vO o^ 







0"; 


■^oo'^ 


» 







e^'c 



.x^^% -; 



v^y - ^ 



xOo. 






^. 



x^'-^^. 









•^^ 



'^^ v^' 






c; 



0' s 



.0^ 






. %^ 



'-, % ,^' 


■Or .#?^ ■_ 






z 


' aV . 


N .V 






^ ^ ^^^^ 










A^^ c '^ ^ '"■ 


i> ^^. 


= x*^ 


°x. 



0>' 



^"^..-^.-..o^-^O-' 












'%<^^ y^^A/a 



f.^ ^^% 



.0 ^ 






\^ -^-, 






-V 



0' ^ 



1 ^^ 



i/^^ .-^ '%^ 



o. 


O ' 




''■*/'' 




'"^V-^ y 


^ y 




xO o^ 


^ ^ ^ " f 


C^ \' ^s'^ ''/ 


,^%(^' /]. 


\ %,^ ^<^.' -^'-^^ 








.O^ 



.^V . 



COUESE OF MATHEMATICAL WOEKS, 

BY GEORGE R. PERKINS, A.M., 

Professor of Mathematics and Principal of the State Normal School 

I. PRIMARY ARITHMETIC. Price 21 cts. 

A want, with young pupils, of rapidity and accuracy in performing operations upon wnttes 
luasers ; an imperfect knowledge of Numeration ; i.aadequate conceptions of the nature am 
Iftiiitions of Fractions, and a lack of familiarity with the prmciples of Decimals, have indujea 
the author to prepare the Primary Arithmetic, 

The first part is devoted to Mental Exer&ises and the second to Exercises on the Slaii 
ntid. Blackboard. 

While the minds of young pupils are disciplined by mental exercises (if not wearisomely 
prolonged), they fail, in general, in trusting to "head-work" for their calculation*; EJid in re- 
forting to written operations to solve their difficulties, are often slow and inaccurate A-om a want 
of early familiarity with such processes : these considerations have induced the Author to devote 
part of his book to prim.ary written exercises. 

It has been received with more popularity than any Arithmetic heretofore issued. 

II. ELEMENTARY ARITHMETIC. Price 42 cts. 

Has recently been carefully revised and enlarged. It will be found concise, yet lucid, ft i«ache« 
the radical relations of numbers, and presents fundamental principles in analysis and examples. 
It leaves nothing obscure, yet it does not embarrass by multiplied processes, nor er.feeble by 
minute details. 

In this work all of the examples or problems are strictly practical, made up as they are in a 
great measure of important statistics and valuable facjs in history and philosophy, which are 
thus unconsciously learned in acquiring a knowledge of the Arithmetic. 

Fractions are placed immediately after Division ; Federal Money is treated as and with De- 
cimal Fractions ; Proportion is placed before Fellowship, Alligation, and such rules as require 
its application in their solution. Every rule is marked with verity and simplicity. The an- 
swers to all of the examples are given. 

The work will be found to be an improvement on most, if not all, previous elementary 
Arithmetics in the treatment of Fractions, Denominate Numbers, Rule of Three, Interest, Equa- 
Ucn of Payments, Extraction of Roots, and many other subjects. 

Wherever this work is presented, the publishers have heard but one opinion in regard to its 
merits, and that most favorable. 

III. HIGHER ARITHMETIC. Price 84 cts. 

The present edition has been revised, many subjects rewritten, and much new matter added ; 
and coQtains an Appewdix of about 60 pages, in which the philosophy of the more difficult 
operal ions and interesting properties of numbers are fully discussed. The work is what its name 
purpoits, a Higher iVrthraetic, and will be found to contain many entirely new principles which 
nave never before ap^^^eared in any Arithmetic. It has received the strongest recom nendationa 
from hi'ndreds of the best teachers the country affords. 

IV. ELEMENTS OF ALGEBRA. Price 84 cts. 
This work is an introducti^m to the Author's " Treatise on Algebra," and is designed espa 
Cially for the use of Common Schools, and universally pronounced " admirably adapted to the 
purpose." 

V. TREATISE ON ALGEBRA. Price SI 50. 

This work contains the higher parts of Algebra usually taught in Colleges ; a new method 
of cubic and higher equations as \vell as the Theorem of Sturm, by which we may at onca 
determine the number of real roots of any Algebraic Equation, wiih much more ease th&n by 
previously discovered method. 

In the present revised editi:m, one entire chapter on the subject of Continued FRACTiova 
has been added. 

VL ELEMENTS OF GEOMETRY, with Practical Applications. $1, 

The author has added throughout the entire Work, Practical Applications, which, in the 
estimation of Teachers, is an important consideration. 

An eminent Professor of Mathematics, in speaking of this work, says : " We have adopted 
% because it follows more closely the best model of pure geometrical reasoning, which ever haa 
J)een, and perhaps ever will be exhibitad ; and because the Author has condensed some of the 
important principles of the great master of Geometricians, and more especiai.y has shown that 
His theorems are not mere theory, oy many practical applications : a quality in a te;ct-bw»k <»' 
feis ''cience nr less uncommon than n is imDortant." 



fnglistr. 

PROF. MANDEVILLE'S EEADING BOOKS. 

I. PRIMARY, OR FIRST READER. Price 10 cents. 

II. SECOND READER. Price 16 cents. 

These two Readers are formed substantially on the same plan ; and the second is a continua- 
tion of the first. The design of both is to combine a knowledge of the meaning and pronuncia 
tion of words, with a knowledge of their grammatical functions. The parts of speech are in- 
troduced successively, beginning with the articles; these are followed by the demonstrative pro 
nouns ; and these asain by others, class after class, until all that are requisite to form a sentence 
have been separately considered ; wlien the common reading lessons begin. 

The Second Reader reviews the ground passed over in the Primary, but adds largely to the 
amount of information. The child is here also taught to read writing as well as printed matter; 
and in the reading lessons, attention is constantly directed to the difierent ways in which senten- 
ces are formed and connected, and of the peculiar manner in which each of them is delivered. 
All who have examined these books, have pronounced them a decided and important advance on 
every other of the same class in use. 

m. THIRD READER. Price 25 cents, 

IV. FOURTH READER. Price 38 cents. 

In the first two Readers, the main object is to make the pupil acquainted with the meaning 
and functions of words, and to impart facility in pronouncing them in sentential connection ; the 
leading design of these, is to form a natural, flexible, and varied delivery. Accordingly, the 
Third Reader opens with a series of exercises on articulation and modulation, containing numer- 
ous examples for practice on the elementary sounds (including errors to be corrected) and on the 
different movements of the voice, produced -by sentential structure, by emphasis, and by the pas- 
sions. The habits formed by these exercises, w^hich should be thoroughly, as they can be easily 
mastered, under intelligent instruction, find scope for improvement and confirmation in the read- 
ing lessons which follow, in the same book and that which succeeds. 

^ These lessons have been selected with special reference to the following |)eculiarities ; 1st. 
Colloquial character; 2d, Variety of sentential structure; 3d, Variety of subject matter; 4th, 
Adaptation to the progressive development of the pupil's mind; and as far as possible, 5tn, 
Tendency to excite moral and religious emotions. Great pains have been taken to make the 
books in these respects, which are, in fact, characteristic of the Vv-hole series, superior to any 
others in use ; with what success a brief comparison will readily show. 

V. THE FIFTH READER; OR, COURSE OF READING. Price 75 cents. 

VI. THE ELEMENTS OF READING AND ORATORY. Price $1. 

These books are designed to cultivate the literary taste, as well as the understanding and vo- 
cal powers, of the pupiL 

The Course of Reading comprises three parts ; thej^rs^jpar? containing a more elaborate 
description of. elementary sounds and the parts of speech grammatically considered than was 
deemed necessary in the preceding w^orks ; here indispensabfe : part second, a complete classifi- 
cation and description of every sentence to be found in the English, or any other language ; ex- 
amples of which in every degree of expansion, from a few words to the half of an octavo page 
in length are adduced, and arranged to be read ; and as each species has its peculiar deliver/ as 
well as structure, both are learned at the same time ; part third, paragraphs; or sentences in 
their connection unfolding general thoughts, as in the common reading books. It may be ob- 
served that the selections of sentences in part second, and of paragraphs in part third, comprise 
some of the finest gems in the language : distinguished alike for beauty of thought and facility 
of diction. If not found in a school book, they might be appropriately called '• elegant extracts." 

The Elements of Reading and Oratory closes the series with an exhibition of the 
whole theory and art of Elocution exclusive of gesture. It contains, besides the classification of 
sentences already referred to, but here presented with fuller statement and illustration, the laws 
of punctuation and delivery deduced from it • the whole followed by carefully selected pieces 
for sentential analysis and vocal practice. 

The Result. — The student who acquaints himself thoroughly with the contents of this hook, 
will, as numerous experiments have proved ; 1st, Acquire complete knowledge of the structure 
of the language ; 2d, ,Be able to designate any sentence of any book by name al a glance ; 3d, Be 
able to declare with equal rapidity its proper punctuation; 4th, Be able to declare, and with suf- 
ficient practice to give its proper delivery. Such are a few of the general characteristics of the series 
of school books which the publishers now offer to the friends and patrons of a sound common 
school and academic education. For more particular information, reference is respectfully made 
to the " Hints," which may be found at the beginning of each volume. 

N. B. The punctuation in all these books conforms, in the main, to the sense and proper de- 
livery of every sentence, and is a guide to both. When a departure from the proper punctua- 
tion occurs, the proper delivery is indicated. As reading books are usually punctuated, it is a 
matter of surprise that children should learn to read at all. 

*.* The above series of Reading Booksarealready very extensively introduced and commended 
by the most experienced Teachers in the country. " Prof. Mandeville's system is eminently 
original, scientific and practical, and destined wherever it is introduced to supersede at once all 
others." 

8 



fHE SHAKSPEARIAN REABEE; 

A COLLECTION OF THE MOST APPROVED PLAYS OF 

SHAKSPEARE. 

^kJ^-lilj' Revised, wka Introduciory and Explanatory Notes, and a Memoir 

or the Author. Prepared expressly for the use of Classes, 

and the Family Reading Circle. 

BY JGHM W. S, HOVVS5, 

Professor of Elocution in Columbia College, 

~ — The Man, whom Nature'' s self hath made 
mock herself, and Truth to imitate. — Spenser. 

One Volume, 12mo, $1 25. 

At a aa.wod when the fame of Shakspeare is " striding the world like a co.ossug,--^ and cdi 
tkma of his wcrks are m'ultiplied with a profusion that testifies the desire awakened in all clfis^g 
af society to read and study his imperishable compositions, — there needs, perhaps, t-sat little 
apology for the- following selection of his works, prepared expressly to render them' unexcep- 
tionable for the use of Schools, and acceptable for Family reading. Apart from the fact, that 
Shakspeare is the " well-spring " from which may be traced the origin of the purest poetry in 
our language, — a long course of professional experience has satisfied me that a necessity ex\?te 
for the addition of a w'^'-k like the present, to our stock of Educational Literature. His writings 
are peculiarly adapted for the purposes of Elocutionary exercise, when the system of instruction 
pursued by the Ttacher is based upon the true principle of the art, viz. — a careful analysis of 
the structure and meaning of language, rather than a servile adherence to the arbitrary and me- 
chanical rules of Elocution. 

To impress upon the mind of the pupil that words are the exposition of thought, and that in 
reading, or speaking, every shade of thought and feeling has its appropriate shade of modulated 
tone, ought to be the especial aim of every Teacher ; and an author like Shakspeare, whose 
every line embodies a volume of meaning, should surely form one of our Elocutionary Text 
Books. * * * Still, in preparing a selection of his works for the express purpose contem- 
plated in my design, I have not hesitated to exercise a severe revision of his language, beyond 
that adopted in any similar undertaking — '' Bowdler's Family Shakspeare " not even excepted ; — 
and simply, because 1 pra.;tically know the impossibility of introducing Shak?p;ear6 as a C!§«*9 
Book, or as a satisfactory Heading Book for Families without this precautionary revisi 5a,- * 
Ex^ ictfrom the Preface. 



HISTORY m) GEOGRAPHY 

OF 

THE MIDDLE AGES 

(chiefly from the frev-h.) 

BY G.W. GREENE5 

Iniiiructor in Brown University. 

Part I: History. One volume, 12mo. SL 

Extract from Preface. 

"This volume, as the title indicates, is chiefly taken from a popular French work, which 
jae rapidly passed through several editions, and received the sanction of the University, It 
mil be found to contain a clear and satisfactory exposition of the Revolution ol the Middle Ages, 
with such general views of literature, society, and manners, as are required to explain the pas- 
sage from ancient to modern history. At the head of each chapter there is an analytical sum- 
mary, which will be found of great assistance in examination or in review.. Instead of a singie 
list of sovereigns, I have preferred giving full genealogical tables, which *re much clearer and 
infinitely more satisfactory." 

10 



A MANUAL 0^ ANCIENT AND MODERN HISTORY, 

C(^ UPRISING : 

I. Ancient History, containing the Political History, Geographical Position, and Socia 
State of the Principal Nations of Antiquity, carefully digested from the Ancient Writers, and il- 
lubtrated by the discoveries of Modern Travellers and Scholars. 

II. Modern Hls tory, containing tlie Rise and Progress of the principal European Nations, 
their Political History, and the chansresin their Social Condition: with a Histoiy of the Coloniei 
Founded by Europeans. By W. COOKE TAYLOR, LL.D., cf Trinity College, Dubl.'n. Revised, 
wfth Additions on A merican History, by C. S. Henry, D. D., Professor of History in the Univer 
nty of N. v., and Questions adapted for the Use of Schools and Colleges. One handsome rol., 
Bva, of BOO pages, $2,25 ; Ancient History in 1 vol. $1,25, Modern History in 1 vol., $1,50. 

The Ancient History division comprises Eighteen Chapters, whi\ h include the general 
outlines of the History of Egypt— the Ethiopians — Babylonia and Assyria — Western Asia— Pal 
estine — the Empire of the Medes and Persians — Phcenician Colonies in Northern Africa— Fount* 
alion and History of the Grecian States — Greece — the Macedonian Kingdom and Empire — tj)« 
States that arose rrom the dismemberment of the Macedonian Kingdom and Empire— Ancient 
Italy— Sicily — the Roman Republic — Geographical and Political Condition of the Roman Emoire 
—History of the Roman Empire — and India — with an Appendix of important illustrative articles, 

This portion is one of the best Cornpends of Ancient History that ever yei has appeared. Il 
eontains a complete text, for the collegiate lecturer ; and is an essential hand-book for the studeni 
who is desirous to become acquaintedf with all that is memorable in general secular archsBology. 

The Modern History portion is divided hito Fourteen Chapters, on the following genera] 
subjects : — Consequences of the Fall of the W^estern Em]Dire — Rise and Establishment of the 
Saracenic Power — Restoration of the Western Empire — Growth of the Papal Power — Reviva} 
of Literaiure— Progress of Civilization and Invention — Reformatiow. and Commencement of tht 
States System in Europe — Augustan Ages of England and France — Mercantile and Colonial Sys- 
tem—Age of Revolutions — French Empire — Hfstory of the Peace — Colonization — China— the 
Jews — with Chronological and Historical Tables and other Indexes. Dr. Henry has appended a 
new chapter on the History of the United States. 

This Manual of Modern History, by Mr. Taylor, is the most valuable and instructive work 
conce-rning the general subjects which rt comprehends, that can be found in the whole department 
of historical literature. Mi. Taylor's book is fast superseding all other cornpends, and is already 
adopted as a text-book in Harvard, Columbia, Yale, New-York, Pennsylvania and Brown Urn- 
reraiiies, and several leading Academies. 



LECTURES 

ON ^ 

MODERN HISTORY. 

By THOMAS ARNOLD, D.D., 
Regiu4 Profezsor of Modern History in the University of Oxford^ and Head 

Master of Rugby School. 

EDITED, WITH A PREFACE AND NOTES, 

By HENRY REED, LL.D., 

Professor of English Literature in the University qfPcL 

One volume, 12mo. ^1,25. 

Extract from the American Editor^ s Preface. 

m preparing this edition, I have had in v4ew its use, not only for the general reader, but ala 
ftfc w lext-book m education, especially in our colles^e course of study. * • * • The introduction of 
di'« vork as a text-book I regard as important, because, as far as my information entitles me to 
ipeak, there is no book better calculated to inspire an interest in historical studv. That it nai 
Uiis power over the mmds of students I can say from experience, which enables me also to add, 
that I have found it excellentiv suited to a course of college instruction. By mfelli.'^eni and cr- 
terpneihg members of a class especially, it is studied as a text-book with zeal and animation. 

11 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 
THE FRENCH LANGUAGE, 

With an Appendix, containing the Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and full Paradigms of tbi 
Regular and Irregular, Auxiliary, Reflective, and Impersonal Verba 

By J. L. Jewett. One volume, l2mo. $1. 

• New Method of Learning the French Language. — This grammar must supersede 

Owhers now used for instruction in the French language. Its conception and arrangement are 
admirable, — the work evidently of a mind familiar with the deficiencies of the systems, the 
place of which it is designed to supply. In all the works of the kind that have fallen under oui 
notice, there has been so much left unexplained or obscure, and so many things have oeen 
omitted— trifles, perhaps, in the estimation of the author, but the cause of great embarrassment 
to the learner — that they have been comparatively valueless as self-instructors. The student 
deceived by their specious pretensions, has not proceeded far before he has f'^u himself m a 
condition similar to that of a mariner who should f at out to sea without a compass to direct 
him. He has encountered difficulty after difficulty, to which his grammar afforded no clue ; 
when, disappointed and discouraged, he has either abandoned the study in disgust, or if hia 
means permitted, has resorted to a teacher to accomplish what it was not in his power to effect 
by the aid of his 'self-instructor.' 

" Ollendorff* has passed his roller over the whole field of French instruction, and the rugged 
inequalities formerly to be encountered, no longer discourage the learner. What were the 
difficulties of the language, are here mastered in succession ; and the only surprise of the 
student, as he passes from lesson to lesson, is, that he meets none of these ' lions in the way.' 

"The value of the work has been greatly enhanced by a careful revision, and the addition of 
an appendix containing matter essential to its compeleteness either as a book for the use of 
teachers or for self-instruction." — New- York Commercial Advertiser. 



VALUE'S IMPROVED EDITIGN OF 

OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

leaening to read, write, and speak 
THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 

With the Lessons divided into Sections of a Proper Length for Daily Tasks, and numerous Cor- 
rections, Additions, and Improvements, suitable for this country, by V. Value ; to which 
is added Value's System of French Pronunciation ; his Grammatical Synopsis ; a 
New Index, and Short Models of Commercial Correspondence. 
One volume, 12mo. Price ^1. 

** Mr. Value has taught practically Ollendorff''s system for many years, and has bestowec^ 
sauch thought and labor on the improvement of this edition. The longer lessons have been judi- 
Siously subdivided ; much a^.tention has been bestowed upon the arrangement of the exercises 
relating to the subjunctive mood: besides the system of pronunjsiati on, we have an excellent 
frammatical synopsis, which appears to us, on a brief examination, very happily constructed, 
nd of great value. In his preface the author mentions several minute corrections made in this 
dition, which ohow the care and accuracy bestowed upon ii." ^Churchman. 



Massiis. D. Appleton & Co. 

Gentlemen.^ 

I have carefully perused your new edition of Ollendorflf by Mr. Value, and find it cob- 
tains all the improvements the original work so much required. It is evidently the result of lon| 
rG'jearch, tim^^, and labor, founded upon experitnce and a thorough knowledge of the system, ana 
in my estimation far superior to any work ot the kind which I have yet met with. I intdor 
adopting the use of it in my classes. Vours, respectfully, 

^ ^ ^ J. ROEMER, 

Professor of the French Language in the N. Y. Free Academy. 
•fc* Keys to the E<i^ercises of the above Gramma/rs in separate vols,, 75 ots. eaeh, 



#rEiirtt» 



Kezzofanti's System of Learning Languages applied to the Study of Frencli. 

IN TWO VOLUMES. 

FIRST FRENCH READER. 

WITH A TREATISE ON FRENCH VERSIFICATION, AND A DICTIONARY OF IDIOMS, 
PECULIAR EXPRESSIONS, ETC. 

BY J. ROEMER, 

Professor of the French Language and Literature in the N. Y. Free Academy, 

12mo. $1, 

SECOND FRENCH READER. 

ILLUSTRATED WITH HISTORICAL, GEOGRAPHICAL, PHILOSOPHICAL, AND 
PHILOLOGICAL NOTES. 

BYJ. ROEMER. 

12mo. SI 25. 

" With iYj6 exception of our own tongue, French is undoubtedly th/» most important Ian* 
gTi£.ge of the modern world. Commerce, literature, science, and the fine arts, all demand its 
aid. It therefore is justly classed with the numerous branches of knowledge essential to a good 
education, 

" The work now before us is an amplification of the system pursued by the late Cardinal 
Mezzofanti, applied to the French language. Professor Roemer, who is favorably known in 
connection with the Free Academy of this city, was personally acquainted with this extraor- 
dinary linguist, and received from him the details of his successlul mode of study " 

"We approve highly of the method so ably advocated by Professor 'Roemer ; it is simple, 
encouraging in its nature, and more likely to conduct the student to a sound knowledge of the 
structure ol" the language than any other with which we are acquainted. The introductory 
remarks on the history and analogies of the French language are practical and suggestive. 
An admirable treatise on French versification (generally neglected in tuition), and a copious 
dictionary of idioms, &c., are very important feaiures in the work. The progressive readmg 
exercises, in prose and verse, have been selected with great taste, and justly claim for the 
volume the additional merit of being highly interesting even to those who have mastered the 
language, and now cultivate its literature. We cannot close our notice of this excellent work 
more appropriately, than by recommending it as being well worthy of the attention of all 
t*^ 4se who are interested in educational progress and the simplification of valuable knowledge." 
- Journal of Commerce. 

NEW POETICAL FREI^CH READER. 

CHOIX DE POESIES 

POUR LES JEUJSTES PERSONIN-ES. 
PAR MADAME A. COUTAN. 

1 vol., 12mo. SI. 

" Lhosx des Poesies pour les Jeunes Personnes, is the title of a selection of poems 
ra the French language, designed for the perusal of the young, by Madame A. Coutan, juat 
published by Appleton and Company, of this city. It is a vely charming collection of some 
»f :he sweetest and most graceful verses in the French language. We were hardly aware, till 
W€ looked over this book, that so many distinguished French authors had contributed to a 
;ia«s of productions, so peculiarly suited to readers of an early age." — Evening Post. 



THE YOMG LADIES' GUIDE TO FREJfCH COMPOSITIOK 

BY GUSTAVE CHOUQUET. 

1 vol., 12mo. 

Extract fr om. Pr efa c e . 
"This work is intended to serve as a reading and translation book, a text-book on Rhetoric, 
•nn as a manual of French composition and conversation. The treatise on Rhetoric, Demg 
applicable to all languages, will help to exercise the minds of young ladies in the elabOratioQ 
w thonght. and train their judgments to sound and correct literary ?nticism." 



ENGLISH SYNONYMES. 

CLASSIFIED AND EXPLAINED, 

WITH 

PEACTICAL EXEECISES. 

DESIGNED FOR SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE TUITIOM, 
BY G. F. GRAHAM, 

Author of ' English, or the Art of Composition,' &c. 

WITH AN INTRODUCTION AND ILLUSTRATIVE AUTHORrPifiSj 

BY HENRY REED, LL. D-, 

Prof, of English Literature in the University of Peniu 

One neat Vol. 12mo. $L 

CONTENTS.— Section I. Generic and Specific Synonymes. R. Active 
and Passive Synonymes. HL Synonymes of Intensity. IV. Positive 
and Negative Synonymes. V. Miscellaneous Synonymes. Index to 
Synonymes, General Index. 

Extract from American Introduction. 

" This treatise is republished and edited with the hope that it will be found useful as a text- 
booK in the study of our own language. As a subject of instruction, the study of the English 
tongue does not receive that amount of systematic attention which is due to it, whether it be 
combined or no with the study of the Greek and Latin. In the usual courses of education, it has 
no larger scope than the study of some rhetorical principles and practice, and of grammatical 
rules, which, for the most part, are not adequate to the composite character and varied idiom of 
English speech. This is far from being enough to give the needful knowledge of what is the 
living language, both of our English literature and of the multiform intercourse — oral and writ- 
ten — of our daily lives. The language deserves better care and more sedulous culture ; it needs 
much more to preserve its purity, and to guide the progress of its life. The young, instead of 
having^ only such familiarity with their native speech as practice without method or theory gives, 
should be so taught and trained as to acquire a habit of using words — whether with the voice or 
the pen— fitly and truly, intelligently and conscientiously." 

'' For such training, this book, it is believed, will prove serviceable. The ' Practical Exer- 
cises,^ attached to the explanations of the words, are conveniently prepared for the routine of 
instruction. The value of a course of this kind, regularly and carefully completed, will be moire 
than the amount of information gained respecting the words that are explained. It will tend to 
produce a thoughtful and accurate use of language, and thus may be acquired, almost uncon- 
sciously, that which is not only a critical but a' moral habit of mind — the habit of giving utter- 
ance to truth in simple, clear and precise terms — of telling one's thoughts and leelings in worda 
that express nothing more and nothing less. It is thus that we may learn how to escape tlio 
evils of vagueness, obscurity and perplexity— the manifold mischiefs of words used thought- 
lessly and at random, or words used in ignorance and confusion. 

" In preparing this edition, it seemed to me that the value and literary interest of the book 
might be increased by the introduction of a series of illustrative authorities. It is in the addi- 
tion of these authorities, containea within brackets under each title, and also of a general index 
to facilitate reference, that this edition differs from the original edition, which in other respects 
IS exactly reprinted. I have confined my choice of authorities to poetical quotations, chiefly be- 
cause it IS in poetry that language is found in its highest purity and perfection. The selections 
have b-^-en made from three of the English poets — each a great authority, and each belonging to 
a different period, so that in this way"^some historical illustration of the language is given at 
th© same time. Tlie quotations froni Shakspeare (born a, d. 1564, died 1616) may be considered 
as illustrating the use of the words at the close of the 16th and beginning of the 17th century ; 
ihosfj from Milton (born 1608, died 1674) the succeeding half century, or middle csf the 17tJi 
tsentiiry ; and those from Wordsworth (born 1770) the contemporary use m the Idth century, 

14 



(0Dglis|i. 
A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE, 

CONTAINING THE PRONUNCIATION, ETYMOLOGY, AND EXPLANATION OP ALL WORDS AXJi 

THORIZED BY EMINENT WRITERS ; 

To which are added, a Vocabulary oi" the Roots of English Words, and an Acjceated 
List of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names 

BY ALEXANDER REID, A.M., 

Rector of the Circus School, Edinburgh. 

Whlia Critical Preface, by Henry Reed, Professor of English Literature in the TJnivers{{7 

Pennsylvani? ., and an Appendix, showing the Pronunciation of nearly 3000 of 

the most important Geographical Names. One volume, 12mo. 

of nearly GOO pages, bound in Leather. Price $1- 

Aiiiong tne wants of our time was a good dictionary of our own language, especially adapted 
for academies and schools. The books which have long been in use were of little value to th« 
junior students, being too concise in the definitions, and immethodical in the arrangement 
Reid's English Dictionary was compiled expressly to develop the precise analogies ana t'arious 
properties of the authorized words in general use, ty the standard authors ard orators who use 
our vernacular tongue. 

Exclusive of the large number of proper names which are appended, this Dictionary h>cludes 
four especial improvements— and when their essential value to the student is considered, the 
sterling character of the work as a hand-book of our language will be instantly perceived. 

The primitive word is distinguished by a larger type ; and when there are any derivatives 
from it, they follow in alphabetical order, and the part of speech is appended, thus furnishing a 
complete classification of all the connected analogous words of tte same species. 

With this facility to comprehend accurately the determinate meaning of the English word, ia 
conjoined a rich illustration for the linguist. The derivation of all the pi 'mitive words is dis- 
thictly given, and the phrases of the languages whence they are deduced, wuether composite or 
simple ; so that the student of foreign languages, both ancient and modem, by a reference to 
any word, can ascertain the source whenc^e it~has been adopted into our own form of speech. 
This is a great acquisition to the person w±iO is anxious to use words in their utmost clearnesig 
of meaning. 

To these advantages is subjoined a Vocabulary of the Roots of English Words, which is of 
peculiar value to the collegian. The fifty pages which it includes, furnish the linguist with a 
wide-spread field of research, equally amusing and instructive. There is also added an Ac- 
cented List, to the number of fifteen thousand, of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names. 
RECOIVIISIENDATIONS 

Reid's Dictionary of the English Language is an admirable book for the use of schools. 
Its plans combine a greater number ot desirable conditions lor such a work, than any with 
which I am acquainted: and it seems to me to be executed in general with great judgment, 
fidelity, and accuracy. 

C. S. HENRY, 
Professor of Philosophy, History, and Belles Lettres, 

in the University of the City of New- York. 

Reid's Dictionary of the English Language is compiled upon sound principles, and with 
judgment and accuracy. It has the merit, "too, of combining much more than is usually looked 
tor in Dictionaries of small size, and will, I believe, be found excellent as a convenient manual, 
for genera^ use and reference, and also for various purposes of education. 

HENRY REED, 

Professor of English Literature in the University of Pennsylvamc^ 

After a careful examination, I am convinced that Reid's English Dictionary has stroM 
lainis upon the attention of teachers generally. It is of convenient size, beautifully executec^ 
nd seems well adapted to the use of scholars, from the common school to the university. 

D. H. CHASE, 

Principal of Preparatory School. 

MiDDLETOWN, Ct. 

Af^er a thorough examination of" Reid's English Dictionary," I may safely say that I con 
iider it superior to any of the School Dictionaries with which I am acquainted. Its accuratt 
and concise definitions, and a vocabulary of the roots of English words, drawn from an author 
.»f such authority as Bosworth, are not among the least of its excellencies. 

M. M. PARKS, 
Chaplain and Professor of Ethics, U. S. Military Academy, West Point 

15 



fttvx^. 



THE 

STANDARD PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY 

OF THE 

FRENCH AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES. 

IN TWO PARTS. 

Part I. FRENCH AND ENGLISH. | Part II. ENGLJSH AND FRENCH. 

The First Part comprehending words in common use — Terms connected with Science— 
sjms belongmg to the Fine Arts — 4000 Historical Names — 4000 Geographical Names— 1 IOC 
tu.ms lately published, with the pronunciation op every word, according to the French 
cademy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians '. together with 760 Cnticai 
R^smarks^ in which the various methods of pronouncing employed by different authors are inves- 
tigated and compared with each other. 

The Second Part containing a copious vocabulary of English words and expnessionsj with 
*iie pronunciation according to Walker. 

THE WHOLE PRECEDED BY 

A Practical and Comprehensive System of French Pronunciation. 
By Gabriel kSurenne, F. A. S. E., 

French Teacher in Edinburgh ; Corresponding Member of the French Grammatical Society 



of Paris ^ Sfc.^ dfc. 
t of th 



Reprinted from a duplicate cast of the stereotype plates of the last Edinburgh edition. 
One stout volume, 12mo., of nearly 900 pages. Price $1,50 



A FEW CRITICISMS ON ITS MERITS. 

Kinderhook Academy. 

Suronne's French Dictionary is in many respects superior to those of " Meadow" and " Boyer." 
The Proper Names at the bottom of each page, and the method of explaining the pronunciation, 
(by the French sounds of the vowels, with which the pupil has become familiar.) are in my opin* 
Ion distinguishing excellencies. SILAS METCALF. 

Princeton^ N. J. 

We use habitually the admirable Dictionary of Surenne. LYMAN COLEMAN. 

National Magazine. 

" This work must have been one of very great labor, as it is evidently of deep research. We 
have given it a careful examination, and are perfectly safe in saying, we have never before seen 
any thing of the kind at all to compare with it. Our space will not permit us to give more than 
this general testimony to its value. Long as the title is, and much as it promises, our examina- 
tion of the work proves that all the promises are fulfilled, and we think that no student of the 
French language should, for a moment, hesitate to possess himself of it. Nor, indeed, will it be 
found less useful to the accomplished French scholar, who will find in it a fund oi information 
which can no where be met with in any one book. Such a work has for a long time been greatly 
nee.' -3d, and Mr. Surenne has supplied the deficiency in a masterly style. We repeat, therefore 
our well digested opinion, that no one in search of a knowledge of the niceties of the French lan- 
guage should be without it." 

New- York Observer. 

" E^ery student of the French language, and every person of taste who is fond of reading 
French. a.nd wishes to become proficient in that tongue, should possess this comprehensive but 
complete dictionary. It embraces all the words in common use, and those in science and the 
fine arts, historical and geographical names, etc., with the pronmiciation of every word according 
to the French Academy, together with such critical remarks as will be useful to every learner. 
It is published in a form of extrsme condensation, and yet contains so full a compilation of words, 
definitions, etc., as scarcely to lea -e any thing to be desired." 
Boston Courier. 

" This is, we believe, the first French pronouncing dictionary that has appeared m the Engliab 
field of French education, and the compiler, Mr. Surenne, may well felicitate himself on the de^ 
cided success whJch has attended his efforts to furnish us with this long expected desideratum. 
Mr. S. hag rendered precise what was before uncertain, clear what had hitherto been obscure, ir> 
short, put into the hands of both teachers and scholars, an authority in philology and pronuncia- 
tion, as good, as correct, as authoritative as Johnson, Walker, or W^ebster, in the English tongue. 
The method adopted for representing the sounds of words, is for the English or American eye 
and ear, so that faultless pronunciation may be depended upon. The phraseology is often that of 
the French Academy, consequently of the highest authority, and is both copious and practicaL 
The English pronunciation is precisely after the plan of Webster, Imitated or followed with the 
most scrupulouci accuracy, thus giving two extraordinary advantages in one work, viz., a dic- 
tionary of French pronunciation, with words and meanings, and a standard of English pronunci- 
atton. We exhort, we entreat teachers, parents, guardians, all interested in the education of 
ycuthj to look at this splendid work of industry and ingenuity, and they will see and recognize ill 
»upei*iority at a glance ^ 

At 1 



(§tmm. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 
OF LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 

THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 

fleprinted from the Frankfort edition, to which is added a Systematic Outline of the differen 

Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, with lull Paradigms, and a 

complete List of the Irregular Verbs. 

BY GEORGE J, A D L E R^ A. B., 

Prafessor of German m the University of the City of New- York. One volume, 12mo. $1 &X 

ID= A KEY TO THE EXERCISES, in a separate volume. 75 cts. 

*' Ollendorff's neio method of Learning to Read., Write, and Speak the German L<m' 
gunge., with a systematic outline of German Gram.ma-r, by George J. Adler, is one of ihos-3 rare 
works which leave nothing to be desired on the subjects o'f which they treat. The learner's dif- 
ficulties are so fully and exactly provided for, that a constant sense of satisfaction and progresa 
is felt from the beginning to the end of the book. A bare inspection of one of the lessens will 
satisfy any one acquainted with the elements of German grammar, that it adapts itself perfectly 
to his wants. With the systematic outline of grammar by Prof. Adler, the nevf method is sub- 
stantially perfect, and it is probably second inlts advantages only to residence and intercourse 
with educated Germans." 

" The study of the German is becoming so essential a part of an ordinary edf.cation, that 
every work tending to facilitate the acquisiTionof the language should be welcomed. An Arr.-eri- 
can edition of Ollendorffhas been much wanted. His s/stem is based upon natural principles. 
He teaches by leading the student to the acc{uisition of phrases, from which he deduces the rules 
of the language. The idioms are also carefully taught, and the entire construction of the s'^^'em 
IS such that, if adhered to witli fidelity and perseverance, it will secure such a practical know- 
ledge of the German as can be acquired by no other mode, so rapidly and thoroughl.*' M% 
heartily commend the book to all v/ho really wish to understand \ t<)ngue which contaMi* po 
many treasures. 



NEW GRAMMAR FOR GERMANS TO LEARN ENGLISH, 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 

THROUGH THE MEDIUM OF THE GERxMAN ; 

Arrar^ged and adapted for Schools and Private Instruction, 
BY P. G AMDS. 

One volume, 12mo. 

Keij to the szme, uniform with the above. Price 75 cts. 

"My compilation of the French Grammar after the method of Ollendorff, has made tl-e Ger 
an public so thoroughly acquainted with ^.his highly practical system of instruction, that it wilJ 
net be necessaiy to add any further recommendation in this place. It was so univei-sally ^s- 
kncwledged and adopted, that I was induced to comoile a similar Grammar for Germans lo 
learn Enghsh, and I diu this the more willingly because I was urged to do so by many from al? 
quarters. -^ •' 

"In carrying out the plan, I endeavored to introduce exercises in questions and answers 
suited to lamiliar and social conversation, so as to do away with :he antiquated Phrase-books 
BtiU in use. ihe frequent application and repetition of the rules set forth in this book. I have 
sought to make as free from dull monotony as possible, by giving the sentences a new turn, and 
by arranging them in different order, so as not to repeat the same over and over again 

" A practical routine of instruction carried on for many years, has taught me the wants c 
ttie studeiuj I feel therefore perfectly confident in bringiiig this b^ok before the public, 

«P. GANDS." 
24 



€tmti\i. 



A DICTIONARY 

eERMAN AND ENGLISH LANGUAGES, 

INDICATINfJ THE ACCENTUATION OF EVERY GERMAN WORD, CONTAINING SEVERAL 
HUNDRED GERMAN SYNONYMS, TOGETHER WITH A CLASSIFICATION AND 
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE IRREGULAR VERSA, AND A DICTION- 
ARY OF GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS. 

QOMPILED FROM THE WORKS OF HILPERT, FLUGEL, GREIB, HE\SS, 

AND OTHERS. 

1 NT ¥/0 PARTS: 

I GERMAN AND ENQTLISH — II. ENGLISH AND GERMAN 

BY G. J. ADLER, A. M., 

Professor of the German Language and Literature in the Univei&ity of the 

City of J^TeiO'York, 

Gj? large volume, 8vo , of UOO pages. Price |5. StioDgly and neatly bouni 

Extract from the Preface. 

In preparir^ this volume, our principal aim was to offer to the American student of 
ifc^ Gennan a work whicn would embody all the valuable results of the most recent 
ksEsvefetigations in German Lexicography, and which might thus became not only a relia- 
ble guide for the practical acquisition of that language, but one whi^h would not lorsake 
him in the higher walks of his pursuit, to which ^its Uterary and scientific treasures 
would naturally invite him. The conviction that such a work was a desideratum, and one 
which claimed immediate attention, was first occasioned by the steadily increasing inter- 
est manifested in the study of the German by such among us as covet a higher intellect- 
ual culture, as well as those who are ambitious to be abreast with the times in all that 
concerns the interests of Learning, Science, Ai-t, and Philosophy. 

In comparing the different German-English Dictionaries, it was found that all of them 
were deficient in their vocabulai-y of for^iign v/ords, which now act so important a par* 
not only in scientific works, but also in the best classics in the reviews, joui-nals, news 
papers, and even in conversational language of ordinary life. Hence we have endeav- 
oured to supply the desired words required in Chemistiy, Mineralogy, Practical Art, 
Commerce, JS avigation, Rhetoric, Grammar, Mythology, both ancient and modern. The 
»,vx:entuation of the German wordB, first introduced by Hemsius, and not a little improved 
by Ililpert and his coadjutors, has also been adopted, and will be regarded as a most de- 
sirable and invaluable aid to the student. Another, and it is hoped not the least, valu- 
able addition to the volume, ai'e the sjTionyms, which we have generally given in an 
abridged and not unfrequentiy in a new form, from Hilpert, who was the fii'st that offered 
to the English student a selection from the rich store of Eberhard, Maas, and Grube.'r. 
Neai'ly all the Dictionaiies published in Gennany having been prepared with speeifd 
reference to the German student of the English, and being on that account incomplete ia 
the German-English pai-t, it was evidently our vocation to reverse the order for this side 
of the Atlantic, and to give the utmost possible completeness and perfection to the Ger- 
""^an part. This was the proper sphere of our labor. 

Morning Courier and JVezo- York Enquirer, 

The Appletons have just published a Dictionary of the German Language^ containing 
Ei^:l2h names of German words, and German translations of English words, by Mr. 
Adler, Professor of German in the University of the City of New-York. 

in view of the present ar.d rapidly increasing disposition of American students to make 
themselves familiar with the Language and Literatm-e of Germany, the publication of 
this work seems ». specially timely and important. It is in form a lai-ge, substantial octavo 
volume of 1400 pages, beautifully printed in cleai- and distinct type, and adapted in every 
wp.j to the constant services for v/hich a lexicon is made. The purpose aimed at by the 
editor cannot be more distinctly stated than in his own words, quoted from the preface3a 
tn. which he fjtates that he sought "to embody all the valuable results of the mostreceni 
Investigations in German Lexicography, so that his v/ork might thu5 become not only a 
reliable guide for the practical acquisition of that language, but one which would not 
'orsake him m the higher walks of his pm-suits, to which its literary treasures woulc? 
^Aturally invite him." All who are in any degree famUiar with German, can bear wil 
asess t2 the necessity that has long been felt for such a work. It is needed by students ol 
&e language at eveVj stage of their progress. None of those hitherto in use have bee| 
satisfactory— the best of them, that published in Philadelphia, in 1845, lacking verv manj 
of the essentials of a reliable and servicable lexicon. From a somewhat clo&e examina 
Hon of its contents, we ai*e satisfied that Mr. Adler's Dictionary will be universally r©' 
garded as the best extant. Its great superiority lies in its completeness^ no word in any 
department of science or literature being omitted. We cannot doubt that it will befioms 
It onc-e the only German lexicon In use tJiroughout the e^^imtrv 



IpatHJi. 



OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD 

OF 

LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SFEAK 
THE SPANISH LANGUAGE, 

fflth an Appendix, containing a brief, but comprehensive Recapitulation of the Rules a« Wftll aa 

of all the Verbs, both Regular and Irregular, so as to render their use eas/ 

and familiar to the most ordinary eapacity. 

TOGETHER WITH 

PRACTICAL RULES FOR SPANISH PRONUNCIATION, AND MODELS OF 
SOCIAL AND COjVIMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 

The whole designed for young learners and persons who are their own instructors. 

By M. VELAZQUEZ and T. SIjVIONNE, Professors of the Spanish and Fre^ich Language* 

One volume, 12mo. of 560 pages. Price $1 50. 

^ KEY TO THE SAME IN A SEPARATE VOLUME, 75 cts. 

"Ollendorff's Spanish Grammar.— This is another number of the admirfjjle series of 
elementary books of instruction in the language of Modem Europe, for which the public is in- 
debted to the Appletons. Ollendorff's method of teaching languages, especially living languages, 
IS now in universal use, and enjoys a very decided pre-eminence over any other now in use, in- 
asmuch as it combines the merits, and avoids the faults of all others, and has, besides, many vary 
marked and admirable peculiarities. No other books are now in general use, and his elementary 
treatises have won a unanimous favor not often accorded to any work in any department of hu- 
man knowledge. Their chief peculiarity consists in this, that they lead the leamor, by gradual 
fteps, each perfectly simple and easy, from the first elements even to the nicest idioms of the 
various languages, comprehending, in the process, a complete mastery of Grammatical rules and 
colloquial phrases. They are in common use, not only in this country, but throughout Europe, 
and are likely to supersede, every where, all similar books. 

"This method of learning Spanish, which has just been issued, is likely to be even more 
widely useful, especially in this country, than those which have preceded it, since recent ev«nts 
have rendered a knowledge of Spanish more than usually important to all classes of our people. 
The editors of the work are widely known as accomplished scholars and distinguished teachers, 
and the book derives still higher authority from their connection with it. We commend it with 
great confidence to all who desire to become acquainted with the Castilian tongue."— A'ets- York 
Ccmrier and Enquirer. 

%m f rammer fnr Ipumatiis tn \um (0iiglijfjr. 

GRAMMATICA INGLESA 

SEaUN 

EL SISTEMA DE OLLENDORFF, 

Accompafiado de xm Appendice que comprende en compendio las reglas contenidas en el cieifX!) 
p2incipal de la obra : un Tratado eobre la pronunciacion, division y formacion de las palabm 
ingUsas 5 una lista de los verbos regulares d irregulares, consus conjugaciones y las distinttf 
prepoeiciones que rigen : modebs de correspondencia, &c., &c., todo al alcance de la capaeidadi 
mas mediana. 

FOR 

RAMON PALENZUELAy 

AbagadOf Doctor en Dereeho Civil de la Universidad de Carieas ( VenezueJd^ y Pr^mm 

de lenguas en Neuvo" Yor^. 

One vol. 12010. 



AKNOLD'S 



FIRST LATIN BOOK; 



REMODELLED AND REWRITTEN, 



AND ADAPTED TO THE 



OLLENDORFF METHOD OF mSTRUCTlOI. 



BY 



ALBERT HARKNESS, 

SENIOR MASTER IN THE PROVIDENCE HIGH SCHOOL. 



NEW-YOEK: 

D. APPLETON k COMPANY, 

200 BROADWAY. 
1851. 



Co--k«4;L 



'(^ 



r^^.'li 









Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1S51_ by 
D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New- York. 



Mrs. Hennen Jennings 
April 26. 1933 






PREFACE. 



Arnold's First and Second Latin Booh was introduced to the 
American public some ^^^q years since, under the editorial care 
of Professor Spencer. As the system was, at that time, quite 
new in this country, and comparatively so in England, the Ame- 
rican editor did not think it best " to make any material alteration 
in the original work." The marked favor with which the volume 
was at once received, and the almost miprecedented success 
which has since attended it, are a sufficient proof of its excellence. 
The test of the class-room and the improved methods of instruc- 
tion have, however, convinced teachers that, with many rare 
merits, and mth a general plan most happily adapted to the 
wants of the beginner in Latin, it was still, in some important 
respects, quite incomplete in its execution and details. The pre- 
sent volume, undertaken at the request of the pubhshers, is the 
result of an attempt to remove these defects, and thus to render 



iy PREFACE. 

the work wortliy of yet higher favor and success. The entii-e 
book has been re^^Titten and many important additions have 
been made. 

The Latin of the First and Second Latin Booh has been re- 
tained, so far as consistent with our pm-pose ; but as it has been 
found necessary to add many new selections, care has been taken 
to secure pure classic Latin, by resorting exclusively to the pages 
of Caesar and Cicero. 

In the preparation of tliis book, it has been a leading object 
with the editor, so to classify and arrange the vaiious topics as 
to simplify^ and, as far as possible, to remove the disheartening 
difficulties too often encountered by the learner at the veiy out- 
set in the study of an ancient language. He has accordingly 
endeavored so to present each new subject as to enable the be- 
ginner fully to master it, before he is called upon to perplex 
himseK yA\h its more difficult combinations. The lessons have 
been prepared with constant reference to the Ollendorff method of 
instruction, while, at the same time, special pains have been taken 
to present a complete and systematic outline, both of the gTam- 
matical forms and of the elementary principles of the language. 
hsL effort has thus been made to combine the respective advan- 
tages of two systems, distinct in themselves, but by no means 
inconsistent with each other. 

In the earlier portions of the book, the exercises for translation 
consist of two paragTaphs of Latin sentences and two of English, 



PREFACE. V 

the first of each being designed to illustrate the particular topic 
which chances to be the subject of the lesson, and the second to 
furnish miscellaneous examples on the various subjects already 
learned. Thus each lesson becomes at once an advafice and a 
review. 

For convenience of reference and for the purposes of general 
review, a summary of Paradigms and an outhne of Syntax have 
been appended to the lessons. The Syntax will be found, it is 
hoped, to be an improvement, at least in point of classification 
and an-angement, upon that ordinarily presented in Latin Gram- 
mars. In a Second Latin Book, now in preparation — being at 
once a Reader and an Exercise Book — the editor contemplates a 
fuller development and illustration of the Latin Syntax, in a series 
of exercises on the principle of analysis and syntliesis. 

The present volume, as already intimated, has been prepared 
Tuainly from Arnold's First and Second Latin Booh ; the editor 
has, however, had before him numerous other works of a kindred 
character, from some of which he has derived valuable aid. 
Among these may be mentioned, in addition to the various Latin 
Grammai-s in use in this country and in England, Allen's New 
Latin Delectus ; Analysis of Latin Verbs, by the same author ; 
and Pimiock's Fhst Latin Grammar ; together with numerous other 
elementary works, among which the editor is happy to specify 
the First Latin Book, by Professors M'Chntock and Crooks. 

Professor Spencer's edition of Arnold's Latin Prose Compo- 



VI PREFACE. 

sition, one of tlie volumes of tlie excellent Classical Series pub- 
lished by tbe Messrs. Appleton, bas been consulted with mucb 
advantage. 

For valuable assistance in tbe prej)aration of tbe Sjmtax, tbe 
editor is bappy to acknowledge bis indebtedness to Greene's Ana- 
lysis of tbe Engbsb Language. 

A. HAEKNESS. 

Providence, July 18, 1851 



CONTENTS. 



mTRODUCTIOK • 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Page 
I. Letters ...,,.. 1 

II. Syllables . . . . . ,2 

III. Quantity . , , , , 2 

IV. Accentuation . . , , , 2 
Y. Sounds of the Letters .... 3 

I. The Continental Method ... 3 

II. The Enghsh Method ... 4 

LESSONS AND EXERCISES. 



I. Parts of Speech. — Proposition. — Subject. — Predicate ^ 

II. Verbs. — First Conjugation .... 8 

III. Fu'st Conjugation — continued . . .11 

IV. Second Conjugation . , . .12 
V. Third Conjugation . . . . .14 

VI. Fourth Conjugation . . . .16 

VII. Four Conjugations. — Plm-al JSTumber . . .17 

VIII. N'ouns. — jN'ominative Case . . . .19 

IX. Nominative Case — continued . . .23 

X. Vocative Case ..... 24 

XL Apposition. — Modified Subject . . .26 

XIL Genitive Case.— Modified Subject . . 27 

XIII. Accusative Case. — Direct Object of Predicate . 31 

XIV. Accusative — continued. — Adverbial Modifiers . 34 
XV. Dative Case. — Indirect Object of Predicate . . 35 

XVL Ablative Case.— Modified Predicate . . 38 

XVIL First Declension . . . . .40 

XVIII. Second Declension. — Nouns in us and um . 43 



Vm CONTENTS. 

Lesson. Page. 

XIX. Second Declension. — Nouns in %r and %r . . 46 

XX. Adjectives of the First and Second Declension . 4Y 

XXI. First and Second Declension — continued . .51 

XXII. First and Second Declension, continued. — Price, Value, 

and Degree of Estimation . . . .53 

XXIII. K'ouns. — Third Declension. — Class I. . . 55 

XXIY. Third Declension.— Class 11. . . . 68 

XXV. Tliii'd Declension.— Class III. . . 60 

XXVI. Thu-d Declension.— Class IV. . . . 63 

XXVII. Third Declension. — Genitives in ium. — Gender . 66 

XXVIII. Thii'd Declension. — Formation of Cases fi-om each other 68 

XXIX. Adjectives. — Thii'd Declension . . . .71 

XXX. Adjectives, continued. — Xouns. — Fom'th Declension ^75 

XXXI. Nouns.— Fifth Declension . • . . .78 

XXXII. Five Declensions. — Greek Nouns. — Gender . 81 

XXXIII. Verbs. — Es^e, to be. — Predicate, Es^e with a Noun or an 

Adjective . . . . . .85 

XXXIV. Infinitive as Subject. — Genitive with Es^e in the Pre- 

dicate ...... 87 

XXXV. Tenses for Completed Action. — Fii'st, Second, and Foui'th 

Conjugations . . . . 90 

XXXVI. Thii'd Conjugation. — Class I. — Second Root the same as 

the First . .... 93 

XXXVII. Thkd Conjugation. — Class 11.— Seco7id Root formed hy 

adding s to the First . . . .96 

XXXVIII. Third Conjugation. — Class II., continued. — Seco7id Root 

formed hy adding s to the First ... 97 

XXXIX. Third Conjugation. — Class IL, contiaued. — Second Root 

formed hy adding s to the First . . . 100 

XL. Formation of the Second Root. — First Irregularity — 

Radical Vowel lengthejied {and often changed) . 103 

XLI. Formation of the Second Root. — Second Irregularity — 

Reduplication . . . . .105 

XLII. Formation of the Second Root. — Third Irregularity — 

Second Root after the analogy of other conjugations 107 
XLIII. Subjunctive Mood ..... 110 

XLIV. Subjunctive Mood. — Purpose . . . .113 

XL V. Persons of Verbs. — Indicative Mood. — First Conjugation 115 
XL VI. Indicative Mood. — Four Conjugations. — Personal Pro- 
nouns . . . . . .119 

XLVII. Subjunctive Mood. — Fom* Conjugations . . 123 



CONTENTS. 



Lesson. 
XLYIII. 



Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Verbs 
in io of the Third Conjugation. — Demonstrative Pro- 
nouns ...... 

XLIX. Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Inten- 
sive Pronoun ...... 

L. Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Relative 

and Interrogative Pronouns 
LI. Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Inter- 
rogative Particles ..... 

LII. Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, contJiued. — Inde- 
finite and Possessive Pronouns . 
LIII. Verb Usse, to be 

LIV. Verb JBJsse, continued. — Comparison of Adjectives . 
LV. Compounds of jEsse, — Comparison of Adverbs. — Nume- 
ral Adjectives 
LVI. Passive Voice. — Third Persons of Tenses for Continued 
Action ...... 

LVII. Passive Voice. — Thii'd Persons of Tenses for Completed 
Action .... 

LVIII. Indicative Mood of the Passive Voice 
LIX. Subjunctive Mood of the Passive Voice 
LX. Imperative Mood — Active and Passive 
LXI. Infinitive Mood .... 

LXII. Participles. — Ablative Absolute 
LXIII. Gerunds and Supines . 
LXIV. Participle in dies . . • • 

LXV. First Conjugation 
LXVI. Second Conjugation .... 

LXVII Third Conjugation 
LXVIII. Fourth Conjugation .... 

LXIX. Verbs mth the Dative.— Indirect Object 
LXX. Deponent Verbs .... 

LXXI. Irregular Verbs. — Fosse, Velle, JVoUe, Malle 
LXXII. Irregular Verbs, continued. — Ferre, Fieri . 
LXXIII. Irregular Verbs, continued. — Ire, Edere 
LXXIV. Periphrastic Conjugations . 
LXXV. Impersonal Verbs 
LXXVI. Impersonal Periphrastic 
LXXVII. Impersonal Passive Verbs.— Prepositions 
LXX VIII. Conjunctions .... 

LXXIX. Subjunctive Mood with ut, ne, quo 



Page. 



121 

130 

132 

134 

136 
138 

142 

. 145 

148 

151 
154 
158 
160 
163 
166 
169 
112 
174 
175 
176 
177 
178 
180 
182 
185 
189 
191 
193 
195 
197 
199 
201 



X CONTENTS. 

Lesson. Page. 

LXXX. Subjunctive with quommus, quin, and other Conjunc- 
tions . . . . . .203 

LXXXI Interrogative Sentences .... 205 

LXXXII. Conditional Sentences. — Subjunctive in Relative Clau- 
ses and with quwni . . . . .207 

LXXXIII. Participles . . . . .209 

LXXXIY. Participles, continued . . . .212 

LXXXY. Derivation of Xouns . . . .215 

LXXXVL Derivation of Adjectives .... 217 

LXXXYII. Derivation of Verbs and Adverbs . . 219 

LXXXYIII. Composition of Words . . .222 



PARADIGMS, (fee. 



1. ISTouns. — Endings of Genitive Singular 


227 


2. Gender . . . . . 


. 227 


3. First Declension .... 


227 


4. Second Declension .... 


. 228 


0. Third Declension .... 


229 


6. Fouith Declension .... 


. 232 


7. Fifth Declension .... 


233 


8. Case-Endings of Substantives . 


.233 


9. Table of Genders .... 


. 234 


10. Adjectives. — First and Second Declension . 


235 


11. Thii'd Declension .... 


. 236 


12. Comparison of Adjectives 


238 


13. l^umerals . . . . 


. 238 


14. Substantive Pronouns 


239 


15. Adjective Pronouns .... 


. 239 


16. Yerbs. — Esse .... 


241 


17. Infinitive Endings . , , . 


. 243 


18. First Conjugation . , . . 


243 


19. Second Conjugation .... 


. 245 


20. Third Conjugation 


247 


21. Fourth Conjugation .... 


. 250 


22. Formation of Second Root 


252 


23. Deponent Yerbs .... 


. 262 


24. Irregular Yerbs .... 


252 


25. Periphrastic Conjugations 


. 257 


26. Impersonal Yerbs 


257 



CONTENTS. 



XI 



SYNTAX. 



Introduction 



259 



CHAPTER I. 



Essential Elements of Sentences. — Subject and Predicate. 



cti^ 


on I. 


Subject . , . . . 


260 


u 


11. 


Predicate ... 

CHAPTER n. 

Subordinate Elements. — Modifiers. 


. 260 


cti< 


3n I. 


Use of Modifiers .... 


262 


u 


II. 


Modifiers of Nouns .... 


. 262 


a 


III. 


Modifiers of Adjectives 


263 


(I 


IV. 


Modifiers of Verbs . . 


. 264 


tt 


a 


§ I. Objects . , . , 


265 


tc 


<( 


§ 11. Adverbial Modifiers 


.268 


<i 


V. 


Modifiers of Adverbs 


211 



CHAPTER in. 



Use of Moods, Participles, Gerunds, and Supines 



211 



Differences of Idiom . 

Cautions 

Latin-English Vocabulary 

English-Latin Vocabulary 



216 

211 
279 
291 



EXPLANATIONS. 

The small numerals above the line in the Exercises refer to Differences 
of Idiom, page 275 ; the small letters to Cautions, page 277. 

The numerals enclosed in parentheses refer to articles in the body of 
the work. 

In the Exercises, words connected by hyphens are to be rendered into 
Latin by a single word ; as, natural-to-man, htimanus ; it-is, est, cfec. 



1^ 



INTEODUCTION. 



PEONUNOIATIOK 

The two Methods, the Continental and the English, which at pres- 
ent prevail in ths^ pronunciation of Latin, differ from each other 
chiefly in the sounds of the vowels ; we shall accordingly first state 
the settled principles in which they agree (as accent, quantity, &c.), 
and then present the vowel sounds of each separately, hoping, how- 
ever, that, in this country, the Continental Method will soon com- 
mend itself to general favor. With the important merit of uniform 
consistency, it is, at the same time, the only pronunciation intelli- 
gible on the Continent of Europe, the very place where the Ameri- 
can scholar will most need his Latin as a medium of communication. 

I. LETTERS. 

The Latin Language lias six characters, or' letters, 
representing vowel sounds, and nineteen representing 
consonant sounds. 

Rem. 1. The vowel sounds are a, e, i, o, w, and y ; the consonants 
are the same as in English, with the omission of w, which is not 
used in Latin. 

Rem. 2. Two vowels sometimes unite in sound, and form a diph- 
thong, as in English ; e. g., cb in Cassar. 

Rem. 3. X and z^ are called double consonants ; I, m, n, and r, 
liquids, and the other consonants, with the exception of h and s, 
mutes. 

* X is equivalent to cs or gs, and ztods. 



2 FIRST LATIN BOOK. 

II. SYLLABLES. 
In the pronunciation of Latin, every word has as 
many syllables as it has vowels and diphthongs ; thus 
the Latin words, more^ vice^ acute, and persuade, are pro- 
nounced, not as the same words are in English, but 
with their vowel sounds all heard in separate syllables ; 
thus, mo-re, vi-ce^ a-cu-te, jper-sua-de, 

IIL QUANTITY. 

Syllables are, in quantity or lengthy either hng^ shorty 
or common (i. e. sometimes long and sometimes short). 

1. A syllable is long in quantity : 

1) When it contains a diphthong^ as the first syllable 
of coedo, 

2) When its vowel is followed by y, x^ s, or any two 
consonants of which the second is not h^ or a liquid; as 
the second syllables of erexit and magister, 

2. A syllable is shorty when its vowel is followed by 
another vowel, or a diphthong, as the second syllable 
of indies. 

Rem. a Yowel is also short when separated from the following vowel 
by the letter h. 

The quantity of syllables, when not determined by these rules, will 
be indicated in the vocabularies (and, in some instances, in the exercises) 
by the dash - when long, by the curve *-* when short, and by the two 
together ~ when common. 

TV, aocentuatio:n'. 

1. The primary (or principal) accent, or stress of 
voice, is placed : 

1) In words of two syllables, always on the first; 
as, Jio'Tno^ a man. 



sou:isrDs of the letters. 3 

2) 111 words of more tlian two syllables, on the penult 
(the last syllable but one), if that is long in quantity; 
otherwise on the antepenult (the last syllable but two) ;' 
as, radiciSj con'sulh, 

2. An additional accent is placed on each second syl- 
lable preceding the primary accent; as, demonstratur. 

V. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 

I. The Continental Method.^ 

1. The Sounds of the Vowels. 

The Continental sounds of the vowels are as fol- 
lows : — 

a dm father; e.g., aris. 

. ( 1. a in made; e.g., edit. 

I 2. <^ in met; e. g., amet. 

i e in me; e. g., ire. 

^ j 1. ixi no ; e. g., ora. 

(2. in nor; e.g., amor. 

^ 6 in do ; e. g., una. 

J e in me; e. g., nympha. 

Rem. Y is used only in words derived from the Greek. 

These sounds are uniformly the same in all situa- 
tions, except as modified by quantity and accent^ (IIL 
and IV.) 

2. The Sounds of the Diphthongs, 

ae and oe ... a in made ; e. g., aetas, coeliim. 
au ... ou in out; e.g., aurum. 

Rem. The vowels in ei and eu are generally pronounced separately. 

* For the Continental Pronunciation the editor is indebted to the 
kindness of Mr. George W. Greene, Instructor in Modern Languages in 
Brown University. 





4 riRST LATIN BOOK. 

8. The Sounds of the Consonants, 

The pronunciation of the consonants is nearly the 
same as in English, though it varies somewhat in differ- 
ent countries. 

II. The ExCtLISH Method. 

1. The Sounds of the Vowels,^ 

In the English method, the vowels generally have the long or short 
Enghsh sounds : the length of the sound, however, is not dependent upon 
the quantity of the vowel, but must be detennined by its situation or 
accent. 

(a) In all monosyllaUes, vowels have 

1) The long sound if at the end of the word ; as, si, re. 

2) The short sound if followed by a consonant ; as, 
sit, rem; except j^ost, monosyllables in es, and plural 
cases in os ; as, hos (a plural case). 

(h) In an accented penidt, vowels have 

1) The long sound before a vowel, diphthong, single 
consonant, or a mute followed by I, r, or h ; as, deus, 
pater, patres ; except tili and sili, 

2) The short sou.nd before a double consonant, or 
any two single consonants except a mute followed by 
I, r, or h ; as, bellwn, rexit, 

(c) In any accented syllable except the penult, vowels 
have 

1) The long sound before a vowel or diphthong ; as 
e in eadem. 



* The system of vowel sounds here presented is the same as that 
given in Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar, and, like that, is based 
upon Walker's Key to the Pronunciation of Greek and Latia Proper 
Names, The rules, however, unlike those of Andi'ews and Stoddard, are 
so prepared as to show the soimds of the vowels, iu all their various 
situations, independently of the division of words iato syllables. This, it 
is hoped, will facilitate their apphcation. 



SOUKDS OF THE LETTERS. 5 

2) The short sound before a consonant; as o in 
dominiis : except, 

a) XT before a single consonant, or a mute followed 
by r or h (and perhaps l)\ as, Punicus, saluhritas. 

b) J., e, and o, before a single consonant (or a mute 
before Z, r, or A), followed by e or ^ before another 
vowel; as, doceo^ dcria, 

id) In all unaccented syllahles^ vowels have the short 
sound; as, cantdmus^ vigilant: except, 

1) Final a in words of more than one syllable. This 
has the sound of aA, as in the word America ; e. g,, 
musa {musah), 

2) Final sjdlables in i (except tibi and sihi)^ es, and 
05, in plural cases ; as, homini^ dies^ illos (a plural case). 

3) The first syllable ofwords accented on the second, 
when the first either begins with an i followed by a sin- 
gle consonant, or contains i before a vowel ; as, diebus^ 
irdtus. 

Rem. E, o, and it, unaccented before a Yowel, diphthong, a single 
consonant, or a mute followed by /, r, or A, are not quite as short 
in sound as the other vowels in the same situations. 

2. The Sounds of the Diphthongs, 

^ and oe, like e in the same situation ; e. g., Ccesar^ 
Daedalus, ^ 

Au, as in the English, author ; e. g., auriim, 
Eu, ^^ ^^ neuter; e. g., Tiew^er (both Eng. 

and Latin). 

Ei, as in the English, height; e. g., dein. 
Oi, ^* '' coin; e, g,^ proin. 

Rsir. 1. The vowels in ei and oi are generaUj pronounced sepa- 
rately. 
Rem. 2. A few other combinations seem sometimes to be u^ed as 



6 FIEST LATIN BOOK. 

diphthongs. U is always the first element of these combine 
tions, and has then the sound of w ; as, suade = swade : except, 
Ui in huic^ and cui^ which has the sound of long I. 

3. The Sounds of the Consonants. 

The consonants are pronounced nearly as in Eng- 
lish ; c and g^ however, are soft before e, i^ and 3/, and 
the diphthongs ce and ce, and hard in other situations : 
ch is always hard, like k ; as, charta (kartah). 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



LESSON I. 

Parts of Speech, — Proposition.' — Subject. — Predicate, 

1. In Latin, as in English, words are divided, .^si- 
cording to their use, into eight classes, called Parts of 
Speech^ viz. : NounSj Adjectives^ Pronouns, Verbs, Adverbs, 
Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections. 

2. These parts of speech, either singly or combined, 
form propositions or sentences; as, dmds, thou lovest; 
puer ludit, the boy plays. 

3. Every proposition, however simple, consists of 
two parts : (1.) the subject, or the person or thing of which 
it speaks ; and, (2.) the predicate, or that which is said of 
the subject: thus, in the proposition, puer ludit, puer 
(the boy) is the subject of which the proposition speaks, 
and ludit (plays) is the predicate which is affirmed of 
the subject. 

4. In Latin the subject is often omitted, because 
the form of the predicate shows what subject is meant; 
thus the proposition dmds, thou lovest, consists in Latin 
of a single word, because the ending as, of dmds, shows 
(as we shall see by and by) that the subject cannot be 
I, he, or they, but must be thou. 

5. When a proposition thus consists of a single 
word, that word is always a verb ; e. g., dmdt^ he loves. 



8 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [6 — 8. 

6. The analysis of a proposition consists in separat- 
ing it into its elements. 

Example 1.- — Proposition, Pi^er (the boy) ludit (plays). 

Pmr (the boy) is the subject^ because it is that of 
which the proposition speaks (3). Ladit (plays) is the 
predicate^ because it is that which is said of the sub-, 
ject (3). 

Example 2. — Proposition, Amds (thou lovest). 

Arncts is ihe pred^icate^ because it is that which is said 
of the subject. Thou, the subject in English, is omitted 
in Latin, because the ending as, of the predicate dmds^ 
fully implies it. 

7. Exercise in Analysis,^ 

Puella {the girl) cantat (sings). Puer {the hoy) 
ludet {ivillplay). Pater {the father) Yidebit {loill see). 
Mater {the mother) ridebat {ivas laughing), Currebat 
Qie was running). Cantabit {lie will sing). Ludebat (he 
was playing). Arabat (/ze %oas ploughing). 



LESSON II. 
Verls. — First Conjugation, 

8. A VERB expresses existence, condition, or action (ge- 
nerally the existence, condition, or action of some person 

* These propositions are to be analyzed according to the examples 
just given. The object is twofold: first, to fix definitely the distinction 
between subject and predicate ; and, secondly, to show the learner that 
when the subject is a personal pronoun (English, /, thou, he, (fee), it is 
generally omitted in Latin. The use of the pronoun to express emphasis 
or contrast will be considered in another place. 



9—13.] VERBS. — FIRST CONJUGATION'. 9 

or thing^ called its subject) : as, est^ lie is ; dormit^ he 
sleeps (is sleeping, or is asleep) ; dmdt^ lie loves. 

9. When a verb expresses simply its meaning^ with- 
out reference to any person or thing, as dmdre^ to love, 
it is said to be in the Infinitive Mood. 

10. When a verb expresses its meaning in the form 
of an assertion or question^ referring to its subject, as 
dmdt^ he loves, it is said to be in the Indicative Mood?' 

11. A verb may represent its subject, 

1) As acting in present time ; as,, dnidt^ he loves. 
It is then said to be in the Present Tense. 

2) As acting in past time ; as, dmabdt, he was lov- 
ing. It is then said to be in the Imperfect Tense, 

3) As acting in future time (i. e., about to act); 
as, dmabit^ he will love. It is then said to be 
in the Future Tense.^ 

12. A verb may represent its subject, 

1) As speaking of himself; as, dmo^ I love, and 
then both subject and verb are said to be in 
the First Person. 

2) As spoken to ; as, dmds^ thou lovest, and then 
both subject and verb are said to be in the 
Second Person. 

3) As spoken of; as, dmdt, he loves, and then both 

subject and verb are said to be in the Third 
Person. 

13. A verb may represent its subject, 

1) As consisting of only one person or thing ; as, 
dmdt, he, she, or it loves, and then both sub- 
ject and verb are said to be in the Singular 
Number, 



* The other moods and te^ises wiU be noticed in another place. 
1^ 



10 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [14 — 16 

2) As consisting of more than one person or thing; 
as, dmaiit, they love ; and then both subject 
and verb are said to be in the Plural Number. 

14. Every verb consists of two parts, viz. : 

1) The Boot, or that part of the verb which re- 
mains unchanged throughout the various 
moods, tenses, numbers, and persons ; as, 
am. in a mare, amo, amat, and amabit. 

2) The Endings which are added to this root, to 
form the moods, tenses, numbers, and persons ; 
thus, in the forms just noticed— viz., amare, 
amS, ama?^, and wioUt — the endings are, are, o, 
at, and aint, 

15. Some verbs have the infinitive in are; as, am- 
are, to love. These are said to be of 

The First Conjugation. 

16. In verbs of this conjugation, 

1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive 
ending are ; as, snadre ; root, dm. 

2) The third persons singular of the present, im* 
perfect, and future tenses of the indicative are 
formed by adding to this root the following 
endings : 

Present Imperfect. Future. 

at, abat, abit. 

PARADIGM. 



Amare, to love : root, dm. 

Present. Am-at, he, she, or it loves (or, is loving). 

Imperfect. Am-abat, " " " was loving. 

Future. Am-ablt, " « " wdll love (will be loving). 



17 — 19.] VERBS. — FIRST CONJUGATION, 



11 



17. VOCABULAEY. 






Latin. 


Meaning, 


Key-words.^ 


Amare, 


to love 


(amorous). 


Arare, 


to plough 


(arable). 


Cantare, 


to sing 


(canto). 


Laborare, 


to labor 


(labor). 


Vigilare, 


to watch 


(vigilant). 



18. Exercise, 
1. Laborat.f 2. Cantat. 3. Arat. 4. Arabat. 
6. Amabat. 6. Vigilabat. 7. Vigilabit. 8. Cantabit 
9, Laborabit. 10. Vigilat. 11. Laborabat. 12. Ama- 
bit. 13. Amat. 14. Cantabat. 15. Arabit. 





LESSON III. 




First 


Conjugation — continued. 


19. Vocabulary. 




Ambulare, 
Jurare, 


to walk 
to swear. 


(ambulatory). 


Pugnare, 
Saltare, 


to fight 
to dance. 


(pugnacious). 


Sperare, 
Vocare, 


to hope, 
to call 


(vocation). 



* These Key-words, derived from the Latin, are introduced partly as 
a key or help to the learner, in fixing the meaning of the Latin, and 
partly as specimens of English derivatives of Latin origin. 

f The subject of each of these verbs may be, in Enghsh, either he, she^ 
or it The ending, at, shows the number and person of the subject, but 
not its gender (see Paradigm). When the subject is thus omitted m 
Latin, we can usually determine from the connection which subject to 
use, just as in Enghsh we determine the meaning of the pronoun they, 
which may represent either things or persons, and either males orfe- 
In these exercises the pupil may use he as the subject. 



12 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [20—22. 

20. In Englisli, tlie tenses^ numhers^ and persons of 
verbs are indicated by certain ivords or signs ; as, 

Present. Imjperfect. Future. 

He loves, He was loving, He will love. 

In Latin, however, no snch signs are nsed; but 
their place is snjoplied by the endings of the verb. 
Hence, in translating English into Latin, omit these 
signs and express the tense^ number^ and person of the 
verb by the proper endings ; e. g. : 

Prese7it. Imperfect. Future. 

Eng. He loves, He was \oYing^ He will love. 
Lat. Ama^, Amdbat^ Amabit 

21. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Saltat. 2. Cantat. 3. Ambiilat. 4. Ambu- 
labat. 5. Jnrabat. 6. Vocabat. 7. Sperabat. 8. Spe- 
rabit. 9. Ambalabit. 10. Saltabit. 11. Jurat. 12. 
Cantabat. 13. Vocat. 14. Laborabat. 15. Jurabit. 

(h) 1. He calls. 2. He is ploughing. 3. He hopes. 
4. He swears. 5. He is laboring. 6. He was laboring. 
7. He was walking. 8. He was dancing. 9. He was 
singing. 10. He was ploughing. 11. He will plough. 
12. He will call. 13. He will swear. 14. He will hope. 
15. He will labor. 16, He is walking. 17. He was 
hoping. 18. He will walk. 19. He dances. 20. He 
was fighting. 21. He will sing. 



LESSON IV. 

Verts. — Second Conjugation, 

22. Some Verbs have the mjinitive in ere; as, monere, 
to advise. These are said to be of 



2B — 25.] VEEBS. — SECOND CONJUGATION. 



13 



The Second Conjugation. 

23. In verbs of this conjugation, 

1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive 
ending ere ; as, monere ; root, mon, 

2) The third persons singular of the present^ im- 
perfect^ and future tenses of the indicative are 
formed by adding to this root the following 
endings : 

Present Imperfect. Future. 

et, ebat, ebit. 



PARADIGM. 



Monere, to advise : root, man. 

Present. Mon-et, he, she, or it advises (is adAdsing). 
Imperfect. Mon-ebat, " " " was advising. 

Future. Mon-ebit, " " " will advise. 



24. YOCABULARY. 






Docere, 


to teach 


{docile). 


Dolere, 


to grieve 


(doleful). 


Flere, 


to weep. 




Manere, 


to remain. 




Movere, 


to move 


(move). 


Nere, 


to spin. 




Respondere, 


to answer 


(respond) 


Ridere, 


to laugh 


(ridicule) 



Timere, 



to fear, to be afraid (timid). 



25. Exercises, 
(a) 1. Eidet. 2» Docet. 3. Eespondet. 4. Dolet. 
5. Dolebat. 6. Nebat. 7. Flebat. 8. Manebat. 9. Mo- 
vebat. 10. Movebit. 11. Dolebit. 12. Docebit. 13. 
Eespondebit. 14. Eidebit. 15. Mo vet. 16. Docebat. 
17. Manebit. 18. Flet. 19. Eidebat 20. Nebit. 



14 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [26, 27. 

21. Pugnat. 22. Manet. 23. Pugnabat. 24. Mane- 
bat. 25. Pugnabit. 26. Manebit. 27. Cantat. 28. 
Timet. 29. Saltabat. 30. Eespondebat. 31. Ambu- 
labit. 32. Timebit. 33. Laborat. 34. Movet. 35. 
Saltabat. 36. Docebat. 37. Vocabit. 38. Dolebit. 

(b) 1. He remains. 2. He moves. 3. He weeps. 4. 
He spins. 5. He was spinning. 6. He was laughing. 
7. He was teaching. 8. He was grieving. 9. He was 
answering. 10. He will answer. 11. He will weep, 
12. He will remain. 13. He will spin. 14. He is laugh- 
ing. 15. He was weeping. 16. He will teach. 17. 
He teaches. 18. He was moving. 19. He will laugh, 

20. He dances. 21. He laughs. 22. He was call- 
ing. 23. He was weeping. 24. He walks. 25. He 
answers. 26. He was ploughing. 27. He was laugh- 
ing. 28. He will sing. 29. He will move. 



LESSON Y. 

Verbs, — Third Conjugation. 

26. Some verbs have the infinitive in ere ; as, regere^ 
to rule. These are said to be of 

The Third Conjugation. 

27. In verbs of this conjugation, 

1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive 
ending ere ; as, regere ; root, reg, 

2) The third persons singular of the present^ im- 
perfect ^ and future tenses of the indicative are 
formed by adding to this root the following 
endings : 



28, 29.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJXJGATIOlsr. 



15 



Present 

It, 


Imperfect. 

ebat, 

PARADIGM. 


Future. 

et. 



Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 


Eegere, 

Reg-it, 

Reg-ebai 

Reg-et, 


to rule : 
he, she. 


root, reg, 

or it rules (is ruling). 
" was ruling. 
" will rule. 



28. Vocabulary. 



Bibere, 


to drink 


(Jbibher ; as, wine-hibber) 


Cadere, 


to fall 


(cadence). 


Currere, 


to run 


(current). 


Diseere, 


to learn 


(disciple). 


Legere, 


to read 


(legible). 


Ludere, 


to play- 


(ludicrous). 


Scribere, 


to write 


(scribe, scribble). 



29. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Ludit. 2. Currit. 8. Discit. 4. Discebat. 5. 
Scribebat. 6. Bibebat. 7. Bibet. 8. Cadet. 9. Leget. 
10. Legit. 11. Currebat. 12. Scribet. 13. Scribit. 
14. Ludebat. 15. Discet. 

16. Laborat. 17. Movet. 18. Cadit. 19. Vocabat. 
20. Eidebat. 21. Legebat. 22. Sperat. 23. Dolet. 
24. Bibit. 25. Jurabat. 26. Flebat. 27. Cadebat. 
28. Arabit. 29. Eespondebit. 30. Ludet. 

(h) 1. He writes. 2. He drinks. 3. He falls. 4. He 
was falling. 5. He was reading. 6. He was playing. 
7. He will play. 8. He will run. 9. He will learn. 10. 
He learns. 11. He was writing. 12. He will read. 13. 
He is playing. 14. He was running„ 15. He will fall. 

16. He is fighting. 17. He fears. 18. He reads. 
19. He was singing. 20. He was spinning. 21. He 
was learning. 22. He will labor. 23. He will re- 
main. 24. He will write. 



16 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[30—33. 



LESSON VI. 

Veiis, — Fourth Conjugation. 

30. Some verbs have tlie infinitive in ire ; as, audirSj 
to hear. These are said to be of 

The Fourth Conjugation. 

31. In verbs of this conjugation, 

1) The root is found by dropping the infinitive 
ending ire ; as, audire; root, aud. 

2) The third persons singular of the present^ imper- 
fect^ and future tenses of the indicative are formed 
by adding to this root the following endings : 

Present Imperfect Future. 

it, iebat, iet. 

PARADIGM. 



Audire, to hear : root, aud. 
Present. Aud-it, he, she, or it hears (is hearing). 
Imperfect. Aud-iebat, " " " was heariQg. 

Future. Aud-iet, " " " will hear. 



32. Vocabulary. 



Audire, 


to hear 


(audible). 


Custodlre, 


to guard 


{custody). 


Dormn-e, 


to sleep 


{dormant). 


Eradlre, 


to iastruct 


{erudition) 


Scire, 


to know 


{science). 


Sitlre, 


to thirst. 




Venire, 


to come. 





33. Exercises, 
(a) 1. Custodit. 2. Eriidit. 3. Sitit. 4. Sitiebat. 
5. Veniebat. 6. Sciebat. 7. Sciet. 8. Audiet. 9. 
Dormiet. 10. Dormit. 11. Erudiebat. 12. Custodiet. 
18. Venit. 14. Audiebat. 15. Erudiet. 



84.] VERBS.— FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 17 

16. Ambiilat. 17. Docet. 18. Currit. 19. Audit. 
20. Cantabat. 21. Eidebat. 22. Ludebat. 23. Dormie- 
bat. 24.- Saltabit. 25. Nebit. 26. Disoet. 27. Veniet. 

(h) 1. He thirsts. 2. He knows. 8. He guards. 4. 
He was guarding. 5. He was instructing. 6. He was 
coming. 7. He will come. 8. He will hear. 9. He 
will thirst. 10. He will know. 11. He hears. 12. 
He was thirsting. 13. He will instruct. 14. He sleeps. 
15. He was hearing. 16. He will guard. 

17. He walks. 18. He spins. 19. He runs. 20. He 
comes. 21. He was dancing. 22. He was teaching. 
23. He was writing. 24. He was sleeping. 25. He will 
sing. 26. He will laugh. 27. He will play. 28. He 
will instruct. 29. He labors. 30. He was weeping. 
81. He will learn. 82. He will sleep. 



LESSON VII. 

Vei^bs, — Four Conjugations. — Plural Number. 

84. The Four Conjugations already noticed contain 
all the regular verbs of the Latin language : hence, 

1) In any regular verb, the root is found by drop- 
ping the infinitive ending of the conjugation 
to which it belongs. These endings in the four 
conjugations are as follows : 

Conj. I. Conj. II. Conj. III. Conj. TV. 

are, ere, ere, ire. 

a) These endings, it must be observed, differ from 
each other only in the vowel before re, which is called 
the characteristic vowel of the conjugation. The char- 
acteristic vowels in the four conjugations are as follows : 



18 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [35. 

Conj, I. Co7ij. II. Conj. IIL Conj. IV. 

a, e, e, i. 

Rem. — Tliese vowels occur so frequently in their respective conjuga- 
tions, that they are called favorite vowels of the conjugations. 
The tliii'd conjugation has also ^ as a favorite vowel, as in the 
present ending, it ; e. g., regit, he rules. 

2) In any regular verb, the third persons singular 
of the present^ imperfect^ and future tenses of 
the indicaiive are formed by adding to the root 
the endings of the conjugation to which the 
verb belongs. These endings in the four con- 
jugations are as follows : 





Pres. 


Imperf. 


Fut, 


Conj. I. 


at, 


abat. 


abit. 


11. 


et, 


ebat. 


ebit. 


m. 


It, 


ebat, 


et. 


IV. 


it, 


iebat, 


let. 



85. In any regular verb, the third persons plural^ in 
the tenses already noticed, are formed by simply in- 
serting n before t in the endings of the third singular. 

Exc. — If I immediately precedes t, it must be changed, in the fourth 
conjugation, into iu ; as, avdit, he hears ; audiunt, they hear : and in the 
other conjugations into u ; as, amdbit, he will love ; amdhunt, they wiH 
love. 

PARADIGM. 





Present 


Imperfect. 


Future. 


■* I Plur. 


Am-at, 


am-abat. 


am-abit. 


Ara-ant, 


am-abarzt. 


am-abii7it. 


IT ySing. 
l Plur. 


Mon-et, 


m on- ebat. 


mon-ebit. 


M6n-e?it, 


mon-ebant, 


mon-ebwnt. 


^■\nl 


Reg-it, 


reg-ebat. 


reg-et. 


Reg-wnt, 


reg-ebant. 


reg-ent. 


• I Plur. 


Aud-it, 


aud-iebat. 


aud-iet. 


Aud-iwnt, 


aud-iebant. 


aud-ient. 



36, 87.] KOUNS. — ^NOMINATIVE CASE. 19 

86. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Saltat. 2. Saltant. 3. Ambiilabat. 4. Ambu- 
labant. 5. Arabit. 6. Arabunt. 7. Docet. 8. Decent. 
9. Timebat. 10. Timebant. 11. Ridebit. 12. Eide- 
bunt 13. Ludit. 14. Ludunt. 15. Scribebat. 16. 
Scribebant. 17. Ourret. 18. Current. 19. Dormit. 
20. Dormiunt. 21. Veniebat. 22. Veniebant. 23. 
Custodiet. 24. Custodient. 25. Yocant. 26. Dolent. 
27. Discunt. 28. Sciunt. 29. Saltabunt. 30. Moye- 
bant, 31. Legebant. 32. Erudiebant. 33. Jurabunt. 
34. Manebunt. 35. Cadent. 36. Sitient. 

(b) 1. He sings. 2. They sing. 3. He was swearing. 
4. They were swearing. 5. He will labor. 6. They 
will labor. 7. He laaghs. 8. They laugh. 9. He was 
spinning. 10. They were spinning. 11. He will re- 
main. 12. They will remain. 13. He runs. 14. They 
run. 15. He was playing. 16. They were playing. 
17. He will drink. 18. They will drink. 19. He 
knows. 20. They know. 21. He was guarding. 22. 
They were guarding. 23. He will hear. 24. They 
will hear. 25. They walk. 26. They answer. 27. 
They write. 28. They sleep. 29. They were plough- 
ing. 30. They were teaching. 31. They were learn- 
ing. 32. They were instructing. 33. They will sing. 
84. They will weep. 85. They will read. 86. They 
will come. 



LESSON YIII 
Nouns, — Nominative Case, 
87. Ik Latin, as in English, all names, whether of 
persons, places, or things, are called Nouns ; as, Ccesdr; 
puer^ a boy, &c. 



20 FIRST LATIN BOOK, [38—44. 

Rem. 1. — ^jS'ames of individual persons or objects ai*e called proper 
nouns ; as, Ccesar ; Roma, Rome. 

Rem. 2. — [N'ames aj)plicable to persons or objects, not as individuals^ 
but as members of a class, are called common nouns ; as, equuSj 
a horse (a name applicable to all animals of this class). 

38. All nouns have gender^ number^ person^ and case. 

39. The Oeiider of a noun is either masculine^ femi 
nine^ common.^ or neuter. 

40. In Latin, as in English, all nouns denoting ob 
jects which have sex, except such names of animals as 
are applicable to both sexes, are, 

1) Mascidine^ when they denote male beings ; as, 
homines^ men ; piier^ a boy ; leones^ lions. 

2) Feminine^ when they denote female beings; 
as, midier^ a woman ; puelldj a girl ; lecendj a 
lioness. 

8) Common^ when they apply alike to both sexes ; 
as, parens^ a parent (either male or female)] 
tesfis^ a witness (either male ot female), 

41. When gender is employed to denote sex, as in 
the cases just noticed, it is called natural gender. 

42. In nouns denoting objects without sex {neuter 
in English\ and in most names applicable to animals 
of both sexes, the gender in Latin is entirely inde- 
pendent of sex, and is accordingly called grammatical 
gender. 

Some of these nouns are grammatically mascuhne ; 
some, grammatically feminine; and some, grammati- 
cally neuter. 

43. The grammatical gender of nouns is determined 
partly by their signification^ but principally by their 
endings. 

44. The general rules for ascertaining the grammati- 
cal gender of nouns, independently of their endings, 
are: 



46 — 49.] KOUNS. — NOMINATIVE CASE. 21 

1) Most names of rivers^ winds^ and months are 
masculine ; as, Rlienus^ tlie Ehine ; auster^ the 
south wind ; Ajrnlis, April. 

2) Most names of countries^ toicns, islands^ and 
trees are feminine ; as jEgyptus^ Egypt ; Row.a^ 
Rome ; Delos^ name of an island ; laurits^ the 
laurel-tree. 

8) Indeclinahle nouns,^ and clauses used as nouns^ 
are neuter ; as, fds^ right ; nihil^ nothing. 

Gender, as determined by the endings of nouns, -will be noticed in 
connection with the several declensions. 

45. The Numbers and Persons are the same in Latin 
as in English. The first person denotes the speaker : 
the second^ \hQ person spoken to ; and the third^ the per- 
son spoken of. The singular number denotes one ; and 
the plural, more than one. 

46. The Cases of Latin nouns are six in number, 
viz. : Norainative^ Genitive^ Dative^ Accusative^ Vocative^ 
and Ablative, 

47. The case of a noun is indicated by its ending ; 
and the formation of its several cases is called De- 
clension. 

48. The Nominative Case corresponds to the nomina- 
tive in English, both in name and use ; e. g., 

Puer luditj the boy plays. 

49. EuLE OF SYNTAX.f — The subject of a finite 
(i. e. not infinitive) verb is put in the nominative. 

Rem. 1. — Thus, in the example, pz^r is in the nominative by this rule. 
Rem. 2. — The subject stands before tlie verb, as in Enghsh. 

* Such as have but one form for all cases and both numbers. 

f Rules for the govenmient and agreement of words are called Hules 

of Syntax, 



22 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [50 — 52. 

50. EuLE OF Syntax. — A finite verb must agree 
with, its subject in number and person. 

Rem. — Thus, in the above example, ludit is in the third person singu- 
lar, to agree with its subject piLer. 

^^ Determine which of the nouns in the following Vocabularies 
have natural gender, and which grammatical, and apply rules. 

51. Vocabulary.^ 

Caesar, m. Caesar, 

a celebrated Roman general, 

Fllius, m, son {filial). 

Pater, m. father (paternal). 

Puella,/. girl. 

Puer, m, boy (puerile:), 

Vincere, to conquer. (vincible), 

52. Exercises, 

{a) 1. Paterf docet. 2. Puer ludit. 3. Filius disce- 
bat. 4. Caesar vincebat. 5. Puer veniet. 6. Puella 
cantabat. 7. Pater scribebat. 

(6) 1. The girl will learn. 2. The father will con- 
quer. 3. The boy dances. 4. The son was learning. 
5. The father was ploughing. 6. The boy was play- 
ing. 7. The girl will sing. 8. Caesar was coming. 

* Gender is indicated in the Vocabularies by m. for masculine, f. for 
feminine, c. for common, and n. for neuter. 

f As the Latin has no article, a noun may be translated, (1) without 
the article ; as, pater, father : (2) with the indefinite article ; 2ls, pater, a 
father : (3) with the definite article ; as, pater, the father. 



(, 54.] 


KOUISrS. — NOMINATIVE 


CASE. 






LESSON IX. 




Nouns.- 


—Nominative Case — 


- Continued. 


53. YOCABULAKY.-^ 




Aqua,/ 




water 


{aqueous). 


Aquila,/ 




eagle 


{aquiline). 


Avis,/ 




bird. 




Cams, c. 




dog 


{canine). 


Equiis, m. 




horse 


{equestrian). 


Filia,/ 




daughter 


{filial). 


Fluere, 




to flow 


{fluent). 


Hostis, c. 




enemy 


{hostile). 


Imperare, 




to command 


{imperative). 


Magister, 




master, teacher 


{magisterial), 


Mater, 




mother 


{maternal). 


Mors,/ 




death 


{mortal). 


Nubes,/ 




cloud. 




Rex, 




king 


{regal). 


Serviis, m. 




slave 


{servant). 


Volare, 




to fly 


{volatile). 



23 



54. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Mors veniet. 2. Aquila volat. 3. Hostis ve- 
niebat. 4. Nubes movet. 5. Aqua fluit. 6. Canis 
ludebat. 7. Equus curret. 8. Magister erudiebat. 9. 
Eex imperabat. 

10. Avis volat. 11. Volant. 12. Servus pugnabit. 
13. Pugnabant. 14. Puer timebat. 15. Timebant. 
16. Puella discebat. 17. Discebant. 18. Filia dormie- 
bat. 19. Dormiebant. 

(b) 1. The bird will fly. 2. The eagle was flying. 
3. The king will come. 4. The mother will teach. 5. 
The daughter will learn. 6. The dog will run. 7. The 

* In this and the following Vocabularies, whenever the gender of a 
noun is not marked, the pupil is expected to determine it by the rules 
already given. 



24 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [55 — 57. 

slave will swear. 8. Caesar was coming. 9. The slave 
is ploughing. 

10. They were ploughing. 11. The king will con- 
quer. 12. They are conquering. 13. The dog will 
come. 14. They were coming. 15. The girl is weep- 
ing. 16. They will weep. 17. The boy is singing. 
18. They will laugh. 



LESSON X. 
Nouns. — Vocative Case, 

55. The same form^ of the noun which is called the 
nominative^ when spoken of^ is called the vocative^ when 
s]3ohen to. This corresponds to the nominative independ- 
ent in English ; e. g. 

Voc. Nom. 

Pater, puer cadet. 

Father (or, faiher\ the boy will fall. 

Rem. — In very short sentences, like the above, the vocative may be 
placed either at the beginning or close ; in other cases, however, 
it is generally preceded by one or more words in the sentence. 

56. EuLE OF Syntax. — The name of the person or 
thing addressed is put in the vocative. 

Rem. — The interjection O is sometimes used before the name address- 
ed, both in Latin and English. 

57. Vocabulary. 

AgrTcola, husbandman (agriculture), 

Balbus, Balbus, a marHs name, 

Caius, Caius, a raarHs name. 

Disc^pfilus, pupil {discijple), 

IMordere, to bite. 

* A single exception wiU be noticed in another place. 



58.] NOUNS. — VOCATIVE CASE. 25 

O (inieTy.), O, used in direct address, 

Peccare, to sin (peccant). 

Regina, queen. 

Soror, sister. 

58. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Puer jurat. 2. mater, puer jurat. 3. Puer 
ludebat. 4. Puer ludebat, magister. 5. Rex saltabat. 
6. reglna, rex saltabat. 7. Mater dolebit. 8. Soror^ 
mater dolebit. 9. Canis mordebit. 10. puer^ canis 
mordebit. 

11. Mors veniet. 12. Balbus jurabat. 13. Jurabunt, 
14. Agricola arabit. 15. Arant. 16. Servus peccat. 
17. Peccabant. 18. Magister erudiet. 19. Hostis 
vincet. 20. Vincebant. 21. Scient. 22. Discebant 
23. Puella legebat. 24. Rex imperabat. 25. Nubes mo- 
vet. 26. Pugnabant. 27. Yincunt. 

(p) 1. The king will conquer. 2. queen, the king 
will conquer. 3. The slave was weeping. 4. Father^ 
the slave was weeping. 5. The boy is swearing {swears). 
6. Master, the boy is swearing {swears). 7. The dog 
will bite. 8. Brother, the dog will bite. 9. They will 
dance. 10. Mother, they will dance. 11. The master 
will hear. 12. Siste?', the master will hear. 13. The 
horse will run. 14. Daughter, the horse will run. 15. 
Death will come. 16. Death will come, king. 

17. Caius is ploughing. 18. They will plough. 19. 
Balbus was fighting. 20. They are fighting. 21. The 
girl was writing. 22. They will learn. 23. The pupil 
will learn. 24. The master is teaching. 25. The queen 
is weeping. 26. They will weep. 27. They were read- 
ing. 28. The eagle was flying. 29. The king will 
command. 30. The mother will teach. 31. The king 
is conquering. 32. The father will come. 
2 



26 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[59, 60. 



LESSON XL 

Nouns, — Ajoposition. — Modified Subject. 

59. The subject of a proposition may liave a noun 
denoting tlie same person or thing connected with it to 
explain or limit its meaning. The subject is then said 
to be modified by the limiting noun ; e. g. 

Subject not modified. Subject Tnodified. 

1. Latiniis regnabat. 2. Latiniis rex regnabat. 

Latinus was reigning. Latinus the king was reigning. 

Hem. 1. — Rex, in the above example, limits Latinus ; i. e. it sho-w's 
that the predicate regnabat is not affirmed of every one who may 
have borne the name Latinus, but only of Latinus the king. Rex 
is in the same case as the subject, i. e. nominative^ and is said to 
be in apposition with it. 

Rem. 2. — The noun in apposition is generally placed after the noun 
which it limits, as in the above example ; if, however, it is empha^ 
tic, it is placed before that noun. 



60. Vocabulary. 




Aurum, 


gold. 




Crescere, 


( to grow, ;i 
( to wax (as moon) |' 


(crescent). 






Faustulus, 


Faustulus, 

an Italian 'shepherd. 




Latinus, 


Latinus, 

a king of Latium, 




Lavinia, 


Lavinia, 

daughter of Latinus. 




Luna, 


moon 


(lunar). 


M^care, 


to glitter, to shine. 




Miles, 


soldier 


(military). 


Numa, 


Numa, 

second king of Rome. 




Pastor, 


shepherd 


(pastor, pastoral). 



61, 62.] NOUJS-S.— GENITIVE CASE. 27 

Regnare, to reign {regnant^ reign). 

Tullia, Tullia, 

a queen of Rome. 
Victoria, Victoria, 

queen of England. 

61. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Balbus clormiebat. 2. Balbiis servus dormit. 
8. Latinus regnabat. 4. Latinns rex vincebat. 5. Tul- 
lia cantabat. 6. Tullia regina saltabit. 7. Caius pastor 
cantabit. 

8. Luna crescit. 9. Aurum micat. 10. Lavinia 
regina regnabat. 11. Currebant. 12. Current. 13. 
Pastor ridebit. 14. Eidebant. 15. Canis mordebit. 
16. Mordebunt. 17. Puella nebit. 18. JSTebunt. 

(h) 1. Numa was reigning. 2. King Kuma was 
reigning. 3. Faustulus a shepherd was singing. 4. 
Queen Victoria was reigning. 

5. The boy was ploughing. 6. They were playing. 
7. They will w^rite. 8. The queen was weeping. 9. 
They are weeping. 10. The soldier will fight. 11. 
The girl will learn. 12. The daughter is spinning. 
13. They will spin. 14. The boy will fight. 15. They 
will fight. ., 



LESSON XII. 

Nouns. — Genitive Case. — Modified Suhject. 

62. Nouns in Latin are declined in five different 
ways, and are accordingly divided into five classes, 
called Beclensions, distinguished from each other by the 
following 



28 FIRST LATm BOOK. [63, 64 



GENITIVE ENDINGS. 



Dec. I. Dec. 11. Dec. III. Dec. lY. Dec. V. 

ae, I, IS, us, el.* 



EXAMPLES. 





Nominative. 


Genitive. 


Dec. I. 


Musa, a muse, 


musae, of a muse. 


II. 


Servus, a slave, 


servl, of a slave. 


III. 


Honor, an honor, 


honoris, of an honor. 


IV. 


Fructus, a fruit, 


fructus, of a fruit. 


V. 


Dies, a day, 


diei, of a day. 



Rem. — The genitive endings are usually added to the word after the 
ending of the nominative is dropped ; but, as this is not al^vays 
the ease, it becomes necessary, in order to decline a noun correctly, 
to know both the nominative and .the genitive : accordingly, both 
these forms are given in the Vocabularies. 

63. The Genitive Case expresses possession^ and tlie 
various relations denoted by the preposition o/J and ac- 
cordingly corresponds both to the English Possessive^ 
and the English Objective with of; as, regis corona^ the 
king's crown (or the crown of the king) ; amor gloriae^ 
the love of glory. 

64. The subject of a proposition may have a nonn 
denoting a different person or thing connected with it, to 
explain or limit its meaning. The subject is then said 
to be modified by such noun ; e. g. 

Subject 7iot modified. Siobject modified. 

1. Filiiis regnabit. 2. E^gis filius regnabit. 

The son will reign. The son of the king will reign. 

Rem. — The genitive regis (of the king), in the above example, modi 
fies filius (ch e son) ; i e. it shows that the predical^ regnabit 

* In this ending e is long except in sp^i, fidei, and rli. 



65, 66.] NOUNS. — MODIFIED SUBJECT. 29 

(will reign) is not affirmed of eveiy son, but only of the son of 
the khig. 

a) In tlie example, the limiting genitive stands be- 
fore the noun which it limits. This seems to be the 
more common order, when no emjphasis is intended, 
though we often find it reversed. 

h) If the noun which is limited by the genitive is 
emphatic^ or is a monosyllable^ it generally stands before 
the genitive ; e. g. 

1. Cicero, pdier patriae. 

Cicero, the father of (his) country. 

2. Lex naturae. 

The lata of nature. 

Rem. — In the first example, pater is emphatic, and in the second, ex 
is a monosyllable ; they accordingly stand before their genitiyes. 

65. Rule of Syxtax. — A noun limiting the mean- 
ing of another noun is put, 

1) In the same case as that noun, when it denotes 
the same person or thing ; e. g. Ldtinus rex^ 
Latinus the king (59, Rem. 1). 

2) In the genitive^ when it denotes a different 
person or thing; e. g. Regis filius^ the son of 
the king. 

66. Vocabulary.* 

Agrlcola, Gen. agrlcolae, husbandman (agriculture). 

Amicus, " amicl, friend (amicable). 

Balbus, " Balbl, Balbus, a marCs name. 

Caius, " Call, Caius, a marHs name. 

Cams, " canis, dog (canine). 

Filia, " flliae, daughter. 

■^ The genitive is given in the Vocabulary ; and the pupil may deter- 
mine from the genitive ending to which dech^jasion the noun belongs. 



30 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[67. 



Fllius, 


Gen. fllil. 


son 




{filial). 


Frater, 


a 


fratns, 


brother 




{fraternal), 


Latin lis, 


a 


Latlnl, 


Latinus, 
a king i 


if Latium 


i^ 


Miles, 


a 


mllitis, 


soldier 




(military). 


Pater, 


a 


patris. 


father 




(jpaternal). 


Puer, 


a 


puerl. 


boy 




(puerile). 


Reglna, 


a 


reglnae, 


queen. 






Rex, 


a 


regis. 


king 




(regal). 


Servus, 


a 


servl. 


slave 




(servant). 


Tullia, 


(i 


Tulliae, 

67. 


Tullia, 
a queen 

Exercises. 


of Rome, 





(a) 1. Servns clormit. 2. Balbi servus dormiet. 3. 
Films ludit. 4. jRegis films ludebat. 5. Reglnae pater 
docebat. 6. Filia ridebat. 7. Filia reglnae ridebat. 
8. Amicus regis cadet. 

9. Balbus servus veniebat. 10. Balhi servus dormit. 
11. Pastor cantabit. 12. Canis pastoris mordebit. 13. 
Mordebunt. 14. Filia pastoris nebit. 15. Regis amicus 
timebit. 16. Caius, regis amicus, timebit. 17. Tullia, 
regis filia, cantabat. 

(p) 1. The brother will conquer. 2. The king will 
conquer. 3. The brother of the king will conquer. 4. 
The daughter of tJie king is singing. 5. The queen 
will read. 6. The daughter of the queen will read. 
7. The father of Balbus was laughing. 

8. The shepherd^ dog (the dog of the shepherd) will 
bite. 9. Tke hoy's dog will bite. 10. The husband- 
man^s dog will play. 11. The soldier will fight. 12. 
The son of the soldier will fight. 13. Latinus the king 
was conquering. 14. The shepherd^s daughter (the 
daughter of the shepherd) is spinning. 



68 — 70.] NOUNS. — ^ACCUSATIVE CASE. 31 

LESSON XIII. 
Nouns. ^—Accusative Case, — -DiTect Object of Predicate. 

68. Every noun consists of two distinct parts, viz : — 

1) The Root^ or that part which remains un- 
changed throughout the various cases of both 
numbers ; as 'rrius in musd, musae^ and musdm. 

2) The Endings^ which are added to the root to 
form these cases; thus, in the forms just no- 
ticed, viz., musa, mtisae, and mtisam, the end- 
ings are a, ae, and dm. 

69. In any noun, of whatever declension, 

1) The root may be found by dropping the en i- 
ing of the genitive singular (62) ; as, musd^ 
Gen. musae; root, mm: servus^ Gen. servi; root, 
serv : honor ^ Gen. honoris; root, honor ^ &c. 

2) Any case may be formed (with a few excep- 
tions) by adding to this root the proper end- 
ing. 

70. 1) The Accusative Singular of neuter nouns is the 

same as the Nominative ; e. g., Nom. sceptrUm^ 
a sceptre ; Accus. sceptrum. 
2) The Accusative Singular oi masculine 2,tl$)l femi- 
nine nouns is formed from the root, by adding 
one"^ of the following 

ACCUSATIVE ENDINGS. 



Dec. I. Dec. 11. Dec. III. Dec, IV. Dec. V. 

am, urn, em, um, em. 



* If the noun is of the first declension, the learner will, of course, add 
the ending given for the first declension ; if of the second, the ending 
given for the second ; and so on. 



82 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[71—75. 



EXAMPLES. 



Genitive. Root. Ending. Accusative. 

Dec. I. Musae, of a muse; mus -am ; musam, a muse. 
II. Servi, of a slave ; serv -um; ^ervum, a slave. 

III. Honoris, of an honor; honor-em; honorem, an honor. 
rV. Fructus, of a fruit; fruct -um; fructum, a fruit. 
V. Biei, of a day ; di -em; diem^ a day. 



71. The accusative case corresponds very nearly to 
tlie English objective, and is used after transitive verbs 
and certain prepositions, 

72. When a verb represents its subject as acting 
upon some other person or thing, it is said to be tran- 
sitive ; and the person or thing upon which the action 
is exerted, is called its direct object ; e. g. 

Serviiis imperiiim administrat. 
{Servius the government administers^ 
Servius administers the government, 

73. In English the object is placed after the verb; 
thus, government is placed after administers ; but in Latin 
the object precedes the verb; thus, imperiiim precedes 
administrat, 

14:. EuLE OF Syntax. — The Direct Object of an 
action is put in the accusative, 

75. Vocabulary. 



Aedlficare, 
Dias, 


Gen. diei, 


to build 
day. 


(edifice). 


Do minus, 
Epistola, 
Laudare, 
Monstrare, 


" dominl, 
" epistolae,/. 


master, as owner 
letter 
to praise 
to show. 


(domineer), 

(epistle), 

(laud). 


Mors, 


" mortis,/. 


death 


(mortal). 



7().J 


NOUNS. — ACCUSATIVE CASE. 




Morus, 


Gen. muri, m. wall 


{mural). 


Occldere, 


to kill. 




Puella, 


" puellae, girl. 




Senatus, 


" senatus, m, senate 


(senate). 


Sperare, 


to hope for. 




Terrere, 


to terrify. 




Timere, 


to fear 


(timid). 


Via, 


" viae,/. way, road. 




Videre, 


to see. 




Vltare, 


to shun. 
76. Exercises. 





33 



(a) 1. Cains puellam laiidat. 2. Puer mw^um aedifi- 
cabat. 3. Rex piierum ridet. 4. Puer mortem vitat. 
5. Puella diem sperabat. 6. Puella viam monstrabit. 
7. Servus dommum occidit. 

8. Puella puerum laudat. 9. Eex senatum timet. 
10. Puer canem timebit. 11. Epistolam scribit. 12. 
Puer canem occidebat. 13. Mortem vitant. ^ 14. Mor^ 
tem timent. 15. Balbus servus dominum timebit. 
16. Balbum seryum docent. 17. Balbi filius puerum 
laudabat. 

(&) 1. The boy will sbow the road, 2. Balbus is 
building a wall, 3. Caius was praising the hoy, 4. 
The slave is showing the way, 5. The king hopes for 
the day, 6. The girl will shun the dog, 

7, The dog will bite the girl. 8. Father is writing 
a letter. 9. The father will praise the daughter. 10. 
They are building a wall. 11. They are kiUing the 
slave. 12. The king's son will play. 13. The king 
fears death. 14. The death of the father will terrify 
the son. ' ' '~^ '^^- 'r " ' ' ■ '- - ' 



2^ 



34 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [77—79. 

LESSON XIV. 

Nouns, — Accusative^ continued,— Adverbial Modifiers. 

77. Rule of Syntax. — Certain qualifying ■words, 
called adverhs^ are often connected with verbs, merely 
to modify their meaning ; e. g., 

1. Miles fortiter pugnat. 2. Miles non piignat. 
{Tlie soldier bravely fights) {The soldier not fights) 
The soldier fights bravely. The soldier does not fight. 

Rem. — In these examples, /or^zfer (bravely) and tion (not) are adverbs 
modifying pUgnat In Latin the adverb generally precedes the 
verb, as in these instances. 

78. Vocabulary."^ 



Anguis, anguis, c. 


snake, serpent. 




Christianiis, i, m. 


Christian 


{Christian), 


Fort:ter, 


bravely. 




Lex, legls,/. 


law 


{legal). 


Mater, matrls, 


mother 


{maternal). 


Negligere, 


to disregard 


{neglect). 


Non, 


not. 




Pastor, pastorls, 


shepherd 


{pastor). 


Pecunia, ae,/. 


money 


{'pecuniary). 


ServiuvS, I, 


Servius, a mav^s name 




Vox, VOCIS,/. 


voice 
79. Exercises, 


{vocal). 



(a) 1. Servius pugnat. 2. Servius fortiter pugnat. 
8. Mors Christianum non^ terret. 4. Agricola anguem 
timebit. 5. Agricola anguem non timebit. 6. Pater 

* In this and the following Vocabularies, either the genitive or its 
ending is given unmediately after each substantive. 

f In translating non before a verb, place 'not' after the English 
tense-sign ; thus, non terret, does not terrify, or is not terrifying. 



80, 81.] NOUNS.— DATIVE CASE. 35 

filiam audiebat. 7. Pater filii vocem audiebat. 8. Ma- 
ter vocem negliget. 9. Mater filiae vocem. non negliget. 

10. Caius legem negligebat. 1 1. Christianus pecuniam 
negliget. 12. Pecuniam negligent. 13. Puerum docent. 
14, Christianus mortem non timet. 

(b) 1. The husbandman will fight. 2. The husband- 
man will not fight. 3. Servius fears death. 4. Servius 
does not fear death. 5. The slave hears the voice of 
(his) master, 6. The boy was killing the dog. 7. The 
boy was killing the shepherd's dog. 8. The dog will 
not bite. 9. Servius will avenge the death of the king. 

10. They do not fear death. 11. They will fight 
bravely. 12. Caius is teaching the boy. 13. The 
daughter of the queen is singing. 14. They did not 
hear (were not hearing). 15. They will not disregard 
the law. 



LESSON XY. 

Nouns. — Dative Case, — Indirect Object of Predicate, 

80. The Dative Case in Latin corresponds to the ob- 
jective with to or for in English ; as, musd, a muse ; 
Dat. musae^ to ot for a muse. 

81. The Dative Singular of a noun may be formed by 
adding to its root one of the following 

DATIVE ENDINGS. 



Bee. I. Dec, 11. Dec. III. Dec. IV. Dec. Y. 
ae, o, 1, ul,* el.f 



* Neuter nouns of the foui-th declension are exceptions, as they have 
the dative singular like the nominative. - 

\ In this ending e is long except in sp^i, fidei, and r6i. 



86 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [82 — 84. 

EXAMPLES. 



Genitive. 


Root. Ending. 


Dative. 


Dec. I. Musae, of a muse; 


m Q s - ae ; musae, 


to ox for a muse. 


II. Servi, of a slave ; 


serv - ; servo, 


a 


" a slave. 


III. HonoriS, of /ionor; 


honor -I; honor!, 


u 


" an honor. 


IV. Fructus, o//rww; 


fr act - ul ; fructui. 


(i 


" afruit. 


V. Diei, of day; 


di - el ; diel, 


(( 


" a day. 



82. The person or thing to or for which any thing is, 
or is done, is called an indirect object; e. g., 

Balbiis puero viam monstrat. 
{Balbus to the hoy the way shows.) 
Balbns shows the way to the boy. 

Rem. — In the example it will be observed that the indirect object 
precedes the direct. This is the more common order, though not 
unfrequently reversed. 

83. EuLE OF Syntax. — Any transitive verb may 
take the accusative of the direct object and the dative of 
the indirect object. 

84. YOCABULARY. 

Accusare, to accuse. 

Bellum, I, n. war. 

Claudere, to shut (dose). 

Condere, to found, to build. 

Dare,* to give. 

Domus, domus, or domi,f house (domestic). 

Evertere, to pull down, to overthrow. 

ludlcere, to declare (as war). 

Leo, leonis, m. lion. 

Miles, itis, m. (rarely/.), soldier (military). 

* Dare is of the first conjugation, with a short, conlarary to the gene- 
ral rule. 



85.] NOUNS. — INDIRECT OBJECT. 87 



Porta, ae,/. 


, { (portal), 
^^*^ \ (porter). 


Reperire, 


to find. 


Romulus, I, 


Romulus, 




the founder of Rome. 


Sceptrum, I, ?i. 


sceptre. 


Urbs, IS,/. 


city (urbane) 




85. Exercises, 



(a) 1. Pastor viam monstrat. 2. Pastor puero viam 
monstrat. 3. Puer viam monstrabit. 4. Puer pastori 
viam monstrabit. 5. Servus portam claudet. 6. Ser- 
vus regi portam claudet. 

7. Eomillus urbem condebat. 8. Agricola anguem 
reperit. 9. Miles agricolae domum evertet. 10. Regis 
sceptrum videbant. 11. Militi viam monstrant. 12. 
Leonem timebant. 

(h) 1. The slave is building a wall. 2. The slave is 
building a wall for the 'king, 3. The boy was showing 
the road. 4. The boy was showing the road to the 
husbandman, 5. The husbandman is showing the 
road to the "hoy. 6. They will declare war against 
the city, . . , . a^^^^^-^' ^' 

7. They are founding a city for the queen. 8. They 
will not disregard the law. 9. They were writing for 
the king. 10. They will accuse the boy. 11. They 
were praising the queen. 12. They will praise the 
queen ^s daughter. 13. The king will declare war 
against the senate. 14. The king will give the city to 
(his) son. 



38 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [86—89. 

LESSON XYI. 

Nouns, — Ablative Case, — Modified Predicate, 

86. The Ablative Case in Latin corresponds to the ob- 
jective with from^ by^ in^ or with in English ; as, musd^ 
a muse ; Abl. musa^ from a muse, or by^ in^ or with a 
mnse."^ 

87. The Ablative Singular of a noun may be formed 
by adding to its root one of the following 

ABLATIVE ENDINGS. 



Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec.llL Dec.lY. Dec.Y, 
a, o, e5f u, e. 



EXAMPLES. 



Oenitive. 


Root. Ending. Ablative. 




Dec. I. Musae, of a muse , 


mus -a; musa, /rom 


in, &c 


, a muse. 


II. Servl, of a slave ; 


s e r V - ; servo, " 


a u 


a slave. 


III. Honoris, of honor , 


honor - e; honore, " 


a a 


honor. 


IV. Fructus, of fruit ; 


fruct - u; fructu, " 


a ti 


fruit 


V. Diel, of day; 


di - e; die, " 


a a 


day. 



88. The predicate may be modified by a noun denot- 
ing the time of an action ; e. g., 

Hieme ursiis dormit. 
{In winter the bear sleeps^ 
The bear sleeps (when ?) in winter, 

89. EuLE OF Syntax. — The time when is pnt in the 

* The preposition is, however, often expressed before the ablative, as 
it is before the objective in Enghsh. 

f As an exception to this, a few nouns of the thii'd declension form 
the ablative in 7, as we shall see by-and-by. 



90—93.] NOUKS. — MODIFIED PREDICATE. 



89 



ablative witliout a preposition (i. e., without any word 
for tiie English at^ in^ &c.) 

Rem.— The ablative of time often stands first in a sentence, as in the 
example. 

90. The predicate may be modified by a noun denot- 
ing the place of its action ; e. g., 

Ursiis in antro dormit. 
[The bear in a cave sleeps.) 
The bear sleeps (where ?) in a cave. 

91. EuLE OF Syntax. — The name of a place where 
any thing is, or is done, when not a town (227), is gener- 
ally put in the ablative with a preposition, 

J2^" The pupil, in preparing his exercises., should imitate the ordet 
in the examples, whenever nothing is said on the point. 



92. Vocabulary. 






Aestas, atis,/. 


summer. • 




Ager, agri, m. 


field 


(agriculture). 


Antrum, i, n. 


cave. 




Asinus, I, m. 


ass. 




Avis, IS,/. 


bird 


(aviary). 


Dllaniare, 


to tear in pieces. 




Equiis, I, m. 


horse 


(equestrian). 


Hiems, emis,/. 


winter. 




Hortus, I, m. 


garden 


(horticulture). 


In (prep, with ahl.), 


in. 




Lueils, I, m. 


grove. 




Mens, tis, m. 


mountain. 




Pratiim, i, n. 


meadow. 




UrSUS, I, TTK 


bear. 





93. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Ursus dormit. 2. Ursus in antro dormit. 3. 
Canis currit. 4. Canis in horto currit. 5. Puer lude- 
bat. 6. Puer in agro ludebat. 7. Hieme ursus in 



40 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [94, 95. 

antro dormiet. 8. Eomiilus urbem condebat. 9. Eo- 
miilus urbem in monte condebat. 10. Hieme- ursus in 
antro dormit. 

11. Servus regem occldet. 12. Leo asmum dilaniat. 
13. Kex reginam accusabat. 14. Eegina filiam docebit. 
15. In luco ludnnt. 16. Leo squum dilaniabit. 

ip) 1. The boy is playing. 2. The boy is playing in 
the garden, 8. The dog is running. 4. The dog is 
running in the meadow, 5. The bird will not sing. 6. 
The bird will not sing in winter, 7. The daughter was 
singing in the grove, 8. They will walk in the field, 
9. They will play in summer, 

10. Balbus will fear Caius. 11. They will fear the 
queen. 12. He was building a wall. 13. They are 
building a wall. 14. The queen is walking in the field. 
15. The queen's mother was weeping. 16. The slave 
is showing the boy (to the boy) the way. 17. The slave 
was shutting the gate. 18. The boy will shut the gate. 



LESSON XVIL 

Nouns. — First Declension,'^ 



94. To the First Declension belong all nouns which 
have the genitive in ae (62). They all end in a (except 
a few Greek nouns. See 174). 

95. Latin nouns of this declension are grammatically 
feminine ; unless their gender is determined by their 
signification^ according to previous rules (40, 44). 

* Having learned in the previous Lessons the use of the several cases 
of the Latin language, the pupil will now find httle difficulty in master- 
ing the five declensions (62) in all the cases of both numbers. 



96—98.] NOUNS. — FIRST DECLENSION. 



41 



96. We have already learned tliat tlie root of a 
noun may always be found from the genitive singular 
(69, 1), but, as it may also be formed without mu.ch 
difSculty from the nominative, it will be well for us to 
notice, in connection with the different declensions, the 
manner in which this may be done. 

97. In the First Declension, 

1) The root may be found by dropping the nomi- 
native ending a, as musd ; root, mus (69, 1). 

2) Any noun may he declined (i. e., all the cases 
of both numbers may be formed) by adding 
to the root the following 



CASE-ENDINGS. 



JVom. 


Gen, 


Dat. 


Accus. 


Voc. 


Ahl. 


Sing, a, 


ae, 


ae, 


am, 


a, 


a, 


Plur. ae, 


arum, 


IS, 


as, 


ae, 


IS. 



PARADIGM. 



Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. Mus-a, a muse. 


Nom. 


Mus-ae, muses. 


Gen. Mus-ae, of a muse. 


Gen. 


Mus-arum, of muses. 


Dat. Mus-ae, to, for a muse. 


Dat. 


Mus-Ts, to, for muses. 


Ace. Mus-am, a muse. 


Ace. 


Mus-as, muses. 


Voc, Mus-a, muse. 


Voc. 


Mus-ae, muses. 


Abl. Mus-a, from, &c. a muse. 


Abl. 


Mus-Is, /rom, &c. muses. 



98. VOCABULABY.^ 



Apenre, 


to open, to uncover 


{aperture). 


Aquila, ae, 


eagle 


(aquiline). 


Caput, itis, n. 


head 


(capital). 


Columba, ae, 


dove. 





The pupil must apply rules for gender. 



42 



FIRST LATIN BOOK, 



[99. 



Corona, ae, 
Dolor, oris, m, 
Luscinia, ae, 

Rldere, 
Sentire, 
Vincire, 



garland, crown 
pain, grief, sorrow 
nightingale. 

S to laugh, > 

f to laugh at S 

5 to feel, to perceive 

i by the senses. 

^ to bind, 

( to bind up. 

99. Exercises, 



(coronation), 
(dolorous). 

(ridicule). 



(a) 1. P:aellae saltant. 2. Aqnilae volant. 3. Ee- 
gina puellas docebit. 4. TuUiae filiae ridebunt 5. 
TuUiae filias ridebit. 6. Aquila columbas occidet. 
7. Lnsciniae cantabant. 

8. Balbus vocem audit. 9. Cains dolorem yitabit. 
10. Puellae dolorem sentiunt. 11. Serviis epistolas 
scribit. 12. Puer caput vinciebat. 13. Eegina puellae 
coronam dabit. 14. Eegina puellis coronas dabit. 

(6) 1. The girl was writing a letter. 2. The girls 
are writing letters. 3. The queen will call (her) daugh- 
ter. 4. The queen is calling (her) daughters. 5. Tul- 
lia will give a garland to her daughter. 

6. They will give garlands to (their) daughters. 7. 
He is reading the queen's letter. 8. They are reading 
the girls' letters (the letters of the girls). 9. They 
will show the way to the queen. 10. The husband- 
man will shut the gate. 11. The doves will fly^. 12. 
The nightingales are singing. 13. The boy hears (his) 
father's voice. 14. The boy is opening the letters. 
15. The slave will open (his) master's letters. 



100 — 103.] NOUNS. — SECOND DECLENSION. 43 

LESSON XVIII. 

Nouns.' — 'Second Declensioii. — Nouns in iis and urn. 

100. To the Second Declension belong all nouns wliicli 
have the genitive singular in i (62). They end in us^ 
um^ e?', and ir (except a few Greek nouns. See 174). 

101. In this declension nouns in um are grammati- 
cally neuter ; and the rest (with a few exceptions'^) are 
grammatically masculine ; unless their gender is deter- 
mined by their signification, according to previous 
rules (40, 44). 

102. In nouns in us and um^ of this declension, the 
root is found by dropping the nominative ending ; as, 
serv' as J a slave ; root, serv : regn-Hm^ a kingdom ; root, 
regn. 

103. Nouns in us are declined by adding to the root 
the following 

CASE-ENDINGS. 



Nom. 


Gen. 


Bat. 


Accu8, 


Voc. 


Ahl. 


Sing, us, 


1, 


o, 


um. 


e,t 


o, 


Plur. 1, 


orum, 


IS, 


OS, 


Tj 


IS. 



* It has not been thouglit best to burden the memory of the learner 
with lisU of exceptions, at this early stage of his study. Accordingly, 
general rules, covering the great majority of cases, are given for immedi- 
ate and constant use ; thus the pupil may fix the general principles of 
the language, and become better prepared to understand and recollect 
the exceptions as they occur in his lessons. Such exceptions, whether 
pertaining to gender or other subjects, will be marked in the Vocabula- 
ries. 

j- The vocative singular, in nouns in us of this declension, is not hke 

the nominative (see 55 and note). Proper nouns in ius drop the ending 
e in the vocative singular ; as, Tullius (proper name), Voc. Tulli, Fllius, 
a son, and genius, a guardian angel, also drop the ending % in the voca- 
tive singular. 



44 



FIRST LATIN BOOK, 

PARADIGM. 



[104. 





Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. 


Serv-Lis, a slave. 


Nom. 


Serv-I, slaves. 


Gen. 


Serv-I, of a slave. 


Gen. 


Serv-orum, of slaves. 


Dat. 


Serv-O, to, for a slave. 


Dat. 


Serv-Ts, to, for slaves. 


Ace. 


Serv-um, a slave. 


Ace. 


Serv-os, slaves. 


Voc. 


Serv-e, O slave. 


Voc. 


Serv-i, slaves. 


Abl. 


Serv-o, /rom, hy a slave. 


Abl. 


SeYY-is,from, hy slaves. 



Rem. — It will be well for the pupil to accustom himself to compare 
the several cases with each other, and to associate together such 
as are alike, or nearly so. 

104. Nouns in um are declined by adding to tlie root 
tlie following 

NEUTER CASE-ENDINGS. 





Nom. 


Gen. 


Bat. 


Accus. 


Voc. 


Ahl. 


Sing. 


um, 


h 


o, 


um, , 


um. 


o, 


Plur. 


a, 


orum, 


IS, 


a. 


a, 


Is. 



PARADIGM. 


Singular. 


Flural 


Nom. Regn-um, a kingdom. 


Nom. Regn-a, kingdoms. 


Gen. Regn-I, of a kingdom. 


Gen. Regn-orum, of kingdoms. 


Dat. Regn-o, to, for a kingdom. 


Dat. Regn-Is, to, for kingdoms. 


Ace. Regn-um, a kingdom. 


Ace. Regn-a, kingdoms. 


Voe. Regn-um, O kingdom. 


Voc. Regn-a, kingdoms. 


Abl. Regn-o,/ro77i, hy a kingdom. 


Abl. Regn-Is,/ro7n, hy kingdoms. 



Rem. 1. — In neuters of all declensions, the warn., ace, and voc. are alike 
in each number, and in the plural end id a, as in the paradigm 
just givea 

Rem. 2. — Neuters in um are declined hke mascuhnes in us of this 
declension, except in the cases just mentioned (nam., ace, and voc). 
Compare paradigms. 



105, 106.] NOUNS.— SECOND DECLENSION. 45 

105. YOCABULARY. 
Agnus, 1, lamb. 

Disclpiilus, I, pupil (disciple), 

Dominiis, i, master, as owner (domineer), 

Gerere, \ ^^ "^''y «"' 

( to wage (as war). 

Haediis, T, kid. 

Lupus, 1, . wolf. 

Magister, tri, master, as teacher (magisterial), 

106. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Caius Balbum docebat. 2. Balbus Caium 
docebat. 3. Servus dominum occidet. 4. Servi domi- 
nos timent. 5. Balbns filios laudabit. 6. Servus do- 
mini filios timet. 7. Servi dominorum filios timebunt. 

8. Puellae dolorem sentiebant. 9. Servi muros aedi- 
ficabunt. 10. Pastor filiis canem dabit. 11. Pastor 
filiabus""^ baedum dabit. 

(b) 1. Balbus will instruct the slave. 2. Cains "will 
punish the pupil. 8. They will instruct (their) pupils. 
4. The slaves will .fear Balbus. 5. The master was 
punishing (his) slaves. 6. Caius will kill the wolf. 7. 
Wolves will kill lambs. 8. The wolves do not see (see 
not) the kids. 

9. Caius was waging war. 10. They are waging 
wars. 11. Balbus will fight. 12. The sons of Balbus 
will fight. 13. The master is teaching the boys. 14. 
The master is teaching his pupils in the garden. 15. 
The girls were walking in the garden. 16. He was 
playing in the meadow. 17. They will play in the 
fields. 18. The slaves were reading (their) master's 
letters. 

* Filia has the dative and ablative plur. in abus, to distinguish it 
from the same cases oifllius. 



46 



FIKST LATIIS BOOK. 



[107, 108. 



LESSON XIX. 

Nouns. — Second Declension, continued, — Nouns in 

er and ir. 
107. Nouns in er and ir^ of tlie second declension, 
have the nominative and vocative singular ahke, and in 
all the other cases are declined like serviis (103), with 
the single exception that most nouns in er drop e in 
the root. 

PARADIGMS. 



1. Gener, a son-in-law : root, gener (e not dropped). 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. Gener, a son-in-law. 


Nom. Gener-I, sons-in-laiv. 


Gen. Gener-I, of son-in-law. 


Gen. Gener-orum, of sons-in-law. 


Dat. Gener-o, to son^in-laio. 


Dat. Gener-Is, ^o sons-in-law. 


Ace. Gener-um, son-in-law. 


Ace. Gener-os, sons-in-law. 


Voc. Gener, son-in-law. 


Voc. Gener-I, sons-in-law. 


Abl. Gener-o, /rom son-in-law. 


Abl. Gener-is,/rom sons-in-law. 


2. Ager, a field : root, agr (e dropped). 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. Ager, afield. 


Nom. Agr-i, fields. 


,Gen. Agr-I, of a field. 


Gen. Agr-orum, of fields. 


Dat. Agr-o, to afield. 


Dat. Agr-Is, to fields. 


Ace. Agi*-um, afield. 


Ace. Agi--os, ^gZ^Zs. 


Voc. Ager, field. 


Voc. Agr-I, O^ZfZs. 


Abl. AgY-o,from afield. 


Abl. AgY-is, from fields. 



2^^* Vir (a maw) and its compounds are the only nouns in ir, and 
are declined like gener. 

108. Vocabulary. 



Armiger, I, 


armor-bearer. 


Dil^gentia, ae, 


diligence. 


Gener, I, 


son-in-law. 


Liber, libri, 


book. 


Vulp6s.is,/. 


fox. 



109—111.] ADJECTIVES. 47 

109. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Paer in agro ludit. 2. Pueri in agris Inde- 
bant. 3. Magister pueros docebit. 4. Magistri disci- 
piilos docebnnt. 5. Magister pueris libros dabit. 6. 
Armigeriim occidebant. 

7. Pater diligentiam (64, h) filiorum laudabat. 8. 
Reginae filia in luco ambnlabat. 9. Lusciniae in lucis 
cantant. 10. Magistri legem non negligent. 11. Pueri 
vnlpem non Occident. 

(&) 1. The boy was running in the fields. 2. The 
boys will run in the fields. 3. The boys saw the mas- 
ter's book. 4. The pupils will give the master a book 
(a book to the master). 5. They will give books to 
(their) masters. 6. He will punish the armor-bearer. 
7. He will accuse (his) son-in-law. 8. They will accuse 
(their) sons-in-law. 

9. The master was praising (his) pupils. 10. The 
master was praising the diligence of (his) pupils. 11. 
The pupils do not hear the master. 12. The slaves 
will shut the gates of the city. 13. The boys were 
reading in the garden. 14. The girls are reading in 
the meadow. 



LESSON XX. 

Adjectives of the First and Second Declension, 

110. The Adjective is that part of speech which is 
used to qualify substantives ; as, honHs^ good ; mdgniis, 
great. 

111. The form of the adjective often depends, in 
part, upon the gender of the noun which it qualifies ; 



48 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [112, 113. 

e. g., Bonz75 puer, a good hoy ; BonSpnella, a good girl; 
and 'Bonum regnum, a good kingdom. Thns, bonus is 
the form of the adjective when used with onasc, nouns, 
bond withye7?2., and bonum with neuter. 

112. These three forms of the adjective are declined 
like nouns of the same endings. Thus, the masculine 
is declined like servus (103), and is accordingly of the 
second declension ; the feminine like musd (97), and is 
of the first declension; and the neuter like regnum 
(104), and is of the second declension. 

PARADIGM. 





Bonus, good. 








SINGULAR. 






3Iasc. 


Fern. 


JSfeut 


Nom. 


Bon-US, 


bon-a. 


bon-um. 


Gen. 


Bon-i, 


bon-ae, 


bon-I. 


Dat. 


Bon-o, 


bon-a e, 


bon-o. 


Ace. 


Bon-um, 


bon-am. 


bon-um. 


Voc. 


Bon-e, 


bon-a, 


bon-um. 


Abl. 


Bon-o, 


bon-a, 

PLURAL. 


bon-o. 


Nom. 


B6n-I, 


bon-ae, 


bon-a. 


Gen. 


Bon-orum, 


bon-arum. 


bon-orum. 


Dat. 


Bon-ls, 


bon-ls, 


bon-ls. 


Ace. 


Bon-OS, 


bon-as, 


bon-a. 


Voc. 


Bon-I, 


bon-ae, 


bon-a. 


Abl. 


B6n-ls, 


bon-ls, 


bon-ls. 



Rem. — Adjectives like the above are called adjectives of the First 
and Second Declension, because they are declined like nouns of 
these declensions ; the masc. and neut. being declined like nouns 
of the second declension, and the fern, like those of the first. 

113. Some adjectives of this declension have the 
nom, and voc. sing, in er, like noims in er of the second 
declension. These, in all their other forms, are de- 



113.] 



ADJECTIVES. 



49 



clined like honus in the Paradigm above, witli tlie ex- 
ception, that most of them drop e before r of the root in 
all genders. 

PARADIGMS. 



1. Tener, tender : 


root, tener (e 


not dropped). 






SINGULAR. 






Masc, 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


Tener, 


tener-a, 


tener- Hm. 


Gen. 


Tener-i, 


tener-ae. 


tener-i. 


Dat. 


Tener-o, 


tener-ae. 


tener-o. 


Ace. 


Tener-iim, 


tener-am, 


tener-iim. 


Voc. 


Tener, 


tener-a. 


tener-iim. 


Abl. 


Tener-o, 


tener-a, 

PLURAL. 


tener-o. 


Nom. 


Tener-I, 


tener-ae, 


tener-a. 


Gen. 


Tener-orum, 


tener-arum. 


tener-orum. 


Dat. 


Tener-Is, 


tener-ls. 


tener-is. 


Ace. 


Tener-os, 


tener-as, 


tener-a. 


Voc. 


Tener-I, 


tener-ae. 


tener-a. 


Abl. 


Tener-ls, 


tener-ls. 


tener-ls. 


2. 


Aeger, sick 


: root, aegr (e dropped). 






SINGULAR. 






Masc. 


Fern. 


ITeut 


Nom. 


Aeger, 


aegr-a. 


aegr-iim. 


Gen. 


Aegr-i, 


aegr-ae. 


aegr-i. 


Dat. 


Aegr-o, 


aegr-ae. 


aegr-6. 


Ace. 


Aegr-um, 


aegr- am. 


aegr-um. 


Voc. 


Aeger, 


aegi--a, 


aegr-um. 


Abl. 


Aegr-o, 


aegi'-a, 

PLURAL. 


aegr-o. 


Nom. 


Aegr-T, 


aegr-ae, 


aegr-a. 


Gen. 


Aegr-ordm, 


aegr-ariim, 


aegr-orum. 


Dat. 


Aegr-Is, 


aegr-ls, 


aegr-is. 


Ace. 


Aegr-os, 


aegr-as. 


aegr-a. 


Voc. 


Aegr-I, 


aegr-ae. 


aegr-a. 


Abl. 


Aegr-ls, 


aegr-ls. 


aegr-ls. 



50 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[114, 115. 



Rem. — The following adjectives have the genitive singular in lus (the 
i is generally short in alteritcs), and the dative singular in 2 in all 
genders, Adz. : alius, another ; nuUus, no one ; soluSj alone ; totusj 
the whole ; ullus, any ; unua, one ; alter, the other ; neuter, nei- 
ther ; and uter, wliich (of the two). 

114. EuLE OF Syntax. — Adjectives agree with the 
nouns which they quahfy, in gender^ nwiiJber^ and 
case ; e. g., 

Mater hondm f iham laudat. 
{The mother {her) good daughter praises). 
The mother praises her good daughter. 

Bem. 1. — The adjective hondm is in ih.Q feminine accusative singuvar^ 

to agree with its nomifiliam. 
Rem. 2. — The position of the adjective seems to depend principally 
upon emphasis ; and accordingly the adjective precedes or follows 
its noun, according as it is or is not emphatic. In the example, 
hondm is emphatic. 
Rem. 3. — Mens, my ; tuus, your (or thy) ; suus, his, her, ckc, though call- 
ed adjective pronouns (273 and 295), are in declension and agi'ee- 
ment really adjectives. They usually follow their nouns : e.g., 
Miiher ancillam suam excitat. 
(The looman maid her awakens) 
The woman awakens her maid. 



115. Yocabulary. 






Benlgnus, a, urn, 


kind 


(benigri). 


Bonus, a, um, 


good. 




Magnus, a, um, 


large, great 


(magnitude). 


Meus,* a, Tim, 


my. 




Pulcher, chra, chrum, 


beautiful. 




Sepelire, 


to bury. 




Studiosus, a, iim, 


studious. 




Suus,f a, um, 


his, her, its, theu*. 




Tuus, a, um, 


your, thy. 





* Voc. sing. masc. is ml. 

t The meaning of this word depends in part upon the gender and 
number of the subject of the proposition in which it is used. Thus, in the 



116, 117.] ADJECTIVES. 51 

116. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Eegiria pneros laudabat. 2. Eegina pueros 
bonos laudabat. 3. Pater filiuni siiimi^ docebat. 4. 
Mater filias suas amabit. 5. Bona mater filias suas 
amabit. 

6. Magister piieros docebit. 7. Bonus magister stu- 
diosos pueros docebit. 8. Agricolae angueni non 
timebunt. 9. Caius bonam legem non negiiget. 10. 
Christiani legem bonam non negligunt. 11. Pater 
mens in prato ambiilat. 

(6) 1. The father was burying his^- son. 2. They are 
burying ^AaV* sons. 8. My friend does not hear my 
voice. 4. The daughters love (their) kind mother. 5. 
The mother will instruct her beautiful daughters. 

6. Caius disregards the law. 7. They disregard the 
good laws. 8. The boys are killing your dog. 9. Good 
boys will not kill dogs. 10. Your dog will kill the 
wolf. 11. Dogs will kill large wolves. 



LESSON XXI. 



Adjectives of the First and Second Declension^ continiced. 

117. The noun which the adjective qualifies is often 
omitted in Latin ; and then in translating into English 
the word man must be supplied, if the adjective is 
masc. sing. ; woman^ if fern. sing. ; and tiling, if neuter 
sing. ; e. g., 



above example (Mulier ancillam suam excitat), sumn means her, because 
the subject mutier is fern. sing. ; with a masculine subject it would mean 
his, and with a plural subject, their, &Q. 



52 FIRST LATIX BOOK. [118 — 120. 

Avariis pecuiiiam amat. 
{The avaricious {man) money loves.) 
The avaricious man loves money. 

Kem. — x\fter a plui*. adjec. tlie noun is sometimes expressed and 
sometimes omitted in the Eng. translation ; thus, avarl may be 
translated avaricious men, or sunply the avaricious. 

118. When a noun is limited by a genitive, one or 
both nouns may be qualified by an adjective ; e. g., 

1. Magna regis corona. 

{The great of the king croion,) 
The king's great crown. 

2. Magna boni regis corona. 

{The great of the good king crown.) 
The good king's great crown. 

119. YOCABULARY. 

Aureus, a, um, golden. 

Avar^tia, ae, avarice. 

Avariis, a, um, avaricious. 

Impiiis, a, iim, impious. 

Iiidoctus, a, um, unlearned. 

Lab5r, oris, m. labor. 

. Poeta, ae, m. poet. 

Sapientia, ae, \\dsdom. 

Vindlcare, to avenge. 

120. Exercises. 

{a) 1. Auream regis coronam videbant. 2. Ser\d 
magnam regis coronam videbunt. 3. Balbi domum 
evertent. 4. Impii domum evertebant. 5. Indoctus 
sapientiam laudabat. 

6. Magnum boni regis sceptrum timebunt. 7. AmTci 
sapientiam tuam laudant. 8. Christiani avaritiam vita- 
bunt. 9. Mater bonas filias laudabat. 

ih) 1. He disregards his slave's labor. 2. He disre- 



121, 122.] KOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 53 

gards his slave's great labor. 3. The beautiful daugh- 
ters of the queen will dance. 4. The poet was holding 
the beautiful crown. 5. The poet was holding the good 
queen's beautiful crown. 6. The good (man) will not 
disregard the law. 7. The poet will laugh aV the un- 
learned (man). 8. The good will not fear death. 

9. They will avenge the death of iheir father. 10. 
They were avenging the death of the good (woman). 
11. The impious (man) will fear death. 12. The poet 
will build a beautiful house. 



LESSON XXII. 



Nouns and Adjectives, — First and Second Declension^ 
continued, — Price^ Value^ and Degree of Estimation, 

121. The predicate of a proposition may be modified 
by a noun or adjective denoting price^ value^ or degree 
of estimation ; e. g., 

1. Avariis patriam auro vendet. 

{The avaricious (man) (his) country for gold will sell.) 
The avaricious man will sell his country for gold. 

2. Avariis pecHniam magni aestimat. 

{The avaricious {man) money at a great {price) values.) 
The avaricious man values money at a great price 
{or highly). 

122. KuLE OF Syntax. — Price, when expressed by 
nouns, is generally put in the ablative, and when ex- 
pressed by adjectives, generally in the genitive. 

E.EM. 1. — The genitive of a few nouns and the ablative of a few adjec- 
tives sometimes occur in expressions of price and value. 

Rem. 2. — In example 1. the noim auro is in the ablative, and in ex- 
ample 2. the adjective magni is in the genitive, by the above rule. 



54 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[123, 124. 



123. Vocabulary. 



Aestimare, 
Aurum, i, 


to value 
gold. 


{estimate). 


Magnl, 

Magnl aestimare. 


< at a great price, 
f at a high price. 
i to prize highly, 
( to think highly of. 




Parvl, 

Parvl aestimare, 


J at a little price, 
( at a low price, 
to think little of. 




Patria, ae, 
Prodltor, oris, 
Vendere, 


native country 

traitor. 

to sell 


(patriotic), 
(vend). 


Verus, a, um. 
Virtus, utis, /. 


true, real, 
virtue. 

124. Exercises, 





(a) 1. Impius patriam aiiro vendebat. 2. Proaitor 
patriam ^arz;z^ aestimabit. 3. Caius amici sui laborem 
parvi aestimat. 4. Boni virtutem magni'^ aestimant. 

5. Eex servum magni aestimabit. 6. Eegina auream 
coronam magni aestimat. 7. Magnam urbis portam 
claudent. 8. Dominus servi sui epistolas aperiet. 9. 
Servus pueros vocabit. 

(b) 1. The traitor will sell (liis) country for gold. 
2. Cains values true virtue at a great {price).^ 3. The 
master thinks little^ of^ the labor of his slave. 

4. The poet will feel real sorrow. 6. A father wdll 
not disregard the sorrow of his son. 6. The avaricious 
(man) will value virtue at a loio [price),^ 7. The avari- 
cious value money at a high (price).^ 8. Christians 
think little^ of^ money. 



125. 126.] jsrouNS. — vhird BECLENSioisr. 55 

LESSON XXIIL 

-Nouns, — Third Declension, — Class I. 

125. To the Third Declension belong all nouns wliich 
have the genitive singular in is. They end in a, e, ^, 
o, y, c, Z, n, r, 5, ifj x^ and may be divided into four 
classes : 

1) Those which have the root the same ai the 
nominative singular (except, in a few in- 
stances, the omission or change of the radical 
vowel) : as, mulier,^ a woman ; root, mulier, 

2) Those which form the root by adding a single 
letter to the nominative singular: as, leo^ a 
lion; root, leon, 

8) Those which form the root by dropping the 

ending of the nominative singular : as, urhs^ 

a city ; root, urh. 
4) Those which form the root by changing the 

ending of the nominative singular : as, joietds, 

piety ; root, pietdt 

126, Class L — This class comprises nouns in c,"^ Z, n, 
?', t^ and y. These either have the root the same as the 
nominative singular, or form it (with a few exceptions) 
by one of the following slight vowel changes : 

1) Nouns in ter and ber generally drop e in the 
root : as, pdter^ a father ; root, patr. 

2) Nouns in en generally change e into i in the 
root : as, flumen^ a river ; root, flumm, 

3) Nouns in ut change u into ? in the root: as, 
cdput^ a head; root, cdpit 



* There are only two nouns witii tliis ending, one of which belongs 
to Class 11. 



56 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[127, 128. 



Rem. — The quantity of the radical vowel is sometimes changed ; this 
is the case in most nouns in cd and or, which generally lengthen 
the vowel in the root. 

127. Neuter nouns of this declension have the nomi- 
native, accusative, and vocative singular alike, and are 
declined in the other cases by adding to the root the 
following 

CASE-ENDINGS. 



Nom. Gen. Bat Accus. Voc, Ahl. 

Sing. —is, 1, — — . e (l). 

Plur. a (ia), um (ium), ibus, a (ia), a (ia), ibus. 



Rem. — The inclosed endiags belong only to neuters in e, al, and ar. 

PARADIGMS. 



1. Caput, n. 


a head. 


2. Animal, n., an animal. 


(root, capit [126, 3].) 


(root, same as nom.^ [126].) 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


Nom. Caput, 


Capit-a. 


Nom. Animal, An!mal-ia. 


Gen. Capit-is, 


Cap!t-um. 


Gen. Anlmal-is, An^mal-iCim. 


Dat. Cap:t-I, 


Capit-ibus. 


Dat. An^mal-T, An!mal-ibus. 


Ace. Caput, 


Cap^t-a. 


Ace. An:mal, Animal-ia. 


Voc. Caput, 


Caplt-a. 


Voc. Animal, An^mal-ia. 


Abl. CapTt-e, 


Caplt-ibus. 


Abl. Animal-T, Airmal-ibiis. 



128. Masculine and feminine nouns of this declen- 
sion are declined, in all the cases except the nominative 
and vocative singular (which are alike), by adding to the 
root the following 



CASE-ENDINGS. 



Nom. 


Gen. 


Dat, 


A ecus. 


Voc. 


Ahl. 


Sing. — 


IS, 


T, 


em (Im), 


— 


e(l). 


Plur. es. 


um (ium), 


ibus, 


es, 


es, 


ibiis. 



* With the radical vowel lengthened (126, Rem.). 



129.] 



NOUNS. — THIRD DECLENSION. 



57 



Rem. — The inclosed endings (except that of the genitive plural, which 
will be noticed again, 141) belong only to a few words. 



PARADIGMS. 



r 



1. Labor, m.^ labor. 

(root, same as 7iom.^ [126].) 
Singular. Plural. 
Nom. Labor, Labor-es. 
Gen. Labor-is, Labor-um. 
Dat. Labor-T, Labor-.biis. 
Ace. Labor-em, Labor-es. 



Voc. Labor, 
Abl. Labor-e, 



Labor-es. 
Labor-ibus. 



3. Pater, a father, 
{root, pair [126, 1].) 



Singular. 
Nom. Pater, 
Gen. Patr-is, 
Dat. Patr-I, 
Ace. Patr-em, 
Voc. Pater, 
Abl. Patr-e, 



Plural. 
Patr-e s. 
Patr-um. 
Patr-ibiis. 
Patr-e s. 
.Patr-e s. 
Patr-ibus. 



Singular. 
Nom. Prater, 
Gen. Fratr-18, 
Dat. Fratr-I, 
Ace. Fratr-em, 
Voc. Frater, 
Abl. Fratr-e, 



Plural. 
Fratr-e s. 
Fratr-um. 
Fratr-ibus. 
Fratr-es. 
Fratr-e s. 
Fratr-lbus. 



* With the radical vowel lengthened (126, Rem.). 

3* 



2. Miilier,/, a woman. 

(ro«t, same as nom. [126].) 
Singular. Plural. 
Nom. Mulier, Mfilier-es. 
Gen. Mulier-is, Mulier- um. 
Dat. Mulier-I, Mulier-i^us, 
Ace. Mulier-em, Mulier-es. 
Voc. Mulier, Mulier-es. 
Abl. Mulier-e, Mulier-Ibus. 

4. Frater, a brother. 

{root, fratr [126, 1].) 



129. YOCABULARY. 




Brutus, T, 


Brutus, a Roman consul. 


Caecus, a, iim, 


blind. 


Consul, IS, 


consul, Roman chief magistrate. 


Finire, 


to finish. 


Frater, tris. 


brother. 


Luc ere, 


to shine. 


Mulier, eris. 


woman. 


Senator, oris, 


senator. 


Siren, is, /. 


siren. 


Scl, IS, m. 


sun. 


Soror, 6r"^s, 


sister. 



58 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [130, 131. 

130. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Agricola laborem finiebat. 2. Mulier sorores 
accasabit. 3. Brutum consulem occidebat. 4. Sena- 
tores Caesarem occidebant. 

5. Bonus pner caput aperiet. 6. Servi capita aperie- 
bant. 7. Sirenes cantabant. 8. Sol lucebat. 9. Caeci 
solem non yident. 10. Pastores aurum magni aestimant. 

(h) 1. The boy accuses bis brother. 2. They accuse 
their brothers. 3. The consuls were waging war. 4. 
The senators fear the consal. 5. The consuls fear the 
senators. 6. The shepherd values his dog at a high 
(price).^ 7. They will finish their labor. 

8. They fear the sirens. 9. Good boys uncover their 
heads. 10. The blind boy does not see the sun. 11. 
The blind do not see the sun. 12. The good woman 
loves (her) beautiful daughters. 13. Good daughters 
love their mothers. 14. Good mothers instruct their 
daughters. 



LESSON XXIY. 
Nouns, — Third Declension. — Class II. 
131. Class II. comprises nouns of the third declen- 
sion in a, (9, and a few in i. These form the root by 
adding a letter to the nominative singular. 

1) ISToims in a, and a few in i^ add t: as, poemd,^ 
a poem; too% poeindt : hyclromeli, mesid ] root, 
hydromelit 

2) Nouns in o add n: as, feo, a lion; root, Icon. 

Rem. 1. — is long in the root. 

Rem. 2. — Nouns in do and go change o into i, before 7i in the root : 
as, virgo, a virgin ; root, virgin. 



132.] 



NOUNS. — THIRD DECLENSION. 



59 



PARADIGMS. 



1. Poema, n,, a poem: 


root, poemdt (13 1, 1). 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Poema, 


N. Poemat-a. 


G. Poemat-is, 


G. Poemat-um. 


D. Poemat-I, 


D. Poemat-ibus, or is.* 


A. Poema, 


A. Poemat-a. 


V. Poema, 


V. Poemat-a. 


A, Poemat-e, 


A. Poemat-ibus, or i3.* 


2. Sermo, m., a discourse. 


3, Yirgo, /, a virgin. 


(root, sermon [131, 2].) 


(root, virgin [131, 2. Rem. 2].) 


Singular. Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


N. Sermo, Sermon-es. 


N. Virgo, Virgln-es. 


G. Sermon-Ts, Sermon-um. 


G. Virg'n-is, Virgm-um. 


D. Sermon-I, Sermon-ibus. 


D. Virgin-I, Virgin-ibus. 


A. Sermon-em, Sermon-es. 


A. Virg:n-em, VirgTn-es. 


v. Sermo, Sermon-es. 


V. Virgo, VirgTn-es. 


A. Sermon-e, Serm6n-:bas. 


A. Virg^n-e, Virg^n-ibus. 



132. Vocabulary. 



AccTplter, tris, m. 


hawk. 




Homo, inis. 


man. 




Optio, onis,^ 


choice 


(optional) 


Oratio, onis,/. 


oration. 




Orator, oris, 


orator. 




Pavo, onis, m. 


peacock. 




Poema, tis, n. 


poem. 




Sermo, onis, m. 


discourse 


(sermon). 


Timld-us, a, um, 


timid. 




Virgo, inis, 


maiden, virgin 


(virgin). 



* ITouns in a generally take the ending Is instead of ihus in the dat. 
and abl. pluraL 



60 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [133, 134, 

133. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Pater tuns poemata legebat. 2. Poeta sermo- 
nem tuum laudabit. 3. Timidae piiellae pavonem 
timent. 4. Virgines liomini yiam monstrabunt. 

5. Bonus puer fratri optionem dabit. 6. Pueri homi- 
nes timent. 7. Indocti sapientiam parz;i ^ aestimabunt. 
8. Puellae sorores suas amant. 

(h) 1. My brother is reading your discourse. 2. The 
boys will kill the peacock. 3. They will kill the bea i- 
tiful peacocks. 4. Your mother is reading the pcem. 
5. The girls are reading poems. 6. The doves fear the 
hawk. 7. The hawk will kill your dove. 

8. The hawks will kill the beautiful doves. 9. Mo- 
thers feel real sorrow. 10. The unlearned will laugh at ' 
the orator. 11. The poet will hear the oration. 12. 
The learned prize wisdom highly,^ 13. The avaricioui 
think little ^ of wisdom. 



LESSON XXV. 

Nouns, — Third Declension, — Class III. 
134. Class III. comprises nouns of the third daoJ^j 
sion in hs^ ms^ ps^ x {= cs or gs)^ is^ ys, e, r, few in i,"^ an</ 
a few in es. They form the root by dropping th© 
nominative ending. 

1) Nouns in hs, ms, ps^ and ys^^ c'-t'cp s: as, urbs^ a 
city; root, urh ; Mems^ wir..i;cr; root, Mem, 

2) Nouns in x (= cs or gs) drop the s inx: as, 
vox {cs\ a voice ; root, voc ; rex (gs)^ a king ; 
root, reg, 

* Nouns in i are of Greek origin : most of these are indeclinable ; a 
few form the root by dropping i, and a few by adding ^ (131, 1). 



134.] 



NOUNS. — THIED DECLENSION. 



61 



3) Nouns in ^5, e, and a few in es^ drop those 
endings ; as, hostis^ an enemy ; root, host: 
7iubeSj a cloud ; root, nub : nidre^ a sea ; root, 
mar. 



PARADIGMS. 



1. Urbs, /, a city. 


2. Mare, 72., a sea. 


(root, urh [134, 1].) 


(root, mar [134, 3}) 


Singular. Plural. 


Singular. Plural, 


N. Urb-s, Urb-es. 


N. Mar-e, Mar-ia.f 


G. Urb-is, Urb-ium.* 


G. Mar-is, Mar-iiim.f 


D. Urb-i, Urb-ibiis. 


D. Mar-i, Mar-ibiis. 


A. Urb-em, Urb-es. 


A. Mar-e, Mar-ia. 


V. Urb-s, Urb-es. 


V. Mar-e, Mar-ia. 


A. Urb-e, Urb-ibus. 


A. Mar-i,f Mar-ibus. 


3. Arx (cs), /, a citadel. 


4. Eex (gs), m., a hing. 


(root, arc [134, 2].) 


(root, reg [134, 2].) 


Singular. Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


N. Arx, Arc-es. 


N. Rex, Reg-es. 


G. Arc-is, Arc-ium.* 


G. Reg-is, Reg-um. 


.D. Arc-i, Arc-ibus. 


D. Reg-I, Reg-ibus. 


A. Arc-em, Arc-es. 


A. Reg-em, Reg-es. 


V. Arx, Arc-es. 


V. Rex, Reg-es. 


A. Arc-e, Arc-ibus. 


A. Reg-e, Reg-lb us. 


5. Hostis, c, an enemy. 


6. Nubes,/, a cloud. 


(root, lio8t [134, 3].) 


(root, nuh [134, 3].) 


Singular. Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


N. Host-iS, Host^es. 


N.. Nub-es, Nub-es. 


G. Host-is, Host-iiim. 


G. Nub-is, Nub-inm. 


D. Host-I, Host-ibus. 


D. Nub-i, Nub-ibus. 


A. Host-em, Host-es. 


A. Nnb-em, Nub-es. 


V. Host-is, Host-es. 


V. Nub-es, Nub-es. 


A. Host-e, Host-"bus. 


A. Nub-e, Nub- -bus. 



Monosyllables in s or a:, preceded by a consonant, have ium in the 
genitive plural. See 141, 3. 
+ See 12t 



62 



riKST LATIN BOOK. 



[135, 136. 



185. YOCABULAKY. 



Arx, arcls, /. 




citadel, tower. 




Civis, IS, m, and 


■/. 


citizen 


(civil). 


Friitex, icis, m. 




shrub. 




Grex, egis, m. 




flock, herd 


{gregarious), 


Hostis, IS, m. an 


td/. 


enemy 


(hostile). 


Judex, icis, 




judge 


(judi: ial). 


Pax, pacis, /. 




peace 


(pacific). 


Reus, I, 




criminal. 




Servare, 




to keep, observe 


(serve). 


Violare, 




to violate. 
136. Exercises, 





(a) 1. Caius leges violabit. 2. Eegina urbem con- 
debat. 3. Pueri magnam urbis portam claudunt. 4. 
Pastores arcem condent. 5. Kens judicis yocem 
timet. 

6. Gives regem accnsabant. 7. Consiiles liostes 
Yincebant. 8. Pastor gregem magni^ aestimat. 9. 
Boni cives pacem magni aestimant. 10. Filii patrem 
vindicabunt. 11. Servus fruticem in horto reperiebat. 
12. Impii patriam aiiro vendunt. 13. Eei judicis vocem 
timebunt. 14. Proditor patriam ]parvi ^ aestimat. 15. 
Proditores patriam parvi aestimabunt. 16. Agricola 
laborem finiebat. 

(6) 1. The boys will not observe the law. 2. Good 
citizens observe the laws. 3. They will guard the city. 
4. Soldiers will guard the cities. 5. They accuse the 
judge. 6. The criminals will accuse their judges. 7. 
The king is violating the law. 

8. Slaves fear their masters. 9. Slaves fear the 
voices of their masters. 10. The king will conquer 
the enemy {pi.). 11. The shepherd will guard his flock. 
12. Shepherds guard their flocks. 13. The poet will 



137.] NOUKS. — THTKD DECLENSION. 63 

praise the judge. 14. They praise the judges. 15. 
Christians will observe the laws of the city. 16. He 
does not observe the laws of the city. 17. Grood citi- 
zens will not violate the laws. 18. The boy is accus- 
ing his sister. 19. They are accusing their fathers. 
20. Traitors will sell their country for gold. 21. They 
think little ^ of ^ virtue. 22. They prize money highly, * 



LESSON XXYI. 

Nouns. — Third Declension. — Class IV. 
137. Class TV. comprises nouns of the third de- 
clension in as^ OS J us^ Is^ ns, rs, and most of those 
in es. These form the root by changing s into r, t, 
or d. 

1) Nouns in as^ Is^ ns^ rs, and most of those in 65, 
generally change s into t: as, pietds^ pi^ty; 
root, pietdt: mons^ a mountain; root, mont: 
abies^ a fir-tree ; root, abiet : miles, a soldier ; 
root, milit. (See Eem. 2, below.) 

Rem. 1. — Masculines in a.s, of Greek origin, insert n before t in the 

root : as, elephds, an elephant ; root, elephant. 
Rem. 2. — Many nouns in es change e into i, before t, in the root : as, 

miles; root, mllit. 

2) Nouns in os and us generally change 5 into r or 
t: SiSjJids, a flower; root, j^or; 5acerrfo5, a priest ; 
root, sdcerdot : virtus, virtue; root, virtut : 
genus, a kind ; root, gener : tempus, time ; root, 
tempor. 

Rem. — Most nouns in us change s into r, and u of the nominative be- 
comes e or o in the root, as in these examples. 



64 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[138 



PARADIGMS. 



1. Civitas, 


yi, a state. 


2. Ars, 


/., art. 


(root, civitat[nl, 1].) 


(root, art 


[137,1].) 


Singular. 


Plural 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Civitas, 


Civitat-es. 


N. Ars, 


Art-es. 


G. CivitaWs, 


Civitat-um. 


G. Art-is, 


Art-ium. 


D. Civitat-i, 


Civitat-ibus. 


D. Art-I, 


Art-ibiis. 


A. Civitat-em, 


CiVitat-es. 


A. Art-em, 


Art-es. 


V. CiVitas, 


Civltat-es. 


V. Ars, 


Art-es. 


A. Civitat-e, 


Civitat-ibus. 


A. Art-e, 


Art-ibus. 


3. Miles, c 


, a soldier. 


4. Corpus, 


?2., a hody. 


(root, milit [137, 1, Rem. 2].) 


(root, corpbr [137, 2].) 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Miles, 


Mllit-es. 


N. Corpus, 


Corp6r-a. 


G. Mil:t-is, 


Mllit-iim. 


G. Corp6r-is, 


Corp6r-um. 


D. Mil;t-i, 


Mil:t-ibus. 


D. Corp6r-l, 


Corpor-ibus. 


A. Milt-em, 


Mlllt-es. 


A. Corpus, 


Corp6r-a. 


V. Miles, 


Mll:t-es. 


V. Corpus, 


Corp6r-a. 


A. Mllit-e, 


Mil t-ibus. 


A. Corp6r-e, 


Corp6r-7bus. 



138. The Latin, like every other language, has 
certain forms of expression peculiar to itself, called 
Idioms:^ e. g., 

y something of time {Lat. Idiom). 

\ some time (Eng. Idiom). 

much of good {Lat. Idiom). 

much good (Eng. Idiom). 



All quid f temporls, 



Multumf boni. 
Quantum f voluptatis. 
Nihil stabilitatis. 



J how much of pleasure {Lat Idiom). 
f how much pleasure 



\ 



(Eng. Idiom). 
nothing of stability (Lat. Idiom). 
no stability {Eng. Idio7n). 

Rem. — These (f ) are neuter adjectives used as nouns ; they govern 
the genitive by the rule already given (65). 

^ These should be carefully compared with the corresponding English. 
A table presenting the Differences of Idiom between the Latin and Eng- 
lish is inserted in this volume for the benefit of the learner. See p. 275. 



, 140.] NOUKS. — THIED DECLENSION. 


39. Vocabulary. 






Aliqmd, 


something. 




Amittere, 


to lose. 




Avarltia, ae, 


avarice. 




Ci vitas, atis,/. 


state. 




Corpus, oris, n. 


body 


i (corporal). 
( (corporeal). 


Elephas, antis, m. 


elephant. 




Figtira, ae, 


figure. 




Habere, 


to have. 




Improbus, a, urn, 


bad, wicked. 




Multiim (neut adj.)^ 


much. 




Multum boni. 


much good. 




Multiim temporis, 


much time. 




Nihil (indec), 


nothing. 




Perdere, 


to waste 


(perdition). 


Quantum (neut. adj.), 


how much ? 




Sacerdos, otis, m. and/ 


priest, priestess. 




Stab:lltas, atis,/. 


firmness, stability (stability). 


Tempus, oris, n. 


time. 




Voluptas, atis,/ 


pleasure 


(voluptuous), 


140. 


JExercises. 





65 



(a) 1. Ayaritia nihil habet voluntatis. ^ 2. Multnm 
iemporis perdebat. 3. Figtira nihil habet stahilitdtis. 
4. Improbi leges civitatis violabunt. 5. Servus ele- 
phantis corpus puero monstrabat. 

6. Improbi virtutem parvi^ aestimant. 7. Milites 
urbem cnstodient. 8. Sacerdotes bonam legem non 
violabunt. 9. Discipiili multum temporis perdunt. 10. 
Indocti m^ultum voluptdtis amittunt. 

(h) 1. The boy will waste much time.* 2. They will 
lose much pleasure. 3. The state will observe its laws. 
4. The soldiers are violating the laws of the state. 5. 
The king will punish the soldiers. 



66 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [141, 142. 

6. The priests were praising the queen. 7. The good 
queen will praise the priests. 8. The soldiers will fear 
the enemy. 9. The good value wisdom highly,'^ 10. 
He will laugh at^ the unlearned. 11. He is losing 
inuch time, 12. The unlearned lose much ]pleasure. 



LESSON XXVII. 



Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued, — Genitives in 
iiim. — Gender, 

141. It has already been mentioned (128, Eem.) that 
some nouns of the third declension have the genitive 
^>"»7^yiD,^ in iivm instead of Hm, These are, 

L) Neuters in e, a\ and ar : as, mdre, mdriUm ; 
dniindl^ dnwidliviin, 

2) Nouns in is and es of Class III. : as, hostts, 
hostium ; nuhes^ fiubiUm, 

3) All monosyllables in 5 or cc preceded by a 
consonant: as, urbs^ urhiUnn ; arx^ arciHra, 

4) Nouns in ns and rs (though in these um is 
sometimes used) : as, cliens^ clientiura ; cohors^ 
cohortmm. 

Rem. — The use of ium in words not included in the above classes 
must be learned from observation. 

142. The gender of nouns of the third declension, 
when not determined by their signification (40, 44), 
may generally be ascertained from their endings^ by the 
following 

RULES FOR GRAMMATICAL GENDER. 

1) Masculines, — Most nouns in er, or, 05, e?, in- 
creasing in the genitive, and 0, except do^ go^ 



143, 144.] jsrouNS. — gender. 67 

and 20, are mascnline ; e. g., der^ slit ; honor^ 
honor ; Jids^ a flower ; pes (gen. pedis), a foot ; 
sermo^ a discourse. 

2) Fewdnines. — Most nouns in do^ go^ io^ as^ is^ ys^ 
aus^ s preceded by a consonant, cc, and es not 
increasing in the genitive, are feminine ; e. g., 
drundS, a reed; Imdgo^ an image; dratid^ an 
oration; aes^as, summer; ^z^rm, a tower ; laus^ 
praise ; hiems, winter ; lex^ a law ; 7iubes (gen. 
nubis), a cloud. 

8) Neuters, — Most nouns in a, e, 2, y, c, ?, n, ^, ar, 
^^r, and us^ are neuter ; e. g., mare, a sea ; 
poemd^ a poem ; ?ac, milk ; dmmdlj an animal ; 
flumen^ a river ; cdput^ a head, &c. 
For exceptions, see Table of Oenders (579). 

143. Vocabulary. 

Amicus, I,* friend (amicable), 

Animas, i, mind, soul. 

Carpere, to gather, to pluck. 

Flos, oris, flower (^floral). 

Ignavus, a, um, indolent, cowardly. 

Magnitudo, inis, greatness, size (magnitude), 

144. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Veram animi magnitudinem laudabunt. 2. 
Christian! leges bonas non violabunt. 3. Pueri multum, 
temporis^ perdunt. 4. Puer caput aperiet. 

5. Servus urbis portas claudit. 6. Servi dominum 
suum vindicabunt. 7. Puer patris vocem audit. 8c 

* Gender, when not given, must be determined by previous rules. 



68 FIEST LATIISr BOOK. [145. 

Pueri patrum voces audient. 9. Lupus haedum dila- 
niabat. 10. Haedi kipos timent. 

(6) 1. The boys are gathering flowers. 2. He -will 
pluck the beautiful flower. 3. The dog will fear the 
lion. 4. Dogs fear lions. 5. The girl will waste much 
time} 6. Your father will lose much time. 7. The in- 
dolent lose much pleasure, 8. The priests are praising 
the king. 

9. The queen will not violate the laws. 10. The 
king's son was violating the laws of the state. 11. My 
friend will not disregard my sorrow. 12. Your friends 
will not disregard your sorrow. 



LESSON XXVIIL 



Nouns. — Third Declension. — Formation of Cases from 
each other. 

145. 1) In any noun of the third declension, all 
the cases, except the nominative and vocative 
singular (and the accusative sing, in neuters), 
can be readily formed from each other, by a 
simple change of the endings : thus, the accu- 
sative sing, honorem gives (by a change of end- 
ing) the dat. honorl^ or the dat. and abl. plur. 
honorihiis^ or any other case which may be 
desired. 
2) The nominative and vocative singular (and ace. 
sing, in neuters^ can generally be formed from 
any other case, in some one of the following 
ways: 



146, 147.] FORMATION OF CASES/ 69 

a) By dropping the ending of tHe given case: as, 

lionoTmi^ Nom. }i6nor.\ 

Eem, 1. — Tins applies to many nouns whose root ends in /, n, or r, 

and to a few with the root in it 
Hem. 2. — / is changed before t into w, and before n into e ; and e is 

inserted before r when preceded b j ^ or b (126, 1); e. g., Gen. 
- . capitis ; root, cdpit ; ]N'om. caput. Gen. fiuminis; root, Jlumin; 

j!^ om. flumen. Gen. pair is; root, pair; Nom. pater. 

h) By ctanging the ending of the given case into 
5, 65, IS J or^ and (for neuters) e: as, urbiSj Nom. t^rS^; 
7iubem^ Nom. nuhes^ &c. 

Rem. 1. — This apphes to most nouns of this declension. 

Rem. 2. — T, d, or r, at the end of the root, is dropped before s, and t 
is changed into e ; cs or gs wiU of course be written x ; e. g., 
pietdtem, Nom. pietds (t dropped before s) ; mllitern, ISTom. mi/'^s 
(^ dropped before 5, and i changed into e); regent, JSTom. rea; 
(regs. = rex). 

c) By changing the ending of the given case, to- 
gether with er or 5r, as the last syllable of the root, into 
Its: as, generis^ Nom. genus. 

Rem. — This applies only to a few of those words whose root ends in 

er or or. 

146. The predicate of a proposition may be modified 
by a noun denoting the manner or cause of its action, 
or the means or insirument employed ; e. g., 

Iram meam dono placabit. 
{Anger my with a gift he will appease!) 
He will appease my anger with a gift, 

147. Rule of Syntax.^ — The cause or manner of an 

* The ace. sing, is used here, though any other case would do equally 
welL 

\ The n(mi. and voc, it will be remembered, are the same in form. 



70 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[148, 149. 



action, and tlie means or instrument employed, are ex- 
pressed by the ablative. 

Rem.— In the above example, dono expresses the means employed, 
and is accordingly in the ablative. 



148. Vocabulary. 



Alius, a, urn, 


high, lofty 


(altitude). 


Catena, ae, 


chain. 




Cingere, 


to surround. 




Complere, 


to fill 


[complement), 


Cunctus, a, urn, 


all (as a whole). 




Donum, I, 


gift 


(donation). 


Flumen, mis, 


river. 




Gladius, i. 


sword. 




lUustrare, 


C to illumine 
( to illuminate 


V (illustrate) 


Ira, ae, 


anger 


i (ire). 

( (irascible). 


Lux, lucis. 


light 


(lucid). 


Mulier, erls, 


woman. 




Placare, 


to appease 
149. Exercises. 


(jplacdble). 



(a) 1. Miles regem gladio occidebat. 2. Eegem catena 
vinciebat. 3. Sol urbem magnam sua luce illustrat. 
4. Iram dono placant, 5. Gives regis iram donis placa- 
bunt. 6. Flumen urbem cingit. 

7. Mulier bona epistolas scribit. 8. Agricola urbis 
portas claudet. 9. Poetarum filiae cantant. 10. Pul- 
cbrae pastorum filiae saltabunt. 11. Caii animum donis 
placabunt. 

(&) 1. The soldiers will bind tbe king with chains. 
2. The river will surround the beautiful city. 3. The 
boy surrounds his head with a garland. 4. He will 
surround his sister's head with garlands. 5. He will 



150j 151.] ADJECTIVES. — THIRD DECLEI^SIOI^. 71 

give a beautiful garland to his sister. 6. They will 
give beautifal garlands to their brothers. 

7. Theyw^re building a wall. 8. They will sur- 
round the city with a high wall. 9. The sun illumines 
all (things) with its light. 10. The sun fills all (things) 
with its light. 11. The blind do not see the sun. 12. 
The blind do not see the lio-ht of the sun. 



LESSON XXIX. 

Adjectives. — Third Declension, 

150. Adjectives of the third declension may be 
divided into three classes, viz : 

1) Those which have three different forms in the 
nominative singular (one for each gender). 

2) Those which have two (the masc, and fern, 
being the same). 

3) Those which have but one (the same for all 
genders). 

151. Adjectives of the third declension are declined 
in their several genders like nouns of the same declen- 
sion, gender^ and ending. It must, however, be observed, 

1) That those which have only one form in the 
nominative singular have the abl. sing, in e or 
^, and the rest, with the exception of compara- 
tives, in I only, 

2) That all except comparatives have, in the 
plural^ the nom., acc.^ and voc, neuter in za, and 
the genitive in ium. 



72 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [152, 158. 

CLASS I. — THREE TERMINATIONS. 

152. Adjectives of the first class have in the nomi- 
native singular the mascnline in er, the feminine in is, 
and the neuter in e. 

PARADIGM. 







Acer, sharp. 








SINGULAR. 






Masc, 


Fem. 


2^eut. 


N. 


Acer, 


acr-is. 


acr-e. 


G. 


Acr-is, 


acr-is. 


acr-is. 


D. 


Acr-l, 


acr-i. 


acr-i. 


A. 


Acr-em, 


acr-em, 


acr-e. 


V. 


Acer, 


acr-is. 


acr-e. 


A. 


Acr-I, 


acr-i, 

PLURAL. 


acr-i. 


N. 


Acr-es, 


acr-es. 


acr-ia. 


G. 


Acr-ium, 


acr-ium. 


acr-ium. 


D. 


Acr-ibus, 


acr-ibus. 


acr-ibus. 


A. 


Acr-es, 


acr-es. 


acr-ia. 


V. 


Acr-es, 


acr-es, 


acr-ia. 


A. 


Acr-ibus, 


acr-ibus. 


acr-ibiis. 



CLASS II. — TWO TERMINATIONS. 

153. Adjectives of the second class have both the 
masculine and feminine in is, and the neuter in e, ex- 
cept comparatives,^ which have the masculine and 
feminine in ^57^, and the neuter in tus. 

* The use of comparatives wiU be illustrated in connection with the 
comparison of adjectives. 



154.] ADJECTIVES. — THIED DECLENSION. 

PARADIGMS. 



73 



1. Tristis, sad. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


Masc. and Fern. Neut 


Masc. and Fern. Neut. 


N. Trist-is, trist-e. 


N. Trist-es, trist-ia. 


G. Trist-is, trist-is. 


G. Trist-ium, trist-iiim. 


D. Trist-I, trist-l. 


D. Trist-ibus, trist-lbiis. 


A. Trist-em, trist-e. 


A. Trist-es, trist-ia. 


V. Trist-is, trist-e. 


V. Trist-es, trist-ia. 


A. Trist-i, trist-I. 


A. Trist-ibus, trist-ibiis. 


2. Tristior {com]parative\ more sad. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


Masc. and Fern. Neut. 


Masc. and Fern. Neut. 


N. Tristior, tristius. 


N. Tristior-es, tristior-a. 


G. Tristior-is, tristior-is. 


G. Tristior-um, tristior-um. 


D. Tristior-i, tristior-i. 


D. Tristior-ibus, tristior-lbus. 


A. Tristior-em, tristius. 


A. Tristior-es, tristior-a. 


V. Tristior, tristius. 


V. Tristior-es, tristior-a. 


A. Tristior-e (i), tristior-e (l). 


A. Tristior-lbus, tristior-lbus. 



CLASS III. — ONE TERMINATION. 

154. All Other adjectives of this declension have 
only one form in the nominative singular for all genders. 



PARADIGMS. 





1. Felix, happy. 




SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 1 


Masc. and Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. and Fern. 


Neut. 


N. Felix, 


felix. 


N. Fellc-es, 


felic-ia. 


G. Felic-is, 


felic-is. 


G. Felic-ium, 


fellc-ium. 


D, Felic-i, 


felic-i. 


D. Fellc-ibus, 


felic-ibus. 


A. Fellc-em, ^ felix. 


A. Felic-es, 


felic-ia. 


V. Felix, 


felix. 


V. Felic-es, 


felic-ia. 


A. Fellc-e (i), 


fellc-e (I). 


A. Fellc-ibus, 


felic-ibus. 



74 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 
PAE ADIGMS, — continued. 



[155, 156. 



2. Prudens, prudent 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


Masc. and Fem. Neut 


Masc. and Fem. Neut. 


N. Prudens, prudens. 


N. Prudent-es, prudent-ia. 


G. Prudent-is, prudent-is. 


G. Prudent-ium, prudent-ium. 


D. Prudent-i, prudent-i. 


D. Prudent-ibas, prudent-ibus. 


A. Prudent-em, prudens. 


A. Prudent-es, prudent-ia. 


V. Prudens, prudens. 


V. Prudent-es, prudent-ia. 


A. Prudent-e (I), prudent-e(l). 


A. Prudent-ibus, prudent-ibiis. 



155. Vocabulary. 

Acer, acris, acre, sharp, severe 



(acrid). 

{fidelity). 

{fortitude). 



Fidelis, e, trusty, faithful 

Fortis, e, brave 

Gloria, ae, glory. 

Maculare, to blemish, to stain {maculate), 

Maximi, at a very high (price), very highly. 

Maximl aestimare, to prize very highly. 

Pausanlas, ae, Pausanias, 

a distinguished Spartan general. 

Prudens, entis, prudent, cautious. 

Turpis, e, base, disgraceful {turpitude). 

Sapiens, entis, wise. 

Splendens, entis, shining {splendid). 

156. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Pater mens fidelem serviim vindicabat. 2. 
Fideles servi dominos suos vindicabmit. 3. Sol splen- 
dens cuncta sua luce ilkistrabat. 4. Sapientes yirtutem 
raaxrmP aestimant. 

5. Sapiens leges acres non violabit. 6. Christiani 
virtutem laudant. 7. Boni yirttitem magni aestimabant. 
8. Pausanias gloriam turpi morte macul^at. 9. Pausa- 
nias magnam belli gloriam turpi morte maculabat. 

Q)) 1. The brave soldier will fight. 2. The brave 
king will conquer the enemy ( j>?.). 3. The brave will 



157, 158.] 



ADJECTIVES. 



75 



conquer tlie cowardly. 4. Wise (men) will not stain 
their glory by a base death. 

5. The good prize the laws of the state very highly.^ 
6, Kind masters do not pnnish faithful slaves. 7. A 
prudent (man) will not violate the laws of his country. 
8. The prudent do not violate severe laws. 



LESSON XXX. 
Adjectives^ continued. — Nouns, — Fourth Declension, 

157. Adjectives are either of the first and second 
declension^ or of the third only: those of the first and sec- 
ond declension are declined in the masculine and neuter 
like nouns of the second declension, and in i\\e feminine 
like nouns of the first ; those of the third declension 
are declined throughout like nouns of the third. (See 
Lesson XXIIL) 

158. Endings of adjectives of the first and second 
declension. 





SINGULAR. 




PLURAL. 


A few X liave Sing, thus : 




Masc. Fern. JSfeut 


Masc. 


Fein. JSfeut. 


Masc. 


Fe7n. 


Neut. 




2.* 1. 2. 


2. 


1. 2. 








N. 


us, er,f a, urn. 


1, 


ae, a. 


us, er. 


a, 


um. 


G. 


I, ae, 1. 


oriim 


arum, orum. 


lus, 


lus. 


lus. 


D. 


o, ae, o. 


IS, 


Is, Is. 


I, 


T, 


I. 


A. 


urn, am, iim. 


OS, 


as, a. 


iim. 


am, 


um. 


V. 


e, er,f a, urn. 


1, 


ae, a. 


e, er. 


a, 


um. 


A. 


0, a, 0. 


IS, 


IS, Is. 


o, 


a. 


o. 




# 













* The declensions of the different genders are here indicated by nume- 
rals. 

f In adjectives in er, the masc. nom. sing, is generally the root {e is 
sometimes dropped) : er, therefore, is not properly a case-ending ; it is 
given merely to show the termination of the nom. and voc. sing., with- 
out regard to the root (107). 

t See^list, 113, Rem. 



76 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [159 — 163. 

159. Endings of adjectives of the Third Declension. 





THREE TERM. 


TYTO TERM. 


COMPARATIVES. 


0>:E TERM. 




M. 


F, 


iV. 


Jf.c&K iV. 


M.chK 


iV. 


M,(bK iV^. 


N. 


er,* 


IS, 


e. 


IS, 


e. 


6r,t 


us. 


various. 


G. 


IS, 


IS, 


'IS. 


IS, 


IS. 


or[-is. 


or-is. 


IS. 


D. 


1, 


I, 


I. 


h 


I. 


or-i. 


or-i. 


1. 


A. 


em, 


em. 


e. 


em. 


e. 


or-em. 


us. 


em.J 


V. 


er,* 


IS, 


e. 


IS, 


e. 


or, 


us. 


like nom. 


A. 


h 


h 


I. 


h 


1. 


or-e (or-l) 


or-e (or-i). 


e(i). 


N. 


es, 


es. 


ia. 


es, 


ia. 


or-es. 


or-a. 


es, ia. 


G. 


ium. 


ium, 


ium. 


iilm. 


ium. 


or-um. 


or-um. 


ium, ium. 


D. 


ibiis. 


lb us. 


lb us. 


ibus. 


ibus. 


or-ibus, 


or-ibus. 


ibus, ibus. 


A. 


es, 


es, 


ia. 


es, 


ia. 


or-es, 


or-a. 


es, ia. 


V. 


es, 


es. 


ia. 


es. 


ia. 


or-es. 


or-a. 


es, ia. 


A. 


Ibus, 


ibus 


ibus. 


ibus. 


ibus. 


or-ibus. 


or-ibus. 


ibus, ibus. 



FOURTH DECLENSIOiSr. 

160. Nouns of the Fourth Declension have the geni- 
tive singular in zls^ and the nominative in us and u. 

161. In this declension, nouns in us (with a few ex- 
ceptions) are masculine^ and those in u are neuter. 

162. The root is found by dropping the nominative 
ending: as, fructiLs^ fruit; root, fruct: cornu^ a horn; 
root, corn, 

163. Nouns in us (of the fourth declension) are de- 
clined with the foUowino; 



CASE-ENDINGS. 



Nom. 


Gen. 


Bat. 


Accus. 


Voc. 


Ahl. 


Sing us. 


us. 


uT, 


um, 


us. 


. Q. . 


Plur. us. 


uum. 


ibus (ubusj). 


us, 


us, 


ibus ^tibus^). 



* The remark on this ending, in adjectives of the fii-st and second de- 
clension, is also applicable here (See 158, Rem. 2.) 

t The or here given in connection with the case-endings belongs to the 
root ; in the nom., ace, and voc. of the neut sing., it is changed into us. 

t Neut. hke nom. § This ending is used only in a few words 



164, 165.] KOUNS. — FOURTH DECLENSIOIT. 



77 



164, jSTeuters in u^ thougli formerly considered inde- 
clinable in the singular, are found to have the genitive 
in us, and are declined with the following 



NEUTER CASE-ENDINGS. 





Norn. 


Gen. 


J)at 


Accus. 


Voc. 


Ahl. 




Sing. 


Q 


us, 


% 


% 


ti, 


Q. 




Plur. 


ua, 


uum. 


ibus (ubus*), 


ua, 


ua, 


ibus 


(ubus*). 



PARADIGMS. 



1. Fructiis, 


m., fruit 


2. Cornu, 


n., a horn. 


(root, fruct) 


(root, 


corn) 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. Fruct-us, 


Fruct-us. 


N. Corn-u, 


Corn-u a. 


G. Fruct-us, 


Fruct-uiim. 


G. Corn-us, 


Corn-uiim. 


D. Fruct-ul, 


Fruct-ibus. 


D. Corn-u, 


Corn-ibus. 


A. Fruct-um, 


PVuct-us. 


A. Corn-u, 


Corn-ua. 


V. Fruct-us, 


Fruct-us. 


V. Corn-u, 


Com-ua. 


A. Fruct-Q. 


Fruci-ibus. 


A. Corn-u, 


Corn-ibus. 



165. YOCABULARY. 






Currus, us, 


chariot. 






Dux, duels, m. andf. leader, guide 




(duke). 


Et, - 


and. 






Excruciare, 


to torture 




{excruciate). 


Exercitus, us. 


armv. 






Innocens, entls. 


innocent. 






Luctus, us. 


grief, sadness. 






Man us, us,/. 


hand 




{manacle). 


Metus, us. 


fccir. 






Nescire, 


not to know, to be ignorant of 




Sinus, us, 


bosom 




{sinuous). 


Sulla, ae. 


Sulla, a marHs 


name. 





* This ending is used only in a few words. 



78 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [166 — 168. 

166. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Sinus nietiim nescit. 2. Liictus animum ex- 
cruciat. 3. Eex liostium (141, 2) currus viclet. 4. 
Hostes regis currum audient. 5. Duces exercitui yiam 
monstrabunt. 6. Puella epistolam sua manu scribit. 

7. Caius epistolas sua manu scribebat. 8. Sei yi Sul- 
lae domum evertebant. 9. SerYu.s domini mortem 
vindicabit. 10. Pastoris filius mortem non timet. 11. 
Luctus et metus animum excruciant (612, Eem.). 

(p) 1. The innocent (man) knows not fear. 2. The 
innocent know not fear. 3. The bosom of the inno- 
cent knows not fear. 4. The boy's mother will write 
the letter with her own hand. 5. The father is writing 
the letters with his own hand. 

6. The slave will show the beautiful chariot to his 
master. 7. The father will avenge the death of his 
son. 8. Fear tortures the cowardly. 9. Fear does not 
torture the brave. 10. The cowardly fear death. 11. 
Brave sold'ers do not fear the enemy. 



LESSON XXXI. 

Nouns. — Fifth Declension. 

167. Nouns of the Fifth Declension have the genitive 
singular in e2','^-and the nominative in es. 

168. Nouns of this declension are feminine^ except 
dieSj a day, masculine and feminine in the singular, 

* In tlie ending of the gen. and dat. sing, e is long, except in spei 
(where it is short), Jl del, and rei (where it is common). 



169 — 171.] NOUNS. — FIFTH DECLENSION. 



79 



and masculine only in tlie plural ; and merldies, mid- 
day, masculine. 

Rem. — The fifth declension comprises only a few words, and of these 
few, only two, — dies, a day, and res, a thing, are complete in the 
plural. 

169. The root is formed by dropping the nomina- 
tive ending : as, cUes^ a day ; root, di, 

170. Nouns of this declension are declined with the 
following 

CASE-ENDINGS. 



JVo^n. 


Ge7i. 


Dat 


Accus, 


Voc. 


Abl 


Sing, es, 


el* 


el,* 


em, 


es, 


e. 


Plur. es, 


erum, 


ebiis, 


es. 


es, 


ebus. 



PARADIGMS. 



Ees,/, a 


thing. 


Dies, m. aiidf,^ a day. 


(root, 


r.) 


(root, di.) 


Singular, 


Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


N. R-es, 


R-es. 


N. Di-es, Di^es. 


G. R-ei, 


R-eram. 


G. Di-ei, Di-erum. 


D. R-ei, 


R-ebus. 


D. Di-ei, Di-ebus. 


A. R-em, 


R-es. 


A. Di-em, Di-es. 


V. R-es, 


R-es. 


V. Di-es, Di-es. 


A. R-e, 


R-ebus. 


A. Di-e, Di-ebus. 



171. Vocabulary. 

Acies, ei, line of battle. 

Aciem instruere, to draw up an army in order of battle. 

Copiae,t arom, forces (copious). 

Dies, ei, day. 



* ^ee note on page 78. 

\ Copiae is of the first declension, plural; the singular is not used 
vvith this signification. 



80 



) 


FIRST LATIN BOOK. 


[172. 


Edticere, 


to lead forth 


(educe). 


Emere, 


to purchase. 




Equltatus, Qs, 


cavalry. 




Fides, ei, 


faith, one's word 


{fidelity). 


Instruere, 


to arrange, to array- 


(instruct). 


Omnis, e, 


all, every. 




Proxlmns, a, um, 


nearest, next 


(proximate). 


Reducere, 


to lead back 


(reduce). 


Servare, 


to keep, to observe 


(serve). 


Spes, el, 


hope. 

172. Exercises, 





(a) 1. Christianus fidem snam servat. 2. Boni fidem 
siiam non violant. 3. Dies veniet. 4. Proximo die 
(88) Caesar copias suas reducebat. 5. Proximo die 
Caesar aciem instruebat. 

6. Caesar equitatum omnem educebat. 7. Paellan 
regis currum videbat. 8. Hostium (141, 2) copias 
videbunt. 9. Tullia puellis viam monstrabit. 10. 
TuUia epistolam sua manu scribit. 

(&) 1. The king will keep his word. 2. The queen 
will not break her word. 3. All (men) prize hope very 
highly.^ 4. They do not purchase hope with gold. 5. 
The wise will not sell hope for gold (122). 

6. He prizes his cavalry very highly. 7. The king 
thinks highly of ^ his whole army. 8. The soldiers will 
observe the laws. 9. The citizens will observe all the 
laws of the state. 10. The wise value true greatness 
of mind very highly. 11. The avaricious value money 
vei^y highly. 



178, 174.] 2T0UNS. — FIVE DECLENSIONS. 



81 



LESSON XXXII. 

Nouns. — Five Declensions, — Greeh Nouns, — Gender. 
173. Terminations of Substantives. 









SINGIILAR. 






Dec. I. 


Dec. II. 


Dec. III. 


Dec. IV. 


Dec.Y. 




P. 


M. 


N. 


M.SfF. N. 


M. N. 


F. 


N. 


a.. 


US, er, ir 


\\m. 


various. 


us. Q. 


es. 


G. 


ae. 


1. 




Is. 


US. 


ei* 


D. 


ae. 


6. 




I. 


ul. u. 


ei.* 


A. 


am. 


urn. 




em (im). like nom. 


um. u. 


em. 


V. 


a. 


e, er,ir. 


um. 


like nom. 


us. u. 


es. 


A. 


a. 


0. 




e(l). 


u. 


e. 








PLURAL. 




N. 


ae. 


T. 


a. 


es, a, or ia. 


us. ua. 


es. 


G. 


arum. 


orum. 




um (iiim). 


uum. 


erum. 


D. 


Is. 


IS. 




ibus. 


ibus (ubus). 


ebus. 


A 


as. 


OS. 


a. 


es. a, or ia. 


us. ua. 


es. 


V. 


ae. 


1. 


a. 


es. a, or ia. 


us. ua. 


es. 


A. 


IS. 


IS. 




ibus. 


Ibus (ubus). 


ebus. 



Rem. — The above table presents the endings of aU nouns in the Latin 
language, except a few derived from the Greek. The only nomi- 
native endings not already noticed, are e, as, and es, in the first 
declension, and os and on in the second. 

174. The following are specimens of tlie declension 
of Greek nouns. 



* See 16'7, Rem. 



82 



FIRST LATI^T BOOK. 



[174:, 



DECLENSION I. 


1. Aeneas (c man's name). 


2, Ancliises (a man's name). 


N. Aene-as, 


N. Anchis-es, 


G. Aene-ae, 


G. Anchis-ae, 


D. Aene-ae, 


D. Anchis-ae, 


A. Aene-am (an), 


A. Anchls-en, 


V. Aene-a, 


V. Anchls-e (a), 


A. Aene-a. 


A. Anchis-e (a). 


8. Epitome, an abridgment 


Singular, Plural. 


N. Ep:t6m-e, Epitom-ae. - 


G. Ep:t6m-es, Epltom-arum. 


D. Ep^t6m-ae, Epit6m-is. 


A. Ep:t6m-en, Ep^tom-as. 


V. Epitom-e, Ep:t6m.-ae. 


A. Epitom-e, Epltom-ls. 


DECLENSION IL 


1. nion, n, (jna7ne of a city). 


2. Delos, / ((name of an 




island). 


N. Ili-on, 


N. Del-OS, 


G. Ili-i, 


G. Del-i, 


D Ili-o, 


D. Del-o, 


A Ili-6n, 


A. Del-6n, 


V Ili-on, 


V. Del-e, 


A. IH-o. 


A. Del-o. 


DECLENSION III. 


1. Pericles {a man's name). 


2. Heros, a liero. 




Singular. Plural, 


N. Pencl-es, 


N. Hero-s, Hero-es. 


G. Pericl-is, 


G. Hero-is, Hero-um. 


D. Perlcl-I, 


D. Hero-T, Hero-ibus. 


A. Pencl-em (ea), 


A. Hero-em (a), Hero-es (as). 


V. Pericl-es (e), 


V. Hero-s, Hero-es. 


A. Perlcl-e. 


A. Hero-e, Hero-ibus. > 



175, 176.] 



GENDER. 



88 



175. Table of Genders of Nouns as determined by 
Nom. Endino:. 





MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


NEUTER. 


Dec. I. 


as and es. 


a and e. 




Dec. IL 


er, ir, us (and os*). 




um (and on*). 


Dec. III. 


er, or, os, es, in- 
creasing in gen. 
and 0, except do, 
go, and io. 


do,go,io,as,is,ys, 
aus, s impure,! 
X and es not in- 
creasing in gen. 


a, e, i, y, c, 1, n. t, 
ar, ur, and us 


Dec. IV. 


us. 




u. 


Dec. V. 




es. 





(For exceptions see Table of Genders [579]). 



176. Vocabulary. 



4LCCipere,J 

Achilles, 5 is, 

Aeneas, ae, 
Anchlses, ae, 
Ascanius, i. 



to receive, to accept. 
Achilles, 

a Grecian hero. 
Aeneas, 

a Trojan prince, 
Anchises, 

the father of Aeneas, 
Ascanius, 

the son of Aeneas, 



Carthag6, inis, Carthage, 

a city in the northern part of Africa. 



* The inclosed endings belong to Greek nouns, many of which, being 
proper names (of men and women), have natm'al gender. 

•f Preceded by a consonant. 

X Accipere forms its imperfect and futm-e tenses Kke verbs of the 
fourth conjugation. (See 270, 2^71.) 

5 Achilles, being a Greek noun, is declined like Pericles (174). 



84 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [177. 

Dido,* as, or onis, Dido, 

queen of Tyre and afterwards the 
foundress of Carthage. 
Epitome, 6s, abridgment (^epitome). 

Heros, ois, hero. 

Historia, ae, history. 

Industria, ae, industry. 

Noster, tra, trum, our. 
Regnum, i, kingdom, government. 

Roma, ae, Rome, 

city of Italy, on the river Tiber. 

Trojaniis, a, um, Trojan. 

177. Exercises, 
(a) 1. Aeneas, AnchTsae filius, urbeni condebat. 2. 
Ascanms, Aeneae jaiius, regnum accipit. 3. Dido 
Carthaginem condebat. 4. Epitomen orationis suae 
scribet. 

5. Caesar milites omnes educebat. 6. Industria mul- 
turn voluntatis habet. 7. Laborem suum finiet. 8. Horti 
nostri multos flores liabent. 9. Servus pueros vocabit. 

{b) 1. Aeneas was founding Eome. 2. The son of 
Anchises was founding Eome. 3. Aeneas, the son of 
Anchises, was founding the city of Eome (the city 
Eome). 4. The Trojan hero loves queen Dido. 5. 
They will kill the Trojan hero. 

6. They are reading an abridgment of the history. 
7. The soldiers praise Caesar. 8. Aeneas praises his 
father Anchises. 9. The Trojans fear Achilles. 10. 
Achilles was slaying the Trojans. 11. The soldier is 
showing his sword to the boy. 12. They will show 
their swords to the boys. 

* Dido is sometimes declined regularly, as a Latin noun of the third 
declension, and sometimes has the genitive in us, and all the other cases 
like the nom. 



178 — 180.] VERBS. — PREDICATE. 85 

LESSON XXXIII. 

Verbs. — Esse, to be. Predicate, Esse, with a Noun or 
an Adjective. 
178. Esse, to be, is an irregular verb (i. e., it does 
not belong to either of the foiir conjugations already 
noticed), and gives us in the third persons of the present, 
iraperfect, smd future tenses, the following 

PARADIGM. 







Singular. 


Plural, 


Present. 


Est, 


he, she, or it is, 


Sunt, they are. 


Imperfect. 


Erat, 


" " " was. 


Erant, " were, 


Future. 


Erit, 


" '" « will be. 


Erunt, " will be. 



179. The predicate of a proposition is sometimes 
expressed by the verb esse (to be), with a noun or an 
adjective ; e. g., 

1. Terra est rotunda. 
The earth is round. 

Rem. 1. — In this example, the predicate is not simply est, but est 
rotunda ; for the assertion is not that the earth is (i. e. exists), but 
that the earth is round. 

Rfm. 2.^The adjective rdtu7ida agrees -with the subject terra in genr 
der, number, and case, by the rule already given. (114). 

2. Pltirimae stellae soles sunt. 
( Very many stars suns are.) 
Very many stars are suns. 
Rem. — ^Here the predicate is soles sunt. 

180. EuLE OF Syntax.~A noun in the predicate 
after esse is put in the same case as the subject when it 
denotes the same person or thing. 

Rem. — In example 2, soles is in the nominative by this rule. 



86 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[181, 182. 



181. EuLE OF Syntax. — The adjectives dlgnus, in- 
dignus, conteiitus, praeditus^ fretus^ and liber^ take the 
ablative ; e. g., 

Yirtiis parvo contenta est. 
( Virtue with little content is,) 
Virtue is content with little. 

Rem. — Parvo in this example is a neut, adj. used as a noun ; it is put 
in the ablative after contenta, by the rule just given. 

182. Vocabulary. 



Arbor, oris,/. 


tree 


{arhor). 


Beatus, a, um, 


happy 


(beatitude) 


Candidus, a, iim, 


white 


(candid). 


Contentus, a, iim, 


content, contented. 




Culpa, ae, 


blame, fault 


(culpable). 


Digniis, a, um. 


worthy 


(dignity). 


Esse, 


to be. 




Est, 


is, it is. 




Faeere,* 


to do, to make. 




Florere, 


to flourish. 




Fretus, a, um. 


relying on. 




Indlgnus, a, um. 


unworthy 


(indignity). 


Laus, dis. 


praise 


(laud). 


Liber, era, eriim, 


free 


(liberty). 


Nemo (inis,f) 


nobody, no one. 




Nix, nivis. 


snow. 




Nupquam, 


never. 




Parvum (neut. adj,), 


little, a little. 




Praeditiis, a, um. 


endued with. 




Quam, 


how. 




Quam multl, ae, a. 


how many. 




Semper, 


always. 




Vires, virium, plur. cf vis, 


strength. 




Vita, ae, 


life ot 


(vital). 



* This verb, together with some others of the third conjugation, has 
the imperfect and future hke verbs of the fourth conjugation. 

f The genitive neminis and ablative nerinine are not in good use. 



183, 184.] VEKBS. — INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT. 87 

183. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Nix est Candida. 2. Bonus est beatus. 3. 
Boni sunt beati. 4. Sapientes parvo content! sunt. 
5. Servus laude dignus est. 6. Patris mei servus laude 
indignus est. 

7. Caius patriam auro yendebat. 8. Caius, homo 
vita indignus, patriam auro vendet. 9. Quam multi 
indigni luce sunt! 10. Arbor florebat. 11. Balbus 
multi laude florebat. 

(b) 1. No-one is always bappy. 2. The avaricious 
(man) will never be contented. 3. The avaricious are 
not contented. 4. Caius is not free from blame. 5. 
Caius is unworthy of praise. 

6. Balbus praises my fidelity. 7. Balbus, a man en- 
dued with great virtue, was praising my fidelity. 8. 
Balbus does much good,^ 9. Caius is unworthy of life. 
10. Caius, a man unworthy of life, does no good^ 11. 
Caius, relying on his strength, does not fear the lion. 
12. The slaves are not free from blame. 13. Christians 
are contented with little. 



LESSON XXXIY. 



Verbs. — Infinitive as Subject — Genitive with Esse in the 
Predicate, 
184. An infinitive mood (with the words belon^ng 
to it) (9) may be used as a noun, and thus become the 
subject of a verb. "When thus used it is in the neuter 
gender (44, 3), and of course takes the adjectives in 
agreement with it in the same gender; e. g.. 



88 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [185—187. 

Difficile est judicare. 
(^Difficult {it) is to judge,) 
It is diJB&cult tojiwlge, or, To judge is dilBicult. 

Rem. — Here judicare (to judge) is the subject of the proposition, for 
it is that of which the predicate difficile est (is difficult) is affirmed. 
It is in the nominative case, and subject of the verb est, and the 
adjective difficile agrees with it. 

185. When the noun in the predicate after esse does 
not denote the same person or thing as the subject, it 
is put in the genitive; e. g., 

Christian! est neminem violare. • 

{Of a Christian it is nobody to wrong,) 
It is the duty (or part) of a Christian to wrong nobody. 

Rem. 1. — In this example the subject is neminem violare, and the pre- 
dicate, Christiani est. 
Rem. 2. — Combining articles 180 and 185 we have the following 

186. EuLE OF Syntax. — A noun in the predicate, 
after the verb esse^ is put, 

1) In the same case as the subject when it de 
notes the same person or thing ; e. g., Cicero 
erat consul, Cicero was consul, 

2) In the genitive when it "denotes a different per- 
son or thing ; e. g., Christiani est neminem vio- 
lare, it is the duty of a Christian to wrong nobody, 

187. In rendering into English, when a genitive fol- 
lows any part of the verb esse (as est,^ erat,^ erit,^ &c.), 
such a substantive as duty.^ part^ mar\ business^ &c., 
must be supplied. 

English Idiom. Latin Idiom. 

It is the part ^ 



duty 
business 
mark 
character^ 



of a wise man. It is of a wise man. 



188, 189.] 



PEEDICATE WITH ESSE. 



188. Vocabulary. 

DifFic~Ilis, e, 
Errare, 
Faciiis, e, 
Fidem violare, 
Huruanus, a, um, 
Magnum est, 
Pt'ccare, 
Turpis, e, 



Violare, 



difficult, 
to err. 
easy 

to break one's word, 
human, natural to man. 
it is a gi*eat thing, 
to sin, to do wi'ong. 
base, disgraceful 
to offend against, to wrong, to 
break a law, one's word, &c. 



{facility). 



(turpitude), 
S {violate). 



189. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Humdnum^ est peccare. 2. Humdnum est 
errare. 8. Turpe est fidem suam violare. 4. Patris'' 
est filium saum docere. 5. Regis est regnare. 

6. Matris est filias suas docere. 7. Servi est viam 
monstrare. 8. Turpe est poetae domum evertere. 9. 
Matres filias laudant. 10. Boni est fidem servare. 11. 
Impii est fidem violare. 

Rem. 1. — In English, when an infinitive mood is the subject of a pro- 
position, the pronoun it is used before the verb is ; hence, in 
translating such sentences into Latin, this pronoun it^ which repre- 
sents, as it were, the coming infinitive or clause, must be omitted. 

Rem. 2. — After it is, ajich a substantive as part, duty, business, mark, 
must be omitted in translating into Latin. 

(b) 1, It is a great (thing) not to fear death.^ 2. It 
is easy to err. 3. It is (the duty) '' of a Christian to 
keep (his) word. 4. It is (the part) of a wise (man) to 
keep the laws. 

5. It is disgraceful to neglect a son. 6. It is natural- 
to-man to prize money very highly, 7. It is the mark 
of an unlearned man to think little of wisdom. 8. 
It is the slave's business to shut the gates of the city. 
9. It is difficult to shut the gates of the city. 10. A 



90 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [190 — 192. 

good citizen will observe the laws of his country. 11. 
It is the parf of a good citizen to observe the laws of 
his country. 



LESSON XXXV. 

Verbs, — Tenses for Completed Action, — First, Second^ and 
Fourth Conjugations, 

190. The tenses which we have thus far used, viz., 
the present^ imperfect^ and future^ represent the action 
of the verb as continuing (11), i. e., as not completed.. 
There are also three tenses for completed action, viz. : 

1) The Perfect, which represents the action as 
completed in present time, i. e., as just com- 
pleted; e. g., dmdmt^ he has loved. 

2) The Pluperfect^ which represents the action as 
completed in past time ; as, dmdverdt^ he had 
loved. 

3) The Future Perfect^ which represents the action 
as completed in future time ; as, dmdverit^ he 
will have loved. • 

191. The tenses for completed action are not formed 
from the same root as those for action not completed^ 
but from another called the second root. This is formed 
in various ways. 

192. In the first, second, and fourth conjugations, 
the second root is formed by adding dv^ u^^ and w^ re- 
spectively, to the root f of the verb ; e. g. : 

•^' A very few verbs of the second conjugation add ev, which may be 
regarded as the full form for which u is a contraction (the e being di"op- 
ped, 9Jid V changed to u). 

\ This we wiU now caU the 1st root, to distinguish it from the 2d. 



193, 194.] VERBS. — CONJUGATIONS. 91 



First Boot. 


Second Root. 


am, 


djn.dv. 


)j mon, 


Tdonu, 


, , aud, 


audz^;. 



Conj. I. Amare, 
Conj. II. Monere, 
Conj. IV. Audire, 

193. In verbs of all the conjugations, tlie third per- 
sons singular of the tenses for completed action are formed 
by adding to the second root the following endings: 
Perfect Pluperfect. Future Perfect. 

it, erat, erit. 



PARADIGMS. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Amare, to love : 1st root, am ; 2d root, dmdv. 

Perfect. Amav-it, he, she, or it has loved (or loved).* 
Pluperf. Amav-erat, " " " had loved. 
Fut. Perf. Amav-erlt, " " " will have loved. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Monere, to advise : 1st root, mon ; 2d root, monu. 

Perfect. Monu-it, he, she, or it has advised (or advised).* 

Pluperf. Monu-erat, " " " had advised. 

Fut. Perf. Monu-erit, " " " shall have advised. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Andire, to hear: 1st root, aud ; 2d root, audw. 

Perfect. Audlv-it, he, she, or it has heard (or heard).* 

Pluperf. Audlv-erat, " " " had heard. 

Fut. Perf. Audiv-erlt, " " " shall have heard. 



194. In any regular verb, the third persons plural^ 
in the tenses for completed action, are formed by simply 

■*^ The perfect in Latin corresponds sometimes to our perfect indefi,' 
nite, and sometimes to our 'perfect definite (perfect with have) ; hence, 
dmavit may be translated either he has loved^ or he loved. 



92 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[195, 196. 



inserting n before t in the ending of tlie third person 
singular (35), except in the perfect, where it must be 
changed into erunt; e. g., 

Perfect Pluperfect. Fut Perfect. 

. j Sing. Amay-it, amav-erat, amav-erit. 

^' * I Plur. AmdiY -erunt^ amav-era7?i^, amav-eri?i/^. 
^ . i Sing. Monu-it, monu-erat, monu-erit. 

*^' * (Plur. Monu-erm2^, monu-eraTi^, m6nu-eri?2^. 
j Sing. AudiY-it, audiv-erat, audiv-erit. 
^* ' ( Plur. AudlY-erunt^ audiv-eran^, audiv-erin^. 

195. Vocabulary. 



Aestimare, av,* 


to estimate, to value. 




Arare, av, 


to plough 




(arable). 


Audire, Iv, 


to hear 




(audible). 


Dllaniare, av, 


to tear in pieces. 




Jurare, av, 


to swear. 






Laudare, av, 


to praise 




(laudable.) 


Monstrare, av. 


to show. 






Placare, av. 


to appease 




(placable.) 


Sepelire, Iv, 


to bury. 






Servare, av. 


to keep, to observe. 




Terrere, u, 


to terrify, to 


frighten. 





196. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Puer juraverat. 2. Pueri juraverunt. 3. Agri- 
cola araverit. 4. Servi araverint. 5. Yulpes pueros 
terruit. 6. Vulpes pueros terruerunt. 7. Poetae sapi- 
entiam parvi aesti mavit. 

8. Veram virtutem magni aestimaverat. 9. Ohristi- 
anus pecuniam parvi aestimavit. 10. Christiani est 
pecuniam parvi aestimare. 11. Magnam poetae sapi- 



* The learner wiU readily form the second root frora the firsts by 
adding the endings here given. 



197—199.] VERBS. — THIRD COKJUGATION. 93 

entiam parvi aestimaverant. 12. Pater filium sepeli- 
vit. 13. Pneri patrem sepeliverant. 

(6) 1. The boy has heard a voice. 2. The boys had 
heard their father's voice. 3. The slave had shown 
the way to the shepherd. 4. They will have shown 
the house to their master. 

5. Caius had praised his son. 6. He has praised his 
slaves. 7. The lion has torn the horse in pieces. 8. 
The fox had frightened the boy. 9. They had valued 
wisdom at a low price, 10. It is easy to keep (one's) 
word. 11. It is difficult to appease anger. 12. He has 
appeased the boy's anger with a gift. 



LESSON XXXYL 



Third Conjugation, — Class I. — Second Eoot the same as 
the First. 

197. Most verbs of the third conjugation may be 
divided into two classes, viz. : 

1) Those which have the second root the same as 
the first. 

2) Those which form it by the addition of 5. 

198. ^\iQ first class comprises most verbs of this con- 
jugation which have the first root in a vowel, together 
with a few which have it in a consonant ; e. g., 

Suere, to sew: 1st robt, sii; 2d root, sii. 

Defendere, tocfe/e?'?,cZ; "- defend; "- defend. 

199. The manner in which the third persons of the 
tenses for completed action are formed from the second 
root, has already been explained. See 193, 194. 



94 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. [200—202. 

PARADIGM. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 






Defendere, to defend 


: 1st root, defend, 


2d root 


defend. 


Perfect. 
Defend-it, 
Defend-erunt, 


Pluperfect. 
defend-erat, 
defend-erant, 


Future Perfect. 
defend-erlt. 
defend-erint. 



200. The Preposition is the part of speech which ex- 
presses the various relations of objects ; ^ e. g., 

Eex 'per urbem ambiilabat. 
{The king iliroiigh the city was walking.) 
The king was walking through the city. 

Rem. — In this example, ph% thi'ough, is a preposition. 

201. Partial Eule of Syntax. — Some preposi- 
tions govern the accusative^ and some the ablative. 

Rem. 1. — Whenever a preposition occurs iq the exercises, its particu- 
lar case mil be given iq the vocabularies. 

Rem. 2. — The accusative, urhem, in the above example, is governed 
by the preposition per. 

202. Vocabulary. 



Aedif iciiim, i, 
Ambulare, av, 
Annuere, annu, 
Concilium, i, 
Conditio, onis, 



building, edifice. 

to walk. 

to assent, to give assent. 

council, meeting. 

condition, terms. 



Constituere, constitii, to arrange, to appoint 
Defendere, defend, to defend. 



Dormire, Iv, 
Incendere, incend, 
Legio, onis, 
Per (prep, with ace), 
Proelinm, I, 



to sleep 

to set on fire, to burn 

legion, body of foot-soldiers. 

through. 

battle. 



{constitute). 

{dormant), 
(incendiary.) 



* It will be remembered, however, that certain relations are some- 
times expressed by the cases of nouns (63, 80, 86). 



208.] VERBS. 95 

Privatus, a, um, private, personal. 

Rellquiis, a, um, remaining, the rest (relic), 

Respuere, respii, to reject. 

Romani (adj. pL)j Romans. 

Romanos, a, nm, Roman, belonging to Rome. 

Suere, su, to sew, to stitch. 

Tlmere, u, to fear (timid), 

Vestis, IS, garment (vest). 

203. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Privatum aedificmrn incenclit. 2. Eeliqna 
privata aeclificia incenderant. 3. Puellae vestem sue- 
riint. 4. Patres anniierant. 5. Milites -urbeni defende- 
rant. 6. Eomani -arbem defenderunt. 

7. Eeliquas legiones in acie constituit. 8. Ursi in 
antro dormivernnt. 9. Agricola per nrbem ambulavit. 
10. Non respuit conditionem Caesar. 11. Diem conci- 
lio constituerunt. 12. Diem concilio constitnerit. 13. 
Servus viam monstraverat. 14. Puer mortem timuit. 
"15. HumoMum^ est mortem timere. 16. ImpiV est 
iidem violare. 

(l) 1. The king has appointed a day for the battle. 
2. They had appointed a day for the council. 3. The 
soldiers defended the building. 4. They had defended 
the poet's house. 5. The queen assented. 6. The 
king had not assented. 

7. The good boy will walk in the city. 8. The poet's 
daughter had walked through the great city. 9. They 
will set the house of the poet on fire. 10. It is the duty"^ 
of a good man to defend the house of a 'friend. 11. 
The avaricious (man) will build a small house. 12. 
They will not defend the house of the avaricious. 13. 
Thej^ will not reject the condition. 14. Caesar had re- 
jected the terms. 15. He will have arranged his sol- 



96 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [204—206. 

diers in order of battle. 16. They liad arranged their 
soldiers in order of battle. 



LESSON XXXYIL 



Third Conjugation. — Class II. — Second ^oot formed hy 
adding s to the First. 

204. Verbs of the third conjugation which have the 
first root in a consonant, generally form the second 
from it by the addition of 5; e. g., 

Carpere, to pluch; 1st root^ carp; 2d roo% carp5. 
Eepere, 2^0 creep ; ^^ rep; " rep5. 

Rem. — When h stands at the end of the first root, it is changed into 
p before s in the second ; e. g., 

Scribere, to write ; scrib ; scrips (not scribs), 
JN'ubere, to marry ; nub ; nups (not nubs). 

205. An adjective modifying the subject is some- 
times used in Latin instead of an adverb modifying the 
verb ; e. g., 

Portam invitus clandet. 
{Lat Id.) The gate unwilling he will shut {adj.). 
{Eng. Id.) He will shut the gate unwillingly (adv.). 



206. Vocabulary. 




Carpere, carps, 


to pluck, to card, to gather. 


-Deglubere, deglups, 


to flay. 


Lana, ae. 


wool. 


Ludere, lus. 


to play. 


Malus, a, um, 


bad. 


OvTs, IS, 


sheep. 


Scribere, scrips, 


to write. 


Uva, ae. 


grape. 



207, 208.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJUGATION. 97 

207. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Caius epistolas sua manu scripsit. 2. Puella 
epistolam sua manu scripserat. 3. Pueri lanam carpse- 
runt. 4. Malus pastor degiupsit oves. 

5. Facile est"^ lanam carpere. 6. Pater meus fidem 
servaverat. 7. Turpe est fidem suam non servare. 8. 
Sapientis est ^ virtutem magni aestimare. 9. Virtutem 
magni aestimaverint. 

(b) 1. The boy has written a letter in Ms own hand. 
2. The girl had written letters in her own hand. 3. 
They wrote letters. 4. The girl has plucked a flower. 
5. The shepherd's daughter had gathered flowers with 
her own hand. 

6. The boy will pluck the grape. 7. It is easy to 
pluck the grape. 8. The girls were gathering flowers. 
9. They had gathered flowers. 10. It is easy to gather 
flowers. 11. The slaves will card the wool. 12. They 
will have carded the wool. 13. In winter the bear 
will sleep in the cave. 14. In summer the girls will 
play in the garden. 



LESSON xxxvni. 

Third Conjugation. — Class II., continued, — Second 
Eoot formed hy adding s to the First. 

208. "When a Z?-sound (c, g^ h, qu) stands at the end 
of the first root, it generally unites, in the second, with 
the 5 which is added, and forms x (i. e. C5, gs^ hs^ or qus 
becomes x) ; e. g., 

* What ia the subject of est ^ (608, 2.) 

5 



98 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 



[209. 



Cingere, to surround ; cing, cinx {cings). 

Tegere, to cover; teg, tex (tegs), • 

Trahere, to draiu ; trah, trax (trahs), 

C5qiiere, to cooh ; . - coqu, cox (coqus). 

a) In a very few verbs gu and v must be treated as 
^-sounds in tlie formation of tlie second root ; e. g., 

Exstinguere, to extinguish ; exsting'^^, extincc. 
Vivere, to live; ViVj yix. 

h) Fluere, to flow, and struere, to build, together with 
their compounds, have tlie second root in x, as if the 
first ended in a ^-sound, as probably it did originally. 

c) The ^-sound is sometimes dropped before s in the 
second root; e. r'., 



Spargere, to scatter ;, 


sparg, 


spars. 


Mergere, to merge; 


merg, 


mers. 


Parcer( 


3, to spare; 


pare, 


pars. 


209. YOCABULARY. 






Cibus, I, 


food. 






Cingere, cinx, 


to surround. 






Complere, ev, 


to fill 




(corr^Iement), 


Coquere, cox, 


to cook, to bake, to ripen. 




Dicere, dix, 


to say- 




(diction). 


Habere, habu, 


to have 




(habit). 


Illustrare, av. 


to illuminate, to 


enlighten. 




Mendacium, T, 


lie, falsehood 




(mendacious). 


Multa (neut pi). 


, many (things). 






Multus, a, lim. 


much, jpL many. 






Pallium, I, 


cloak 




(to palliate). 


Peccare, av. 


to sin, to do wrong. 




Prudentia, ae. 


prudence. 






Simiilatio, onis, 


assumed appearance, pretence (dissimulation) 


Stultitia, ae, 


folly 




(stultify). 



210.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJUGATION. 99 

SummuSj a, um, highest, greatest (summit), 

Tegere, tex, to cover. 

Violare, av, to violate, to break • (violation). 



210. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Puer dixit. 2. Caius, homo vita indigniis, 
dixerat. 3. Puellae dixernnt. 4. Fkimen iirbem 
cinxit. 5. Flumina urbes cinxerunt. 6. Amicus 
amici corpus suo pallio texit. 

7. Prudentiam simulatione stultitiae texerat. 8. 
Summam prudentiam simulatione stultitiae texerunt. 
9. Christiani non est mendacio culpam tegere. 10. 
Turpe est peccare. 11. Turpe est mendacio culpam 
tegere. 12. Sol cuncta sua luce illustraverat. 13. 
Caius leges civitatis violaverit. 

(h) 1. The woman has surrounded her head with a 
garland. 2. The slave has surrounded his head with 
a garland. 3. They had surrounded their heads with 
garlands. 4. The boy had said nothing. 5. The girl 
cooked the food. 6. They had cooked the food. 

7. The king had surrounded the city with a wall. 
8. They will surround the city with a wall. 9. They 
covered the fault with a lie. 10. It is disgraceful to 
cover a fault with a lie. 11. The slave had covered 
his master's body with a cloak. 12. The slave had 
said many (things). 13. The sun fills all things with 
its light. 14. It is the business of the slave'' to cook 
food for his master. 15. It is never useful to lose time, 
16. He will lose much pleasure.* 17. How much 
pleasure will he lose ? 



100 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [211 — 213. 

# 

LESSON XXXIX. 

Tliird Conjugation. — Class II., continued. — Second Root 
formed hy adding s to the First. 

211. Whenever a i-sound {d or t) stands at tlie end 
of tlie first root, it is generally dropped before s in tlie 
second, and the preceding vowel, if short, is length- 
ened; e. g., 

Clandere, to shut; eland, clans (claucZs). 
Amittere, to lose; amitt, amis (ami^s). 
Dividere, to divide; divid, divis (divirfs). 

212. When a limiting nonn denotes some character- 
istic or quality of the nonn which it limits, it is always 
accompanied by an adjective, and is pnt either in the 
genitive or ablative ; e. g., 

Pner eximiae pnlchritndmis. 
Pner eximia pnlchritiidine. 
A boy of remarkable beanty. 

213. Combining the above with the rnle already 
given (65), we have the foUomng 

EuLE OF Syntax. — A nonn limiting the meaning 
of another, nonn is pnt, 

1) In the same case as that nonn, when it denotes 
the same person or thing ; as, Latinii^ rex^ 
Latinns the king. 

2) In the genitive, v/hen it denotes a different _ 
person or thing; as, Eegis flliiis, the hinges 
son: except 

(a) When it denotes character oy quality; it is then 
accompanied hj an adjective, and is pnt either in the 
genitive or ablative ; as, Paer eximiae i^ulchritudiwis ; 



214 — 216.] VERBS. — THIRD CONJUGATIOjS-. 101 

or, Puer eximid pulchritudme^ a boy of remarkable 
beauty. 

214. EuLE OF SyjSTTAX. — Yerbs of accusing^ convict- 
ing^ acquitting^ warning^ and the like, take the accusa- 
tive of the person and the genitive of the crime, 
charge, &c, ; e. g.;, 

Caiiim proditionis accusant. 
( Caius of treachery they accuse.) 
They accuse Caius of treachery.^ 

Rem.- — Here 2^r6diti6nis is in the genitive, by the above rule. 

215. {Eng. Id.) To condemn to death. 

{Lat. Id?) To condemn of the head {cdpitis).\ 

216. Vocabulary. ' 



AccQsare, av, 


to accuse. 




Ambitus, us, 


bribery. 




Amittere, amis. 


to lose. 




Capitis {gen.), 


of the head, to death 


(capital). 


Claudere, claus, 


to shut 


{close). 


Damn are, av, 


to condemn. 




Facies, el. 


face, appearance. 




Furtfim, I, 


theft 


{furtive). 


Ingeniilm, i. 


talent, ability 


{ingenious). 


Ludere, los, 


to play. 




Nunquam, 


never. 




Proditio, onis, 


treachery. 




Salt are, av, 


to dance. 




Vir4 virl, 


man, hero. 





^ This genitive is not properly governed by the verb, but by a noun 
understood ; thus, if we supply crimine with proditionis in the example, 
the sense will not be changed ; as, ' They accuse Caius with the charge 
of treachery.' 

f We may suppose that it was originally, " to condemn to the loss of 
the head f^ or, ''to the punishment of the head." 

\ Homo, G. homims, and vir are both man: but homo is man as 
opposed to other animals ; that is, a human being : whereas vir is man 



102 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [217. 

217. Exercises. " 

(a) 1. Portas nrbis clauserant. 2. Cams mnltnm 
temporis amisit. 3. Cains, vir summo ingenio, mul- 
tum temporis amisit. 4. Balbum ambitus accusave- 
rant. 5. Pueri in prato luserunt. 

6. Balbum capitis damnabunt. 7. Cliristiani est 
avaritiam damnare. 8. Caium accnsavit. 9. Caium, 
summo ingenio virum, proditionis accusaverat. 10. 
Facile est saltare. 11. Difficile est iram placare. 12. 
Facile est pueri animum dono placare. 13. Ursus in 
antro dormivit. 14. Hieme ursi in antris dormiunt. 
15. Nunquam utile est peccare. 

Q)) 1. The slave lias shut the gates of tlie city. 2. 
They will accuse the slave of treachery. 3. Caius had 
accused the slaves of theft. 4. He will have lost much, 
time.^ 5. Balbus, a man of the greatest virtue, has 
praised the fidelity of the slave. 6. Balbus, a man en- 
dued with the greatest virtue, has accused the boy of 
theft. 

7. They have accused Balbus of bribery. 8. They 
had accused Balbus, a man of the greatest virtue, of 
bribery. 9. The sun had illuminated all things with, 
its light. 10. The sun will have filled the world with 
its light. 11. They have written the letters with their 
own hands. 12. The queen had written a letter witli 
her own hand. 13. He covered his face with his cloak. 
14. They had covered their faces with their cloaks. 

as opposed to woynan. — When men means human beings, men generally 
(including hoth sexes), it should be translated bj homines. — When man 
is used contemptuously, it should also be translated by homo, because thai 
word says nothing better of a person than that he is a human being. — 
When man is used respectfully, with any praise, &c., it should be trans- 
lated by vir. 



218, 21?.] FORMATION OF SECOND ROOT. 



103 



LESSON XL. 

Formation of the Second Root. — First Irregularity- 
Radical voiuel lengthened (and often changed). 

218. Eegular Endings of the Second Eoot of Verbs, 



Conj. I. 



Cmij, II. 
u {or ev). 



Conj. 111. 
s, or like 1st root. 



Conj. IV. 



Rem. — The above table presents only the regular endings of the 
second root; there are, however, several irregularities in the 
formation of that root which we must notice. 

219. Some verbs in eacb.'^ of the four conjugations 
form the second root by lengthening the vowel of the 
first; e. g., 



Jiivare, to assist; 


j^v, 


juv. 


Videre, to see ; 


vid, 


vid. 


Edere, to eat; 


ed. 


ed. 


Venire, to conie; 


ven, 


ven. 



1) In the third conjugation, 
a) If the first root has a, the second will have e, 
h) J/and n are often dropped before a final mute ; e. g., 

Capere, to take ; cap, cep {a changed to e). 

{n dropped, and 
a changed to e). 
Eumpere, to hurst ; rump, rup (m dropped). 
Vincere, to conquer ; vine, vie {n dropped). 



cap, cep 
Erangere, to break ; frang, freg 



* In the first and fourth conjugations, juvare, Idvclre, venire, and their 
compounds, are probably the only instances. 



104 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[220, 221. 



220. VOCABULABY, 



Brachium, I, 


arm. 




Capere, cep. 


to take, to receive. 




Cibus, T, 


food. 




Emere, em, 


to buy. 




Exercitus, us, 


army. 




Foediis, erls, 


treaty 


(federal). 


Frangere, freg. 


to break 
i a Gaul, an inhabitant of Gaul, 
( now France. 


(fragile). 


Gallus, i, 




Lavare, lav, 


to wash 


(lave). 


Mel, mellis, 


hone3^ 




Miles, itiSj 


soldier 


(military), 


Nemo, inis,* 


nobody, no one. 




Quia, 


because. 




Rumpere, rQp, 


to break, to violate. 




Semper, 


always. 




Utilis, e. 


useful 


(utility). 


Venire, veil, 


to come. 




Videre, vid. 


to see 


(visible). 


Vinculum, I, 


chain. 

221. Exercises, 





(a) 1. Balbiis man us lavit. 2. Pueri manus lave- 
rant. 3. Agricola exercitiim vidit. 4. Milites vene- 
runl^ 5. Cains bracliiiLm suum fregerat. 6. Quantum 
voluptatis ceperunt ! 

7. Wunquam utile est foedus rumpere. 8. Nunquam 
utile est fidem yiolare, quia semper est turpe. 9. Fa- 
cile est puerorum animos donis placare. 10. Turpe est 
foedera negligere. 11. Galli negligebant foedera. 12. 
Nemo semper laborat. 13. Culpas suas simulatione 
virtutis texit. 14. Multum voluptatis ceperant. 15. 



* The gea neminis and abl. nemme are not in good use. 



222.] FOKMATION OF SECOND EOOT. 105 

Mnltum voliiptatis amiserant. 16. Quantum cibi 
amiseriiiit ! 

{b) 1. Gains lias broken his arm. 2. They had broken 
their arms. 3. The king had broken the treaty. 4. 
The Ganls had broken the treaty. 5. Caesar had seen 
the army. 6. The girls will have seen the queen. 7. 
Caesar conquered the Gauls. 8. The Gauls did not 
conquer Caesar. 

9. It is disgraceful to break a treaty. 10. It is diffi- 
cult to conquer the Gauls. 11. It is not easy to con- 
quer the enemy. 12. He had appeased • Balbus. 13. 
They will break their chains. 14. Thej^ had broken 
their chains. 15. It is easy to break (one's) arm. 16. 
They are losing much money. 17. They had lost 
much money. 18. They were losing much pleasure. 
19. They will condemn Balbus to death (215). 20. 
He had conquered his enemies. 



LESSON XLI. 



Formation of the Second Hoot — Second Irregidarity— 
Reduplication. 
222. A FEW verbs of the first, second, and third 
conjugations, form the second root by prefixing to the 
first their initial consonant, with the following vowel 
or with e ; e. g.. 

Dare, to give ; d, ded, 

Mordere, to lite; mord, momord. 

Currere, to run ; curr, ciicurr. 

Rem. — The radical vowel is also sometimes changed ; as, cadere, to 
fall ; 2d root, cecid {d changed to i), 

5* 



106 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [223, 224 

223. YOCABULARY. 

Ab (j}rep, with abl.)^ from. 

Auctumnus, I, autumn. 

Barb a, ae, beard. 

Color, oris, color. 

Currere, ciicurr, to run. 

Dare, ded, to give. 

Finis, IS, m. or/. end. 

Humerus, I, shoulder. 

Mordere, momord, to bite. 

Mutare, av, to change. 

Nox, noctis, night. 

Pendere, pepend, to hang (intrans.). 

Per {prep, with accus.), through. 

Sagitta, ae, arrow. 

Tondere, totond, to shear, shave. 

224. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Equus per urbem cucurrit. 2. Sagittae ab 
humero pependerunt. 3. JSTox proelio (648) finem 
dedit. 4. Mains pastor oves non totondit. 5. Malus 
pastor deglupsit oves ; non totondit. 

6. Boni pastoris^ est tondere oves, non deglnbere. 
7. Pastores agricolas riserunt. 8. Lnpus boni pastoris 
ovem momorderit. 9. Boni canis^ non est oves mor- 
dere. 10. Servns portas nrbis clauserit. 11. Pueri 
regis sceptrnm videbnnt. 12. Lusciniae colorem muta- 
bunt. 13. Anctumno Insciniae colorem suum mntave- 
rint. 

(b) 1. The dog lias bitten tbe sbeep. 2. Yonr dog 
had bitten the girl. 3. My horses have been running 
(have run). 4. Balbus has given his dog to your son. 
5. They had given their dogs to the shepherd. 

6. The wolf had bitten the sheep. 7. The shepherd 
will shear his sheep. 8. A shepherd does not shear 



225;] FORMATION OF SECOND ROOT. 107 

his sheep in the winter. 9. The wolves have bitten my 
dog. 10. Cains will shave (his) beard. 11. The cloak 
was hanging from (his) shonlder. 12. The dog has 
bitten the wolf. 13. They wrote the letter. 14. Bal- 
bus had shaved (his) beard. 15. The girls have pluck- 
ed flowers in Caius's garden. 16. The girls will walk 
in the garden. 17. The queen was walking through 
the city. 18. They have surrounded the city with 
walls. 19. They have offended-against the laws of 
their country. 



LESSON XLII. 



Formation of the Second Root, — Third Irregularity--^ 
Second root after the analogy of other conjugations. 

225. A FEW verbs in each conjugation form the se- 
cond root according to the analogy of one or more of 
the other conjugations. 

1) A few in the first conjugation follow the 
analogy of the second ; e. g., 

Micare, to glitter: 1st root, mic ; 2d root, micib, 

2) A few in the second follow the analogy of the 
third; e. g., 

Eidere, to laugh ; 1st root, rid; 2d root, ris (rids). 
JjVigQTQ^ to mourn ; '^ lug; '^ lux (higs), 

3) A few in the third follow the analogy of the 
second or fourth ; e. g., 

Colem^ to till ; 1st root, col; 2d root, colu. 
Te1j&re^ to seek ; " pet; " petlv. 



108 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [226—228. 

4) A few in the fourth follow the analogy of the 
second or third ; e. g., 

Aperire, to open; 1st root, dper; 2d root, opem. 
Vincire, to hind; *' vine ; " vinx (cs). 

Rem. — Verbs of the third conj. "wliich have the 1st root in sc, together 
with a few others, generally change the consonant-ending of the 
1st root into v in the 2d ; as, crescere, to increase; 1st root, cresc ; 
2d, crev. Most of these verbs are supposed to have been derived 
from pure roots. 

226. EuLE OF Syntax.— Length of time is gener- 
ally expressed by the accnsative ; e. g., 

Caiiis annUm unum yixit. 
(Caius year one lived.) 
Cains lived one year, 

227. EuLE OF Syntax.— The name of a town (91) 
where any thing is or is done, if of the first or second 
declension, and singular number, is put in the genitive ; 
otherwise, in the ablative ; e. g., 

1. Caius anniim uniim Cortonae vixit. 
Caius lived one year at Cortona. 

2. Caiiis annum uniim Tlhure vixit. 
Caius lived one year at Tihur. 

Rem. — In these examples, Cortonae and Tlhure are names of towns ; 
the first is put in the genitive, because it is of the first declension, 
and sing. Dumber, and the second in the ablative, because it is of 
the third declension. 

228. Vocabulary. 

Amittere, amis, to lose. 

Annus, I, year. 

Aperire, aperu, to open, to uncover. 

Biennium, two years, space of two years, 

Caftti^are, av, to chastise. 



229.] FOKMATION OF SECOND EOOT. 109 

InvltuSj a, urn, unwilling. 

Liigere, lux, to grieve, mourn, weep for. 

Manere, mans, to remain. 

Matrona, ae, matron. 

Roma, ae, Rome, 

a city of Italy ^ on the Tiber, 
Tlbiir, uris, Tibur, 

a town in Laiium, in Italy. 
Totus, a, urn (g. lus), the whole, the entire. 

229, Exercises. 

(a) 1. Balbus multos annos Eomae manserat. 2. 
Biennium Carthagine manserant. 3. Mater luxerit. 
4. Matronae luxerunt. 5. Brutum Eomanae matronae 
luxerunt. 6. Pastores agricolas riserunt. 7. Pueri 
capita aperuerunt. 

8. Dominus servi sui epistolam aperiet. 9. Domin-as 
servi sui epistolas aperuerat. 10. Aliquid temporis* 
in Vitus (205) amittet. 11. Christiani est neminem vio- 
lare. 12. Neminem violavit. 13. Biennium Eomaa 
manebit. 14. Biennium Carthagine manebunt. 

(b) 1. They remained at Tibur many years. 2. Caius 
remained at Carthage for the space-of-two-years. 3. 
He has opened his father's letter. 4. They had opened 
the letters at Carthage. 

5. My father will remain at Kome the whole win- 
ter. 6. He wrote the letters at Eome. 7. They are 
mourning for *" their son. 8. They have been in mourn- 
ing two years. 9. The girls wore mourning for ^ their 
mother. 10. My father values industry very highly. 

11. Balbus has accused the shepherd's son of theft. 

12. They have accused Caius of bribery. 



110 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [230 — 234 

LESSON XLIIL 

Subjunctive Mood, 

230. The Subjunctive Hood represents the action or 
state expressed by the verb, not as a fact^ but simply 
as Si possibility^ wish, or conception of the mind; e. g., 

She may write, 
may he write, 
let him write. 

_ T-^ ^ ^ T ^ (he has come that he may write. 

2. V enit ut scribat, \. . _, ., 

' ( he has come to lurite. 

Rem. — Scribdt in the above examples is in the present subjunctive. 

231. The present subjunctive, when not preceded by 
ilt^ generally expresses either a wish (to be translated 
by may he)^ or a command (to be translated by let 
him^ &c.). 

232. If the wish or command is to be expressed neg- 
atively^ ne (never non) must be used with the subjunc- 
tive ; e. g., 

Ne piitet, let him not think. 

233. The tenses of the subjunctive mood*^ are the 
present^ imperfect^ perfect^ and pluperfect. 

234. The endings of the third persons sing, of the 
tenses of the subjunctive are as follows : 





Present. 


Imperfect. 


Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 




(1st root.) 


(1st root.) 


(2d root.) 


(2d root.) 


Conj. 


I. et. 


aret, 


erit, 


isset. 


Conj. 


II. eat. 


eret, 


erit, 


isset. 


Conj. 


III. at. 


eret, 


erit, 


isset. 


Conj. 


IV. lat, 


iret, 


erit. 


isset. 



* The subjunctive has no futures. 



235, 236.] 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Ill 



Rem. — The third persons pluji-al of the several tenses of the subjunc- 
tive are formed by inserting n before t in the ending of the third 
singular. 

235. The English, signs corresponding to the Latin 
subjunctive are as follows: 



Present, may or can. 

Imperfect, might, could, would, or should. 

Perfect, may have. 

Pluperfect, might, could, would, or should have. 



236. Partial Paradigm of the Subjunctive Mood. 


FIRST CONJUGATION. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Pres. Am-et, 

he may or can love. 


Am-ent, 

they may or can love. 


Imp. Am-aret, 

he might, &c. love. 


Am-arent, 

they might, &c. love. 


Perf. Amav-erit, 

he may have loved. 


Amav-erint, 

they may have loved. 


Plup. Amav-isset, 

he might, cfec. have loved. 


Amav-issent, 

they might, &c. have loved. 


SECOND CONJUGATION. | 


Pres. Mon-eat, 

he may or can advise. 


Mon-eant, 

they may advise. 


Imp. Mon-eret, 

he might, <fec. advise. 


Mon-erent, 

they might, &c. advise. 


Perf. Monu-erit, 

he may have advised. 


Monu-erint, 

they may have advised. 


Plup. Monu-isset, 

he might, &c. have advised. 


Monu-issent, 
they might, ho,, have advised. 


THIRD CONJUGATION. | 


Pres. Reg-at, 

he may rule. 


Reg-ant, 

they may rule. 


Imp. Reg-eret, 

he might, <fec. rule. 


Reg-erent, 

they might, <fec. rule. . 


Perf. Rex-erit, 

he may have ruled. 


Rex-erint, 

they may have ruled. 


Plup. Rex-isset, 

h^ might, &c. have ruled. 


Rex-issent, 

they mighty <fec. have ruled. 



112 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [237. 

PARADIGM — cont Inued. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 


Singular. 


Plural 


Pres. Aud-Iat, 

he may hear. 


Aud-iant, 

they may hear. 


Imp. Aud-ii-et, 

he might, &c. hear. 


And-irent, 

they might, <fec. hear. 


Per£ Audiv-erit, 

he may have heard. 


Audiv-erint, 

they may have heard. 


Plup. Audiv-isset, 

he might, (fee. have heard. 


Audiv-issent, 

they might, Ac. have heard. 
ft 



237. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Scribat. 2. ISTe scribant. 3. Serviis claiidat 
portas. 4. Pueri ne clandant portas. 5. Oantet puella. 

6. Ludant Pueri. 7. Pater scriberet. 8. Scripsissent. 
9. Filium suum sepeliret. 10. Sepeliat filium._ 

11. Placet pueri animnm. 12. Ne multa discat. 13. 
Fidem suam servavit. 14. Fidem suam servavissent. 
15. Fidem suam inviti servaverunt. 16. Pueram in 
urbe sepeliverunt. 17. Patres filios sues docuerant. 

(5) 1. Let the slaves shut the gates of the city. 2. 
Do not let the slave see the letter. 3. Let him write 
a letter. 4. He might have come. 5. They may have 
read the book. 6. He would have broken his arm. 

7. Do not let the dog bite the boy. 

8. Balbus has kept his word. 9. He would have 
broken his word. 10. Let him appease his father's 
anger. 11. He remained at Carthage many years. 

12. They would have remained at Eome two years. 

13. They had remained in the city one year. 14. Let 
fathers teach their sons. 



288—242.] SUBJUNCTIVE mood. 113 

LESSON XLIY. 
Subjunctive Mood, — Purpose. 

238. The present and imperfect subjunctive in Latin 
are often used to express a purpose. 

239. The infinitive often denotes purpose in English, 
but never in Latin ; accordingly, in expressions of pur- 
pose, the idioms of the two languages are entirely dis- 
tinct from each other, and should be carefully studied. 



240. Eng, Id. 



I have come to see you. 
I came to see you. 



^ ^ j I have come that I may see you. 
1 1 came that I might see you. 

241. When a purpose is to be expressed affirma- 
tively, ut is used with the subj., when negatively, 
ne ; e. g., 

1. Balbiim rogat ut puerum docedt. 
{Balhus he asks that the boy he may teach.) 

He asks Balbus to teach the boy. 

2. Balbiim rogat ne puerum docedt. 

He asks Balbus not to teach the boy. 

242. The subjunctive expressing purpose must be in 
the present tense ; unless the verb on which it depends 
is in a past tense {imperfect^ perfect indefinite^ or pluper- 
fect)^ and then it must be in the imperfect. 

Rem. — The perfect definite (193, Rem.), or perfect with have (which 
denotes that the action has been done in a period of time still 
present), is considered a present tense, and followed by the pres- 
ent subjunctive. 



114 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [243 — 245. 

243. Examples. 

1. Venit "lit portas claudat. 

{He is coming that the gates he raay shut.) 
He is coming to shut the gates. 

2. Yenit (indef.) iit portas clauderet. 
{He came that the gates he might shut.) 

He came to shut the gates. 

3. Venit (def.) iit portas claudat. 

{He has come that the gates he may shut.) 
He has come to shut the gates. 

Ee:m:. 1. — In the 1st example the subjunctive is in the present tense, 
because the verb venit, on which it depends, is present ; while in 
the 2d, it is in the imperfect, because its verb, venit (came), is in 
the perfect indefinite. 

Rem. 2. — In the 3d example the subjunctive is in the present, because 
the verb venit (has come) is in the perfect definite, and, though in 
form the same as in the 2d example, reaUj expresses different 
time. 

Rem. 3. — The Latin perfect, when followed by the present subjunctive, 
must be translated into English with the sign have, as in example 3. 

244. YOCABULARY. 

Comparare, av, to procure, to raise, to levy. 

Discere, didic, to learn. 

Edere, ed, to eat {edible). 

Evertere, evert, to overthrow, to pull down. 

Legere, leg, to read {legible) . 

Plor^miis, a, um, very much or great, pi., very many. 

Quiescere, quiev, to rest, be quiet {quiescent). 

Rogare, av, to ask, to entreat. 

Vivere, vix, to live {vivid). 

245. Exercises. 
(Construe ut and the subjunctive by the infinitive.) 

(a) 1. Legit ut discat. 2. Legit"^ ut discat. Legit 

ut disceret (242). 3. Edit ut vivat. 4. Edit ut viveret 

_ _ — ^ __» 

* See 243, Rem. 3. 



246, 247.] 



FEKSONS OF VERBS. 



115 



5, Servi veniunt ut portas claudant. 6. Veniat servus 
ut portas Lirbis claudat. 7. Caium rogat iit veniat. 

8. Venit- ut copias comparet. 9. Eomae plurimi 
vivunt ut edant. 10. Cantent puellae. 11. Quiescant 
servi. 12. Veniat Cains at epistolam sua manu scribat. 
13. Yenerat Cains ut Balbi animnm donis placaret. 

{b) 1. He has come to read (241) your letter. 2. 
They came to read your book. 3. They will come to 
accuse the judge of theft. 4. The boy will come to 
give his sister a garland. 

5. Let the slaves shut the gates. 6. Do not let your 
dog bite the boy. 7. They had come to raise forces. 
8. The enemy will think little^ of your forces. 9. He 
had come to surround the girl's head with a beautiful 
garland. 10. Let boys prize wisdom very highly. 



LESSON XLV. 
Persons of Verbs. — Indicative Mood, — First Conjugation. 

246. It will be remembered that verbs have three 
persons (12): these are distinguished from each other 
by certain terminations called Personal Endings. 

247. The three persons may be formed in the per- 
fect indicative (which is somewhat irregular) by chang- 
ing it, of the third person singular, into the following 

PERSONAL ENDINGS. 



Singular. 

1 St Pers. 2d Pers. 3d Pers. 

1, istT, it. 



Plural. 
1st Pers. 2d Pers. 3d Pers. 

imus, istis, erunt (or er«). 



116 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[248. 



248. In all the tenses^ of the indicative and sub- 
junctive moods, except the perfect indicative, the three 
persons may be formed by changing t of the third sin- 
gular into the following 



PERSONAL ENDINGS. 



1st Pers. 
m, O, 



Singular. 
. 2d Pers. 3d Pers. 
S, t. 



1st Pers. 
mus, 



Plural. 

2d Pers. 

tis, 



3d Pers. 
nt. 



a) The ending o, for the first person singular, belongs to the 
indicative present, future perfect, and, in the first and second conju- 
gations, to the future. The vowel which stands before i in the 
third person is dropped before o in the first person, except in the 
present of the second and fourth conjugations (and in a few verbs 
of the third) ; e. g., 



Sd Person. 
Pres. 1st Conj. Amat, he loves, 
" 2d " Monet, he advises, 
* 3d " Regit, he rules, 
" 4th " Audit, he hears, 



1st Pei'so7i, 
amo (ci dropped), Hove. 
moneo (e not dropped), I advise, 
rego (I dropped), I rule. 
audio (I not dropped), / hear. 



b) The ending m, for the first person singular, belongs to the 
indicative impeifect, plupeifect, and, in the third and fourth conjuga^ 
tions, to the future, and to the subjunctive throughout all its tenses. 
In the future of the third and fourth conjugations, the vowel e, which 
stands before t in the third person, is changed into a before m in 
the first person ; e. g., 

3c? Person. \st Person. 

Imperf. Amabat, he was loving, amabam, I loas loving. 

Pluperf. Aniaverat, he had loved, amaveram, / had loved. 

Put. 3d Conj. Reget, he will rule, regain, I will rule. 

" 4th " Audiet, he will hear, audiam, / will hear. 

* "We of course speak only of the active voice, as the passive has not 
yet been noticed. 



249j 250.] INDICATIVE MOOD, 117 

c) In the 'present and future tenses of the indicative^ if i stands 
before t in the third singular, it is changed into iu in the third plural, 
in the fourth conjugation, and into u in the other conjugations; e. g,, 

Singular. Plural. 

Fut IstConj. Amabit, 7?,e will love, amabunt, they will love. 

" 2d " Monebit, he loill advise, monebunt, fhey will advise, 

Pres. 3d " Regit, he rules, regunt, they rule. 

" 4th " Audit, he hears, audiunt, they hear, 

249. The vowel before the personal endings mus 
and tis.^ is long in the imperfect and pluperfect of the 
indicative, and in all the tenses of the subjunctive, ex- 
cept the perfect, in which it is common^ (long or 
short). 

250. Paradigm of the Indicative Mood — First Con- 
jugation. 



Amare, to love: 


1st root, dm ; 2d, dmav. 


Present 


(1st root). 


Singidar 

1. Am-o, Hove. 

2. Am-as, thou lovesL 

3. Am-a^, he loves. 




Plural. 

1. Am-amws, we love. 

2. Am-d^tis, ye or you love. 

3. Am-an^, they love. 


Imperfeci 


' (1st root). 


Am-abam, / was loving. 
Am-abas, 

thou wast loving. 
Am-abai;, he was loving. 




Am-abamii5, we were loving. 
Am-aba^i5, 

%je or you were loving. 
Am-aba7z;(, they were loving. 


Future 


(\st root). 


Am-ab6, I shall love. 
Am-abls, thou wilt love. 
Am-abiz;, he will love. 




Am abimzis, we shall love. 
Am-abi^is, ye or you will love. 
Am-abu7i^, they will love. 



* The vowel is also generally considered common before these end. 
ings in the future perfect ; the old grammarians, however, make it lomg. 



118 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 
PARADIGM — continued. 



[251, 252. 



! 
Perfect (2d root). j 


Amav-t, 

/ loved or liave loved. 


Amav-imzzs, 

we loved or have loved. 


Amav-is^I, 

thou lovedst or hast loved. 


Amav-zs^Ts, 

ye or you loved or have loved. 


Amav-z^, 

he loved or has laved. 


AmsiV-erunt (ere), 

they loved or have loved. 


Pluperfect (2d root). 


Amav-eram, I had loved. 


Amav-eramws, we had loved. 


Amav-eras, 

thou hadst loved. 


Amav-era^is, 

ye or you had loved. 


Amav-era^, he had loved. 


Am^Y-erant, they had loved. 


Future Perfect (2d root). j 


Amav-ero, 

/ shall have loved. 


Amav-erimws, 

we shall have loved. 


Amav-eris, 

thou wilt have loved. 


Am^v-eritis, 

ye or you will have loved. 


Amav-erl;^, he will have loved. 


Amav-ermf, they will have loved. 



251. YOCABULARY. 






Ad (prep, with ace.), 


to. 




Ducere, dux, 


to lead 


(duke). 


Hesternus, a, urn, 


of yesterday. 




Incolumis, e, 


safe, uninjured. 




Legatus, 1, 


ambassador 


(legate). 


Mittere, mis, 


to send. 


(mission) 


Praemittere, 


to send before. 




Primus, a, um, 


first 


(prime). 



252. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Yiolabas legem. 2. Violavisti leges. 3. Bal- 
bnm Yocavi. 4. Hesterno die Balbum vocavimus. 5. 
Urbem servavi. 6. Gives incoliimes servavimus. 7. 
Cainm, summo ingenio (213) virum, ambitus accusa- 
veratis. 8. Balbum capitis damnabitis. 



253.] 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



119 



9. Legates ad Caesarem mittunt. 10. Prima luce 
omnem equitatnm praemTsit. 11. Christianiis nemi- 
nem violabit. 12. Neminem violayisti. 13. Miiltos 
annos regnabis. 14. Balbus paryo (181) conteiit"as est. 
15. Servus miilta laude dignus est. 

{b) 1. You have kept your word. 2. I will not 
break my word. 3. You {pi) have violated the laws 
of the state. 4. You (joL) prize money very highly. 
5. We shall condemn avarice. 6. I have never ac- 
cused the queen. 7. We shall accuse the priest of 
treachery. 

8. They appeased the anger of Caesar. 9. We will 
appease your anger. 10. Caesar thought very highly 
of his army. 11. We will send ambassadors to the 
king. 12. It is the duty of a Christian'' to keep his 
word. 13. It is the part of a wise man to be content 
with little. 



LESSON XLYL 

Indicative Mood. — Four Conjugations, — Personal 
Pronouns, 

253. Paeadigm of the Indicative Mood. 



Present 


(1st root), am, is^ &c., loving. 


1 Conj, I. 


Cmij. II. 


Conj, III 


Conj. IV. 


S. iJ Am-6, 


M6n-eo, 


Reg-6, 


Aiid-io, 


2. Am-a5, 


M6n-es, 


Reg-i5, 


Aud-ls. 


3. Am-a^; 


M6n-e^ ; 


Reg-i^- 


Aud-Tz' ; 


P. 1. Am-amws, 


Mhn-emus^ 


^eg-.miLS^ 


AudiAmiis, 


2. Am-atis, 


Mon-e^is, 


Reg-i^is, 


A\x^-\tis, 


3. Am-an^. 


Mon-en^. 


Reg-im^. 


Awdi-mnt. 



120 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 

PARADiGBi — continued. 



[253. 



Imperfect (1st root), was^ did. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


C07lj. I. 

Am-abam, 

Am-aba5, 

Am-aba^ ; 

Am-abamz75, 

Am-aba^is, 

Am-abani(. 


(7o7i;-. II. 
Mon-ebam, 
Mon-ebas, 
Mon-ebaj ; 
Mon-ebamws, 
Mon-eba^i5, 
Mon-eba^z^. 


Conj. III. 
Reg-ebam, 
Reg-ebas, 
Reg-eba?: ; 
Reg-ebamz/s, 
Reg-eba2;i5, 
Reg-eban?:. 


Co7ij. TV. 
Aud-iebam, 
Aud-iebas, 
Aud-ieba^ ; 
Aud-iebamzis, 
Aud-ieba^zs, 
Aud-iebaTz^. 


Future (1st root), shall or will. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Am-abo, 

Am-abi5, 

Am-abi^ ; 

Am-abi?n?/s, 

Am-ab^^fis, 

Am-abun^. 


Mon-ebo, 

Mon-ebis, 

Mon-ebi^ ; 

Mon-ebimzis, 

M6n-eb]2!i5, 

Mon-ebun^. 


Reg-am, 

Reg-es, 

Reg-e^- 

Reg-emz"zs, 

Reg-e^is, 

Reg-e?z^. 


Aud-iam, 

Aud-ie5, 

Aud-ie^ ; 

Aud-iemz^s, 

Aud-ie^zs, 

Aud-ierz^. 


Perfect (2d root), have. 




S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Amav-i, 
Amav-is^i, 
Amav-2^ ; 
Amav-lmf/5, 
Amav-is^Ts, 
Amav-erwn^ or 


Monu-i, 
M6nu-^5^^, 
M6nu-z? ; 
M6nu-i772z/s, 
Monu-is^is, 
MoYm-erunt or 


Rex-r, 
Rex-zs^I, 
Rex-i^ ; 
Rex-^mz/s, 
Rex-zs^zs, 
Rex-erunt or 


AudlV-^, 
AudiY-isti, 
AudiV'it ; 
Audlv-tmzls, 
Audlv-zs^zs, 
Audlv-erzzTz^ or 


1 ere. 


ere. 


ere. 


e?'e. 


Pluperfect (2d root), had. 




S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. \. 

2. 
3. 


Amav-eram, 

Amav-eras, 

Amav-era^ ; 

Amav-erawi^s, 

Amav-era^Is, 

Amav-era?i?. 


Monu-eram, Rex-eram, 
Monu-eras, Rex-eras, 
Monii-era^; ; Rex-era?! ; 
Monu-eramws, Rex-eramws, 
Monu-era^zs, Rex-erai(is, 
M6nu-era?i^. Rex-erazi^. 


Audlv-eram, 

Audlv-eras, 

Audlv-erai! ; 

Audiv-eramzzs, 

Audiv-era^zs, 

Audlv-era?z^. 


Future Perfect (2d root), shall or ^ 


mil have. 


S. L 

2. 

3 
P. L 

2. 

3. 


Amav-ero, 

Amav-erls, 

Amav-erii^; 

Amav-ermws, 

Amav-eri^is, 

Ainav-eriTi^. ^ 


M6nii-er6, ' 
Monu-er-s, j 
Monu-erl^ ; 
M6nu-eri7?2iis, '• 
Monu-eri/Is, ; 
M6nu-eri?zi. i 


Rex-ero, 

Rex-erls, 

Rex-er"^; 

Elex-erimfzs, 

Elex-er/zs, 

Rex-eri?z2!. 


Audlv-erO, 
Audlv-eris, 
x\udlv-erT^ ; 
Audi v-e rim z/.s, 
Audlv-erMs, 
Audlv-eri7z#. 



254 — 258.] SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 



121 



PRONOUNS. 

254. Pronouns are words wMch. supply the place of 
nouns ; as, ego^ I ; tu, tliou, &c. 

255. Pronouns are divided into two classes ; viz., 

1) Suhstantive Pronouns ; as, ego^ tu, &c. 

2) Adjective Pronouns ; as, Azc, this; illSj that. 

256. Substantive Pronouns are three in number, 
viz. : ego, I (which is of course of the first person) ; tu^ 
thou {second person) ; and sul, of himself {third person). 
These from their signification are often called Personal 
Pronouns. 

257. Substantive Pronouns are declined as follows : 





SINGULAR. 






1st Person. 


2d Person. 


3d Person. 


N. 


Ego, /. 


Tu, thou. 




G. 


Mei, of me. 


Tul, of thee. 


^ Sul, of himself, herself 
\ itself 
Sibi, to himself Slc. 


D. 


Mihi, to or for me. 


Tlbi, to or /or thee. 


A. 


Me, me. 


Te, thee. 


Se, himself 


V. 




Tu, thou. 




A. 


Me, with, &LC. me. 


Te, with thee. 


Se, z(Ji^7i himself 




PLURAL. 




N. 


Nos, we. 


Vos, ye or you. 




G. 


Nostrum, ) ^ 
or Nostrt, !"/«''• 


Vestrum, } r 
orVestn, \ "/^/ow. 


SuT, of themselves. 


D. 


Nobis, to us. 


Vobis, to you. 


Sibi, to themselves. 


A. 


Nos, us. 


Vos, you. 


Se, themselves. 


V. 




Vos, ye or ?/ow. 




A. 


Nobis, with us. 


Vobis, with you. 


Se, w'27/i themselves. 



258. As the ending of the verb shows the person of 
its subject, the nominative of pronouns is seldom ex- 
pressed as the subject, except for the sake of emphasis 
or contrast. 



122 



FIRST LATIK BOOK. 



[259, 260. 



259. Vocabulary. 

Agere, eg, to drive, to lead, to do. 

De (jprep. ivitli ahl), from, concerning. 



Dedere, dedid, 


to surrender. 


m 


Demonstrare, av, 


to show, to demonstrate 


(demonstration). 


Ego, 


L 




Err are, av, 


to err 


(error). 


Exponere, exposu, 


to set forth, to explain 


(expose). 


Facere, (io), fee, 


to make, to do, to act. 




Gratia, ae, 


gratitude, favor, pi. thanks. 




Gratias agere, 


to give thanks. 




Iter, itmeris, n. 


journey, route 


(itinerant). 


Judicare, av, 


to judge 


{judicature). 


Occultare, av, 


to conceal 


(occultation). 


Poscere, poposc, 


to demand. 




Res, rei, 


thing, affair, subject. 




Sed, 


but. 




Sensus, us, 


feeling, perception 


(sense). 


Tu, 


thou, you. 
260. Exercises, 





{a) 1. Eem omnem exposui. 2. Brravi. 3. Ego 
de meo sensu judico. 4. Ego misi viros: pueros tu 
misisti. 5. Hesterno die Balbum ad me yocavi. 6. 
Vos judicavistis. 7. Nos judicabimus. 8. Mihi gra- 
tias egistis. 

9. Gains itinera nostra servabat. 10. Fidem enam 
inviti servavernnt. 11. Agricolae est laborare. 12. 
Cains, nt demonstravimns, itinera nostra servabat. 
13. Caesar servos poposcit. 14. Nos servos non 
poposcimns. 

(b) 1. We have read your letters. 2. You were play- 
ing, but /was writing. 3. He lias given me a beauti- 
ful book. 4. He wirll give you {to you) thanks. 5. 
We shall thank you. 6. I had called the boy to me. 



^61.] SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. — FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 123 

7. Yesterday you called tlie girls to you. 8. "We liave 
never opened your letters. 

9. I liave kept my word. 10. You. liave never 
broken your word. 11. They have accused you of 
theft. 12. The judge has condemned us to death (215)„ 
13. We will not accuse you of treachery. 14. We 
shall not remain in the city. 



LESSON XLVII. 



Suhjunctive Mood, — Four Conjugations, 
261. Paradigm of the Subjunctive Mood. 



PRESENT (1st root), may or can. | 


Conj. I. 


Conj. II. 


Conj. III. 


6^071/ IV. 


Am-em, 


Mon-eam, 


Reg-a7?i, 


Aud-iam, 


Am-es, 


M6n-ea5, 


Reg-as, 


Aud-ias, 


Am-e^ ; 


M6n-ea^ ; 


Reg-azJ; 


Aud-ia^ ; 


Am-emMS, 


M6n-eamw5, 


Reg-amfi^s, 


Aud-iam?/s, 


Avu-eiis, 


M6n-eaa'.9, 


Reg-aa's, 


Aud-ia^is, 


Kxn-Qnt 


Mon-eaTz^. 


Reg-a?2t 


Aud-iaTi^. 


IMPERFECT ( 


1st root), raight^ could., won 


?6?, or should. 


Am-arew, 


Mon-erem, 


Reg-erem, 


Aud-irem, 


Am-ares, 


Mon-eres, 


Reg-ere5, 


Aud-n-es, 


Am-are^ ; 


Mon-ere/ ; 


Reg-ere^; 


Aud-Tre^ ; 


Am-aremw5, 


Mbn-eremus, 


Reg-ere??2ws, 


A\\A-\vemus, 


Am-are^is, 


Mon-ev&tis, 


Reg-ere/is, 


Aud-n-e^^Is, 


Am-are/i^, 


Mon-eren^. 


Reg-ere?2z^. 


Aud-Tren^. 


P 


ERFECT (2d root), may hat 


)e. 


Amav-erim, 


Monu-erim, 


Rex-erTm, 


Audlv-erTm, 


Amav-eiis, 


Monu-erls, 


Rex-erl5, 


Audlv-erls, 


Amav-erl^ ; 


Monu-eri^ ; 


Rex-erl^ ; 


Audlv-en^ ; 


Amav-erimz/s, 


Monu-erimii'S, 


Rex-erimiis, 


Audiv-enmi/s, 


Amav-eri^Is, 


Monu-erii(is, 


Rex-eriZl^, 


Audiv-eri^Is, 


Amav-ei'int 


Monu erin^, 


Rex-erinL 


Audlv-eiin^. 



124 



FIRST LATm BOOK. [262 — 265. 

T All ABiGM— continued. 



PLUPERFECT (2d poot), inight^ could^ luould^ or should 
have. 



Conj. I. 

Amav-issem, 

Araav-isses, 

Amav-isse^ ; 

Amav-issemus, 

Amav-isse/is, 

Aniav-issen^. 



Conj. II. 

M6nu-isse??z, 

Monu-isses, 

Monu-isse^ ; 

Monu-issemz/s, 

Monu-isse^Is, 

Monu-is&en^. 



Conj. III. 

Rex-issem, 

Rex-isses, 

Rex-isse^ ; 

Rex-issemzis, 

Rex-isse^Is, 

Rex-isse?i^. 



Conj. ly. 

Audiv-issem, 

Aucllv-isses, 

Audlv-isse/ ; 

Audlv-issemzzs, 

Audlv-issez!ls, 

Audlv-isseTi^. 



Rem. — It will be observed that throughout the subjunctive the 1st 
person sing, ends in m. 

262. The subjunctive with ut is used to express a 
residt; e. g., 

Tantiim est frigiis iit nix non liquescat. 

The cold is so great that the snow does not melt. 

263. The subjunctive with ut^ denoting result, gene- 
rally depends upon a proposition which contains some 
word signifying so^ such^ so great., &c. ; thus, in the above 
example, it depends upon tantum {so great^ or such), 

264. Hence, in turning English into Latin, that after 
so, such, so great, kc, must be translated by ut, and the 
verb which follows must be put in the subjunctive. 
(See example above.) 

265. When the subjunctive depends upon a verb in 
the present, pe7fect definite, or future, it must be put in 
the present tense, unless it represents its action as com- 
pleted at the time denoted by the principal verb ; and 
then it must be in the j)erfect ; e. g., 

1. Tanta est pueri industria iit multa discat. 

The boy's industry is so great that he learns much. 



266 — 268.] SUBJUNCTIVE mood. 125 

* 2, Nescio quid dixerit. 

I do not know what lie lias said. 

Rem. — In tlie first example, the subjunctive discat (learns) is in the 
present tense, because the time of its action is the same as that of 
est (pres.) on which it depends, and in the second example dixerit 
(he has said) is in the perfect, because it represents its action as 
completed at the time denoted by nescio (i e. pres.). 

266. When the siibjnnctiye depends upon a verb in 
the imperfectj perfect indefinite^ or pluperfect^ it must be 
put in the imperfect tense, unless it represents its action 
as completed at the time denoted by the principal verb, 
and then it must be in \hQ pluperfect ; e. g., 

1. Tanta erdt pueri industria iit multa disceret. 

The boy's industry was so great that he learned 
much. 

2. Nescivi quid dixisset 

I did not hnow what he had said. 

Rem. — The imperf disceret represents its action as not completed, while 
the pluperfect dixisset represents its action as completed. 

266. A few adjectives in Latin are often used merely 
to specify some particular part of the nouns to which 
they belong ; e. g., 

In summo I on the highest mountain {Lat, Id.), 
monte, I on the top of the mountain {Eng. Id.). 

In mediis ( in the middle waters {lat. Id.). 
aquTs, ( in the middle (or midst) of the waters 

{Eng. Id.). 

268. Vocabulary. 

Alpes, Alpium, Alps. 

Conservare, av, to preserve (conservative), 

Frangere, freg, to break. 



126 FIRST LATIK BOOK. [269. 



Frlgiis, oris. 


cold 


(frigid). 


Ibi, 


there. 




Liquescere, lica, 


to melt 


(liquid). 


Medius, a, urn, 


middle, midst of, middle of (267). 




Nare, av, 


to swim. 




Nondum, 


not yet. 




PisClS, IS, 771., 


fish. 




Summus, a, um, 


highest, top (267) 


(summit), 


Tantiis, a, um, 


so great. 

- 269. Exercises, 





(a) 1, Yenit ut me audiat. 2. Yeni nt yos audiam. 
3. Yenerunt ut nos andiant. 4. Yenerunt nt te aiidi- 
rent. 5. ISTe violetis fidem. 6. In summo monte tan- 
tum est frigus ut nix ibi nnnqnam liqnescat. 

7. In summis Alpibns tantnm erat frigus ut nix ibi 
nunquam liquesceret. 8. Yenit ut patriam auro ven- 
dat. 9. Yenisti ut patriam auro venderes. 10. Avis 
in summa arbor e cantabat. 11. Multum yoluptatis 
ceperam. 

(b) 1. The cold is so great tliat the snow does not 
melt (265). 2. The cold has been so great that the snow 
has not yet melted (265). 3. The cold was so gTcat on 
the top of the mountain that the snow did not melt 
there (266). 4. The cold was so great on the top of the 
Alps that the snow did not melt there (266). 5. I have 
come to learn. 6. You have come to play. 

7. Let him keep his word. 8. Do not break your 
word. 9. Do not sell your country for gold. 10. On 
the top'° of the mountain the snow never melts. 11. 
On the top of the Alps the snow never melts. 12. The 
fish is swimming in the middle ^° of the water. 



270, 271.] 



THIRD COKJUGATION". 



127 



LESSON XLYIII. 

Indicative and Subjunctive Moods^ continued. — Verbs in io 
of the Thirdj Conjugation. — Demonstrative Pronouns. 

270. A FEW verbs of tlie third conjugation are in- 
flected (i. Ce form their tenses, numbers, and persons) 
in the present, imperfect, and future indicative, and in 
the present subjunctive, like verbs of the fourth con- 
jugation. The following is an example. 

Rem. In the present, first and second persons plural, the i in the 
penult is short ; as, capimus^ capitis. 

271. Paradigm of Verbs in io of the Third Conju- 
gation. 



Capere, to take 


; 1st root, cap ; 2d, cep. 


INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 
Cap-io, I take. 
Cap-is, tliou takest. 
Cap-it, lie takes. 


PRES 


ENT, 

Plural. 
Cap-imus, we take. 
Cap-itis, ye or you take. 
Cap-iunt, they take. 




IMPERFECT. 1 


Cap-iebam, / ivas taking. ^ 
Cap-iebas, tliou wast taking. 
Cap-iebat, he was taking. 


Cap-iebamiis, we were taking. 
Cap-iebatis,?/e or you were taking. 
Cap-iebant, they were taking. 




FUTURE. 1 


Cap-iam, I shall take. 
Cap-ies, thou wilt take. 
Cap-iet, he will take. 




Cap-iemiis, we shall take. 
Cap-ietis, ye or you will take. 
Cap-ient, they will take. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Cap-iam, I may take. 
Cap-ias, thou may est take. 
Cap-iat, he may take. 


PRES 


ENT. 

Cap-iamiis, we may take. 
Cap-iatis, ye or you may take. 
Cap-iant, they may take. 



128 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[272—274 



Rem. — The remaining parts of the indicative and subjunctive moods, in 
verbs in io, are entirely regular. 

272. It has been stated (255) that pronouns are di- 
vided into two classes, viz., Substantive Pronouns and 
Adjective Pronouns, 

273. Adjective pronouns are so called, because they 
are sometimes used as pronouns to supply the place of 
nouns, and sometimes as adjectives to qualify nouns. 
These are divided into several classes. 

274. Demonstrative Pronouns^ so called because they 
point out or specify the objects to which they refer, 
are hic^ ille^ iste^ is, and their compounds^ and are declined 
as follows : 







1. Hic, this. 






Singular. 




Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. F. 


N. 


N. Hie, 


haec. 


hoc. 


Hi, hae. 


haec. 


G. Hujus, 


hujils, 


hujus. 


Horum, harum, 


horum. 


D. Huic, 


hulc, 


hulc. 


His, his. 


his. 


A. Hunc, 


banc, 


hoc. 


Hos, has, . 


haec. 


V. 










A. Hoc, 


hae, 


hoc. 


His, his, 


his. 






2. Ille, lie <§t that. 






Singular. 




Plural 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. F. 


N. 


N. Ille, 


ilia, 


illud. 


nil, illae. 


ilia. 


G. Illlus, 


illlus. 


illlus. 


Illorum, illariim. 


illorum. 


D. nil. 


illl, 


ill!. 


nils, illls, 


illls. 


A. Ilium, 

V. 

A. Illo, 


illam. 


illud. 


Illos, illas, 


ilia. 


ilia, 


illo. 


nils, illis. 


illls. 






3. Iste, that. 




Iste, that, is declined like ilU. It usually refers to objects which 


are present to the person addressed, and sometimes expresses contempt. 



275.] 



DEMOKSTKATIYE PEONOUKS. 

PARADIGMS -continued. 



129 







4. Is, he or that. 








(Less specific than ille.) 






Singular. 




Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. F. 


N. 


N. Is, 


ea, 


id. 


It, eae. 


ea. 


G. Ejus, 


ejus. 


ejus. 


Eorum, earum. 


eorum. 


D. El, 


el, 


ei. 


lis or els, iis or eis, 


ils or eTs. 


A. Eum, 


earn, 


id. 


Eos, eas, 


ea. 


V. 










A. Eo, 


ea, 


eo. 

5. Idem, 


Its or els, iTs or eis, 
the same. 


iis or els. 




(Formed by annexing dem to is.) 






Singular. 




Plural. 




M. 


F 


N. 


M, F. 


N. 


N. Idem, 


eadem, 


idem. 


Ildem, eaedem. 


eadem. 


G. Ejusdem, ejusdem, ejusdem. 


EoruDdem,earundem 


,eorundem. 


D. Eldem, 


eidem, 


eldem. 


Eisdem, or eisdem, or eisdem, or 
lisdem, iisdem, iisdem. 


A. Eundem, eandem 


, idem. 


Eosdem, easdem, 


eadem. 


V. 










A. Eodem, 


eadem, 


eodem. 


Eisdem, or eisdem, or 
lisdem, iisdem. 


eisdem, or 
iisdem. 



275. VOCABULAEY. 

Ab (jprejp. with ahl.), 
Castra, orum (plur.), 
Celeriter, 
dementia, ae, 
Confugere (io), confug. 
Cum (prep, with abl.)^ 
Dimittere, dimis, 
Ex (prep, with abl.), 
Impetus, us, 
Imp er at a, orum. 
Locus, I, 
Movere, mov, 

6^ 



from. 

camp. 

quickly. 

mildness, clemency. 

to flee for refuge. 

with. 

dismiss. 

from. 

attack 

commands. 

place, position 

to move, to put in motion. 



(impetus), 
(local). 



130 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [276, 277. 

Postera, um (mas. not used), next, following. 

Postulare, av, to demand. 

Promittere, promis, to promise. 

Promovere, promov, to move forward, to advance. 

Vero, indeed, truly. 

276. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Postero die castra ex eo loco movent. 2. Idem 
facit Caesar. 3. Idem faciebant. 4. Ego vero istiid 
non postiilo. 5. Veni ut legerem. 6. Haec promis- 
istis. 7. Eodem die castra promovit. 

8. Hi primi (205) cum gladiis impetum fecerunt. 
9. lUi imperata celeriter fecerunt. 10. Ibi me non 
occidisti. 11. Eum ab se dimittit. 12. Yenisti ut eum 
videres. 13. Hunc ca]3itis damnabunt. 14. Illos pro- 
ditionis inviti accusaveratis. 

(IS) 1. I will give you this book. 2. We prize tliese 
beautiful books very highlj^ 3. They think very little 
of those beautiful books. 4. You have condemned 
this man to death. 5. I will entreat him not to do 
(that he may not do) this. 

6. I have u.nwillingly condemned him to death. 7. 
We will not accuse you of treachery. 8. You have 
accused him of bribery. 9. Vf e entreated him not to 
accuse his son. 10. AYe did not make the attack. 11. 
They asked us to make an attack. 



LESSON XLIX. 



Indicative and Subjunctive Moods^ continued. — Intensive 
* Pronoun, 

277. The Intensive Pronoun^ ipse^ himself, is so 
called because it is used to render an object emphatic; 



278—281.] 



INTENSIVE PKONOUN. 



131 



it is also called an adjunctive pronoun, because it is 
usually joined to a noun, or to some other pronoun; 
as, Romulus ipse^ Eomulus himself; tu ipse^ you 
yourself. 

278. Ipse^ when joined to a noun or pronoun, may 
sometimes be translated by very ; as, hoc ipsum^ this 
very thing. 

279. Ipse is declined as follows : 





Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. Ipse, 


ipsa. 


ipsum. 


Ipsi, 


ipsae. 


ipsa. 


G. Ipslus 


, ipsius, 


ipslus. 


Ipsoriim, 


ipsarum. 


ipsoriim. 


D. Ipsi, 


ipsi, 


ipsi. 


Ipsis, 


ipsis, 


ipsis. 


A. Ipsum 


, ipsam. 


ipsum. 


Ipsos, 


ipsas, 


ipsa. 


V. 












A. Ipso, 


ipsa. 


ipso. 


Ipsis, 


ipsis, 


ipsis. 



Rem. — Tlie substantive pronouns are rendered intensive by annexing 
the syllable met ; as, egomet, 1 myself. In the substantive pro- 
noun of the thu'd person, sese is used intensively in the accusative 
and ablative of both numbers. 



280. YOCABULARY. 



Accedere, access, 


to approach 


At, 


. but, yet. 


Fortuna, ae. 


fortune. 


Fuga, ae, 


flight. 


Genus, generis. 


kind, nature 


Justus, a, um, 


just, fair. 


Numerus, i, 


number 


Occult are, av. 


to conceal 



Respondere, respond, to answer 



(access). 



(numerous), 

(occult). 

(respond). 



Usque, 



as far as ; usque ad, even to. 



281. Exercises, 
(a) 1. Ipse fuga mortem yitaverat. 2. Ipse ad castra 
hostium accessit. 8. Ipsi usque ad castra hostium 



182 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[282. 



accesserant. 4. Cains sese occult ab at. 5. Servi nostri 
sese occultabunt. 6. Ipse dixit. 7. Hoc ipsum jnstum 
est. 8. At te eadem tua fortuna servavit. 9. Caesar 
liaec promisit. 10. Ad haec legati responderunt. 

{b) 1. He himself accused the son of the king. 2. 
We shall accuse the king himself. 3. You yourself 
gave me this book. 4. They will read this very {ipse) 
book. 5. We ourselves will go to see the queen. 6. 
They have gone to see the queen herself. 

7. You promised this. 8. We will ourselves do the 
same. 9. You have said nothing of (de) the nature of 
the war. 10. We shall say nothing of the war itsel£ 
11. They had come to condemn me to death. 



LESSON L. 



Indicative and Subjunctive Moods^ continued, — Relative 
and Interrogative Pronouns, 

282. The Relative Pronoun^ qul^ who, is so called, 
because it always relates to some noun or pronoun, ex- 
pressed or understood, called its antecedent. It is de- 
clined as follows : 



Singular. 






Plural 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. Qui, 


quae, 


quod. 


Qui, 


quae, 


quae. 


G. Cujns, 


cujus, 


cujus. 


Quorum, 


quarum. 


quorum. 


D. Cm, 


CUT, 


cul. 


Quibus, 


quibus. 


quibus. 


A. Quem, 


quam. 


quod. 


Quos, 


quas, 


quae. 


V. 












A. Quo, 


qua, 


quo. 


Quibus, 


quibus, 


quibus. 



283 — 285.] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 



133 



283. EuLE OF Syntax. — The relative agrees with. 
its antecedent in gender and number ; as, Puer qni 
scribit, the hoy who lurites. 

Rem. — Qui is in the masculine singular, to agree with its antecedent 
puer ; but it is in the no7ninative because it is the subject of 
scribif, and not because its antecedent is in the nominative. 

284. The Interrogative Prononns, qms and qm^ are so 
called because they are used in asking questions. 
Qui (which? what?) is used adjectively^ and is declined 
like the relative. Qms (who? which ? what?) is gen- 
erally used suhstantively^ and is declined like the rela- 
tive, except the forms guis^ quid^ as follows : 



Singular. 






Plural 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F, 


N. 


N. Quis, 


quae, 


quid. 


Qui, 


quae, 


quae. 


G. Cujus, 


cujus, 


cujus. 


Quorum, 


quarum. 


quorum. 


D. Cul, 


CUT, 


CUl. 


Quibus, 


quibus. 


quibus. 


A. Quern, 


quam. 


quid. 


Quos, 


quas. 


quae. 


V. 












A. Quo, 


qua. 


quo. 


Quibus, 


quibus. 


quibus. 



285. Vocabulary. 

Amplius (comp. adv. from ample), 

Cogitare, av, 

Cognoscere, cognov, 

Coram, 

Exspectare, av, 

Nuntius, 1, 

Parvus, a, um. 

Persptcere, perspex, 

Plane, 

Vocare, av, 



more, further. 

to think, to think about. 

to ascertain. 

openly, in person. 

to await, expect. 

messenger. 

little, small. 

to perceive, to see. 

plainly, 

to call. 



134 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [286, 287. 

286. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Quis nos vocabit ? 2. Quid dixisti? 8. Quid 
cogitas? 4. Quid times? 5. Qnis tibi hunc librum 
dedit ? 6. Eadem quae ex nuntiis cognoverat, coram 
perspicit. 7. In qua urbe vivimus? 8. Illi, quod 
nemo fecerat, fecerunt. 9. Quid est quod amplius ex- 
spectes ? 10. Quam urbem liabemus ? 11. Quis Caium 
proditionis (214) accusat? 12. Quern ambitus accusa- 
yisti? 13. Carthagine invitus manebo. 14. Bien- 
nium Eomae inviti manebant. 15. Summam pruden- 
tiam ^mulatione stultitiae texistis. 
• (b) 1. "Whom do you love ? 2.1 see the slave wliom 
you punished. 3. Who has sold his coimtry for gold? 
4. Who gave the boy this beau.tiful book ? 5. Who 
will show me the way ? 6. I will show you the house 
which my father built. 

7. Which book were you reading ? 8. I was read- 
ing the book which you gave me. 9. We all read to 
learn (that we may learn). 10. You have remained at 
Eome many years. 11. How much time you have 
lost ! 



LESSON LI. 



Indicative and Suhjiinctive Moods, continued. — Interroga- 
tive Particles, 

287. Ne and milm are interrogative particles ; and 
when a question has no interrogative pronoun (284) or 
interrogative adverb, one of these particles must be 
used. 



288—290.] INTEREOGATIVE PARTICLES. 



135 



288. If ne is used, it must follow and be joined to 
some other word ; and, if there is a not in the sen- 
tence^ it must be joined to the non (not), making 
nonne ; e. g., 

1. Scribitne Cains ? Is Cains writing? 

2. Nonne scribit ? Is not he writing ? 

3. Num scribit Caiiis ? Is Cains writing ? [No.] 

Rem.— A question with ne and without non asks for information (Ex. 1), 
with non expects the answer yes (Ex. 2), and with nitm expects 
the answer 7io (Ex. 3) ; thus, Num scribit Oaius, means, Caius is 
not writing, is he i 



289. Vocabulary.^ 

Asperger e 5 aspers, sprinkle, 
Ara, ae, altar, 
Auctumnus, i, autumn. 
Construere, construx, to huild, 

construct. 
Immergere, immers, to plunge 

into. 
In (prep, with accus. or abl.), with 



accus., to, into, against; with 

abl., in. 
Nidus, I, nest. 

PerTciilosus, a, um, dangerous. 
Sanguis, mis, m,, blood. 
Semen, inis, seed. 
Spargere, spars, to scatter, to sow. 
Victim a, ae, victim. 



290. Exercises, 

(in construing, omit the ne or num^ but make the sentence a question.) 

(a) 1. Scripsitne Cains ?f 2. Nnm scripseratis ? 8. 
Nnm rex portas urbis sna mann clandet ? 4. Quid 
rides ? 



* It has been thought unnecessary longer to insert Icey-words in the 
Vocabularies, but it is hoped the pupil will still continue to accustom him- 
self to associate with his Latin at least some of the more common Eng- 
lish words which have been derived from it. 

f In construing a question, the auxiliary verb {does, do, did, has, have) 
must be put before the subject; as, Scripsitne puer, Has the hoy written i 
or, Did the hoy write ? 



136 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [291—293. 

5. Cains se in flumen immersit. 6. Periculosum est 
hieme se in flumen immero'ere. 7. Pner se in flninen 

o 

immergat. 8. J.^?^iC(9teru?7i 65^^ semina anctnmno spar- 
gere. 9. Nonne in summis Alpibus tantum est frigus, 
nt nix ibi nnnqnam liqnescat ? 10. Sacerdos victima- 
rum sanguine aram aspersit. 11. ISTonne boni est pas- 
toris'' tondere oves, non deglubere? 

(&) 1. Does tie live to eat ? [I^o.] 2. Does not he 
eat to live ? 3. The husbandman has scattered seeds. 
4. Have not the husbandmen scattered seeds ? 5. He 
has plunged the body into the middle of the ivaters. 6. 
Let fish swim in the midst of the waters, - 7. They have 
come to condemn (239) you to death? 8. Can he swim . 
in the middle of the ivaters?^^ [^o.] 9. The boy's in- 
dustry is so-great, that he can learn all things. 10. 
Has not a wolf bitten the sheep? 11. Are you shear- 
ing the sheep ? 



LESSON LIL 



Indicative and Subjunctive Moods, continued. — Pronouns, 
Indefinite and Possessive, 

291. Indefinite Pronouns are so called because they 
do not definitely specify the objects to which they re- 
fer ; e. g., quiddm^ a certain one ; dliquis, sonie one ; 
quisque, every one ; siquis, if any, &c. 

292. The indefinite pronouns are compounds either of 
quis or qui, and are declined in nearly the sam^e man- 
ner as the simple pronouns. 

293. Quiddm, compounded of qui and dam, is de- 
clined like qui, except in the neuter singular, where it 



294j 295.J INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 



137 



takes qvM (instead of quod) when iised substantively and 
in the accu^tive singular and genitive plural, where 
m before d is changed into n ; as, quendain (not quern- 
ddm)^ quorundam (not qudrumddm). 

294. Aliquis, compounded of dims and qms^ is de- 
clined like qms^ except in the neuter singular, nomina- 
tive and accusative, where it has dUquod adjective, and 
dliquid substantive ; and in the feminine singular and 
neuter plural, where it has dliqud. It is declined as 
follows : 







SINGULAR. 






M. 


F. 


N. 


N. 


Aliquis, 


aliqua, 


aliquod or aliquid. 


G. 


Alicujtis, 


alicujus. 


alicujus. 


D. 


Allcul, 


alicuI, 


alTcuT. 


A. 


Aliquem, 


aliquam, 


aliquod or aliquid. 


V. 








A. 


Aliquo, 


aliqua, 

PLURAL. 


aliquo. 




M. 


r. 


N. 


N. 


AliquT, 


aliquae. 


aliqua. 


G. 


Aliquorura, 


aliquarum. 


aliquoriim. 


D. 


Aliquibus, 


aliquibus, 


aliquibus. 


A. 


Aliquos, 


aliquas. 


aliqua. 


V. 








A. 


Aliquibus, 


aliquibus. 


aliquibus. 



295. The Possessive Pronouns (so called because they 
denote possession), 7neilSj med^ meum ; tuus^ tud^ tudm ; 
suus^ sud^ suu/m ; noster^ nostrd^ nostri^im ; vester^ vestrd^ 
vestrHmj are declined, as we have already seen (114, 
Eem. 8), like adjectives of the first and second declen- 
sion. 



188 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [296—298. 



296. YOCABULARY. 

A (prep, with abl.), from. 
Argentum, I, silver. 
Concilium, I, council. 
Continere, u, to restrain, confine. 
Culpa, ae, fault. 



Indicere,indix, to declare(as war'), 

Infllgere, inflix, inflict. 

St, if 

Ullus, a, um (113, Rem.), any. 

Vulnus, ens, wound. 



297. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Aliqnid temporis invitus amiltes. 2. Non est 
tua "olla culpa, si te aliqui tinmerunt. 3. Aliquis est 
in horto tuo. 4. Caesar snos a proelio continebat. 5. 
Legates ad Caesarem misit. 6. Legati ad concili-am 
venerunt. 7. Christianorum est fidem suam seryare. 
8. Tiirpe est patriae tuae leges violare. 9. Rex nrbi 
bellum indicet. 10. Anguis agricolae vulnus infligebat. 
11. Tanta est industria tua, ut multa discas. 12. Tanta 
fuit industria tua ut multa disceres. 

(h) 1. Some one bas accused you of bribery. 2. They 
liave accused certain persons of tbeft. 3. He will con- 
demn some one to deatb. 4. "We have lost some time. 
5. The shepherd has sold his dog for gold. 6. It is 
the duty of a father to instruct his sons. 7. Who 
has accused you of theft ? 8. No one has accused me 
of theft. 9. Some one has accused you of treachery. 
10. Who has accu.sed me of treachery ? 11. The Mug 
himself has accused you of treachery. 



LESSON LIIL 



Verh. — Esse. 
298. The verb esse^ to be, is called a substantive 
verb, except when used as an auxiliary in the passive 



299.] 



ESSE — TO BE. 



139 



voice (not yet examined) of other verbs. Its conjuga- 
tion is quite irregular. 

299. Paradiofm of the verb Esse. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present (am). 


Singular. 
Sum, I am, 
Es, thou art. 
Est, he is. 


Plural, 
Siimus, we are. 
Est IS, you are. 
Sunt, they are. 


Imperfect {was). 


Eram, I was. 
Eras, thou wast, 
Erat, he was. 


E ramus, we were, 
Eratis, you were, 
Erant, they were. 


Future {shall or will he). 


EyO, I shall he, 
Eris, thou wilt he, 
Erit, he will be. 


Erimus, we shall be, 
Erltis, you will he, 
Erunt, they will be. 


Perfect (have heen or was). 


Fui, / have been, 
Fuisti, ihou hast heen, 

Fuit, he has been. 


Fuimus, we have heen. 
FuistiS, you have been, 

Fuerd?*' ( ^^^y ^"^^^ ^^^^• 


Pluperfect (had heen). 


Fueram, I had been. 
Fueras, thou hadst been, 
Fuerat, he had been. 


Fueramus, ^e had been, 
Fueratis, you had been. 
Fu erant, they had heen. 


Future Perfect {shall or will have been). 


Fuero, / shall have been. 
Fueris, thou wilt have heen. 
Fuerlt, he will have heen. 


Fuerimus, we shall have heen, 
Fueritis, you will have been, 
Fuerint, they will have heen. 



140 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [299. 



PARADIGM- 


—continued. 


1 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present (m 
Singular. 
SiiD, I may he. 
Sis, thou mayest he. 
Sit, he may he. 


ly or can he). 

Plural. 
Simus, ive may he. 
Sltis, you may he. 
Sint, they may he. 


Imperfect (mighty could, would, or should he). 
Essem, I might he. Essemus, we might he. 

Esses, thou mightest he. Essetis, you might he. 
Esset, he might he, Essent, they might he. 


Perfect (m 
Fuerim, I may have heen. 
Fueris, thou mayest have heen. 
Fuerit, he may have heen. 


ay have heen). 

Fuerimus, we may have heen. 
Fuerltis, you may have heen. 
Fuerint, they may have heen. 


Pluperfect (mighty could, ivould, or should have heen). 


Fuissem, I might have heen. 
Fuisses, thou mightest have heen. 
Fuisset, he might have heen. 


Fuissemus, we might have heen. 
Fuissetis, you might have heen. 
Fuissent, they might have heen. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD."^ 


Es, or esto, he thou. \ Este or estote, he ye. 
Esto, let hi?n he. \ Sunto, let them he. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Present, Esse, to he. 

Perfect, Fuisse, to have heen. 

Future, » Futuras (a, urn) esse, to he about to he. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Future, Futurus, a, um, ahout to he. 



* The remainixig forms are given here in order to complete the Par- 
adigm of the verb esse, although the nature and use of the imperative and 
i'nfiititive moods, and of the participles, have not yet been examined ; a 
word of explanation wiU be sufficient for this place. 



300—304.] ESSE— TO BE. 141 

300. The Imperative Mood denotes a command, and 
of course is never nsed in the first person. 

301. The Infinitive Mood^ as we have already seen 
(9), represents simply the meaning of the verb, with- 
out person or number. It has three tenses, present^ 
perfect^ diudi future, 

302. The Participle is that part of the verb which 
has the form and inflection of an adjective; thus, the 
participle /?/^z/TO«s, a, iira^ is declined like the adjective 
bonus ^ 5, Hm (112). 

303. Vocabulary. 



Absolvere, absolv, to acquit. 

Admlratio, onis, admiration. 

Bvevis, e, sliort. 

Digniis, a, um, worthy. 

FeiTum, i, iron. 

Habitare, av, to dwell, to inhabit. 

Honor, oris, honor. 



Incertus, a, um, uncertain. 
Indlgnus, a, um, unworthy. 
Mens, tis, mind, reasoning faculty. 
Opus, eris, work. 
Tranquillus, a, um, calm, tran- 
quil. 
Utilis, e, useful. 



304. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Mens sapientis semper erit tranquilla. 2. Est 
tuum^ iter facere. 3. Puer in horto fuerat. 4. His 
honoribus (181) digni sitis. 5. Caius vita indignus est. 
6. Ferrum et aurum sunt utilia. 7. Haec opera sunt 
admiratione digna. 8. Vita est brevis et incerta. 9. 
Improborum^ est malos lau^dare. 10. Venimus ut 
patriae tuae leges violaremus. 11. Yeniant servi ut 
portas urbis claudant. 12. Multos annos Eomae habi- 
taveratis. 

ih) 1. The good will be happy. 2. May you be 
happy. 3. We all might have been happy. 4. It is 

* Est tuum, it is yours ; i. e., your duty. 



142 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [305, 306. 

my duty to keep tlie laws of my country. 5. May lie 
ever be worthy of this honor. 6. He would have been 
unworthy of his father. 

7. He had been king many years. 8. We will never 
praise the bad. 9. They will condemn us to death. 
10. We will never accuse the good. 11. He had broken 
his arm at Athens. 12. Virtue is the highest wisdom. 
13. We will acquit you of bribery (214.) 



LESSON LIY. 



Verb Esse, continued, — Comparison of Adjectives. 

305. Adjectives in Latin, as in English, may express 
different degrees of the quality which they denote ; e. g., 

Altiis, altior, altissimiis. 

High, higher, highest. 

Rem. — In this example, alius (bigli) is said to be in the positive degree; 
altior, in the comparative ; and altissimus, in the superlative. 

306. In Latin, adjectives are compared by adding to 
the root of the positive the following endings : 

Comparative. Superlative. 

M. F. N. M. r. jsr. 

lor, ior, iiis. issimus, issima, isslmum. 



Examples. Root. Comparative. 

Altus (high), alt. altior (ior, ius), altissimus (a, iim). 

Mitis (mild), mit. mitior (i6r,ius), mitissimus (a, um). 

Rem. 1. — Adjectives in er add rimus {si, um) to the positive, to form 
the superlative ; e. g., 

Pulcher, pulchrior, pulchen-imiis. 

Rem. 2. — A few adjectives in lis form the superlative by adding limua 
to the root of the positive ; e. g., 



307— 309.] coMPAKisoiq- of adjectives. 143 

Facilis {easy), facilior, facillimus. 

Difficilis {difficult), diff icilior, difficillimus. 

Similis {like), similior, simillimus. 

Dissimilis {unlike), dissimilior, dissimillimus. 

Rem. 3. — The foUowiDg adjectives are quite irregular in their com- 
parison, viz. : 

Bonus {good), mehor, optimiis. 

Mains {bad), pejor, pessimus. 

Magnus {great), . major, maximus. 

Parvus {little), nunor, minimus. 

Multus {much), plus (pi. plures, [ ■,_ v w 

plura), j P ^^®* 

807. The conjunction qudm is generally used with 
the comparatiye degree, unless one of the persons or 
things compared is the subject of the proposition, in 
which case qudm is usually omitted, though sometimes 
used; e. g., 

1. Nihil est dementia diYinius. 
Nothing is more godlike than clemency. 

2. Europa minor est quam Asia. 
, Europe is smaller than Asia. 

308. EuLE OF Syntax. — The comparative degree 
without qudm is followed by the ablative. 

Rem. 1. — dementia in the first example is in the ablative by this rule. 

Rem. 2. — If quam is expressed, the following noun will be in the same 
case as that which precedes : thus, Asia, wliich follows qumn in 
the second example, is in the same case as Europa, which precedes. 

309. The conjunction qudm before a superlative ren- 
ders it intensive ; e. g., 

^ ^ T _ ^ w ( JSnq. Id, As many as possible. 
Quam plurimi, < "^ ^^ . ^ -^ ^ 
K Lat Id, As the most. 

( Enq, Id. \ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^ possible. 
Quam maximus, \ ^* * | rpj^^ greatest possible. 
' Lat, Id. As the greatest. 



144 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [310, 811. 

Rem. — The superlative may often be best translated by very instead 
of most; 2l^, mons altissimus, a very high mountain. 



810. Vocabulary. 

Amplus, a, um, extensive. great. 
Argentiim, I, silver. 
Celeber, brls, bre, celebrated. 
Cicero, onls, Cicero. 
Dlvlniis, a, um, divine. 
Futuriis, a, um, future. 
Gravis, e, heavy. 
Impendere, to overhangs to 
threaten. 



Ignoratio, onis, ignorance. 

Malum, I, an evil, 

Pretiosus, a, um, valuable, 

Quam, tJian. 

Quam maximus, a, um, as great 

a§ possible. 
Ratio, onis, reason, 
Scientia, ae, knowledge, 
Turris, is, tower. 



811. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Aurum gravius est argento. 2. Ignoratio futu- 
rorum malorum utilior est quam scientia. 3. Difficilli- 
mum est iram placare. 4. In summis montibus '° acer- 
rimnm est frigus. 

5. Yeniunt ut copias comparent. 6. Venit ut quam 
maximas^ copias compararet. 7. Turris est altior muro. 

8. Quid est in liomine ratione divinius ? 9. Mons al- 
tissimus impendebat. 10. Cicero erat orator celeber- 
rimus. 11. Romani ampliores copias exspectabant. 

(b) 1. Gold is very heavy. 2. Gold is more valua- 
ble than silver. 3. Wisdom is more valuable than 
gold and silver. 4. You are building a very high 
wall. 5. You have your wall higher than your tower. 
6. We shall raise very large forces. 7. You have 
raised larger forces than the king himself. 

8. We have come to raise as large forces as possible.^ 

9. Let them raise as large forces as possible. 10. It 
is^ very easy to keep one^s word. 11. It is easier to 
keep one's word than to appease anger. 12. Who was 
more celebrated than Cicero ? 13. He was a very cele- 
brated orator. 



312 — 315.] COMPARISON OP ADVERBS. 145 

LESSON LY. * 

Compounds of ^^^e,— Comparison of Adverbs, — Numeral 
Adjectives, 

312. The compounds of esse (except posse^ to be able, 
which is irregular, and will be noticed hereafter) are 
conjugated like the simple esse, prodesse^ however 
(compounded of ^?^o, for, and esse^ to be), inserts d after 
pro in those parts which in the simple verb begin with 
e J as, 

Pres, Prosiim, proc?es, prodest, prosiimiis, prodestis, 
prosunt, &c. 

313. The compounds of esse {except posse) are followed 
by the dative, as they take only an indirect object (82 
and 643, 2) ; e. g., 

Mihi profait. 

It profited me {did good to me). 

Rem. — Here it is plain that mihl (to me) is not a direct, but only an 
indirect object. 

314. Most adverbs are derived from adjectives, and 
are dependent upon them for their comparison: the 
comparative of the adverb being the same as the neu- 
ter comparative of the adjective, and the superlative 
being formed from that of the adjective by changing 
the ending us into e ; as, 

Adj, Altus, altior (iiis neut,\ altissimus. 
Adv, Alte, altiiis, altissime. 

NUMERALS. 

315. Numerals comprise, 

(a) Numeral adjectives, coji^iSting of three distinct 
classes ; viz., 



146. 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[316, 317. 



1) Cardinals^ whicli denote simply the number of 
o^ ects ; as, unus^ one ; duo, two, &c. 

2) Ordinals^ Avliicli denote tlie position of any ob- 
ject in a series; as, primus^ first; secundilsj 
second. 

8) Distrihutives^ wliicli denote the number of ob- 
jects which are taken at a time ; as, singulis 
one by one ; bml^ two by two. 
(S) Numeral adverbs ; as, semel^ once ; bis^ twice. 
(See Numerals, 583.) 

316. EuLE OF Syktax. — Adverbs modify verbs, ad- 
jectives, and other adverbs ; e. g.. Miles fortiter pug- 
nat, the soldier fights bravely. Hand diflficilis, not difi 
fijcult 

317. (a) The first three cardinals, unus^ duo^ and^re^, 
are declined as follows : 

1. Paradigm of tiniis, one. 



N. Unus, 


una, 


unum. 


Unl, 


unae, 


una. 


G. Unius, 


unlus, 


unlus. 


Unorum, 


unarum, 


unorum. 


D. Unl, 


uni, 


unl. 


Unis, 


unis. 


unis. 


A. Uniim, 


nnam, 


unum. 


Unos, 


anas, 


una. 


V. Une, 


una, 


unum. 








A. Uno, 


una, 


uno. 


Unis, 


unis, 


unis. 



Rem. — The plui'al oiunus, as a numeral, is u^d only withnounswhicli 
have no singular. 

2. Paradigms of duo, two^ and tres, three. 



N. Duo, duae, 


duo. 


Tres (m. 


4-/0, 


tria. 


G. Duorum, duariim, 


duorum. 


Trium, 




trium. 


D. Duobus, duabus. 


duobus. 


Tribus, 




tribus. 


A. Duos and};, _ 
duo, &^'^ 


duo. 


Tres, 




tria. 


V. Duo, duae, 


duo. 


Tres, 




tria. 


A. Duobus, duabus. 


duobus. 


Tribus, 




tribus. 



318 — 821.] NUMEKAL ADJECTIVES. 147 

Rem. — Tres is declined like the plural of tristis (153). 

(b) Cardinal numbers, from four to one hundred, are 
indeclinable; those denoting hundreds are declined 
like the plural ot bonus (112); e. g., diicenti, ae, a, two 
hundred, 

318. Ordinals are dechned like bonus. Distributives 
are declined like the plurah of 65nz^5. 

319. Whenever the same noun belongs to both mem- 
bers of a comparison in Latin, it is generally expressed 
in the first and omitted in the second ; in Enghsh, how- 
ever, it is expressed in the first, and represented in the 
second by the pronoun that or those ; e. g.. 

Maris siiperficies major est quam terrae. 

The sea's surface is greater than {that^) of the land. 

Rem. — Hence, in translating English into Latin, that, those, after than, 
should be omitted. 



320. YOCABULARY. 
Concertare, av, to contend, quarrel. 
Contlnuiis, a, um, successive. 
Decern, ten, 
Decimus, a, um, tentli. 
Duo, duae, duo, two, 
Interesse, interfu, to he engaged 

in. 
Mare, is, sea, 
Obesse, obfu, to he prejudicial to. 



Omnlno, altogether, in all. 

Prodesse, profu, to do good, to 
profit. 

Producere, produx, to lead for- 
ward or out. 

Quartus, a, um, fourth, 

Quinque, five. 

Superficies, el, sin face. 

Terra, ae, earth. 



321. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Milites fortiter pugnant. 2. Eomani fortius 
quam hostes pugnaverunt. 3. Ex eo die dies conti- 
nuos quinque Caesar pro castris suas copias produxit. 
4. Erant omnino itinera duo. 5. Caesar quam max- 



* Here that stands for the surface. 



148 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [322. 

imas copias comparaverat. 6. Cains, vir summo inge- 
nio praeditus, Eomae habitat. 7. Seryus mens proelio 
interfuit. 8. Fides plurimis profuit. 9. Cliristianorum 
est ^ avaritiam damnare. 10. Cains mnltis proeliis in- 
terfuerat. 11. Terrae superficies minor est quam maris. 
12. Caesar decimam legionem misit. 

(p) 1. They will fight bravely. 2. You fought more 
bravely than the Eomans. 3. The king himself was 
engaged in the battle. 4. He fought very bravely. 
5. Ten legions were engaged in the first battle. 6. 
The soldiers of the tenth legion fought more bravely 
than those ^ of the fourth. 7. Anger has often heen 
prejudicial to states. 8. It is the part of a Christian to 
do good to as many as possible. 9. Caesar raised the 
greatest forces possible. 10. Many states relying on 
their strength will raise forces. 



LESSON LVL 



Passive Voice, — Third Persons of Tenses for continued 
Action. 

322. A TEANSITIVE verb (72) may represent its 
subject, 

1) As acting upon some object; as, Pater filiiim 
docet, the father teaches his son ; it is then said 
to be in the Active Voice. 

2) As acted upon by some other person or thing; 
as, Filius a patre docetiir, the son is taught hy 
his father ; it is then said to be in the Passive 
Voice. » 



323, 824.] PASSIVE voice. — third persons. 



149 



Rem. — The forms which have been used in the previous exercises all 
belong to the active voice : we shall now consider the formation 
and use of the passive. 

823. The third persons (singular and plural) of the 
tenses for continued action (190), both in the indica- 
tive and subjunctive moods, are formed in the passive 
voice, by adding the ending ur to the corresponding 
forms of the active. 

a) But observe that the vowel before the t in the singular is long, 
except from It in the third conjugation, and from obit and ehit. 

324. The following table presents the formation of 
the third persons of the passive in the moods and tenses 
just mentioned. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present (1st root), is, are loved, &c. 


Conj. I. 


Conj. II. 


Conj. III. Conj. IV. 


Am-at, 


Mon-et, 


Reg-it, Aud-it, 


Am-atwr. 


Mon-eti/r. 


Reg-itwr. j Aud-Itwr. 


Am -ant, 


Mon-ent, 


Reg-unt, ' Aud-iunt, 


Am-ant?ir. 


Mon-entwr. 


Reg-untwr. Aud-iunt?lr. 


Imperfect (1st root), was, were loved, &c. 


Am-abat, 


Mon-ebat, 


Reg-ebat, 


Aud-iebat, 


Am-abati^r. 


Mon-ebatwr. 


Reg-ebatiir. 


Aud-iebatwr. 


Am-abant, 


Mon-ebant, 


Reg-ebant, 


Aud-iebant, 


Am-abantii?'. 


Mon-ebantwr. 


Reg-ebantwr. 


Aud-iebantwr. 


Future (1st root), shall or will he loved. 


Am-abit, 


Mon-eblt, 


Reg-et, 


Aud-iet, 


Am-dhiiiir. 


M6n-eb7tfir. 


Reg-etilr. 


Aud-iet?/r. 


Am-abunt, 


Mon-ebunt, 


Reg-ent, 


Aud-ient, 


Am-abuntizr. 


Mon-ebuntiir. 


Reg-entizr. . 


Aud-ientzi?'. 


SUBJUNCTIVE #M00D. 


Present (1st root), may or can he loved. 


Am-et, 


Mon-eat, 


Reg-at, 


Aud-iat, 


Am-etiir. 


Mon-eatur. 


Reg-atiir. 


Aud-iatwr. 


Am-ent, 


Mon-eant, 


Reg-ant, 


Aud-iant, 


Am-entz/r. 


M6n-eant?ir. 


Reg-antwr. 


Aud-ianti/?\ 



150 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. [325 — 827. 

PARADIGM — continued. 



Imperfect (1st root), might, could, &lc., 


be loved. 


Am-aret, 
Am-aret?77'. 
Am-arent, 
Am-arentwr. 


Mcn-eret, 
M6n-eretz7r. 
Mon-erent, 
Mon-erent?'/ r. 


Reg-eret, 
Reg-eretf/7'. 
Reg-erent, 
Reg-erentz77-. 


Aud-Iret, 
Aud-Iretz/r. 
Aud-lrent, 
Aud-Irenti/r. 



825. EuLE OF Syntax. — Passive verbs are followed 
by the same cases as the active^ except the direct ob- 
ject, which becomes the subject of the passive (322); 
e. g., 

Act nil Balbiim furti accusant. 

They accuse Balbus of theft. 
Pass, Balbiis ab illis furti accusatiir. 

Balbus is accused of theft by them. 

RexM. — Observe that the agent is put in the ablative with ah (ab iUis) ; 
a, however, is often used before a consonant. 



826. YOCABULARY. 
Colere, il, to cullivate, to practise. 
Demonstrare. av, to show. 
Interf icere (i6),interfec, to kill, to 

shy. 
Mittere, mis, to send. 
Pro (prep, with abl.) if or, before. 



Rhenils, i, Rhine, a river. 

ReLquiis, a, um, the rest, the other. 

Sex, six. 

Supra, above. 

Tangere, tetig, to touch, reach. 

Unus, a, um, one, single, single one. 



327. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Caius filios docet. 2. Filii a Caio docentar. 
3. Legatos ad Caesarem mittent. 4. Legati ad Caesa- 
rem mittentur. 5. Mittantur legati. 6. Eeliquas sex 
legiones pro castris in a^ie constituet. 7. Caium capitis 
damnabunt. 8. Caius capitis damnabitur. 9. Haec 
civitas Ehenum tangit. 10. Haec ci vitas Ehenum, 
ut supra demonstravimus, tangit. 11. Virtus ab omni- 
bus colatur. 



328 — 330,] PASSIVE voice. — thied persons. 151 

{b) 1. Balbus will kill Gains. 2, He will be killed 
by Balbus. S. Cains accuses me of theft. 4. I am 
accused of theft by Caius. 5. Let him be accused of 
bribery, 6. Let them be condemned to death. 7. 
They are killed in the first battle. 8. Let not the king 
be condemned to death. 9. The law will be broken. 

10. Will not the laws be broken by wicked (men)? 

11. Let not the laws of the city be broken by us. 



LESSON LYII 



Passive Voice, — Third Persons of Tenses for Completed 
Action, 

328. The tenses for completed action in the passive 
voice are called Compound Forms^ and consist of the 
perfect participle with certain parts of the* verb esse 
(299). We must accordingly notice here the formation 
of this participle. 

329. The perfect participle is formed from what is 
called the third root^ by the addition of the ending us 
(a, iim), and is declined like bonus, 

' 330. The third root is formed from the first, 

1) In the first, second, and fourth conjugations 
by the addition of the respective endings, at^ 
tt^ and It; e.g., 

Amare, am, SbVCidt, 

Monere, mon, mon^^. 

Audire, aud, audit. 

2) In the third conjugation, by the addition of ^, 
or sometimes s (especially to the ^sounds). 



152 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 



[831, 332. 



a) Any p-sound before t is p (i. e,, jpi or U becomes j)t). 
h) Any /c-sound before t is c (i. e,, c/, gU or qut becomes ct). 
c) D, and sometimes g, is dropped before s (see 208, c, and 21 1). 

Scrlbere, scrib, scri;)t (b changed to p). 

Regere, re^, rect {g changed to c). 

Claudere, climd, claus (d dropped). 

831. The third persons singular of the perfect, plu- 
perfect, and future perfect of the passive indicative are 
formed respectively from the third singular of the pre- 
sent, imperfect, and future"^ of the indicative of the verb 
esse and the perfect participle ; and the plural is formed 
in the same way, by using the plural of the participle 
and verb. 

332. The third persons of the perfect and pluperfect 
passive subjunctive, are formed by a similar combina- 
tion of the perfect passive participle with the third 
persons of the present and imperfectf subjunctive 
of esse. 



PARADIGM. 



Conj. I. 

Am are. 
1st root, dm, 
3d " dmai. 





Conj. 


II. 




Monere. | 


1st 


root, 


mon, 


3d 


a 


moml. 



Conj. III. 

Regere. 
1st root, reg, 
3d " recL 



Conj. IV. 

Audlre. 
1st root, Gfi^c?, 
3d " audit 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Perfect (lias been or was loved, <fcc.). 

S. lAmatusJ est, I Monltfis est, I Rectus est, I Andltus est, 
P. jAmatll sunt. | Monitl sunt. | Recti sunt. | Audit! sunt. 



* Instead of the present, imperfect, and future, the perfect, pluper- 
fect, and future perfect are sometimes used. 

f Instead of the present and imperfect, the perfect and pluperfect are 
sometimes used. 

X These participles, which, it must be remembered, are declined like 
bonus (302), are always of the same gender and number as the subject 
of the verb, thus : 



833.] PASSIVE VOICE. — THIRD PERSONS. 

TARABiGM— continued. 



153 



Pluperfect (had been loved, &c.). 

S. |Amatus erat, IMonitus erat, [Rectus erat, lAudltus erat, 
P. lAmatl erant. iMomti erant. | Recti erant. |Audlti erant. 

Future Perfect (shall or will have been loved, &c.). 

S. lAmatus erlt, IMonitus erlt, 1 Rectus erit, lAudltus erlt. 
P. lAmati erunt. |M6nitI erunt. | Recti erunt. |Audltl erunt. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Perfect (may have been loved, &c.). 

S. lAmatiis sit, IMonitus sit, I Rectus sit, | Audit, s sit, 
P. lAmatl sint. |M6niti sint. | Recti sint. |Audlti sint. 

Pluperfect (might have been loved, &c.). 

Rectus esse t, lAudltus esset, 



S. I Amatus esset, IMonitus esset, 
P. Amati essent. Monlti essent. 



Recti essent. Auditi essent. 



333. YOCABULARY. 

Aestimare, av, at, to value, to prize. 

Colloquium, i, conference, meeting. 

Consplcere (io), conspex, con- 
spect, to seSy discover. 

Decernere, decrev, decret, to de- 
cree. 

Dicere, dix, diet, io say, speak, 
name. 

Facere (io), fee, fact, to do, make, 
'perform, 

Frangere, freg, fract, to break, to 
violate. 



Interf icere (io), fee, feet, to kill. 
Interim, in the mean time, mean* 

while, 
Lenis, e, mild, merciful, 
Literae, arum (pZ.), letter^ epistle, 
Mittere, mis, miss, to send, 
Parare, av, at, to prepare. 
Quintus, a, um, fifth. 
Secundus, a, um, second. 
Sententia, ae, sentiment. 
Suppllcatio, onis, thanksgiving, 
Viginti, twenty. 



Amatus est, he has been loved. 

Amata est, she has been loved. 

Amattim est, it has been loved. 

Amati sunt, they (men) have been loved. 

Amatae sunt, they (women) have been loved. 

Amata sunt, they (things) have been loved. 



7* 



154 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [334, 335. 

334. Exercises, 
- (a) 1. Supplicatio decreta est. 2. Mors omnibus 
parata est. 3. Dies coUoquio dictiis erat ex eo die quin- 
tns. 4. Malta ab Caesare in earn sententiam dicta 
sunt. 5. Faciam id quod est lenius et utilius. 6. Mit- 
tuntur ad Caesarem a Balbo literae. 7. Interim mili- 
tes legionum duarum ab hostibus cons23iciebantur. 8. 
Milites legionum duarum conspecti sunt. 

(S) 1. A thanksgiving had been decreed to Caesar. 
2. Twenty soldiers of the tenth legion had been killed 
in the second battle. 3. Money has ever been valued 
very highly. 4. Has not money alwaj^s been valued 
very highly ? 5. Were not the laws broken at Athens? 
6. The laws had been broken at Eome. 7. We will 
appoint the tenth day for a conference. 8. Messengers 
had been sent to the king. 9. A soldier was sent to 
the kiuR. 



LESSON LYIII. 



Indicative Mood of the Passive Voice. 

335. The persons of the tenses for continued action 
in the indicative and subjunctive moods maj^ be formed 
from the corresponding parts of the active, as follows : 

a) The first persons, by dropping the final conso- 
nant (when there is one), and adding r ; e. g., 
Amo {act.)^ amor (pa.ss. r added). 

Amabam {act.)^ aniabar {j^ass. m dropped^ r added). 

h) The second persons, by changing s (sing.) into 
ris (or re), and th (plur.) into 77imi ; e. g.. 



8S6 — 338.] IKDIOATIVE PASSIVE. 



155 



Amas (act), amarl^ (or re) {pass, s changed to ris or re), 
Amatis (ac^.), arnamini (^a55. tis *' ^^ mini). 

c) Th.e third persons, by adding ur (323) ; e. g., 

Amat {act)^ amatiir {pass, voc added). 
Amant {act)^ amantur {pass, iir added), 
*■ 
336. The personal endings of the tenses for conti- 
nued action, in the indicative and subjunctive moods, 
active and passive, are as follows : 





Shigular, 






Plural. 






1. 


2. 


3. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


Act. 
Pass. 


5, m, 
r. 


rls, re. 


t, 
tur. 


mus, 
mur. 


tis, 
mini. 


nt, 
ntur. 



337. The first and second persons of the passive may 
accordingly be formed directly from the third (as al- 
ready obtained), by changing its ending into those ot 
the first and second, and observing the same principles 
for vowel changes as apply to the active (248) ; e. g., 

3 c? Pers. \st Pers. 2d Pers. 

Sing, Avaa^tur^ amor {vowel changed) amarls (re). 
Plur, AiRdintur, amami^r, amamm^. 

338. The first and second persons of the tenses for 
completed action may be obtained directly from the 
third person, by simply changing the third person of 
the proper tense of esse into the first and second ; e. g., 

Smg, Amatiis est, amatus sum, amatiis es. 
Plur, Amati sunt, amati sumiis, amati estis. 



156 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[339. 



339. Paradio'm of the Indicative Passive. 



Present (1st root), am loved, &c. 



Conj. I. 
Am-6r, 
Am-ari."? (re), 
Am-a/z/r ; 
Ara-a??zHr, 
Am-a7//i?ii, 
Am-anlur. 



Conj. II. 
Mon-eor, 
M5n-e?'is (re), 
MoYi-etur ; 
M6n-e77mr, 

Mon-e?7/wr. 



C(m. III. 
Reg-o?', 
Reg-e?i5 (re), 
Reg-i/w?' ; 
Reg-i??2ii^7*, 
Reg-i???n?t, 
Reg-U7?/wr. 



(7o7i;. lY. 
And-ior, 
Aud-l7is (re), 
Aw^-ltur ; 

Aud-rmim, 
AudL-Xantur, 



Imperfect (1st root), was loved, &c. 



Am-abar, 
Am-aba?i.s (re), 
Am-aba'i^r ; 
Am-aba77?in*, 
Am-abaA7/'i?2l, 
Am-aban/ii^r. 



Mon-ebar, 

M6n-eba?'is(re), 

M6n-eba/w7* ; 

M6n-eba?77wr, 

Mon-eba/nim, 

M6n-ebari/?ir. 



Reg-ebar, 

Reg-ebari5(re), 

Reg-eba ur ; 

Reg-eba??i?/r, 

Reg-eba7?2ini, 

Reg-eba72/wr. 



Aud-iebar, 

Aud-iebari^(re), 

Aud-ieba/i2?'; 

Aud-ieba777i<r, 

Aud-iehRmmi, 

Aud-ieh3intu7\ 



Future (1st root), shall or will he loved. 



Am-abor, 
Am-abe7is (re), 
Am-abi/?/r ; 
Am-2.h\mur, 
Am-abi7«i7?t, 
Am-Sibvintur, 



Mon-ebor, 
M6n-ebe7-is (re), 
Mbn-ehVur ; 

Mon-eblmmi, 
Mbn-ehuniur. 



Reg-a^, 
Reg-eris (re), 
Reg-etur ; 
Reg-emur, 
Reg-emini, 
Reg-enlur, 



Aud-iar, 
Aud-ie7'is (re), 
And-ie fur ; 
Aud-ie777Mr, 
Aud-ieminly 
Aiid-ientur. 



Perfect (3d root, perf. part, and sum*), was or have been loved. 



Amat-us sum,* 
Amat-us es, 
Amat-us est; 
Amat-i sumus, 
Amat-I estls, 
Amat-I sunt. 



MonTt-us sum, 
Monlt-us es, 
M6n"It-us est; 
Monlt-i sumus, 
Momt-i estis, 
Monlt-I sunt. 



Rect-us sum, 
Rect-us es, 
Rect-us est; 
Rect-i sumus, 
Rect-i estis, 
Rect-I sunt. 



Audlt-us sum, 
Audlt-us es, 
Audlt-us est ; 
Audit i sumiis, 
Audlt-I estis, 
Audlt-I sunt. 



Pluperfect (3d root, perf. part, and eramf), had been loved. 



Amat-us eram,f 

Amat-us eras, 
Amat-us erat; 
Amat-I eramus, 
Amat-I eratis, 
Amat-I erant. 



Mon!t-us eram, 
Mon^t-Lis eras, 
M6n:t-us erat ; 
Monit-i eramus, 
Monit-I eratis, 
Monlt-I erant. 



Rect-us eram, ] Audlt-us eram, 
Rect-us eras, Audlt-us eras, 
Rect-us erat; Audlt-us erat; 
Rect-i eramus, 'Audlt-i eramus, 
Rect-I eratis, lAudlt-I eratis, 
Rect-I erant. Audlt-l erant. 



* Fui is sometimes used instead of sum (331, K). 

t Fueram is sometimes used instead of eram (331, N.). 



840, 341,] 



INDICATIVE PASSIVE. 

PARADIGM — continued. 



157 



Future Perfect (3d root, ferf. part, and ero*), shall or will 
have been loved. &c. 



Amat-ns ero,* 
Amat-us ens, 
Amal-us erit ; 
Amat-I erlmfis, 
Amat-i ent!s, 
Amat-I erunt. 



Monit-us ero, 
Monit-us er-s, 
Monit-us erlt; 
Monlt-I er^mus, 
Monlt-i ent:s, 
Momt-I erunt. , 



Rect-us ero, 
Rect-us erls, 
Rect-Qs erlt; 
Rect-I erlmus, 
Rect-i erlt!s, 
Rect-i erunt. 



Audlt-us ero, 
Audit-US erls, 
Audlt-us erlt; 
Audit-i erlmiis, 
Audlt-i erltls, 
Audit-I erunt. 



340. YOCABULARY. 

AccQsare, av, at, to accuse. 

Admonere, u, it, to admonish, 
warn. 

Bene, well. 

Carthagmiensis, is, a Carthagi- 
nian. 

Clipeus, I, shield. 

Damnare, av, at, to condemn. 

Discere, dldlc, to learn. 

Donare, av, at, to give, present. 

Excitare, av, at, to excite, arouse. 



Finire, Iv, It, to finish, 
Graecl, oriim, the Greeks, 
Hasta, ae, s'pear, 
Laudare, av, at, to praise, 
Mensls, is, m., month, 
Mutare, av, at, to change, 
November, bris {ahl. i), November, 
Pugnare, av, at, to fight, 
Punire, Iv, It, to punish. 
Superare, av, at, to surpass, con' 
quer, to go over. 



341. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Tempora mntantur et nos mutamnr in illis. 
2. Finitur labor agricolae mense Novembri. 3. Vos 
laudainini, pneri qui bene didicistis. 4. Donabor clipeo 
et hasta, si bene pro patria pngnavero. 5. Admonebe- 
ris, ne iram excites. ^ 6. Graeci a Eomanis superati 
snnt. 7. Eodem anno Cartliaginienses et Graeci a Eo- 
manis superati sunt 8. Proditionis accusati estis. 9. 
Ambitus accusati sumus. 

{b) 1. You will be punished. 2. Has he not been 
punished? 3. We have been admonished not to ac- 



* Fuero is sometimes used instead of ero (331, N.). 



158 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[342. 



cuse the king. 4. Has the queen beerx condemned to 
death ?s (No.) 5. Who will be condemned to death? 
6. "Who have been accused of treason ? 7. We shall 
be presented with two beautiful books. 8. Have you 
not been presented with a very fine dog ? 9. Had not 
the Greeks been conquered by the Komans ? 10. By 
whom were the Eomans conquered? 11. We shall be 
conquered bj^the enemy. 



LESSON LIX. 

Subjunctive Mood of the Passive Voice. 
342. Paradigm of the Subjunctive Passive. 



Present (1st root), mmj or can he loved, &c. 


Conj. 1. 


Conj. 11. 


C07lj. III. . 


Conj. IV. 


Am-er, 


Mon-ear, 


Reg-ar, 


Aud-iar, 


Am-eris (re), 


M6n-ea7is (re), 


Reg-aris (re). 


Aud-ia ris (re), 


Am-e 'ur; 


MoQ-ea^?/r ; 


Reg-a/ur ; 


Aud-mur ; 


Am-emur, 


M6n-ea?7iwr, 


Reg-a???fi?', 


Aud-iamwr, 


Am-emuil, 


Mon-eaminl, 


Reg-^mlnl, 


Aud-iamnt, 


Am-entur. 


Mon-ean^zzr. 


Reg-Sintur. 


Aud-iarz/wr. 


Imperfeci 


(l.st root), might, could, &c,, be loved, &c. 


Am-arer, 


Mon-erer, 


Reg-erer, 


Aud-lrer, 


Am-areH.s (re), 


M6n-ere?*is (re), 


Reg-ere?i.9(re) 


Aud-lreris (re). 


Am-2iTetur ; 


Mbn-ere/ur ; 


Reg-ereiur ; 


Awd-iY etur ; 


Am-are772wr, 


Mon-er emur, 


Reg-eremur, 


Aud-iremur, 


Am-2Lremim, 


Mbn-eYem.ml, 


Reg-ereminl, 


Aud-ireminl, 


Am-aren/wr. 


Mbn-ereniur. 


Reg-erentur. 


Aud-irentur. 


Perfect (3d r 


oot — perf. part, and sim or fuerlm), may have 




been loved, &c. 


Amat-us stm, 


Monit-us sim. 


Rect-us Sim, 


Audlt-us slm, 


Amat-us sis. 


Mcn:t-us sis, 


Rect-ils sis. 


Audit- fis sis. 


Amat-iis sit, 


Mon t-us sit; 


Rect-fis s:t; 


Audlt-us s:t ; 


Amat-I simus. 


Monit-I sim us. 


Rect-I slmus. 


Audlt-I slmus, 


Amat-I slt:s, 


Momt-lsltls, 


Rect-I sit'S, 


Audlt-I sItTs, 


Amat-I sint. 


Monlt-I sint. 


Rect-i sint. 


Audlt-i sint. 



843—84:5.] SUBJUNCTIVE passive. 

PARADIGM — continued. 



159 



Pluperfect (3d root — jperf. fart, and essem or fuissem), might 
have been loved, &c. 



Amstt-us essem, 
Amat-us esses. 
Amat-us esset ; 
Amat-I essemus 
Amat-I essetis, 
Amat-I essent. 



M6nit-us essem, 
Monlt-us esses, 
Momt-iis esset; 
Monit-I essemus 
Monit-I essetis, 
Monit-l essent. 



Rect-us essem, 
Rect-ils esses, 
Rect-us esset; 
Rect I essemus 
Rect-i essetis, 
Rect-i essent. 



Audit-as essem, 
Audlt-us esses, 
Audit^us esset; 
Audlt-I essemus 
Audlt-I essetis, 
Audlt-i essent. 



843. Rule of Syntax. — Yerbs signifying to separate 
from^ or deprive of, are followed by the ablative in ad- 
dition to the accusative of the direct object; e. g., 

Me Zi/ce privant. 

They deprive me of light. 

844. Vocabulary. 



Adulatio, oms, flattery. 

Contra (prep, with ace), against. 

Decipere (io), decep, decept, to 
deceive. 

Fraudare, av, at, to defraud. 

Fugere (io), fug, fugit, to flee. 

Granum, I, grain, grain of corn, 

Imprudens, tis, inconsiderate, im- 
prudent. 

NequTdem,* not even. 

Pauper, eris, a poor man. 

Perfugium, I, refuge. 

Praebere, u, it, to furnish, ofl'er. 



Praeparare, av, at, io prepare. 
Princeps, princlpis, chief, leader, 
Privare, av, at, to deprive. 
Sancire, sanx, sanct, to enact, coU' 

firm. 
Senectus, utls,/. old age. 
Servare, av, at, to observe, keep. 
Speciosus, a, um, plausible, spe* 

cious. 
Tam, so. 
Verbum, i, word. 
Vivere, vix, vict, io live. 



845. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Non sum t^m imprudens ut verbis speciosis 
decipiar.i 2. Bonae leges a principibus sanciantur. 8. 



* The emphatic word is generally written between the two parts of 
this word ; thus, ne grand quidem, not even a grain. 



160 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [346 — 348. 

Praeparetur animus contra omnia. 4. Praebeatur se- 
necttiti perfugium. 5. Ne me luce privetis. 6. Ne 
grano quidem uno pauperes fraudetis. 7. Pauperes ne 
grano quideni uno fraudentur. 8. Invitus^ te furti 
accusaverat. 9. Caius, yir summo ingenio, Eomae vivit. 
{b) 1. Be not deceived. 2. Let Mm not be deceived. 
3. I was so imprudent as to be deceived (that I was 
deceived) by specious words. 4. You will not be so 
imprudent as to be deceived by flatterj^ 5. Let all 
good laws be observed by tbe citizens. 6. The boys 
fled that ^ they might not be punished. 7. Do not de- 
fraud the poor. 8. Let not the poor be defrauded. 
9. May they never be defrauded by you. 10. You 
shall never be defrauded of even a single grain by us. 



LESSOR LX. 

Imperative Mood — Active and Passive, 

346. The Imperative mood expresses a command^ an 
exhortation^ or entreaty. It is used only in the present 
tense, and in the second and third persons. 

347. If a negative accompanies the imperativej it 
must be expressed in Latin by ne (instead of non) ; e. g., 

Ne peccate, do not sin. 

Rem. — It will be remembered that a command or exhortation may 
also be expressed by the present subjunctive (231). 

348. The imperative is formed from the first root by 
the addition of the following endings : 



349.] 



IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 



161 





ACTIVE. 






Conj. I. 


Conj. II. 


Conj. Ill 


Conj. IV. 


S. 2. 


a or ato, 


e or eto, 


e or ito, 


I or Ito. 


3. 


ato, 


eto, 


ito, 


ito. 


P. 2. 


ate, atote, 


ete, etote, 


ite. itote, 


Ite, Itote. 


3. 


anto, 


ento, 


unto, 


iunto. 




PASSIVE. 




S. 2. 


are or ator. 


ere or etor, ere or itor, 


Ire or itor. 


3. 


ator, 


etor, 


itor, 


Itor. 


P. 2. 


aminl, 


eminl, 


imml, 


immi. 


3. 


antor, 


entor, 


untor, 


iuntor. 



349. Paradigm of the Imperative Mood. 



CONJUGATION I. 




Active. 


Passive. 


S. 2. 

3. 
P. 2. 

3. 


Am-a or am-ato, 

love thou, do thou love, 
Am-ato, let him love, 
Am-ate or am-atote, 

love ye, do ye love, 
Am-anto, let them love. 


Am-are or am-ator, 
be thou loved. 

Am-ator, let him be loved. 

Am-amlnl, 

be ye loved. 

Am-antor, let them be loved. 


CONJUGATION II. 


S. 2. 

3. 

P. 2. 

3. 


M6n-e or mon-eto, 

advise thou. 
Mon-eto, lei him advise. 
Mon-ete ormon-et6ie,adviseye 
Mon-ento, let them advise. 


Mon-ere or mon-etor, 

be thou advised. 
Mon-etor, let him be advised, 
Mon-emlnl, be ye advised. 
Mon-entor, let them be advised. 


CONJUGATION III. | 


S. 2. 

3. 

P. 2. 

3. 


Reg-e or reg-ito, 

rule thou. 
Reg-itO, let him rule. 
Reg-ite or reg-itote, r^ile ye. 
Reg-unto, let them rule. 


Reg-ere or reg-itor, 
be thou ruled. 
Reg-itor, let him be ruled, 
Reg-1m!nl, be ye ruled. 
Reg-untor, let them be ruled. 


CONJUGATION IV. 1 


S. 2. 

3. 

P. 2. 

3. 


Aud-i or aud-ito, 

hear thou. 
Aud-ito, let him hear. 
Aud-Ite or aud-Itote, hear ye. 
Aud-iunto, let them hear. 


Aud-Ire or aud-ltor, 

be thou heard. 
Aud-itor, let him be heard. 
Aud-lmml, be ye heard. 
Aud-iuntor, let them be heard. 



162 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[350, 851. 



Rem. — The second forms of the imperative {to, tote, nto, <fec.) are used 
in laius, rules, and other formal expressions of duty or permission. 

850. VOCABULAKY. 



Ac, and. 

AmencanuS; a, um, American. 

Audire, iv, It, to hear, listen to. 

Castlgare, av, at, to chastise. 

Cogitare, iv, at, to think about. 

Compescere, compescu, to re- 
strain, repress. 

Conjux, ugis, m. or /., husband, 
wife, spouse. 

Conservare, av, at, to preserve. 

Consilium, I, advice, instruction. 

Corrumpere, corrup, corrupt, to 
mislead, corrup. 

Defendere, defend, defens, to de- 
fend. 

Deglubere, deglups, deglupt, to 
flay, to skin. 



Exorare, av, at, to supplicate, 

Liberl, orum {pi.), children. 

Nomen, inis, name. 

Pernicies, el, destruction. 

Populus, T, people. 

Que (joined to the word it con- 
nects;, and, 

Ruere, ru, ruit (or rut), to rush. 

Salus, utis,/, safety. 

Scrlbere, scrips, script, to write. 

Sepelire, Iv, sepult, to bury, inter. 

Tondere, totond, tons, to shear, 
shave. 

Vester, tra, trum, your. 

Videre, vid, vis, to see. 



851. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Caium ne accusa. 2. Balbum ne accusate. 
3. Tonde oves : ne degiube. 4. Tondete oves : ne 
degiubite. 5. Audi, puer, consilia sapientium. 6. 
Audite, pneri, consilia sapientium, et videte, ne in per- 
niciem ruatis. 7. Exorare, mi (115) pater, compesce 
iram. 8. Nemo in urbe sepelitor. 9. Lex erat his 
verbis scripta: "Nemo in urbe sepelitor." 10. Audi, 
mi fili (103, N.), ab improbis ne corrumpitor. 11. De 
vobis ac de liberis vestris cogitate. 12. Conservate 
vos, conjiiges, liberos, fortunasque vestras. 13. Populi 
Eomani nomen salutemque defendite. 

(b) 1. Do not accuse me of theft. 2. Let him shear 
the sheep. 3. Let no one break the laws. 4. Let the 
laws be observed. 5. Do not chastise the slave. 6. 



852—355.] INFINITIVE MOOD. 163 

Let not the slaves be chastised. 7. Let him be buried 
in the citj. 8. Defend (ye) the name and the safety 
of the American people. 9. Defend (ye) the American 
eagle. 10. Let the American eagle be defended by all. 

11. Boys, listen to (hear) the instruction of your fathers. 

12. Do not break your word. 



LESSON LXL 



Infinitive Mood, 

852. The Infinitive mood (as already stated, 9) re- 
presents the simple meaning of the verb without refer- 
ence to person or number. 

353. The infinitive mood has in each voice three 
tenses ; viz., the present^ perfect^ and future. 

Rem. — We must here give the formation of the supine and future act, 
participle (both of which we shall soon notice), as they are used in 
forming the futui'e infinitive. 

354. ^hiQ future active participle and the active supine 
are formed from the third root ; the former by the ad- 
dition of uriis (a, iim) ; as, dradt (3d root), dmdturus (a, 
iim) ; and the latter by the addition of um ; as, dmdt^ 
dmdtilm. 

355. Th^ infinitives are formed as follows : 

1) The present, from the first root by the addition 
of the endings : 

Cooij. I. Conj. 11. Conj. III. Conj. TV. 

Act. are, ere, ere, ire. 

Pass. ari, eri, i, iri. 

2) The perfect active, from the second root by 



164 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[356, 357. 



tlie addition of the ending isse ; and the per- 
fect passive from the perfect participle and esse, 
3) The future active, from the future active par- 
ticiple and esse ; and i\\Q future passive from the 
supine and iri, 

356. ParadiD:m of the Infinitive Mood. 



COXJ. I. 




Active. 


Passive. 


Pres. 


Am-are, to love. 


Am-an, to be loved. 


Perf. 


Amav-isse, 


Amat-iis esse, 




to have loved. 


to have been loved. 


Fut. 


Amat-urus esse, 


Amat-um Iri, 




to be about to love. 


to be about to be loved. 


COjS^J. II. 


Pres. 


Mou-ere, to advise. 


Mon-erl, to be advised. 


Perf. 


Monu-isse, 


Monit-us ess^, 




to have advised. 


to have been advised. 


Fut. 


Monit-urus esse, 


Monlt-fim in. 




to be about to advise. 


to be about to be advised. 


CONJ. III. 


Pres. 


Reg-ere, to rule. 


Reg-T, to be ruled. 


Perf. 


Rex-isse, 


Rect-us esse. 




to have ruled. 


to have been ruled. 


Fut. 


Reet-urus esse, 


Rect-um irl. 




to be about to rule. 


to be about to be ruled. 


CONJ. IV. 


Pres. 


Aud-ire, to hear. 


Aud-lrl, to be heard. 


Perf. 


Audlv-isse, 


Audlt-us esse. 




to have heard. 


to have been heard. 


Fut. 


Audlt-urus esse, 


Audlt-um irl, 




to be about to hear. 


to be about to be heard. 



857. Rule of Syntax. — The subject of an infinitive 
must be put in the accusative ; e. g., 

Videt te esse beatiim. 

He sees that j^ou are happy. 



858—860.] INFINITIVE MOOD. 165 

Rem. 1.— The accusative ie is the subject of esse. 
Rem. 2. — The use of the infinitive, as the subject of a finite verb, has 
been already considered (184). 

358. EuLE OF Syntax. — The infinitiye, either alone 
or with other words connected with it, may depend 
npon another verb; e. g., 

1. Ciipit sapere. 

He desires to he wise, 

2. Sperat se victurum esse. 
He hopes that he shall live. 

Rem. 1. — In most cases the infinitive is really the direct object of the 
verb on which it depends ; thus sapere (to be wise) is really the 
object desired. He desires (what ?) to be wise. 

Rem. 2. — In the compound infinitives (i. e., those which are made up 
of two words) the participles must agree in gender, number, and 
case with the subject of those infinitives ; but of course the supine 
remains unaltered. Thus, in the second example, victurum is in 
the accusative masculine singular, to agree with se, the subject of 
the infinitive. 

859. Two or more English sentences, joined by the 
conjunction that^ are often made one Latin sentence, 
by leaving ont the conjunction, and turning the follow- 
ing nominative into the accusative and the verb into 
the infinitive. 



860. Vocabulary. 

Certus, a, um, certain. 
Clemens, tls, mild, merciful. 
Convertere, convert, convers, to 

turn, convert. 
Cupere (io), cuplv (or i), cupit, 

to desire. 
Dividere, divTs, divis, to divide. 
Docere, u, doct, to teach. 
OcLilus, I, eye. 



Pars, partis, part. 

Peccare, av, at, to sin, 

Praeda, ae, booty. 

Sapere, Iv, i, or u, to he wise, 

Sperare, av, at, to hope. 

Timere, u, to fear. 

Tres, tria, three. 

Vendere, vendid, vendit, to sell 



166 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [361 — 364. 

361. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Balbi est omnia in tres partes dividere. 2. 
Nunqiiam utile est peccare. 3. Omnes homines beati 
esse CLipiunt. 4. Ciipio me esse clementem. 5. Doce- 
mus pueros ut sapere discant. 6. Yideo in me omnium 
yestrum ociilos esse con versos. 7. Sperant se victuros 
esse. 8. Certum est Balbum patriam auro vendidisse. 

(h) 1. He is said to have divided the booty into ten 
parts. 2. They are said to have lived at Eome five 
years. 3. "We desire to be happy. 4. You all de- 
sire to be happy. 5. He is said to have been very 
happy. 6. He saj^s, that all eyes were turned upon 
him. 7. He sees that you are happy. 8. It is certain, 
that a Christian does not fear death. 9. It is certain, 
that the boy has heard a voice. 10. It is certEiin, that 
Balbus will value my labors very higldy.^ 11. It is 
certain, that the avaricious value money very highly. 
12. It is certain, that Balbus will be condemned to death. 



LESSON LXII, 



Particip les. — A h la tive A bso lu te, 

362. The participle is that part of the verb which 
has the form and inflection of an adjective. 
• 363. A verb may have four participles, viz. : the 
present diTidi future in the active voice, and the perfect and 
future in the passive. 

864. The participles are formed as follows : 

1) The present active in the four conjugations, 
by the addition of the respective endings : 



365, 366.] ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 167 

L 2. 3. 4. 

ans, ens, ens, iens, 

to the first root ; as, 

Amans (loving), iRonens, regent, audiens, 

2) The future active, from tlie third root, by the 
addition of the ending urus (a, urn) (302) ; as, 

AmsiiTlrus (about to love), monituruSj rect- 
uruSj Siuditurus, 

3) The perfect passive, from the third root, by 
the addition of the ending us (a, um) (302) ; as, 

Amsiius (loved), moniti7-5, xectus^ auditi^5. 

4) The future passive in the four conjugations, by 
the addition of the respective endings : 

1. 2. 8. 4. 

andus, endiis, endus, iendiis, 
to the first root ; as, 

Avuandus (deserving to be loved), moxien- 
duSj Tegendus^ Siudiendus, 

365. The participle in ns answers to the English participle in ing. 
The participle in us answers to the English participle in ed, 

en, t, &c. 

The participle in dus must be translated by the present in- 
finitive passive^ as used with a substantive. (A termination 
to he desired ; a crime to be abhorred.) 

The participle in rus must be translated by ' about to (write) ;' 
or, 'going to (write).' 

366. EuLE OF Syntax. — A noun and a participle 
standing grammatically independent of the rest of the 
sentence are put in the ablative (called absolute) ; e. g., 

' Eng. Id.j Caesar having conquered 
Caesar, victTs his enemies. 

hostibiis, I Jjat. Id, Caesar his enemies being 
conquered. 



168 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [367—869. 

367. The want of a participle for the perfect active 
is snpphed by the ahlative absolute^ or by quum {when) 
with the perfect or pluperfect subjunctive. The perfect 
subjunctive must be used, if the other verb is in the 
present tense ; e. g., 

Caesar having conquered ^Caesar, quiim vicisset hostes. 
his enemies, ^ Caesar, victis hostibiis. 



368. Vocabulary. 

Aequitas, atis, equity, justice. 
Angustiae, arum (pZ.)? ^ narrow 

pass, defile, 
Canere, cecin, cant, to sing. 
Compellere, compiil, compuls, to 

drive, compel. 
Constituere, constitu, constitut, 

to arrange, constitute. 
Deprehendere, deprehend, de- 

prehens, to seize, catch. 



Devincere, devic, devict, to conn 
quer. 

Exclamare, av, at, to cry out, ex- 
claim, 

Immergere, immers, immers, to 
plunge into, immerse. 

Ludere, lus, lus, to play, to sport, 

Manere, mans, mans, to remain, 

Quum, wken, 

Violare, av, at, to violate, to break. 



369. Exercises, 

(a) 1. In via ludentem puerum vidi. 2. In via lu- 
dentes deprehendimus. 3. Caesar fugientes hostes in 
angustias compuht. 4. Fracto pueri brachio, Eomae 
manebit. 5. Violatis patriae legibus, vita indignus 
est. 6. Puer, quum manus in aquam immersisset, ex- 
clamavit. 7. Caesar, quum devicisset hostes, summa 
aequitate res constituit. 

(b) 1. Did you hear the nightingales singing in the 
grove ? 2. I saw the fishes swimming on the surface 
(top) of the water. ^° 3. Did jou see the girls playing 
in the garden ? 4. Have you not seen the boys play- 
ing in the street ? 5. Caius, having broken his arm, 
remained at Eome. 6. The slave, having killed his 



370 — 373.] GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 169 

master, was condemned. 7. They say that the slave 
has been condemned to death. 8. You are said to 
have been accused of treason. 9. Having violated the 
laws of the state, we shall all be punished. 



LESSON LXIII. 

Gerunds and Supines. 

V 370. The Gerund is that part of the verb which cor- 
responds to the participial substantive in ing in English. 

371. The gerund is really a verbal substantive of 
the neuter gender, used only in the genitive, dative, 
accusative, and ablative singular. 

Rem. — ^The infinitive supplies the place of tlie nominative of the 
gerund, as that is sometimes used as the subject of a verb (184). 

372. The genitive of the gerund ends, in the four 
conjugations, respectively in 

1. 2. 3. 4. 

andi, endi, endi, iendi. 

A.T[iandl (of loving), monendi^ xegendi, eiudiendi. 

373. The gerund is declined in the parts in use pre- 
cisely like a neuter noun of the second declension ; e. g., 

Gen. AmandT, of loving. 

Dat Amando, to or /or loving. 

Ace. Amandiim, loving. 

All. Amando, hy loving. 

Rem. — The gerund, being a part of the verb^ of course governs the 
same case. 



170 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [374—379. 

• 374. EuLE OF Syntax. — The gerund is governed 
like a noun in tlie same case ; e. g., 

Inter ludendum. 
{During playing,) 
While they are playing. 

375. The Latin verb has two supines ; one in um and 
one in u. 

376. The supines are formed by adding the above 
endings to the third root ; e. g., 

Amatiim (to love), monitum, rectum, auditum. 
Amatu (to be loved), monitu, rectu, auditti. 

E-EM. — The supine in um is generally Englished bj the present infini- 
tiye active, and that in u by the present infinitive passive, though 
it may be translated by the active, if that gives better English. 
Both supines are really active ; thus, factum means for doing^ 
and factu in doing. 

377. EuLE OF Syntax. — The supine in um follows 
verbs of motion, to express the purpose or object of 
that motion ; e. g., 

. Mittit legatos pacem petWim. 

He sends ambassadors to sue for peace. 

378. EuLE OF Syntax. — The supine in u is used 
after adjectives signifying good or had^ easy or difficulty 
agreeable or disagreeable, &c. ; e. g., 

Difficile est dictu. 
It is difficult to say, 

379. EuLE OF Syntax. — Many adjectives signifying 
cfeiVe, knowledge^ skilly participation^ recollection^ fulness^ 



380, 381.] GEKUNDS AND SUPINES. 171 

and tlie like^ together with their contraries, govern tha 
genitive; e.g., 

Ciipidus laudis, desirous of praise, 

880. YOCABULARY. 



Aquari, at. to bring water, 

Aquatum (sup.), to bring water. 

Auxilium, 1, aid, help. 

Ciipidus, a, um, desirous, desi- 
rous of. 

Jucundiis, a, urn, pleasant, de- 
lightful. 

Mirabilis, e, wonderful. 

Pabular!, at, to forage. 



Pabulatom (sup.), to forage. 
Petere, Iv (i), It, to seek, ask, sue 

for, 
Rogare, av, at, to ask. 
Sumptus, us, expense. 
Supervacuus, a, iim, unnecessary 
Venarl, at, to hunt. 
Venatum (sup.), to hunt. 
Vitare, av, at, to avoid, shun. 



381. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Cupidi sunt docendi. 2. ISTnm pueri ludendo 
discnnt ? 3. Puer cnpidus est discendi. 4. Misernnt 
legatos pacem petitum. 5. Legatos ad Caesarem mit- 
tunt rogatnm auxilium. 6. Jucundum est auditu. 7. 
Difficile est factu. 8. Mittantur legati pacem petitum. 

9. Quantum temporis ludendo amiserunt ! 10. Multum 
temporis ludendo amittemus. 

(&) 1. He learns by teaching. 2. Have we not 
learned by teaching ? 3. Is there not much pleasure 
in learning ? 4. How much pleasure (there) is in learn- 
ing ! 5. There is much pleasure in teaching. 6. Do 
not boys learn while playing ? 7. The boy has been 
sent a hunting. 8. Caesar has sent the fourth legion 
to forage. 9. Ambassadors have been sent to ash peace. 

10. It is difficult to say. 11. It is wonderful to tell. 
12. Has not Caesar sent the fourth legion to bring 
water? 



172 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [382 — 384. 

LESSON LXIV. 

Participle in dus. 

382. Instead of a gerund goyerning its case, we may 
use a participle in dus agreeing with a noun ; e. g., 

{Eng) The intention of writing a letter. 
{Lat) Consilium scribendi epistolam. 
(or) Consilium scribendae epistolae.'^ 

383. Thus, then, epistold scribendd may be declined 
throughout. 

Sing. 

N. Epistola scribenda, a letter to he written, 

Gr. epistolae scribendae, of writing a letter, 

D. epistolae scribendae, to or for writing a letter. 

Ace. (ad) epistolam scribendam, to write a letter (or 

for writing a letter), 
Abl. epistola scribenda, hy writing a letter, 
Plur. 

N. epistolae scribendae, letters to he written, 
Gr. epistolarum scribendarum, of writing letters, 
D. epistolis scribendis, to ot for writing letters. 
Ace. (ad) epistolas scribendas, to write letters {pi for 

writing letters), 
Abl. epistolis scribendis, hy writing letters, 

384. YOCABULARY. 



Adjumentum, I, aid, help. 
Ampere (io), arrlpu, arrept, to 
snatch, seize. 



Athenae, arum, Athens, ciii; of 

Greece. 
Augere, aux, auct, to increase. 



* The real meaning of ' consilium scribendae epistolae' is * the design 
of (c= about) a letter to be writtea' 



885.] 



PAKTIOIPLE IN BUS. 



173 



Cupidior, oris (comp.), fonder » 

Elegantiaj ae, elegance, 

Emere, em, empt, to buy, pur- 
chase. 

Exercere, exercu, exercit, to 
practise, exercise. 

Gerere, gess, gest, to carry on, 
to wage. 

Habere, u, it, to have, enjoy. 



Lege re, leg, lect, to read, 
Obtinere, obtinu, obtent, to ob' 

tain, acquire, 
Occasio, onis, opportunity, 
Peritus, a, um, skilful, skilled 

in, 
Regere, rex, rect, to govern, 

rule, 
Studiosus, a, um, very fond. 



385. Exercises, 

(a) 1, Balbns omnem occasionem exercendae i irtutis 
arripiebat. 2. Multi cnpidiores sunt emendorum libro- 
rum quam hgendorum, 8. Caesar belli gerendi peritus 
fuit. 4. Omnis occasio exercendae yirttitis arripiatur. 
5. Certum est, omnem occasionem exercendae virttitis 
a Christiano arripi. 6. Omnis dicendi elegantia auge- 
tur legendis oratoribus et poetis. 7. Homo magna 
habet adjumenta ad obtinendam sapientiam. 

(h) 1. The boy is very fond of writing letters, 2. He 
was very fond of hearing the orator. 3. Seize every 
opportunity of practising virtue, 4. The Romans were 
fond of waging war, 5. Ambassadors are sent to heg 
for peace. 6. Ambassadors will be sent to sue for 
peace. 7. The law will be broken. 8. Will not the 
laws be broken by wicked (men) ? 9. It is certain, that 
the laws are broken by the wicked at Eome and at 
Athens. 10. Let your word be kept. 11. Let the 
state be ruled by the wise. 



174: FIEST LATIN BOOK. [386, 387. 

LESSON LXV. 

First Conjugation, 
386. Vocabulary.^ 



Adeo, 50, in such a manner. 
Cant are, av, at, to sing. 
Certamen, inis, contest. 
Crabro, onis, wasp. 
Inter, between^ during. 



Inter ambulandum, while walking, 
Irrltare, av, at, to trouble, irritate. 
Ornare, av, at, to adorn. 
Robustus, a, um, robust, strong, 
Spoliare, av, at, to rob of, despoil. 



387. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Sapientis est supervacuos snmptns yitare. 2. 
Crabronem ne irrites (232). 3. Crabronem ne irritate 
(347). 4. Irritasne crabrones ? 5. Nonne earn legem 
ipse violabas ? 6. Inter ambulandum cantabant. 7. . 
Hie miles est adeo robiistus, ut nemo eum in certamine 
superayerit. 8. Prata et agri pulcherrimis floribus 
ornantur. 9. Oculisne me, judices, priyabitis? 10. 
Violatis patriae legibus (366), mea me laude spoliatis. 
11. Num mea laude spoliabor ? 

(6) 1. It is the duty of a Christian'' to ayoid unne- 
cessary expense. 2. Did they not themselyes yiolate 
those laws? 3. Let not the laws be yiolated by Chris- 
tians. 4. We hope we shall neyer be accused. 5. 
Haye you eyer been accused? 6. Let your laws be 
kept. 7. Is it not certain that the laws are broken by 
the wicked ? 8. Did they not condemn him to death ? 
9. Balbus is so strong that he has neyer been surpassed 
in a contest. 10. Haye I not been depriyed of my 
eyes ? 

* Preparatory to this exercise, the pupil is expected to review tho- 
roughly the Paradigm of the First Conjugation. See 588. 



388 — 390.] SECOND conjugatiois'. . 175 

LESSON LXVI. 

Second Conjugation, 

388, EuLE OF Syntax. — Many verbs which, signify 
to ask^ demand^ or teach^ together with celdre (to conceal), 
take two objects, one of a person and another of a 
thing; e. g., 

Caesar frumentiim Aeduos flagitabat. 

Caesar demanded corn of the Aedui. 



389. Vocabulary."^ 

Divitiacus, I, Divitiacus, man^s 
name. 

Imperare, av, at, to command, 
give comtnands, 

Jiibere, juss, juss, to direct, or- 
der. 



Mordere, momord, mors, to biis. 
Parere, u, it, to obey. 
Propensus, a, um, inclined to, 
Sanare, av, at, to cure, reform. 
Tacere, ii,it, to be silent, to pass 
over in silence. 



390. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Hostes non timemus. 2. ISTonne respondebis? 
3. Docendo docemnr. 4. Ego multa tacui : multa sa- 
navi. 5. Ad docendum propensi sunt. 6. Pareat 
animus: non imperet. 7. Caesar Divitiacum ad se 
vocari jubet. 8. Te haec docebo. 9. Pueros haec 
docebant. 10. Pueri haec docti sunt. 11. Canis pue- 
rum momordit. 12. Nonne oves totondistis? 

(5) 1. Do you not fear the enemy ? 2. Do not fear 
the enemy. 3. Who taught the boy this ? 4. Did you 
teach those boys this? 5. Who sheared this sheep? 
6. Let no one shear my sheep. 7. Did the dog bite 
you? 8. I have been bitten by your dog. 9. We 

* The pupil will, of course, review Paradigm. See 689. 



176 riKST LATIN BOOK. [391 — 393. 

have ourselves been taught by teaching. 10. Did you 
not laugh at your father ? 



LESSON LXYIL 

Third Conjugation, 
891. EuLE OF Syntax. — After verbs of motion : 

1) The place to which the motion is directed, if 
a town or small island^ is put in the accusative 
without a preposition ; e. g., 

Eomam venire, to come to Borne. 

2) The place from which the motion proceeds, if 
a town or small island, is put in the ablative 
without a preposition ; e. g., 

Eoma venire, to come from Rome, 

Rem. — Before other names of places the preposition is generally 

expressed. 
(Review Paradigm 590.) 

392. Vocabulary. 

Agere, eg, act, to do, act. 



Committere, mis, miss, to en- 

Curare, av, at, to attend to, cause, 

&c. 
Dare, ded, dat, to give. 
Eques, itis, horseman. 
Gratia, ae, favor ; pL, thanks. 



Gratias agere, to give thanks, to 

thank. 
Injuria, ae, injury, wrong done. 
Pons, tis, m., bridge. 
Responsum, I, answer, reply. 
Tegere, tex, tect, to cover, cort" 

ceal. 
Unquam, ever. 



393. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Caium Athenas mittat. 2. Servum Athenas 
miserat. 3. Mihi gratias egistis. 4. Sicut vixi, ut 



394, 395.] FOURTH conjugation-. 177 

nemo unquam me iiUms injnriae acciisaverit. 5. Pen- 
tern in .flumine faciendum cnravit. 6. Equites proe- 
lium committunt. 7. Hoc responso dato, eqnites proe- 
lium committunt. 8. Certum est, Caesarem belli ge- 
rendi perltum fuisse. 9. Legatos ad eum miserunt. 
10. Omnis dicendi elegantia augetur legendis orato- 
ribus (382). 

{b) 1. He has sent an ambassador to Rome. 2. Am- 
bassadors will be sent to sue for (377) peace. 3. Am- 
bassadors have been sent to sue for peace. 4. He has 
never been sent to Athens. 5. He is said to have been 
very desirous of (379) learning. 6. They say that you 
are desirous of engaging battle. 7. They are said to 
be skilful in waging war. 8. Having made this reply 
they engage battle. 9. It is disgraceful to cover a 
fault with a lie. 



LESSON LXYIII. 

Fourth Conjugation. 
(Meview Paradigm 691.) 
394. YOCABULARY. 



Antea, hefore. 
Captivus, a, iim, captive. 
Claudere, claus, claus, to shut. 
Fundi! s, 1, estate^ farm. 
Hannibal, alis, Hannibal. 
Intra {^rep. with accus.), within. 
Italia, ae, Italy. 



Praeceptum, 1, precept, instruction. 
Praesens, tis, present. 
Succurrere, curr, curs, to aid, 

succor. 
Tarentum, T, Tarentum, a town 

in Italy. 
Vetustus, a, iim, old, ancient. 



395. Exercises. 
(a) 1. Haec ex captivis audiverat. 2. Yenit sacer- 
dos ut aram sanguine aspergat. 3. Miles Tarentum 



178 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [396. 

venit. 4. Hunc aiidiebant antea, nunc praesentem 
vident. 5. Fundo in tres partes diviso, Komam venit. 
6. Veni ut mihi succurras. 7. Hannibal, Alpibus su- 
peratis, in Italiam venit. 8. Lex erat Eomanorum ve- 
tustissima, ne qnis intra urbem sepeliretur. 

(b) 1. Have not the boys been sent to bring water? 
2. They have come to shut the gates of the city. 3. 
"Will you come to shut the gates ? 4. Let them come 
to shut the gates. 5. Let all come to hear the instruc- 
tions of the wise. 6. Let the instructions of the wise 
be always heard. 7. By hearing the instructions of 
the wise we shall learn wisdom. 8. He has buried his 
father. 9. Has he buried him within the city ? 10. 
Do not bury him within the city. 



LESSON LXIX. 

Ve7'bs with the Dative, — Indirect Object, 

396. The use of the indirect object has been already 
illustrated ; but as some verbs in Latin are followed by 
the dative (the case of the indirect object) where we 
use no preposition, and should therefore be led by the 
English to put the accusative, it may be well to notice 
a few instances of this. The verbs of this class are 
principally such as signify : 

To command or obey^ please or displease^ favor or in- 
jure, serve or resist^ together with to indulge, spare, par- 
don, envy, believe, persuade/^ 

* See 643 



897, 398.] INDIRECT OBJECT. 179 

Rem. 1. — Yacare {to have leisure) andnubere {to marry ^ used of fe- 
males), also take the dative. 

Rem. 2. — It will be readily perceived, in most cases, that the dative 
after the above verbs is really the indirect and not the direct ob- 
ject ; thus, imperare (to command) means to give a command to; 
placgre (to please) to give pleasm-e to; and so of most, if not all, of 
the others. 

897. Vocabulary. 

Ars, artis, art, 

Beate, happily. 

Credere, credid, credit, to believe, 
put confidence in, 

Cupiditas, atis, desire, passion. 

Favere, fav, faut, to favor, 

Ignoscere, nov, not, to pardon, 

Indulgere, induls, indult, to in- 
dulge. 

Invidere, vid, vis, to envy. 



Nocere, nocu, nocit, to hurt, 
Parcere, peperc, parcit, to spare, 
Persuadere, persuas, persuas, to 

persuade, 
Resistere, stit, stit, to resist, 
Servire, iv (i). It, to serve, be a 

slave to. 
Studere, u, to study, strive for. 
Vacare, av, at, to have leisure 

for, 

398. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Irae multos annos servieras. 2. Regendis 
animi cupiditatibus studeamus. 3. Caesar legendo 
libro vacabit. 4. Christiani est patriae suae legibus 
parere. 5. Ignosce mihi. 6. Nemo tibi credet. 7. 
Improbus patriae legibus non parebit. 8. N um legi- 
bus parebunt improbi, violata fide ? 9. Discant Chris- 
tiani animis suis imperare. 10. Sapientia ars est bene 
beatec^ue yivendi. 

(b) 1. I would have favored Caius. 2. You would 
have resisted anger. 3. You {pi.) would have hurt 
nobody. 4. We would have indulged the desire. 5. 
I was hurting myself. 6. You were hurting me. 7. 
You had hurt Caius. 8. You had been-the-slave-of 
passion. 9. Do not be-the slave-of passion. 10. You 
were sparing the enemies. 11. It is the duty of a, Chris- 
tian to envy nobody. 12. Do not envy the good. 13* 



180 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [399 — 402. 

It is pleasant to succor the miserable. 14. Nobody 
will believe tlie wicked. 15. Death, spares nobody. 
16. They had spared the gate of the city. 17. He 
spares himself in the winter. 18. He does not spare 
even himself. 19. You will never have persuaded me. 
20. Let the Christian learn to command himself. 



LESSON LXX. 



Deponent Verbs, 

399. A DEPONENT verb is one which has a passive 
form^ but an active meaning, 

400. Deponent verbs have all the four participles ; e. g., 
1) Loquens, speaking ; 2) locutus, having spohen ; 

3) locuturus, ahout to speak ; 4) loquendus, to 
he spoken, 

Eem. — The past participle of a deponent verb is the participle of the 
'j^'zrfect active, which other verbs do not have. 

401. EuLE OF Syntax. — The deponent verbs, utor^ 
fruor^ fungor^ potior^ vescor^ dignor^ and their com- 
pounds, usually take the ablative ; e. g., 

y oluptate fruitur, he enjoys pleasure, 

Bem. — The ablative after the above is not strictly the object, but the 
ablative of means ; thus, to enjoy pleasure, is to be delighted with 
pleasure. 

402. EuLE OF Syntax. — Verbs of reminding^ remem- 
hering^ forgetting^ and pitying^ usually take the genitive 
of the object remembered, forgotten, &c. ; e. g., 

Eeminiscor benef icil tui, / remember your kindness. 



403, 404.] 



DEPONENT VEEBS. 



181 



Rem.— Most of these verbs, except those signifying to pity^ sometimes 
take the accusative instead of the genitive. 



403. Vocabulary. . 

Aliquando, some time or other. 

Benef icium, I, benefit. 

Flagitium, i, crime. 

Fungi, f unct, to discharge, 

Loqui, locut, to speak, 

Male, badly. 

Misererl, miserit, or misert, to 

pity. 
Oblivisci, obllt, to forget. 



Odium, 1, hatred, 

Officiilm, 1, duty. 

Post (prep, with accus,), after, 

Potiri, potit, to get possession. 

Recordari, at, to remember, to 

recall to mind. 
Sempiternus, a, um, eternal, 
Uti, us, to use. 



404. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Christianorum est misereri pauperiim. 2. 
Homo improbus aliquando cum dolore flagitiorum su- 
orum recordabitur. 3. Multi beneficiis male utuntur. 
4. Vincamus odium, paceque potiamur. 5. Christiani 
est injuriarum oblivisci. 6. Beatus est, qui omnibus 
vitae officiis fungitur. 7. Elegantiam loquendi legen- 
dis oratoribus et poetis auxerant. 

(&) 1. Let the Christian discharge all the duties of 
life. 2. Let us use our horses. 3. The good after 
death will enjoy eternal life. 4. Will not the good 
after death enjoy eternal life? 5. Is the life that we 
now enjoy eternal ? 6. Let boys learn to discharge all 
the duties of life. 7. Have you not spared the con 
quered?^ 8. Spare {pi.) the conquered. 9. Let us 
spare the conquered. 10. We will resist anger. 11. 
Will you not resist anger? 12. Let Caius, who sold 



* Participles as well as adjectives (111) are sometimes used substan 
tively. 



182 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [405 — 407, 

his country for gold, be condemned to death. 13. Let 
the wicked, who sold their country for gold, be accused 
of treason. 



LESSON LXXL 

Irregular Verhs, 

405. The irregular verbs are those which deviate 
from the ordinary rules, not only in the formation of 
their roots, but also in the inflection of some of their 
tenses. 

406. The irregular verb posse (to be able), com- 
pounded oipot (potis, able) and esse (to be), is conju- 
gated like the simple esse^ except, 

V) T before s becomes s ; as, possum (potsum). 

2) The /in the second root is dropped; SiS, potu 
(potfu). 

3) In the present infinitive and imperfect subjunctive 
there is a contraction ; as, posse (for potesse), 
possem (for potessem). 

407. Paradigm. 



Posse, to be able ; 2d root, potu, 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres, Possum, potes, potest, possumus, potestis, possunt. 
Imp. poteram; Fut. potero; Per/. p6tu-l; Pluperf. potu-eram; 
Fut. Perf. p6tu-er6. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres, possim; Imp, possem; Per/! p6tu-erim ; Pluperf. potu- 
issem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres, posse ; Perf. potu-isse. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Potens (used as an adjective, powerful). 



408—410.] 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



183 



408. The various forms of posse are often best trans- 
lated by the auxiliaries, can, could, &c. ; e. g., 

Ego facere possum, lean do (am able to do). 

Rem. — When a past tense of posse is thus translated bj could, any 
present infinitive depending upon it must be translated by the 
English perfect ; e. g., 

Ego facere potui, / could have done. 

409. The irregular verb v e 1 1 e, ^o will, or be willing, aiid its com- 
pounds, nolle, to be unwilling (from ndn and velle), and malle, 
to wish rather, to prefer (from mag \magls, more] and velle), are 
conjugated as in the following : , 

410. Paradigms. 



Velle. 


Nolle. 


Malle. 


2d root, vblu. 


2d root, nolu, 
INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 


2d root, malu. 


V616, 

Vis, 

Vult; 

Volumijs, 

Vultis, 

Volunt. 


Nolo, 

Nonvis, 

Nonvult ; 

Nolumijs, 

Nonvultis, 

Nolunt. 

IMPERFECT. 


Mal6, 

Mavis, 

Mavult ; 

Malumus, 

Mavultis, 

Malunt. 


VoVebam, bas, &c. 


Nol-ebam, bas, &c. 

FUTURE. 


1 Mal-ebam, bas, &c. 


V6l-am. 


1 Nol-am. 

PERFECT. 


1 Mal-am. 


V6lu-I. 


Nolu-1. 

PLUPERFECT. 


[ Malu-I. 


Volu-eram. 


Nolu-eram. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 


1 Malu-eram. 


Volu-ero. 


1 Nolu-erO. 


1 Malu-er6. 



184 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 

TARADiGMS-continued. 



[411, 412. 





SUBJUNCTIVE. 






PRESENT. 




Vel-im, IS, &c. 1 


Nol-im, Is, &c. 1 

IMPERFECT. 


Mal-im, Is, &c. 


Vell-em, es, &c. | 


Noll-em. 1 

PERFECT. 


Mall-em. 


Volu-erim. | 


Nolu-erim. | 

PLUPERFECT. 


Malu-erim. 


Volu-issem. | 


Nolu-issem. | 

IMPERATIVE. 

Nol-I or Ito, 
Nol-Ite,Itote. 

INFINITIVE. 


Malu-issem. 


Pres. Velle. 
Per/. Volu-isse. 


Nolle. 
Nolu-isse. 

PARTICIPLES. 


Malle. 
Malu-isse. 


Volens. 1 


Nolens. * | 





411. Vocabulary. 

Animal, alis, animal. 

CoiTigere, correx, correct, to cor- 
rect, rfform. 

Cor, cordis, n., heart 

Malle, malu, to 'prefer wish ra- 
ther. 

Nolle, nolu, to he unwilling. 

Nullus, a, urn (113,R.), no, not 
any. 



Occldere. occid, occis, to kill. 
Posse, potu, to he able. 
Praeteritus, a, um, past; prae- 

terita (neut. pL), the past. 
Probus, a, um, honest, upright. 
Sclpio, onis, Scipio, a distiri' 

guished Roman. 
Sine, without. 
Velle, volu, to wish. 



412. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Haec facere possumus. 2. Haec facere poti\ 
isti. 3. Multum discere vult. 4. Nolui hoc facere 



413, 414.] 



IRREGULAK VERBS. 



185 



5. Praeterita mutare non possiimiis. 6. ISTnllum ani* 
mal quod sanguinem liabet, sine corde esse potest. 7. 
Discat ut possit docere. 8. Num pueri regendae civi- 
tatis (382) periti esse possunt? 9. Si vis beatus esse, 
animo impera. 10. Probi semper vitam corrigere 
volunt. 11. Scipio dicebat, malle se "iinum civem ser- 
vare, quam mille hostes occidere. 

(b) 1. Do you wish to cliange the past? 2. We do 
not wish to change the past. 3. You (pi) cannot change 
the past. 4, We cannot shun death. 5. Let us learn, 
that we may be able to teach others. 6. They wish to 
be happy. 7. We all wish to be . happy. 8. Could 
you not have seen the king? 9. We might have 
learned much. 10. We were unwilling to accuse you. 
11. Were you not unwilling to accuse the king? 



LESSON LXXII. 



Irregular Verhs^ continued, 

413. The irregular verb, f erre, to bean drops e between two 7*'s, 
SLQferre tor fer ere, and i in the endings of the second and third sing, 
act., and of the third sing. pass. It borrows its second and third 
roots from other verbs. 

414. Paradigm. 



Ferre, to bear ; 2d root, tul; 3d, Idt 

INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT. 



Active. 

Fer-5, fer-s, fer-t, 
fer-tis, fer-nnt. 



fer-imus. 



Passive. 



Fer-6r, fer-ris, fer-tur, fer-imilr, 
fer-imml, fer-untur. 



186 



FIRST LATIN" BOOK. 

PARADIGM — continued. 



[414 





IMPEEFECT. 


Active. Passive. 
Fer-ebam, bas, (fee. Fer-ebar, baris, &c. 




FUTURE. 


Fer-am, es, &c. 


1 Fer-ar, eris, &c. 




PERFECT 


Tul-i, isti, &c. 


\ Lat-us sum, es, «fec. 




PLUPERFECT. 


Tiil-eram, as, &c. 


1 Lat-us eram, &c. 




FUTURE PERFECT. 


Tul-ero, &c. 


1 Lat-us ero, &c. 




SUBJUNCTIVE. i 




PRESENT. ! 


Fer-am, as, &c. 


1 Fer-ar, aris, &c. 




I3IPERFECT 


Fer-rem, res, &c. 


1 Fer-rer, reris, &c. 




PERFECT. 


Tul-erim, &c. 


1 Lat-us Sim, &c. 




PLUPERFECT. 


Tul-issem. 


1 Lat-us essem, &c. 




IMPEKATIVE. 


Fer, or ferto, 

Fer-to; 

Fer-te, or fer-tote 

Fer-unto. 




Fer-re, or fer-tor, 
Fer-tor ; 
Fer-imml, 

Fer-untor. 1 

1 




INFINITIYE. 


Pres. Fer-re, 

Perf. Tiil-isse, 
Fut. Lat-uriis esse. 


Fer-rT, 
Lat-us esse, 
Lat-um irl. 



415, 416.] 



IRKEGULAR VERBS. 
PARADIGM — continued. 



m 



PARTICIPLES. 



Active. 
Pres. Fer-ens, 
FuL Lat-urus (a, um). 



Passive. 
Perf. Lat-us (a, um). 
FuL Fer-endus (a, um). 



GERUND. 
Fer-endi, do, dum, do. | 

SUPINE. 
Lat-um. I Lat-u. 



Rem. — The compounds of ferre are conjugated like the simple verb. 

415. The irregular verb, fieri, to become, be made, is used as 
the passive of facere, and, in the tenses for completed action, has 
the regular forms of the passive of that verb. 

416. Paradigm. 



Fieri, to become, be made. 

PRESENT. 

Indicative. | Subjunctive. 

FiO, f Is, fit, &c. I Fl-am, f i-as, f I-at, &c. 

IMPERFECT. 

Fi-ebam, ebas, &c. | Fi-erem, eres, &c. 



FUTURE. 



Fl-am, es, &c. 



PERFECT. 

Fact-US sum, &c. | Fact-us sim, &c. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Fact-US eram, &c. | Fact-us essem, &c. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

Fact-US ero, &c. I 



IMPERATIVE. 



Sine^. Fl, or fl-to, 
Fi-to. 



Plur. Fite, or fl-tote, 
Fl-unto. 



188 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 
PARADIGM — continued. 



[417, 418. 









INFINITIVE. 








Pres, 


Fieri; 


Perf. Fact-US esse ; 


Fut. 


Fact-um 


iri. 








PARTICIPLES. 








Perf. 


Fact-US 


(a 


urn) ; Fut. Faciendus 


(a, urn). 





417. YOCABULARY. 

Aiferre, attul, allat, to bring, to 
bring to, 

Auctor, oris, author, 

Calamitas, atis, misfortune, ca- 
lamity. 

Creber, bra, hrum, frequent, nu- 
merous. 

Ferre, tul, lat, to carry, bear, en- 
dure. 



Fieri, fact, to become, be made, 
Inferre, intul, illat, to bring a- 

gainst, to wage, 
Iterum, again, 
Referre, retul, relat, to bring 

back, to relate. 
Rumor, oris, report, rumor, 
Tertius, a, um, third, 
Utilitas, atis, profit, advantage. 



418. Exercises. 

{a) 1, Quid fers manu, mi fili? 2. Is labor utilis 
est qui auctori laudem fert, aliis ntilitatem. 3. Tertio 
die auxilium tulerunt. 4. Crebri ad eum rumores affe- 
rebantur. 5. Dixit Gallos sibi belkim intulisse. 6. 
His responsis ad Caesarem relatis, iterum ad eum Cae- 
sar legates mittit. 7. Brutus consul factus est. 

{b) 1. He lias been made king. 2. Do you wish to 
become king ? {No,) 3. Many reports will be brougbt 
to you. 4. What reports have been brought to you ? 
5. Your father has become poor. 6. Shall you not 
bring us aid? 7. Do you not wish to carry aid to 
your brother ? 8. Caesar waged many wars. 9. Cae- 
sar is said to have waged many wars. 10. He has 
endured many misfortunes. 11. Do you wish to wage 
war against your father ? (No.) 12. We were unwil- 
ling to wage war against our country. 



419.] IRKEGULAR VERBS. 189 

LESSON LXXIII. 

Irregular Yerhs^ continued, 

419. The irregular verb, ire, to go, is regular in 
tlie parts from the first root. 

PARADIGM. 



Ire, to go ; 2d root, w ; 8d, it 

PRESENT. 

Indicative. I Subjunctive. 

Eo, Is, it ; imus, itis, eunt. | Earn, eas, &c. 

IMPERFECT. 

Ibam, ibas, &c. | Irem, Ires, &c. 

FUTURE. 

Ibo, ibis, &c. I 

PERFECT. 

Iv-I, iv-isti, &c. I Iv-erim, eris, &c. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Iv-eram, eras, &c. | Iv-issem, isses, &c. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

Iv-er6, eris, &c. | 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sing. I, or Ito, I Plur. Ite, or Itote, 

Ito. I Eunto. 

INFIN'ITIVE. 
Pres. Ire ; Perf. Iv-isse ; Fut. Iturus, esse. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres. lens (gen. euntis) ; Fut. Itnrus, a, iim. 

GERUND. I SUPIKE. 

Eundi, do, dum, do. \ Mm, itQ. 



190 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[420—423. 



Rem. — The compounds of ire are conjugated like the simple verb, but 
generally contract the perfect Ivl into il, and most of them want 
the supine. 

420. E d e r e, to eat^ is conjugated regularly as a verb of the third 
conjugation, but has also certain forms like those of esse. These 
are as follows : 



Regular. 
Pres. Edo, &c. 

Lnperat. Ede, &c. 
Subj. Imp. Ederem, &c. 
Infin. Edere, 



Irregular. 
Es, est, estis. 
Es, esto, este, estote. 
Essem, esses, &c. 
Esse. 



421. EuLE OF Syntax. — The words domus and rusj 
togetlier with the genitives Jiuml., lelll^ and mllttiae, are 
construed like names of towns (see 227) ; e. g., 
Domiim rediit, he returned home. 



422. Vocabulary. 

Abire, i, it, to go away, depart* 
Domi (gen. of domus), at home. 
Edere (esse), ed, es, to eat. 
Et — et, both — and. 
Evolare, ?.v, at, to fly away, to 
flee. 



Ire, IV, it, to go. 

Mllitiae (gen. of militia), on ser^ 

vice, in the field. 
Nee — nee, neither — nor. 
Re dire, i, it, to return. 
Rus, rarls, field, country. 



423. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Fracto pneri brachio, abit. 2. Fundo in tres 
partes diviso, redit Athenas. 3. Pueriyenatum^^ ive- 
runt. 4. Est(e(i^^) ntviyat. 5. ISTonne estis ntvivatis? 
6. Abeat Eomam. 7. Scriptis epistolis, abierunt. 8. 
Balbiis, quum manus in aqnam immersissei^ abiit. 9. 
Caius rus ex iirbe evolaverit. 10. Cains nondum rure 
rediit. 11. ' Et Caesar et Balbns Eomam redierunt. 12. 
Venit sacerdos, nt aram floribus cingeret. 

(i) 1. Caesar has not yet returned to Eome. 2. The 



424 — 427.] PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS. 191 

boys have gone a hunting. ^ ^ 3. Do you wish to go a 
hunting ? . 4. They say he has gone a hunting. 5. He 
says that he wishes to go a hunting. 6. Do you not 
eat to live ? 7. He says that he eats to live. 8. Bal- 
bus, having crowned the boy's head with a garland, 
went away. 9. Caesar, having conquered his enemies, 
will return to Rome. 10. They all wish to return to 
Rome. 11. Do you wish to return home ? 12. Balbus 
is at his own house. 13. He was with me both at 
home and on service. 14. You have hved many years 
in the country. 



LESSON LXXIY, 



Periphrastic Conjugations, 

424. There are two periphrastic conjugations formed 
respectively from the future participles in rus and dvis^ 
combined with the various tenses of the verb esse. 
The first periphrastic conjugation represents the action 
2^^ future^ or as one that is about to be done; e. g., 
Scrip turiis sum, / am about to write, 

425. The second periphrastic conjugation expresses 
duty or necessity ; e. g., Virtus colenda est, virtue raust 
he cultivated, 

426. RuLB OF Syntax. — The agent, or person by 
wJiom^ is put in the dative with the part, in dus ; with 
other words it is generally governed in the ablative by 
a or db, 

427. Rule of Syntax. — Many adjectives are fol- 
lowed by the dative of the object to which the quality 



192 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [428, 429. 

is directed, or for which it exists ; e. g., Pax miM gra- 
tissima erat, peace icas very^ acceptable to me. 



428. YOCABULARY. 

Bib ere, bib, bib it, to drink. 
Delere, ev, et, to destroy, 
Ignarus, a, um, ignorant, 
Inutilis, e, useless^ unfit for. 
Marlmus, a, iim, marine, of the sea. 



Propior, us (comp.), nearer, 
Putare, av, at, to think, regard. 
Simplex, icis, simple. 
Subvenire, ven, vent, to go to the 
assistance of to aid. 



429. Eooercises, 

(a) 1. .Tondendae sunt oves, non deglubendae. 2. 
Exercenda est yirtus. 3. ISTonne claudendae sunt urbis 
portae ? 4. Sapientia ars vivendi putanda est. 5. Puer 
Eomam mittendus est. 6. Pauperibus qui ne grano 
quidem uno fraudandi sunt, subveniamus. 7. Quid 
facturi estis? 8. Simplex cibus pueris utilissimus-est. 
9. Luna terrae propior est quam sol. 10. Aqua ma- 
rina inutilis est bibendo. 11. Inutiles sunt libri ignaro 
legendi. 

(6) 1. They must be sent to Athens. 2. They must 
be sent into the country. 8. We must be taught by 
the wise. 4. The city must be destroyed. 5. The 
gates must be shut. 6. Must not virtue be learned ? 
7. Must not virtue be practised ? 8. Every opportu- 
nity of practising virtue^^ must be seized. 9. The poor 
must not be defrauded of even a single grain. 10. Has 
he not defrauded the poor ? 11. Let not^the poor be 
defrauded of a single grain. 12. Is not the moon 
nearer the earth than the sun ? 



4.30 — 432.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 193 



LESSON LXXY. 

Impersonal Verbs. 

430. Impersonal verbs are such as are used only in 
the third person singular, and never take a personal 
subject (as I, thou^ he). The subject in English is gene- 
rally expressed by the pronoun it; e. g., 

Oportet, it behooves. 

Taedet me, it disgusts me (I am disgusted with). 

431. Besides the verbs which are strictly impersonal, 
many others are often used impersonally ; e. g., 

Constat, it is known. 
Juyat, it delights. 

432. The impersonal verb licet, it is lawful^ oris 
allowed, denotes permission, and may be translated by 
may and might; e. g.. 

Licet; may (it is allowed). 
Licuit, might (it was allowed). 

Mihi ire licet, / may go. 

Tibi ire licet, You may go. 

nil ire licet. He may go. 

Nobis ire licet, We may go. 

Yobis ire licet. You may go. 

Illis ire licet, They may go. 

Mihi ire licuit, I might have gone. 

Tibi ire licuit. You might have gone. 
Rem. 1. — The dative in these examples is the indirect object after licet. 
Rem 2. — The present infinitive must be translated by the Enghsh 
perfect after licuit, might, as in the above examples. (See also 408, 
Rem.) 

9 



194 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [433 — 436. 

{Eng.) I may go. [Lat Id.) It is allowed me to go. 
{Eng.) I might have gone, {Lett. Id.) It was allowed 
me {then) to go. 

433. The impersonal verb oportetj it behooves^ de- 
notes duty or 2^^^W^^^ty-) ^^^ ^^J be translated hj 
ought; e. g., 

Me ire oportet, I ought to go, 

Te ire oportet, &c. You ought to go. 

Me ire oportuit, / ought to have gone. 

Te ire oportnit, You ought to have gone. 

Rem. 1. — Observe that here, too, the present infinitiye is to be trans- 
lated by the perfect after a past tense. 
Rem 2 — The infinitive after oportet takes a subject accusative, 

434. English. Latin Idiom. 

{a) I repent of my folly, It repents me of my folly. 

I am vexed at my folly. It vexes me of my folly. 

I am ashamed of my folly, It shames me of my folly. 

I pity the poor, It pities me of the poor. 

I am weary of life, It irks me of life. 

(Jb) Me meae stultitiae poenltet, I repent of my folly. 

Me meae stultitiae piget, I am vexed at my folly. 

Me meae stultitiae pudet, I am ashamed of my folly. 

Miseret me pauperum, I pity the poor. 

Taedet me vitae, I am weary of life. 

435. EuLE OF Syntax. — The impersonal verbs of 
feeling, iniseret^ poenitet^ pitdet^ taedet^ and piget^ take the 
accusative of the person, together with the genitive of 
the object which produces the feeling. (See examples 
above.) 

436. Vocabulary. 

Adesse, adfu, to he present. Dlligens, entis, diligent. 

Amicitia, ae, friendship. Habitare, av, at, to inhabit, dwell. 

Constat, it is known, is an admit- Immortalis, e, immortal 

ted fact. Licet, it is lawful, is permitted. 



437, 438.] IMPEESOISTAL PEEIPHEASTIC. 195 



Reci'pere (16), cep, cept, to re' 

ceive. 
Saepe, often. 
Sonus, 1, sound, noise. 
Tardus, a, urn, slow, 
Velox, ocis, sivift. 



Miseret, one pities; tulme mise- 

ret, I pity you, 
Oportet, it behooves, one ought. 
Pige t, one is grieved at ; me piget, 

/ am grieved, 
Poemtet, it repents, one repents. 
Praestat, it is better. 

487. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Constat sonum luce tardiorem esse. 2. Saepe 
facere praestat qTiam loqui. 3. Nonne licet Eomae 
habitare ? 4. N'onne licuit Atliems habitare ? 5. Nnn- 
quam licet peccare. 6. JSTum licet Cbristianis gloriae 
servire ? 7. Pueros oportet diligentes esse. 8. Ami- 
citiam immortalem esse oportet. 9. Tui me miseret; 
mei piget. 10. Sapientia semper eo contenta est quod 
adest. 11. Ne multa loquere. 12. Miserere nostri. 13. 
Nattira omnes propensi sumus ad discendum. 

(&) 1. It is well known that light is swifter than 
sound. 2. Is it not well known that the moon is nearer 
the earth than the sun ? 3. Is it not well known that 
sound is slower than light ? 4. He repents of his folly. 
5. I repented of my folly. 6. Ought not Christians to 
do good to as many as possible f 7. Ought not Balbus 
to have kept *" his word ? 8. Ought not Caius to have 
been condemned to death ? 9. I have received many 
letters from you. 10. The bird has flown away from 
my hands. 



LESSON LXXVI. 



Impersonal Periphrastic, 
438. The second periphrastic conjugation is often 
used impersonally ; e. g., . 



196 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [439 — 442- 

Milii scribendum est, I rnvM or sliould write. 

Tibi scribendum est, you must or should icrite, 

nil scribendum est, he must or should write, 

Nobis scribendum est, ice must or should lorite, 

Yobis scribendum est, you raust or should write, 

nils scnbendiim est, they must or should icrite, 

439. Here too the agent is put in the dative (see 426) when ex- 
pressed. It is omitted : 

1) When it means every body or people in general, though 
it may be translated by we or you ; e. g., 

Edendfim est, we or you (every body) must eat, 

2) When the persons meant are not likely to he mistaken. 

440. In the impersonal periphrastic construction, if 
the verb is one which governs a dative (396), its agent 

(the person by whom) must not be expressed ; e. g., 
Credendum est Caio. 
We must believe Caius {^aot^ Caius must believe). 

Rem. — If, in any iQstance, it is necessary to express the agent, it must 
either be done by means of the ablative Tvith a or ah, or the form 
of the expression must be changed. The two datives would leave 
it doubtful which was the agent 

441. YOCABULARY. 
Etiam, even. 

Laborare, av, at, to labor, toil. 
Metuere, u, to fear. 



Senex, senis, an old man ; pi. the 
affed. 



442. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Mihi discendum est. 2. Etiam senibus dis- 
cendum est. 3. Improbis metuendum est. 4. Tibi 
evolandum est ex urbe. 5. Manendum est Eomae. 
6. Totam hiemem manendum est Carthagine. 7. Am- 
bulandum est per urbem. 8. Laborandum est, ut dis- 
cas. 9. Nonne laborandum est, ut discamus? .10. 



443.] IMPEKSONAL PASSIVE VEEBS. 197 

Nnm semper ludendum est ? 11. Nonne resistendnm 
est irae? 12. Niim credendum est improbis? 13. 
Nonne resistendiini est animo ? 14. Non omiies ad 
discendum propensi sunt. 15. Discendum est, ut pos- 
sis docere. 16. Edendum est, nt possimus vivere. 

(&) 1. We must dwell in the country, 2. We must 
remain at home, 3. We must fly from tlie city (into) 
the country. 4. The unlearned mu.st labor, that they 
may learn. 5. We must fight, that we may preserve 
our lives. 6. The girls must walk through the city. 
7. True greatness of mind must be valued at-a-very- 
high-price. 8. We should spare the conquered. 9. 
We should resist anger. 10. Should we not resist 
anger? 11. We should obey the laws of our country. 
12. We must not spare even Balbus. 13. We must 
pardon both Caius and Balbus. 14. We must not be- 
lieve even Caesar himself. 15. Having written his 
letter, he will go a-hunting. 



LESSON LXXVII. 



Impersonal Passive Yerbs, — Prepositions. 

443. Those verbs which take no direct object in the 
active, can only be used impersonally in the passive ; e. g., 
Mihi creditur, / am believed, 
Tibi creditur. Thou art believed, 
nil creditur. He is believed. 

Nobis creditur. We are believed, 
VobTs creditur, You are believed, 
nils creditiir, They are believed. 



198 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [444 449. 

444. Prepositions, as we have already seen (200), 
sliow the relation of objects to each other ; e. g.^ in urbe 
habitat, he dwells in the city, 

445. EuLE OF SyIs^tax. — The following twenty-six 
prepositions govern the accusative ; viz., Ad, adversiis, 
ante, apiid, circa or circum, cis or citra, contra, erga, 
extra, infra, inter, intra, jnxta^ 6b, penes, per, pone, 
post, praeter, prope, propter, secnndiim, supra, trans, 
ultra, versiis {rare), 

446. EuLE OF Syntax. — The following eleven pre- 
positions govern the ablative ; viz., A (ab or abs), ab- 
sque, coram, ciim, de, e or ex, palam, prae, pro, sine, 
teniis. 

447. EuLE OF Syntax. — The five prepositions, clam, 
in, sub, subter, and super, take sometimes the accusa- 
tive and sometimes the ablative. 

REii. — Li and sub govern the accusative in ansver to vjhither (i. e. 
after verbs of motion), and the ablative in ansv^er to where (i. e. after 
verbs of rest). Subter generally takes the accusative. Super 
takes the accusative after verbs of motion and also vrhen it signi- 
, fies upon, and the ablative when it signifies on or of (as of a sub- 
ject spoken or written about). 

448. YOCABULARY. 



Cis, on this side. 

Coelnm, I, heaven, the heavens. 

Coram, before, in the presence of. 

Erga, towards. 

Firmus, a, urn, firm, sure. 

Infra, below. 



Intra, within. 

Paiicus, a, um, few, little. 

Pietas, atis, loyalty, faithfulness, 

Prae, before, in comparison with. 

Supra, above. 

Terra, ae, the earth. 



449. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Yobis non creditur. 2. Bonis creditur. 3. 
Gloriae tuae invidetur. 4. Irae resistitur. 5. Pauci 
veniunt ad senectutem. 6. Nulla est firma amicitia 



450—464:.] CONJUNCTIONS. 199 

inter males. 7. Pietas erga patriam conseryanda est, 
8. Graili.cis Elienum habitant. 9. Intra mures liabi- 
tabat. 10. .Coram popiilo loquetur. 11. Argentum 
prae auro contemnitur. 12. Caecus de coloribus judi- 
care non potest. 13.. Supra nos coelum conspicimus ; 
infra nos terram. 

(b) 1. The good are always envied. 2. The wicked 
should never be believed. 3. The conquered must be 
spared. 4. We are envied. 5. They will be envied. 
6. He was buried within the walls. 7. They wish to 
be buried on-this-side-of the Ehine. 8. Let us walk 
through the city. 9. They have returned from the 
city into the country. 10. Do you wish to go into the 
city ? 11. My father will remain in the city the whole 
winter. 



LESSON LXXVIIL 

Co7ijunctio7is. 

450. Conjunctions are merely connectives ; as, pater 
et f iliiis, the father and son. Certain combinations of 
these require some attention. 

451. M followed by another et; turn or qitum fol- 
lowed by tum^ are hath — and. 

452. Non solum — sed etiam^ not only — lut also. 

iso — as; as — as, 
as ivell — as, 
loth — and. 

454. Etiam, even^ also ; etiam atque etiam, again and 
again ; quoque, also^ too (follows the word it belongs to). 



200 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [455—461. 

455. Ant, or ; aut — aut, vel — vel, either — or, 
Sive — sive, seu — sen, either — or^ whether — or, 

456. Nee — nee, neqne — neque, neither — nor, 

Yel, or^ sometimes even ; with superlatives, very, 
extremely^ possible, 

457. At, sed, autem, yeriim, vero, hut, 
Attamen, tamen, veruntamen, yet^ hut, hut yet, 

458. AtqvL\ but, now (as nsed in reasoning). 

459. Nam, namqne, enim, for. 



Erg8, 


therefore, then. 


Igitiir, ideo, 


therefore. 


Itaque, 


accordingly, and so, there- 




fore. 


Qnare, 


wherefore. 



460. Vocabulary. 

Ain'phibmm,!, amphibious animal. 
Audax, acis, audacious, daring. 
Deterrere, u, it, to deter. 
Inceptum, I, purpose, undertaking. 
Impedire, iv, it, to impede, hinder. 



Nasci, nat, to be born. 

|S[imius, a, um, excessive, too 

much. 
Piidor, oris, shame, sense of shame. 
Somniis, I, sleep. 



461. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Et discet pner et docebit. 2. Et Eomae vixi 
et Carthagine. 3. Lnpns qunm oyem tnm canem mo- 
morderat. 4. Ovem non solum totondit, sed etiam 
deglupsit. 5. Nee timidus est, nee audax. 6. Mmius 
somnus neque ammo, neque corpori prodest. 7. Non 
deterreor ab incepto, sed pudore impedior. 8. Nihil 
laboras ; ideo nihil habes. 9. Nemo tam pauper vivit, 
quam natus est. 10. Amphibia et in aqua et in terra 
vivunt. 

(b) 1, We shall go both to Eome and to Carthage. 
2. "Will you also accuse me ? 8. Will they even con- 



462 — 466.] SUBJUNCTIYE mood with ut, ne, quo. 201 

demn the king to death.? [No.] 4. We must both 
learn and teach. 5. Do you not wish both to learn 
and to teach ? 6. We might have condemned not only 
the father, but also the son. 7. He will either remain 
at Eome, or go to Athens. 8 Dogs as well as wolves 
sometimes bite sheep. 9. He sent his son to Rome, 
but was unwilling to go himself. 10. Caius has been 
accused of treason, but he will never be condemned. 
11. He will not go a hunting, for he has buried his son. 



LESSON LXXIX. 

Subjunctive Mood with iit, ne, and quo. 

1. m order that^ that^ so that. 
1 2. theinfin. (expressing purpose). 

462. Ut with subj.'s 3. as, with infinitive, 
' 4. granting that^ although. 
,5. that^ after to fear that not. 

463. When ut introduces a purpose^ the subjunctive 
may be rendered by may^ might ; when it introduces a 
consequence (as after 50, such\ it may be rendered by 
the indicative or infinitive. 

464. Ut with the indicative is a<s, ivhen^ since^ after ^ how. 

CI. lestj that not. 
■NT- •+>. w J 2. 720^ m^A ^Ae infinitive. 
j 3. not with the imperative. 
1^ 4. after to fear that. 
466. Ne with the imperative or subjunctive ased 
imperatively, is simply not; as, ne scrlbds, or ne scribe, 
do not write. 
9^ 



202 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [467 — 471. 

467. After verbs of fearing, ut and ne appear to 
change meanings; iit, that — not^ ne, that ot lest. 

468. After verbs of fearing, the subjunctive present 
must generally be rendered by i\iQ future; as, vereor ut 
fdcidm^ I fear that I shall no^^ do, vereor ne fdcidm^ I fear 
that I shall do. 

469. Qno with the subjunctive is used to express 
purpose in sentences containing a comparative degree ; 
as, medico dliquid dandura est^ quo sit studiosior^ some- 
thing should be given to the physician, that he may be 
the more attentive. 

^^^ For the use of tenses in the subjunctiye, see 265 and 266. 



470. Vocabulary. 

Cavere, cav, caut, to take care^ 

he careful. 
Cognitus, a, ilm, known, 
EfFicere (io), fee, feet, to effect, 

accomplish. 
Fames, is, hunger. 
Ineognitus, a, um, unknown. 
Medleus, I, physician, 
Monere, monu, monit, to advise, 

warn. 



Multitude, inis, multitude. 
Numerare, av, at, to number. 
Quo, that, in order that. 
Satis (substantively), enough, 
Stella, ae, star, 
Sustinere, tinu, tent, to sustain^ 

to endure. 
Vererl, verit, to fear. 



471. Exercit 



'Cises, 



(a) 1. Multi alios lau.dant, ut ab aliis laudentur. 2. 
Stellarum tanta multitude est, ut numerari non possint. 
8. Medicis aliquid dandum est, quo sint studiosiores. 4. 
Cave ne incognita pro cognitis habeas. 5. Ne tentes 
quod effici non possit. 6. Vereor, ne labores tuos 
augeam. 7. Vereor ne brevi tempore fames in urbe 
sit. 8. Timeo ut labores tantos sustineas. 9. Avarus 
semper veretur, ut satis habeat. 10. Verebamini ut 
pax firma esset. 



472, 473,] suBJUi^CTiYE with conjunctioits. 203 

(b) 1. The cold is so great that the snow will not 
melt. 2. He praised us, in-order-that he might be 
praised by us. 3. The multitude of men was so great 
that it could not be numbered. 4. The multitude is 
so great that it cannot be numbered. 5. He has come 
to aid you. 6. They have gone to Eome to aid their 
father, 7. I sent him home, that he might not be bit- 
ten by the dog. 8. He warned his sons not to break 
the laws. 9. We fear we shall increase your labors. 
10. They feared that he would not be acquitted. 



LESSON LXXX. 



Subjunctive with quommiis, qum, and other Conjunctions, 

472. After verbs of hindering^ quommiis is more 
common with the subjunctive than ne. It may gene- 
rally be translated by /rom, the verb being turned into 
the participial substantive. 

Rem. — Quominiis (quo and minus) means literally, by which the less, 
or, 50 that the less; e. g., 

Cai5 nihil obstat quominiis sit beatus. 

{Nothing opposes Gains by which he should be the less happy) 

ITothing prevents Caius from being bappy. 

"1. but (as used after negatives), 

2. the relative with not 

3. as not with infinitive. 

4. ^Aa^ after doubt^ deny in nega- 
tive sentences. 

5. from or without with the^ar- 
ticipial substantive^ after 
prevent^ escapcyho,. 



473. Quinwithsubj. 



204 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [474 — 478. 

474. QuTn coincides very nearly with hut; it is, 
however, generally better translated by some of the 

•other forms given above ; e. g., 

-.V rr,T . -IT _ ^,^,{but thinks, 

1) There is nobody, quinputet-< ^ _ _._ 
^ ( "Who does not tliink. 

2) No one is so mad, quTn piitet, as not to think, 

3) I do not deny, qmn turpe sit, that it is disgraceful, 

4) They never saw him, quin rideret, without 

laughing. 

Rem. — Quin with the subjunctiye is generally used after negative ex- 
pressions and those which imply doubt. 

475. The following conjunctions are used with the 
subjunctive; viz., 

Diim, modo, dummodo, provided^ if only. 
Licet, although, 

O SI (0 ^7"), iitinam, would that. 
Quamvis, however much^ however. 
Quasi, tanquam, as if. 

Rem. — Not after provided^ <fec., is expressed by ne. 

476. EuLE OF Syntax. — Verbs signifying to abound, 
or he destitute of take the ablative ; e. g., Nemo alioriim 
ope carere potest, no one can he (do) without the assistance 
of others. 



4,1*1. Vocabulary. 

Diibitare, av, at, to doubt, 
Interdum, sometimes, 
Obstare, stit, stat, to oppose, pre- 
vent. 



Providus, a, um, prudent, cau- 
tious. 
Terrere, terru, territ, to terrify. 



478. Exercises, 

{a) 1. Nihil impedit, quominus id facere possimus. 
2. Quid obstat, quominus Caius sit beatus? 8. Non 



479—482.] INTEEEOGATIYE SENTENCES. 205 

me terrebis, quominus illud faciam. 4. Sapiens nun- 
quam dubitabit, quin immortalis sit animus. 5. Nemo 
est tam bonus ac providus, quin interdum peccet. 6. 
O si quisque yirtutem colat ! 7. Utinam hoc verum 
sit. 8. Sic agis, quasi me ames. 

(&) 1. JSTotliing prevents you from being happy. 2. 
Nothing prevents him from doing this. 8. Does any 
thing prevent you from doing this ? 4. We have never 
doubted that the soul is immortal. 5. Do you doubt 
that the soul is immortal ? 6. There is no one who 
does not think (473, 2) that you were engaged in the 
battle. 7. He never saw the shepherd without laugh- 
ing at him (474, 4). 8. Would that all citizens would 
observe the laws. 



LESSON LXXXI. 



Interrogative Sentences, 

479. All interrogatives take the indicative when the 
question is put directly ; as, nUm credis^ do you believe? 

480. Niim and ne are merely interrogative particles, 
and are not construed in direct questions. 

481. All interrogatives take the subjunctive when 
the question is put indirectly or doubtfully^ especially 
when it depends upon another verb. 

482. Double questions take two different construc- 
tions, viz. : • 

1) The first clause is introduced by nUm^ VitrUm^ 
or ne^ and the second by an. 



206 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[483, 484. 



2) The first clause lias no interrogative word, and 
tlie second has an or n^. 



483. Vocabulary. 

Enumerare, av, at, to enumerate, 

to count up. 
Ignis, IS, m., fire, heat, 
Immobilis, e, immovable, fixed. 
Locuples, etis, rich. 
Major, us, oris (comp. q/'magniis), 

larger, greater. 
Minor, us, oris (comp. (/parvus), 

smaller. ■ 
Mobilis, e, movable. 



Miser, era, erum, unhappy, miser- 
able. 

Mortalis, e, mortal, 

Nescire, iv. It, to be ignorant, not 
to know. 

Olim, formerly. 

Quaestio, onis, question, 

Rotundus, a, um, round, 

Unde, whence. 



484. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Estne animus ininiortalis ? 2. Visne miser 
esse? 3. Quis ennmeret artinni miiltitndinem ? 4. 
Nescio, nnde sol ignem habeat. 5. Quid dicam nescio. 
6. Olim qnaestio erat, nnm terra rotunda esset. 7. 
Utrum major est sol, an minor, quam terra? 8. Xum 
sol mobilis, an immobilis? 9. Snmusne immortales, 
an mortales ? 

(&) 1. AYho has come? 2. I do not know who has 
come. 3. Do not all men wish to live ? 4. Do you 
fear that the king will be conquered ? 5. Do you not 
fear that we shall be condemned to death ? 6. What 
did he say ? 7. We do not know what he said. 8. 
Are they rich or poor ? 9. You do not know whether 
we are rich or poor. 10. Whence does the moon de- 
rive (liabere) her light ? 11. He does not know whence 
the m(5bn derives her light. 12. Who knows whence 
the sun derives his light ? 



485 — 487.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 207 

' LESSON LXXXII. 

Conditional Sentences. — Subjunctive in Relative Clauses 
and with Quum. 

485. Eyeey conditional sentence consists of two 
parts, the condition and the consequenje; e. g., 

Si quid habeat, dabit. 

If lie tas any thing, he will give it. 

Kem. — Here si quid hdhedt is the condition, and ddhit the consequence. 

486. Conditional sentences are of three kinds: 

1) Those which assume the condition to be true; 

Si quid habet, dat. 

If he has any thing, he gives it. 

2) Those which represent the condition as ^05- 
sihle ; e. g., 

Si quid habeat, dabit. 
If he has any thing, he will give it. 
8) Those which represent the condition as imjpos- 
sihle; e. g., 

1. Si quid haberet, daret. 

If he had any thing, he would give it. 

2. Si quid habuisset, dedisset. 

If he had had any thing, he would have 
given it. 

487. It must be observed : 

1) That the condition is expressed in the first of the 
above classes by the indicative^ vcl the second 
by the subjunctive present or perfect^ and in the 
third by the subjunctive imperfect ox pluperfect 



208 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [488 — 490. 

2) That the consequence is expressed in the first 
two of these classes by the indicative (or some- 
times by the imj^erative)^ and in the third by 
the subjunctive imperfect or phiperfect, 

488. The relative clause takes the subjunctive : 

1) AYhen it expresses d, purpose or result; e. g., 

1. Legatos miserunt, qui dicerent. 

They sent ambassadors to say {that they might 
say). 

2. Neque enim tu is es qui nescias. 

Nor indeed are you such an one as not to 
know (ivho may not hnovS). 

2) When it defines or explains some indefinite an- 
tecedent, whether affirmative or negative ; e. g., 

1. Sunt qui piitent. 

There are (some) who think, or some persons 
think. 

2. Nemo est, qui hand intelligat. 

There is no one who does not understand. 

489. Quiim (ciim) takes the subjunctive when it in- 
troduces a cause or reason, or in any way shows the de- 
pendence of one event upon another ; e. g.. 

Quae cum ita sint. 

Since these things {lit which things) are so. 

490. Quum, as an adverb of time {when\ takes the 
indicative ; e. g.. 

Iter faciebam quitm Balbiim videbam. 
I was travelling ivhen I saw Balbus. 

The use of quum with the perfect or flu-perfect suhjuncthe to sup- 
ply the place of a perfect active participle, has already been noticed 
(367). 



491—493.] PARTICIPLES. 209 



491, Vocabulary. 

Consulere, sulu, suit, to consult^ 

ask advice. 
Natio, on IS, nation. 
Pertimescere, timu, to fear 

greatly. 



Suadere, suas, suas, to advise, 
Sustmere, tinu, tent, to sustain, 

withstand, 
Vulnerare, av, at, to wound. 



492. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Peccavit, si id fecit. 2. Peccabit, si id faciat. 
3. Peccarent, si id facerent. 4. Peccavissent, si id 
fecissent. 5. Si yis beatns, impera animo. 6. Si me 
consiilis, suadeo. 7. Patriam anro, si potuisset, vendi- 
disset. 8. Sunt qni rideant. 9. Erant qui saltavissent. 
10. Caesar equitatum, qui sustineret bostium impetum, 
misit. 11. Nulla est enim natio quam pertimescamus. 

(b) 1. If lie is alive {lives), he is now at Athens. 2. 
If lie remains at Athens, lie will learn much. 3. If he 
had gone to Eome, he would have been killed. 4. 
They would have sold their country, if they could. 5.* 
If the king had been in the city, he would have par- 
doned you. 6. There were some who were wounded. 
7. Since we cannot remain at Eome, we will go to 
Athens. 8. Caesar had sent two legions to attack 
(make an attack upon) the enemy. 



LESSON LXXXIII. 



Participles, 

493. Participles assume an assertion, which may be 
formally stated in a sentence whenever it is necessary 
or convenient to do so ; thus, puer rldens^ may be vari- 



210 FiEST LATm BOOK. [494 — 498. 

ously translated, according to the connection ; as, the 
hoy who laughs, the hoy when he laughs^ &c. 

494. Participles may sometimes be translated by a 
relative clause ; e. g., 

- -r» V- _ -, ( the hoy who lauqhs, 

1. Puer ridens k _ , "^ .. ^ ^ , . 

( the boy who was Laughing. 

c T^ ^ - - ^ {the hoy ivho is qoina to lauqh, 

2. Puer risurus, \ ^ ^ ^ ^ % ^-^ ^ ^ 

( the boy icho will laugh. 

3. Puer amatiis, the hoy who is (or was) loved, 

4. Puer amandus, tJie hoy who ought to he loved. 

495. If no substantive is expressed, supply man^ men^ 
he, slie, or those^ &c. ; e. g., 

1. Eidentis, of him who laughs. 

2. Eidentiiim, of those who laugh. 

496. With a neuter plural participle, supply tilings; 
e. -g., 

-T) , ^ , - w ^ things that will pass away. 
Praeteritura, \ ^ . -. 

( what will pa^s away. 

Rem. — Participles, being parts of yerbs, of course goveiii the same 
cases. 

497. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor- 
responding verbs with wlien or while ; e. g., 

Ridens, when (or while) he is (or was) laughing. 

Rem. — In a sentence with when or while, we often omit the auxiliary 
verb ; e. g., 

Ridens, when laughing. 

498. If the participle stands alone, /ze, they^ a man^ 
rmn^ or one^ &c., must be supplied as the subject of the 
verb ; e. g., 

1. Eidens, when he (or one) is laughing. 

2. Ridentes, ^vhen men (or tliey) are laughing. 



449—503.] 



PAETICIPLES. 



211 



499. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor- 
responding verbs with if; e, g., 

1. Eidens, if a man (heoTone) laughs, 

2. Amatiis, if a man Qie or one) is loved, 

500. Participles may sometimes be translated by cor- 
responding verbs with because^ for^ since^ or by partici- 
pial substantives with/ro772 or through, 

1. because I doubt 

2. for I doubt, 

501. Diibitans, -I 3. since I doubt, 

4. from doubting, 

5. through doubting. 



502. YOCABULARY. 

Adulator, oxi^^ flatterer, 

Disjungere, junx, junct, to sepa- 
rate. 

Durare, av, at, to last, 

Expellere, pul, puis, to expel, 
banish. 

Fellcitas, atis, happiness. 

Immensus, a, um, immense. 

Tnnoxius, a, urn, harmless, 

Intervallum, i, distance, space, 

Perf idia, ae, perfidy. 



Perpetuo, for ever, 

Pervenire, ven, vent, to arrive 

at, reach. 
Pius, a, um, pious. 
Placere, placu, placit, to please. 
Revertere, vert, vers, to return^ 

turn back, 
Satiare, av, at, to satisfy, 
Viderl, vis, to seem, 
Vituperare, av, at, to reprove^ 

criticise. 



503. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Sapiens bona semper placitnra laudat. 2. 
Pii homines ad felicitatem perpetuo duraturam perve- 
nient. 3. Adulator aut laudat vituperanda, aut vitu- 
perat laudanda. 4. Leones satiati (497) innoxii sunt. 
5. Bquum empturus (499) cave ne decipiaris. 6. Eoma 
expulsus Carthagine pueros docebit. 7. Respondent 



212 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [504 — 506. 

se perfidiam veritos (501) revertisse. 8. Stellae nobis 
parvae yidentur, immenso intervallo a nobis disjunctae. 
(b) 1. He wlio does wrong (494) is never happy. 2. 
Those wlio read this book will learn much. 3. There 
are some who think (488, 2) little of happiness which 
will not last. 4. The wise prize very highly the hap- 
piness which will last for ever. 5. They learned much 
while remaining at Eome (497). 6. If you love your 
parents (499), you will obey them. 7. We shall pardon 
him if condemned. 8. He fled from the city, because 
he had been accused of bribery (501). 



LESSON LXXXIV. 



JParticijjhs — continued, 

504. Participles may sometimes be translated by 
verbs with though or although; e. g., 

1. Ridens, though he laughs, 

2. Amatiis, though he is {ivas^ &c.) loved, 

505. "We often omit the auxiliary verb after though; 

e. g., 

1. Eidens, though laughing, 

2, Amatiis, though loved, 

506. Participles may sometimes be translated by 
verbs or participial nouns, with after ; e. g., 

1. Passiis (Act.), I ^- ^^^'^' ^'' ^'''' ^^^^"^^ '^^'^'^- 

( 2. after suffering, 

( 1. after he ivas (has*been) loved, 

2. Amatiis, < 2. after he had heen loved, 

( 3. after having heen loved. 



507—510.] PARTICIPLES. 213 

507. Participles may sometimes be translated by 
corresponding verbs followed by the conjunction 
and; e.g. 

1. Eidens exclamat. 

He laughs and exclaims (lit laughing lie ex- 
claims). 

2. Eidens exclamavit. 

He laughed and exclaimed. 

Rem. — In the above examples the participle is construed by the same 
tense as the accompanying verb ; sometimes, however, a different 
tense must be used ; e. g., 

Correptiim leporem lacerat. 

He has seized the hare and is mangling it. 

508. Participles with non may be translated by par- 
ticipial substantives depending upon the preposition 
without; e. g., 

1. Non ridens, without laughing, 

o -XT- -X- (1. without heinq loved, 

2. JN on amatus, { ^ _ ^ ? ^ . 

( 2. without Loving him. 

3. Vitiiperat libros non intellectos. 

He censures books {not understood) without un- 
derstanding them. 

509. Participles in the ablative absolute may be con- 
strued like participles in any other construction, the 
Latin substantive being translated either by the nom- 
inative «r the objective; e. g., 

Tarquinio regnante, when Tarquin was hing, 
Te sedente, as you were sitting, 
Capta Tyro, after Tyre ivas taken, 

510. Participles may often be translated by substan- 
tives of kindred meaning ; e. g., 



214 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[511, 512. 



Leges Yiolatae, the violation of the laivs (lit. the vio- 
lated laics). 
Vere appropinqnantej 07i the approach of spring. 



511. Vocabulary. 

Adventus, us, approach. 

Ante (j)rep. iviihaccus.), before. 

Appropinquare, av, at, to ap- 
proach. 

Coena, ae, supper, feast. 

Cognoscere, nov, nit, to ascertain. 

Comprehendere, hend, hens, to 
arrest^ comprehend. 



Intelligere, lex, lect, to under- 

stand. 
Ponere, posu, posit, to place. 
Prof iciscl, prefect, to set out^ to 

start. 
Transire, i, it, to pass over, 
Ver, veris, n., spring. 



512. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Ad coenam yocatiis, nondiim yenit. 2. Multa 
transimus ante ociilos posita. 8. Ociilus, se non yidens, 
alia yidet. 4. Cum legionibus profectus celeriter adero. 
5. Compreliensum iLominem Eomam ducebant. 6. 
Non petens regnum accepit. 7. Multi yitiiperant libros 
non intellectos. 8. His responsis datis, iternm ad eum 
Caesar legatos mittit. 9. Cognito Caesaris adyentu, 
legatos ad eum mittunt. 

(b) 1. He will not be condemned, altbougli lie lias 
been accused of treason. 2. Although, inyited to the 
feast, they will not come. 3. They were accused and 
(507) condemned. 4. He will receiye the goy^rnment 
without seeking it (508). 5. We censure these boys 
without knowing them. 6. They were put to death 
without haying been condemned. 7. Haying ascer- 
tained the approach of our army, the enemy fled. 8. 
Birds will return on the approach of spring. 



513—519.] BEKIVATION OF NOUNS. 215 

LESSON LXXXY. 

Derivation of Nouns, 

513. WoEDS may be formed in two ways ; viz., 

1) By derivation^ i. e., by the addition of certain 
endings to tlie roots of other words ; e, g., 
moeror, sadness, formed by the addition of or 
to moer, the root of moe?xre^ to be sad. 

2), By composition, i. e._, by the union of two or 
more w^ords, or their roots ; e. g., benevolens, 
benevolent, well-wishing, from Sme, well, and 
volenSj wishing. 

514. Nouns may be derived from other nouns, and 
from adjectives and verbs. 

515. The endings, Msj Id, litm, added to the root of 
nouns, with a connecting vowel (sometimes I or 5, but 
generally u, which sometimes takes c before it), form 
diminutives ; e. g., hortulils (hortus), a little garden. 

516. The masculine endings, Mes (or ides), ddes, and 
iddes, and the feminine ds and is, added to the root of 
names of persons, form patronymics or names of descent; 
e. g., Pridmides (Priamus), a son or descendant of Priam ; 
Tantdlis (Tantalus), daughter of Tantalus. 

517. Atics, ttds, and urd, added to the root of nouns, 
denote office, rank, orhodyofmen; e.g., consdldtus {cotl- 
sul), consulship ; clvitds (civis), state, body of citizens. 

518. lum, added to the root of nouns, denotes the 
state or condition of the objects expressed by the primi- 
tive; sometimes an assemblage of those objects; e. g., 
servitidm (servus), either servitude or domestics. 

519. The endings, itds, id, itid, itudb, and tus (gen. 



216 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [520 — 525. 

tutts)^ added to the root of adjectives, form abstract 
nouns ; e. g., homtds (bonus), goodness ; diVigentid (di- 
ligens), diligence ; multitudb (mnltus), multitude ; vir- 
tus (vir), virtue, manliness. 

520. The endings, a and o, added to the first root of 
verbs, and or (fem. rix) to the third, denote the agent 
or person who; e. g., scribd (scribere); a scribe; hibo 
(bibere), a drunkard ; victor (vincere), a conqueror. 

521. Or and mm, added to the first root, and w, Hs^ 
and urd to the third, denote the action or state expressed 
by the verb ; e. g., pdvor (pavere), fear ; gaudium (gau- 
dere), joy; actio (agere, act), an action, &c. 

522. Ido and igb^ added to the first root, denote the 
abstract of the primitive ; e. g., ciipidb (cupere), desire. 

523. Men and mentum^ added to the first root, denote 
the thing done^ that by which it is done^ or that which does ; 
e. g., tegmen (tegere), a covering; flumen (fluere), a 
stream, river. 

524. Z7m, added to the third root, denotes the action 
of the verb, or the means or result of it ; e. g., tectum 
(tegere), roof, covering ; scriptum (scribere), a writing. 



525. Vocabulary. 

Adjuvare, juv, jut, to aid, help. 

Adventus, us (advenire), ap- 
f roach, arrival, 

Circumdare, ded, dat, to sur- 
round. 

Civitas, atis (civis), state. 

Dlligentia, ae (diligens), dili- 
gence. 

Fugare, av, at, to put to flight. 

Hortulus, I (hortus), a little gar- 
den. 



Imperator, oris (imperare),com- 
mande7\ 

Multitudo, mis (multus), multi- 
tude. 

Nuntiare, av, at, to announce, re- 
port. 

Pastor, oris (pascere), shep' 
herd. 

Senatus, us (senex), senate. 



526 — 529.] DEEIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 217 

526. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Hortiili nostri multos flores habent. 2. Im- 
perator quam maximas copias comparavit. 8. Dili- 
gentia tua laborem patris adjuyit. 4. Hie nun tins ad- 
ventnm tnnm nnntiayerat. 5. Ciceronem magna po- 
piili multittido circnmdedit. 6. Pastor fugavit Inpnm 
qui ovem unam momorderat. 

(6) 1. Have you seen tte shepherd's dog? 2. We 
went to see the boy's little garden. 3. Let them not 
come into the senate. 4. He has announced the arrival 
of the king. 5. Did you not announce . the arrival of 
the leaders? 6. Caesar said that he would put to 
flight the forces of the enemy. 7. The commander 
has sent messengers to Eome. 8. The leaders will 
collect as large forces as possible. 9. The laws of the 
state have been violated by the commander. 



LESSON LXXXVL 
Derivation of Adjectives, 



527. Adjectives may be derived from nouns and 
verbs. • 

528. The endings, alis^ arts, icus^ llis^ and iUs^ added 
to the root of nouns == of helonging to^ related to ; e. g., 
regdlis (rex), regal; populdris (populus), popular; cwl- 
lis (civis), civil, &c. 

529. Aceus^ icius, eus, and inus, denote the material; 
the first two sometimes origin^ and the last two some- 
times similarity ; e. g., pUncius (pater), patrician ; au- 
reus (aurum), golden, &c. 

10 



218 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [530 — 536, 

530. Osus and lentus (often with connecting vowel u\ 
denote fuh2ess J abundance ; e. g., dqitosus (aqna), Avateiy ; 
lutulentus (lutum), full of mnd. 

531. Aeus^ aniis (idnus)^ iensis^ and mus^ added to 
tlie root of proper names of places, denote native of^ 
occupant of; e. g., JRonmnus (Roma), a Roman; Athe- 
niensis (Athenae), an Athenian, &c. 

532. Arius (generally used substantively), denotes 
occupation^ sometimes pertaimng to ; e. g., consiliarius 
(consilium), counselling, or a counsellor. 

533. AtHs^ ttiiSj and utics = furnished with, &c. ; e. g., 
aurdtiLs (aurum), gilt ; turrltus (turris), turreted, &c. 

534. Stiis = leing in^ having in one's self; e. g., to- 
hustles (robur), robust. 

535. Adjectives may be derived from verbs by the 
use of the following endings : 

1) Ax = having a propensity to perform the action 
of the verb ; e. g.. Max (edere), voracious. 

2) Bundles and cundus = the strengthe7ied Tciesmmg 
of the present participle used adjectively ; e. g., 
onlrabundiis (mirari), full of admiration, &c. 

8) Idus (and sometimes uHs) = the quality indica- 
ted by the verb ; e. g., algidus (algere), cold. 

4) IVis and hiVis = capahle of being ^ easy to be ; e. g., 
docilis (docere), easy to* be taught, docile ; ere- 
dibiVis (credere), capable of being believed, 
credible. 



536. YOCABULARY. 
Anulus, I, a ring. 
Atheniensis, e (Athenae), Aihe- 

nian. 
Carthaginiensis, e (Carthago), 

Carthaginian. 



Civllis, e (civis), civil. 

Fallax, acis (fallere), false^ de- 

cepiive. 
Fabulosus, a, um (fabula), /a- 

bulous. 



587— 539J VEEBS and adverbs. 219 



Gallicus, a, um (Gallia), Gallic, 
pertaining to Gaul. 

Incredibilis, e (in and credere), 
incredible, 

Narrare, aVy at, to relate. 

Narratio, onis (narrare), narra- 
tive, story. 



Octo, eiglit 

Popularis, e (populus), popular, 

Socrates, is, Socrates, a celebra- 
ted Athenian philosopher. 

Speciosus, a, um (species), spe- 
cious, plausible. 

Vincire, vinx, vinct, to bind. 



537. Exercises, 

(a) 1. Haec narratio est fabiilosa. 2. Kon sum tarn 
imprudens, ut verbis speciosis decipiar. 8. Spe fallaci 
decepti estis ; cavete ne iterum decipiamini. 4. Quis 
credat illud quod incredibile est ? 5. Caesar octo libris 
bellnm Gallicum, tribus civile narravit. 6. Atlienien- 
ses Socratis damnati (506) pedem ferro yinxerunt. 

{b) 1. Many have been deceived by false hopes. 2. 
Let lis not be deceived by false words. 8. These nar- 
ratives are incredible. 4. He has given his sister two 
gold rings. 5. The Romans waged many wars. 6. 
The Carthaginians were conquered by the Romans. 
7. The Athenians condemned Socrates to death. 8. 
They cannot deceive the judge by specious Avords. 9. 
The senator wishes to be popular. 10. They are wag- 
ing a civil war. 



# 
LESSON LXXXYIL 

Derivation of Verbs and Adverbs, 

588. Yerbs may be derived from nouns and adjec- 
tives, and from other verbs. 

539. Verbs derived from nouns and adjectives are 
generally called denominatives. 



220 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [540 — 547. 

540. Transitive denominatiyes end in are (dep. ari) 
or ire ; e. g., curare (ciira), to take care of; flmre (finis), 
to finish. 

541. Intransitive denominatives end in ere or scere ; 
e. g., florere (flos), to bloom ; mdturescere (maturus), to 
become ripe. 

I^Ei^i, — The ending scere is joined to tlie root by means of a connecting 
Yowel ; e is the connecting vowel in the above example. 

542. Yerbs derived from other verbs comprise four 
distinct classes, viz. : frequentatives, inchoatives^ desidera- 
tives^ and diminutives, 

543. Freqnentatives denote repeated or continuedj 
action, and are formed by the addition of are or itare to 
the third root, except in the first conjugation, where 
they add itdre to the first root ; e. g., habitdre (habere), 
to inhabit ; voUtdre (volare), to fly often^ to flit. 

544. Inchoatives denote the heginning or increase of 
an action, and are formed by the addition of scere to the 
first root with a connecting vowel ; e. g., cldrescere (cla- 
rere), to grow bright, or clear. 

545. Desideratives denote a desire to do the action 
of the primitive, and are formed by adding ttrire to the 
third root ; e g., esurire (edere), to desire to eat. 

546. Diminutives denote a feehle action, and are 
formed by adding illdre to the first root ; e. g., cantilld.re 
(cantare), to sing in a feeble voice. 

547. Derivative adverbs generally take one of the 
following endings, viz. : 

1) When derived from nouns, tim^ itics ; e. g*, 
gregdiim (grex), in flocks ; funditi'ts (fundus), 
from the foundation. 

2) When derived from adjectives, e, e, o, ter (con- 



548, 549.] 



YEKBS AND ADVERBS. 



221 



necting vowel i except after n) ; e. g., vere 
(yerus), truly; /daZe (facilis), easily; cl^5(citus), 
quickly ; foriiter (fortis), bravely. 
8) When derived from verbs, run added to the 
third root; e. g., stdtwi (stare, stat), imme 
diately. 



548. Vocabulary. 

Cantare, av, at (canere), to sing. 

Curare, av, at (cura), to take care 
of. [guard. 

Custodire, Iv, It (custos), to 

Finire, Iv, It (finis), to finish. 

Florescere (florere), to begin to 
bloom. 

Fortiter (fortis), bravely. 

Germania, ae, Germany. 

Habit are, av, at (habere), to in- 
habit, dwell. 

Ladiis, I, play, sport, pi. games. 

Nuntiare, av, at (nuntius), to an- 
nounce, report. 



Occultare, av, at (occulere), to 

hide, conceal. 
Provincia, ae (pro and vincere), 

province. 
Pugnare, av, at (pugna), to fight, 
Saevire, Iv or i, It (saevus), to 

rage, to be cruel. 
Spectare, av, at (specere), to see, 

look at. 
Statim (stare), immediately. 
Tectum, I (tegere), a covering, 

roof, house. 
Vigllare, av, at (vigil), to luatch, 

remain awake. 



549. Exercises. 

(a) 1. Laborem nostrum finivimus. 2. Canes tecta 
nostra custodiverunt. 8. Bellum saevit per Grerma- 
niam.^ 4. Dormivistine, an vigilasti? 5. Puellae in 
horto cantabant. 6. Corpora* nostra curaveramus. 7. 
Pueri ludos spectaverunt. 8. Arbores florescunt. 9. 
Hie ad summam gloriam florescebat. 10. Decrevimus 
habitare in provincia. 11. Consilia sua occultaverunt. 
12. Si te viderit, statim curret ad te. 

(6) 1. Have they announced your arrival ? 2. Who 
will announce the arrival of the king? 3. Caesar sent 



222 FIEST LATIN BOOK. [550. 

very laro^e forces to aTiard the city. 4. They haye 
gone into the country to yitness the games. 5. They 
haye finished the y^ar. * 6. We ydsh to finish the y^ork. 
7. The enemy are said to haye fonght brayely. 8. 
The floyers are beginning to bloom in onr garden. 
9. Do you ydsh to liye (dwell) in the city ? 10. We 
wish to hye in the country. 



LESSOIs^ LXXXVIII. 



Composition of Words, 

550. Prepositions often enter into compositivjn ydth 
other words, as prefixes. 

Rem. — Many prepositions -andergo no change of form on entering into 
composition, and merely impart to the simple word their own 
force. These, of course, require no special notice ; others, how- 
ever, present some peculiarities. 

1) A, ab, Qh?> = away fro'iii ; e. g., abstinere (abs and tenere), to 
abstain from. In substantives and adjectives, it denotes 
privation; e. g., dmens (a and mens), without mind, mad. 

2) Ad = to {d often assimilated before, consonants, except d,j, 
m, and v) ; e. g., accipere (ad and capere), to accept. 

3) Con (cum) = idth, together, sometimes completely (co before h 
and vowels ; com before h, p, and sometimes before a vowel ; 
n assimilated before Z, m, and r) ; e. g., conducere fcon and 
ducere), to lead together, collect. 

4) De^==/rom, dovm ; e. g., deducere (de and ducere), to deduce. 
In substantives and adjectives, privation ; e. g., dernens (de 

^ and mens), mad. 

5) E,ex= out of, thoroughly (e before hquids and 6, d, g, and v ; 
e/" before/); e. 2:., expugnare (ex and pugnai'e), to vanquish, 
storm. 

6) In = into, on, against {ini before h and /»; i before gn; n as- 
similated before I, m, and r) ; e. g., inciirrere (in and currere), 



551— '554.] COMPOSITION of woeds. 223 

to attack. In adjectives, not; e. g., indignus (in and dig- 
nus), unworthy. 

7) Ob == against {h assimilated before c,f, and usually jo) ; e. g., 
opponere (ob and ponere), to place against, to oppose. 

8) Pro =/or, /or^^A (j9roc/ before vowels) ; e. g,, proponhr (ipro 
and ponere), to set forth, propose. 

9) Bub = under, from below, somewhat {b assimilated before c, f, 
g, and sometimes m, p, and r; sus in a few words) ; e. g., 
subjicere (sub and jacere), to thi'ow under, to subject. 

551. The inseparable prepositions, amb^ around, 
about ; dts or dl, asunder ; re {red before vowels), back, 
again, away ; 5e, without, apart from; and ve, not, often 
occur as prefixes, in compound words; e. g., amhire 
(amb and ire), to go round ; disponere (dis and ponere), 
to put asunder, to distribute ; r^dire (red and ire), to 
return ; seducere (se and ducere), to lead apart ; vesanus 
(ve and sanus), not sane, insane. 

. 552. Adverbs are sometimes used as prefixes ; e. g., 
henevolens (bene and volens), benevolent; mdUvolens 
(male and volens), wishing ill, malevolent. 

553. Certain vowel-changes often take place in form- 
ing compound words ; thus, a, e and ae are often changed 
into i {a sometimes into e) ; e. g., acclpere (ad and ca- 
pere), abstmer^ (abs and tenere), occider^ (ob and caedere). 

Rem. 1. — Having examined the prefixes, we pass to notice a few ter- 
minations of frequent occurrence in compound words. 

Rem. 2. — When the first part of a compound is a noun, the connecting 
vowel is generally short i, as in agricola (ager and colere), a 
husbandman. 

554. From/ac^r^, to do, are derived, {Vjfex^ agent; 
e. g., aril/ex (ars and facere), an artist; {2)ficmm^ cor- 
responding substantive of thing ; e. g., artificium^ an 
art ; {S)ftcus^ he who does {adjectively) ; e. g., beneflcus.^ 
beneficent. 



224 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[555—561. 



555. From cdpere^ to take, are derived, (1) ceps^ 
agent; e. g., princeps (primns and capere), one who 
takes tlie first (place), a prince, a leader ; (2) cipium, 
corresponding substantive of thing ; e.g., principium^ 
a beginning. 

556. From dicere^ to speak, are derived, (1) dex^ agent, 
one who speaks ; e. g., index^ an informer ; (2) dicium^ 
corresponding substantive of thing ; e. g., indicium^ a 
disclosure ; (3) dicus {adj.)^ speaking ; e. g., mdledwuSj 
slanderous. 

557. From cdnere^ to sing ; cen^ agent ; e. g., tubicen 
(tuba and canere), a trumpeter. 

558. From velle^ to wish ; volens and volus {adj,\ wish- 
ing; e. g., henevolens and henevolus (bene and velle), 
benevolent. 

559. From /erre and ^erere, to bear; fer and ger^ one 
who bears ; e. g., Lucifer (lux and ferre), Venus as 
morning star, the bearer of light ; arrmger (arma and 
gerere), armor-bearer. 

560. From colere^ to cultivate ; cold^ one who culti- 
vates, or dwells in ; e. g., ^gricold (ager and colere), a 
field-tiller, a husbandman. 



561. Vocabulary. 

Adducere, dux, duct (ad and 

ducere), to bring to. 
Attingere, tig, tact (ad and tan- 

gere), to reach, attain. 
Condere,did, dit (con and dare), 

to found. 
Convenire, ven, vent (con and 

A^enire)', to assemble, convene. 
Expugnare, av, at (ex and pug- 

nare), to take by storm. 



Incertiis, a, um (in and certus), 
uncertain. 

Incola, ae, m. &/. (in and co- 
lere), an inhabitant. 

Invadere, vas, vas (in and va- 
dere), to go against, invade, 

Italia, ae, Itali/. 

Obses, idis, m. &/., hostage. 

Occidere, eld, cas (ob and ca- 
dere), to fall, set. 



562.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 225 



Occidere, cid, cis (ob and cae- 

dere), to kill. 
Philosophus, 1, philosopher, 
Possidere, ed, ess, to possess. 



Princeps, ipls (primus and 
capere), the first, a leader, 
chief. 

Verum, I, truth. 



562. Exercises, 

(a) 1, Multi philosoplii yerum non attigerunt. 2. 
Eex portas nrbis clausit hostibus inyadentibus. 8. Has 
terras possidemiis ; illas expiignabimiis. 4. Galli Eo- 
mam expugnayerunt. 5. Sol post montes illos in mare 
occidit. 6. Hie unus miles duos ant tres occidit. 7. 
Incolae ad eum legates misernnt. 8. Caesar omnemi 
senatum ad se conyenire, prineipnmqne liberos ob- 
sides ad se adduci jiissit. 9. Incertum est quo tem- 
pore Dido Carthaginem condiderit. 

(h) 1, The commander will collect large forces and 
inyade Italy. 2. After haying waged war for many 
years, they took the city by storm. 3. Caesar had or- 
dered all the inhabitants to assemble in his presence. 
4. Let ns pnt the inyading enemy to flight. 5. Eomu- 
1ns is said to haye founded Eome. 6. It is uncertain 
at what time Carthage was founded. 7. I do not know 
at what time he returned home. 8. They say that 
Caius was killed in the first battle. 



10* 



PARADIGMS. 



Dec. V. 



Noims, — Five Declensions. 

563. Endings of the Genitive Singular. 

Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. Dec. IV. 

ae, 1, IS, tis el,' 

Rem.— Some Greek nouns are exceptions. 

564. Gender in Latin is, 

1) Natural, when determined by sex, as in English ; as, liorw^ 
a man, masc. ; mulier, a woman, fern. 

2) Grammatical, when not determined by sex ; as, sermo, a 
discourse, masc; laurus, a laurel, /em. 

565. Natural Gender. 



Masculine. 
Names of males. 



Feminine. 
Names of females. 



Common. 

Names appHcable to 

both sexes. 



566. The gra-mmatical gender of nouns is determined partly by their 
signification, but principally by their endings. 

567. Grammatical Gender, when not determined by nom. ending. 



Masculine. 
Most names of rivers, 
winds, and months. 



Feminine. 
Most names of coun- 
tries, towns, islands, 
and trees. 



Neuter. 
IndecUnable nouns and 
clauses used as nouns. 



Rem.— Grammatical gender, as determined by the endings of nouns, will be noticed 
in connection with the several declensions. 

568. First Declension, 

1. Characteristic ae, 

2. Nominative endings : Latin a ; Greek e, as, and es. 

3. Grammatical gender : a and e, fem. ; as and es, masc. 

Rem.— Cases coming under previous rules (565 and 567) are, of course, excepted. 



* In this ending e is long, except in spei, fidei, and rei. 



228 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[569. 



4. Case-endings. 








Nom 


Gen. 


Dat 


Ace. Voc. Abl. 


Sing. a, 


ae, 


ae 


am, a, a. 


Flur. ae 


arum. 


is. 


as, ae, is. 


Rem.— The declension of Greek 


nouns presents some exceptions. 


5. Paradigms. 








1. Musa, a muse. 




2. Epitome, an abridgment. 


Sing. 


Plur. 




Sing. Plur. 


K Mus-a, 


Mus-ae. 




K Epitom-e, Epitom-ae. 


G. Mus-ae, 


Mus-ariim. 




G. Epitom-es, Epitom-ariim. 


D. Mus-ae, 


Mus-is. 




D. Epitom-ae, Epitom-is. 


A. Mus-am, 


Mus-as. 




A. Epitom-en, Epitom-as. 


Y. Mus-a, 


Mus-ae. 




V. Epitom-e, Epitom-ae. 


A. Mus-a, 


Mus-is. 




A. Epitom-e, Epitom-is. 


3. Aeneas (a man's name). 




4. Anchises (a man's name). 


"N". Aene-as 






]Sr. AncMs-es. 


G. Aene-a€ 


k. 




G. Anchis-ae. 


D. Aene-ae 


. 




D. Anchis-ae. 


A. Aene-am (an). 




A. Anchis-en. 


V. Aene-a. 






Y. AncMs-e (a). 


A. Aene-a. 






A. Anchis-e (a). 



569. Second Declension. 

1. Characteristic I. 

2. Nominative endings: Latin, er, ir, us, um; Greek, os and on. 

3. Grammatical gender : um and on, neut. ; the rest masculine, 
except, 

1) Alvus, domus, humus, and vanniis, which are feminine ; pela- 
gus and virus, neuter ; and vulgiis, generally neuter^ but some- 
times masculine. 

2) Such as come under previous rules. 



4. Case-endings. 

Nom. Gen. 

Sing. Nom. end. i, 

Flur. i {neiLt. a), orum. 



Dat. Ace. Voc. AbL 

o, iim, e (or like nom.), o, 

is, OS {neut. a), i {neut. a), is. 



Rem.— A few Greek noims are exceptions. 



570.] 



PARADIGMS. 



229 



5. Paradigms. 
Servus, slave. 



Regnum, king- 
dom> 



Serv-tis. 

Serv-i. 

Serv-o. 

Serv-um. 

Serv-e. 

Serv-6. 



Serv-I 

Serv-oriim. 

Serv-is. 

Serv-os. 

Serv-i. 

Serv-is. 



Gener, son-in- 
law. I 



SINGULAR. 



Regn-um. 

Regn-L 

Regn-o. 

Regn-um. 

Regn-um. 

Rggn-o. 



Regn-a. 

Regn-orum, 

Regn-is. 

Regn-a. 

Regn-a. 

Regn-is. 

Rem.— Vir, a man, is declined like gener. 



6. Paradigms of Greek nouns. 
1. Ilion, 71. (name of a city), 
]Sr. Ili-6n. 

G. ni-i. 

D. ni-o. 
A. ni-on. 
V. Ri-on. 
A. Di-o. 



Ager, field. 



Gener. 


Ager. 


Gener-i. 


Agr-L 


Gener-o. 


Agr-o. 


Gener-um. 


Agr-iim. 


Gener. 


Ager. 


Gener-o. 


Agr-o. 


lAL. 

Gener-i. 


Agr-i. 


Gener-orilm. 


Agr-oriim. 


Gener-is. 


Agr-is. 


Gener-os. 


Agr-os. 


Gener-i. 


Agr-L 


Gener-is. 


Agr-is. 



2. Delos, f. (name of an island), 
K Del-6s. 
G. Del-i. 
D. Del-o. 
A. Del-6n. 
V. Del-e. 
A. Del-o. 



570. Third Declension. 

1. Characteristic is. 

2. Nominative endings : a, e, i, o, y, c, I, n, r, 5, t, x, 
3 Table of gender in the third declension. 



Masculine. 
er, or, os, es increasing in 
gen. and o, except do, 
go, and io. 



[Feminine. 
do, go, io, as, is, ys, aus, 
s impure, es not in- 
creasing in gen. and x. 

For exceptions, see 579. 



Neuter. 
a, e, i,y, c,I,n,t,ar, 
ur, and us. 



4. Classification of nouns of the third declension, according to the 
formation of root from nominative ending. 



Class I.f 
Root like Nom. 



Class II. 
Root adds a let- 
ter. 



Class m. 

Root drops nom. 

ending. 



Class. IV. 

Root changes 

nom. ending. 



230 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [571, 572- 

5. Masculine and feminine case-endings. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. 

Sing. . . IS, i, em, (im), . . e (i), 

Plur. es, um (ium), Ibus, es, es, ibiis. 

Rem. ].— The inclosed endings ini and i belong only to a few words. 
Rem. 2.— The ending ium of the genitive plural occurs in the following classes of 
nouns; viz., 

1) Neuters in e, al, and ar ; as, mdre^ mdrium ; dniindl, dnimdlium. 

2) Nouns in is and es of Class III. ; as, hostls, hostiUm ; nicbes, nUbiUm. 

3) All monosyllables in s or x preceded by a consonant ; as, urbs, urbiitm ; 
arx, arciilm. 

4) Nouns in ns and rs (though in these um is sometimes used) ; as, cliens, 
clientium ; cohors, cokortiUm. 

6. Neuter case-endings. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Ab. . 

Sing. . . is, i, . . . . e (i), 

Plur. a (ia), iim (ium), ibus, a (ia), a (ia), ibus. 

Rem. — The inclosed endings belong to neuters in e, al^ and ar. 

571. Class I. comprises nouns in c,* /, t?, r, ?, and y. These 
either have the root the same as the nominative singular, or form it 
(with a fe\y exceptions) by one of the following slight vowel-changes: 

1) Nouns in ter and her generally drop e in the root : as, 'patery 
a father ; root, fatr. 

2) Nouns in en generally change e into ^ in the root ; as, 
flumeri) a river ; root, Jiumin. 

3) Nouns in ut change u into i in the root; as, caput, sl head; 
root, cdpit. 

Rem.— The quantity of the radical vowel is sometimes changed ; this is the case in 
most nouns in dl and or, which generally lengthen the vowel in the root. 

572. Class II. comprises nouns of the third declension in a, o, 
and a few in i. These form the root by adding a letter to the 
nominative singular, 

1) Nouns in a, and a few in i, add t; as, poemd, sl poem; 
root, poemdt : Jiydrdmeli, mead ; root, hydromeliL 

2) Nouns in o add n ; as, leb, a lion ; root, leon. 
Rem. 1. — O is 16ng in the root. 

Rem. 2. — Nouns in do and go change o into I, before n in the root; as, virgo, a vir- 
gin ; root, virgin. 

* There are only two nouns of this ending, one of which belongs to 
Class II. 



573—575.] 



PARADIGMS — KOUNS. 



231 



573. Class III. comprises nouns of the third declension in bs, 
ms, ps, X (= cs or gs), is, ys,e, a few in i,* and a few in es. They 
form the root by dropping the nominative ending. 

1) Nouns in bs, ms, ps, and ys, drop s ; as, urbs^ a city ; root, 
urb ; hiems, winter ; root, Mem. 

2) Nouns in a; (=cs or gs) drop the s in x ; as, vox (cs), a 
voice; root, voc; rex (gs), a king; root, reg. 

3) Nouns in is, e, and a few in es, drop those endings ; as, 
hostis, an enemy; root, host: nubes, sl cloud; voot, nub: 
mare, a sea ; root, mar. 

574. Class IV. comprises nouns of the third declension in as, os, 
us, Is, ns, rs, and most of those in es. These form the root by 
changing s into r, t, or d. 

1) Nouns in as, Is, ns, rs, and most of those in es, generally 
change s into t ; as, pietas, piety ; root, pietat : mons, a 
mountain ; root, moni : dbies, a fir-tree ; root, dbiet : mlles^ 
a soldier ; root, mllit. (See Rem. 2, below.) 

Rem. 1. — Masculines in as, of Greek origin, insert /i before t in the root ; as, elephas, 

an elephant ; root, elephant. 
Rem. 2. — Many nouns in es change e into ?, before t, in the root ; as, miles ; root, 

mllit. 

2) Nouns in os and us generally change s into r or t; sis,flos, 
a flower ; root, flor : sdcerdos, sl priest ; root, sdcerdot : 
virtus, virtue; root, virtut: genus, a kind; root, gener: 
iempus, time ; root, tempor. 

Rem.— Most nouns in us change s into r, and u of the nominative becomes e or o in 
the root, as in these examples. 

575. Paradigms. 



Miilier, /., a woman. 

(root, sa7ne as nom. [126].) 



Singular. 
N. Mulier, 
Gr. Mulier-is, 
D. Mulier-i, 
A. Miilier-em. 
V. Mulier, 
A. MuHer-e, 



Plural. 
Muher-es. 
Mulier-um. 
Mulier-ibiis. 
Miilier-es. 
Miilier-es. 
Midier-ibus. 



Virgo,/, a virgin. 
(root, virgin [131, 2. Rem. 2].) 



Singular. 
K Yirgs, 
Gr. Yirgin-is, 
D. Yirgin-i, 
A. Vhgin-em, 
v. Virgo, 
A. Virgin-e, 



Plural. 
Virgin-es. 
Virgin-iim. 
Virgin-ibus. 
Vii-gin-es. 
Virgin-es. 
Virgin-ibus. 



* Nouns in i are of Greek origin : most of these are iadeclinable ; a 
few form the root by dropping i, and a few by adding t {612, 1). 



232 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[576. 



Rex (gs), m., a king, . 


Corpus, n 


, a body. 


(root, reg [ 


134, 2].) 


(root, corpor [137,2].) 


Singular. 


Plural 


Singular. 


Plural. 


K Rex, 


Reg-es. 


N. Corpus, 


Corp6r-a. 


G. Reg-is, 


Reg-um. 


G. Corpor-is, 


Corpor-mn. 


D. Reg-i, 


Reg-ibus. 


D. Corp6r-i, 


Corpor-ibus. 


A. Reg-em, 


Reg-es. 


A. Corpus, 


Corp6r-a. 


V. Rex, 


Reg-es. 


y. Corpus, 


Corp6r-a. 


A. Reg-e, 


Reg-ibiis. 


A. Corp6r-e, 


Corpor-ibiis. 




GREEK 


NOUNS. 




Pericles (a man^s name). 


Heros, 


a Jiero. 






Singular. 


Plural. 


K Pericl 


-es. 


K Hero-s, 


Hero-es. 


G. Pericl 


-is. 


G. Hero-is, 


Hero-iim. 


D. Pericl 


1. 


D. Hero-i, 


Hero-ibus. 


A. Pericl 


-em (ea). 


A. Hero-em (a), Hero-es (as). 


V. Pericl 


-es (e). 


V. Hero-s, 


Hero-es. 


A. Pericl-e. 1 


A. Hero-e, 


Hero-ibus. 



576. Fourth Declension. 



1. Characteristic us, 

2. Nominative endings : us and u, 

3. Grammatical Gender: ?/, neuter; i^s, masculine ; except 

Acus, a needle ; domus, a house ; manus, a hand ; idus, the ides , 
porticus, a gallery ; tribus, a tribe ; -which are feminine. 

4. Masculine and feminine case-endings. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Accus. Voc. Abl. 

Sing, us, us, ui, urn, us, u. 

Flur. us, uum, ibiis (ubus*), us, us, ibus (libiis*). 



5. Neuter case-endings. 

Nom: Gen. Dat. 

Sinff. u, us, u, 

J*lur. ua, uiim, ibtis (iibus*), 



Accus. 



ua. 



Voc. Abl. 

u, u, 

ua, ibus (ubiis*). 



* This ending is used only in a few words. 



577, 578.] 



PAKADiaMS — ^NOUNS. 



233 



6. 


Paradigm 
Fructus, 


3. 

W2., fruit 




Cornii, 72., a liorn. 




(root, fruct.) 




(root, corn.) 




Singular. 


Plural. 




Singular. Plural. 


K 


Fruct-us, 


Fruct-us. 


K 


Corn-u, Corn-aa. 


a. 


Fruct-us, 


Fruct-uum. 


G. 


Corn-US, Corn-uum. 


D. 


Fruct-m, 


Fruct-ibus. 


D, 


Corn-u, Corn-ibus. 


A. 


Fruct-iim, 


Fruct-us. 


A. 


Corn-u, Com-ua. 


Y. 


Fruct-us, 


Fruct-us. 


V. 


Corn-u, Corn-ua. 


A. 


Fruct-u, 


Fruct-ibus. 


A. 


Corn-u, Corn-ibiis. 



577. Fifth Declension. 

1. Characteristic el,^ 

2. Nominative ending : es, 

3. Grammatical gender feminine^ except dies^ a day (m. and/, in 
singular, and m. in plural), and merldies^ mid-day (masc). 

4. Case-endings. 

Dat. 



Nom. 
Sing, es, 
JPlur. es. 



Gen. 
ei,"^ 
erum, 

5. Paradigms. 

Res, /, a thing, 
(root, r.) 



Accus. 
em, 



Voc. 

es. 



ebiis, 



Abl. 



ebiis. 



Singular. 
K R-es, 
R-ei, 
R-ei, 
R-em, 
R-es, 
R-e, 



G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
A. 



Plural. 
R-es. 
R-erum. 
R-ebiis. 
R-es. 
R-es. 
R-ebus. 



Dies, m, and/, a < 

(root, di.) 



Singular. 
Di-es, 
Di-ei, 
Di-ei, 
Di-em, 
Di-es, 
Di-e, 



Plural. 

Di-es. 

Di-eriim. 

Di-ebiis. 

Di-es. 

Di-es. 

Di-ebus. 



578. Case-endings of Substantives. 





Dec. I. 




F. 


N. 


a. 


G. 


ae. 


D. 


ae. 


A. 


am. 


Y. 


a. 


A. 


a. 



Dec. II. 

M. N. 

iis, er,ir, iim. 
i. 
o. 

iim. 
e, er, ir, um. 



N. 



SINGULAR. 
Dec. III. 

various. 

IS. 

i. 

em (im), like nom. 

like nom. 

e (i). 



Dec. IV. 



M. 

iis. 

us. 

ui. 

iim. 

lis. 

u. 



N. 



Dec. V. 

r. 

es. 
ei.*^ 
ei.* 
em. 

es. 



* In the ending of the gen. and dat. sing, e is long, except in spei 
(where it is short), fidei, and rei (where it is common). 



234 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[579. 





Dec. I. 




r. 


N. 


ae. 


G. 


arum. 


D. 


is. ' 


A. 


as. 


V. 


ae. 


A. 


is. 



Dec. II. 



31. 



N. 



Dec. III. 


Dec. rv. 


Dec. V. 


I\L ^- F. N. 


M. N. 


F. 


es. a or ia. 


us. ua. 


es. 


urn (ium). 


uum. 


eriim. 


ibus. 


ibiis (iibus). 


ebiis. 


es. a or ia. 


us. ua. 


es. 


es. a or ia. 


us. ua. 


es. 


ibiis. 


ibiis (iibus). 


ebii^ 



Rem.— The above table presents the endings of all nouns in the Latin language, 
except a few derived from the Greek. 



Masculine. 
Names of males. 



579. Table of Genders, 
L Natural Gender. 

Feminine. 
IS^ames of females. 



Common. 

N'ames applicable to 

both sexes. 



n. Grammatical Gender, independent of nominative ending. 



Masculine. 

Most names of rivers, 

winds, and months. 



Feminine. 
Most names of coun- 
tries, towns, islands, 
and trees. 



Neuter. 
Indeclinable nouns, and 
clauses used as nouns. 



Dec. 

Dec. 



III. Grabimatical Gender, as determined by nominative ending. 
I Masculine. I Feminine. I Neuter, 

a, e. 



I. 
II. 



Dec. III. 

Dec. IV. 
Dec. Y. 



as, es. 

er, us, OS.* 

T, or, OS, es, in- 
creasing in gen., 
o except do, go, 
and io. 



do, go, io, as, is, ys, 
aus, s impure, x, 
es not increasing 
in gen. 



um, on. 

a, e, i, y, c, 1, 
ar, ur, us. 



n, t, 



I 



Principal Excejptions.\ 



SECOND DECLENSION. 

Alviis, domiis, hiimiis, and vannus, are feminine ; pelagiis and viriis, 
neuter ; vulgiis, generally neuter, sometimes masculine. 



* ISTouns in ir have natural gender. 

f This list of exceptions contains some whose gender is not gramma- 
tical. They are given here for convenience of reference. 



580.] GENDEES. 285 

THIRD DECLENSION. 

1) Masculines. 

{do and go?) Cardo, comedo, harpago, ordo, unedo, ligo, and margo 

(the last sometiines /em.), 
(as,) As and Greek nouns in as (gen. antis). 
(is.) Amnis, anguis, axis, cassis, cinis (or /.), collis, crinis, ensis, 

fascis, finis (or /.), follis, funis, igrns, lapis, mensis, or bis, panis, 

piscis, postis, pulvis, sanguis, torris, unguis, vectis, and vermis. 
(s impure.) Adeps, dens, fons, forceps (or/.), mons, pons, quadrans, 

and riidens. 
(x.) Calix, codex, cortex, grex, poUex, thorax, and vertex. 
(l.) Sal and sol. 

(n.) Lien, pecten, ren, and many words of Greek origin. 
(ur.) Furfur, turtur, and vultur. 
(us.) Lepus a7id mus. 

2) Feminines. 

(or and os.) Arbor, cos, and dos. 

(es increasing.) Compes, merces, merges, quies, requies, seges, and 

teges. 
(o.) Caro, echo, and Argo. 
(2CS.) Grtis (m.), incus, juventus, palus, pecus (iidis), salus, senectus, 

servitus, sus (m.), tellus, and virtus. 

3) ISTeuters. 

(er.) Cadaver, iter, tuber, uber, ver, verber, and names of plants in er, 
(or.) Ador, aequor, cor, and marmor. 
(as and es.) Fas, nefas, vas, and aes. 

(os.) Os (oris), OS (ossis), and the Greek words, chaos, epos, ethos^ 
and melds. 

FOURTH DECLENSION. 

Acus, idus, manus, pdrticiis, and tribiis, are feminine. 

FIFTH DECLENSION. 

Dies and meridies are masculine, though the former is sometimes 

fern, in sing. 

580. Adjectives, — First and second Declension, 
1. Case-endings of adjectives of the first and second declension. 



236 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[581. 







Singular. 






Plural. 


A fewt ha"' 


reS 


5ing. 


thiif • 




M 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 




2 


^ 1. 


2. 


2. 


1. 


2. • 










G. 


us, er,f a, 
i, ae, 


um. 
i. 


i, 
oriim, 


ae, a. 
arum, orum. 


us, er, 
ius, 


a, 

iiis. 


um. 
iiis. 


D. 


0, 


ae, 


o. 


IS, 


is, 


is. 


i, 


i. 




i. 


A. 


um. 


am, 


um. 


OS, 


as, 


a. 


um. 


am, 


iim. 


V. 


e, er,t a, 


iim. 


i. 


ae, 


a. 


e,er, 


a, 




um. 


A. 


0, 


a, 


0. 


is, 


is. 


is. 


0, 


a, 




o. 


c 


5. Paradigms. 

Singular. 


Bonus, good. 

Plural. 










K 


B6n-us, 


a, 


um; 




Bon-i, ae, 




a. 






a 


Bon-i, 


ae, 


i; 




Bon-oriim, arum, 




oram. 




D. 


Bon-o, 


ae, 


o; 




B6n-is, is, 




is. 






A. 


Bon-um, 


am. 


um; 




B6n-os, as. 




a. 






Y. 


Bon-e, 


a, 


um; 




Bon-i, ae, 




a. 






A. 


Bon-o, 


a, 


o; 




B6n-is, is, 




is. 








Tener 


, tend 


€r ; root, tener {e not dropped). 












Singular. 






Plural. 










N. 


Tener, 


a. 


iim; 




Tener-i, ae. 




a. 






a 


Tener-i, 


ae. 


i; 




Tener-oriim, ariim. 




orum. 




D. 


Tener-o, 


ae. 


o; 




Tener-is, is. 




is. 






A. 


Tener-um, 


am, 


um; 




Tener-os, as, 




a. 






Y. 


Tener, 


a, 


um; 




Tener-i, ae. 




a. 






A. 


Tener-o, 


a, 


; 




Tener-is, 


is. 




is. 





Rem. 1.— Most adjectives in er drop e before r of the root in all genders. 

Rem. 2. — The following adjectives have the genitive singular in xiis (the i is gene- 
rally short in alterius)^ and the dative singular in x in all genders, viz. : alius^ 
another ; nulliis^ no one ; sDlus^ alone ; totus^ the whole ; ullus^ any ; unus^ one ; 
aZ^er, the other ; neuter^ neither; and w^er, which (of the two). 

581. Adjectives of the Third Declension, 

1. Adjectives of the third declension may be divided into three 
I, viz. : 



* The declensions of the different genders are here indicated by nu- 
merals. 

f In adjectives in er, the 'inasc. noin. sing, is generally the root {e is 
sometimes dropped) : er, therefore, is not properly a case-ending ; it is 
given merely to show the termination of the nom, and voc. sing., without 
regard to the root (107). 

X SeeHst, 113, Rem. 



581.] 



PARADIGMS — ADJECTIVES. 



237 



1) Those which have three different forms in the nominative 
singular (one for each gender). 

2) Those which have two (the masc. and /em. being the same). 

3) Those which have but one (the same for all genders). 

2. Adjectives of the third declension are declined in their several 
genders like nouns of the same declension, gender, and ending. It 
must, however, be observed, 

1) That those which have only one form in the nominative 
singular have the abl. sing, in e or i, and the rest, with 
the exception of comparatives, in I only. 

2) That all except comparatives have, in the plural, the nom.^ 
ace, and voc. neuter in ia, and the genitive in ium, 

3. Paradigms. 

Class I. 

Acer, sharp. 





Sin 


gular. 






Plural. 






M. 


F. 


N. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


K 


Acer, 


acr-is, 


acr-e. 


N". Acr-es, acr-es, 


acr-ia. 


G. 


Acr-is, 


acr-is, 


aci 


-is. 


G. Acr-ium, acr-ium, 


acr-iiim. 


D. 


Acr-i, 


acr-i. 


acr-i. 


D. Acr-ibus, acr 


-ibus. 


acr-ibiis. 


A. 


Acr-em, 


acr-em. 


acr 


-e. 


A. Acr-es, acr-es. 


acr-ia. 


V. 


Acer, 


acr-is, 


acr 


-e. 


Y. Acr-es, acr-es, 


acr-ia. 


A. 


Acr-i, 


acr-i, 


acr-i. 


A. Acr-ibus, acr 


-ibus, 


acr-ibiis. 










Cla 


ssll. 












1. 


Tris 


tis, sad. 








Singular. 






Plural. 






M.SfF. 


N. 






M.Sf P. 


N, 


\ 


K 


Trist-is, 


trist-e. 






N. Trist-es, 


trist 


-ia. 


G. 


Trist-is, 


trist-is. 






G. Trist-iiim, 


fcrist 


-ium. 


D. 


Trist-i, 


trist-i. 






D. Trist-ibus, 


trist-ibiis. 


A. 


Trist-em, 


trist-e. 






A. Trist-es, 


trist-ia. 


V. 


Trist-is, 


trist-e. 






V. Trist-es, 


trist 


-ia. 


A. 


Trist-i, 


trist-i. 






A. Trist-ibus, 


trist-ibiis. 






2. Tristior (comp 


arative), more sad. 






K 


Tristior, 


tristius 






K Tristior-es, 


tristior-a. 


G. 


Tristior-is 


tristior 


-is. 




G. Tristior-um, 


tristior-um. 


D. 


Tristior-i, 


tristior 


i. 




D. Tristior-ibiis, 


tristior-ibiis. 


A. 


Tristior-em, tristius 






A. Tristior-es, 


tristior-a. 


V. 


Tristior, 


tristius 






V. Tristior-es, 


tristior-a. 


A. 


Tristior-e 


'i), tristior 


-eO 


0. 


A. Tristior-ibiis, 


tristior-ibiis. 



238 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[582, 583. 





Class HI. 






Felix, happy. 




Singular. 




Plural. 


M.^F. N. 




M. 4' r. 


N. 


N. Felix, felix. 




N. Felic-es, 


felic-ia. 


G. Felic-is, fellc-is. 




G. Felic-ium, 


felic-ium. 


D. Felic-i, felic-i. 




D. Felic-ibiis. 


felic-ibus. 


A. Felic-em, felix 




■ A. Felic-es, 


felic-ia. 


Y. Felix, felix. 




Y. Felic-es, 


felic-ia. 


A. Felic-e (i), felic-e ( 


0. 


A. Felic-ibus, 


felic-ibus. 



582. Comjparison of Adjectives, 

In Latin, adjectives are compared by adding to the root of the 
positive the following endings: 

Comparative. Superlative. 

M. F. N. 

issimus, issima, issimum. 

Comparative. Superlative. 



M. F. 

ior, ior, 
Examples. 
Altiis (high), 



N. 

ius. 
Root, 
alt. 
mit. 



altior (ior, ius), altissimus (a, una). 
Mitis {mild\ mit. mitior (ior, ius), mitissimiis (a, um). 

Rem. 1. — Adjectives in er add rimus (a, iim) to the positive, to form the superla- . 
tive ; e. g., 

Pulcher, pulchrior, pulcherrimus. 

Rem. 2. — A few adjectives in lis form the superlative by adding Ivnus to the root 
of the positive ; e. g., 

Facilis {easy), facilior, f acillimiis. 

DiffTcilis {difficult), difficTlior, difficiJlimus. 

SimilTs (Jike), similior, simillTmiis. 

Dissimilis {unlike), dissimilior, dissimillimiis. 

Rem. 3.-— The following adjectives are quite irregular in their comparison, viz. : 

Bonus {good), mglior, optimiis. 

Maliis {bad), pejor, pessimus. 

Magnus {great), major, maximus. 

Parvus {liltle), minor, minimiis, 

Multus (wwc/i), plas (pi. pliires, plura), plurimiis. 



Cardinals. 
Uniis, one. 
Dud 
Tres. 



583. Numerals.^ 



Ordinals. 
Primus, first 
Secuudus. 
Tertius. 



Distributives. I 
^mgu^,onehyone. j 
Bliii. I 

Terni. 



Adverbs. 
Semel, once. 
Bis. 
Ter. 



* See Numerals, p. 145. 



5 


B^ 


t, 585J 


PAEADIGMS- 


—PRONOUNS. 


286 


4 f Quatuor. 


Quartiis. 


Quaterni. 




Quater. 


S 


Quinque. 


Quintiis. 


Quini. 




Quinquies. 


6 


Sex. - 


Sextus. 


Seni. 




Sexies. 


7 


Septem. 


Septimus. 


SeptenT. 




Septies. 


8 


Octo. 


Octaviis. 


Octoni. 




Octies. 


9 


JS'ovem. 


Nonus. 


Noveni. 




Novies. 


10 


Decern. 


Decmius. 


Deiii. 




Decies. 


584. Substantive Pronouns. 


SINGULAR. 






1st Person. | 2d Person. 


3d Person. 


IS". 


Eg6,Z 


Tu, thou. 




G. 


Mei, of me. 


Tui, of thee. 


j Sui, of himself, her- 
\ self itself 


D. 


Mihi, to ox for me. 


Tibi, to or for thee. 


Sibi, to himself &c. 


A. 


Me, me. 


Te, ^^e^. 


Se, himself. 


V. 




Tu, thou. 




A. 


Me, with, (fee, me. 


Te, with thee. 


Se, with himself. 


PLURAL. 




K 


ISTos, we. 


Vos, ye or ^/o?^. 




G 


JSTostrum, ) . 
orNostri,p/^^' 


Vestriim ) ^ 


Sui, of themselves. 


D. 


Nobis, to us. 


Vobis, to you. 


Sibi, to themselves. 


A. 


Nos, Its. 


Vos, you. 


Se, themselves. 


V. 




Vos, 2/e or you. 




A. 


N 


obis, with us. 




Vobis, with you. 


Se, 


with themselves. 



585. Adjective Pronouns, 

I. The Possessive Pronouns (so called because they denote pos- 
session), m'eus, med, meum ; iuus, tud, tuum; suus, sua, suum ; 
nosier, nostrd, nostrum ; vester, vestrd, vestrum, are declmed, as we 
have already seen (114, Rem. 3), like adjectives of the first and 
second declension. 

II. Demonstrative Pronouns (so called because they point out or 
specify the objects to v\^hich they refer), are Mc, ille, iste, Is, and 
their compounds, and are declined as follows : 

1. Hic, this. 





Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. Hic, 


haec, 


hoc. 


Hi, 


hae, 


haec. 


G. Hujiis, 


hujus, 


hujus. 


Horiim, 


hariim, 


horum. 


D. Huic, 


huic, 


huic. 


His, 


his. 


his. 


A. HuRf>, 


hanc, 


hoc. 


Hos, 


has. 


haec. 


V. 












A. Hoc, 


hac, 


hoc. 


His, 


his. 


his. 



240 



FIRST LATIN BOOK, 



[585. 



A. lUo, 



2. Ille, he or that. 







Singular. 






Plural. 






M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. 


lUe, 


iUa, 


illud. 


nil. 


illae, 


iUa. 


G. 


Illius, 


illius, 


illius. 


lUortim, 


illarum, 


illorum. 


D. 


nil, 


illi, 


iUi. 


lUis, 


niis, 


niis. 


A. 
Y. 


lUum, 


illam, 


iUiid. 


lUos, 


iUas, 


iUa. 



ilia, 



iUo. 



Elis, 



iUis, 



iUis. 



3. Iste, that. 

Iste, that, is declined like ille. It usually refers to objects which are 
present to the person addressed, and sometimes expresses contempt. 



4. Is, he or that, 
(Less specific than ille.) 





Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F, 


n: 


M. 


F. 


N. 


K Is, 


ea. 


id. 


li, 


eae, 


ea.' 


G-. Ejus, 


ejus, 


ejus. 


Eorum, 


eariim, 


eorum. 


D. Ei, 


ei, 


ei. 


lis or eis, 


iis or eis. 


iis or eis. 


A. Eum, 


eam, 


id. 


Eos, 


eas. 


ea. 


V. 












A. E5, 


ea. 


eo. 


lis or eis. 


iis or eis, 


iis or eis. 



5. Idem, the same, 
(Formed bj annexing dem to is.) 



Singular. 

M. F. N. 

N. Idem, eadem, idem. 

G. Ejusdem, ejusdem, ejusdem. 

D. Eidem, eidem, eidem. 

A. Eundem, eandem, idem. 
Y. 

A. Eodem, eadem, eodem. 



Plural. 
M. F. 

lidem, eaedem, 

Eorundem, earundem, 
Eisdem, or eisdem, or 
lisdem, iisdem, 
Eosdem, easdem, 

Eisdem, or eisdem, or 
lisdem, iisdem. 



N. 

eadem. 
eorundem. 
eisdem, or 

iisdem. 
eadem. 



eisdem, or 
iisdem. 



III. The Intensive Pronoun, ipse, himself, is so called because 
it is used to render an object emphatic. It is declined as follows: 



586.1 

M. 

K Ipse, 

G. Ipsius, 

D. Ipsi, 

A. Ipstun, 

V. 

A. Ipso, 



PAKADIGMS — VERBS. 



Singular, 

r. 

ipsa, 
ipsius, 
ipsi, 
ipsam, 

ipsa, 



ipsmn. 
ipsius. 
ipsi. 
ipsum. 

ipso. 



M. 

Ipsi, 

Ipsorum, 
Ipsis, 
Ipsos, 

Ipsis, 



Plural. 
F. 
ipsae, 
ipsartim, 
ipsis, 
ipsas, 

ipsis, 



241 

N. 

ipsa. 
ipsoruiTL 
ipsis. 
ipsa. 

ipsis. 



IV. The Relative Pronoun, qui, who, is so called because it 
always relates to some noun or pronoun, expressed or understood, 
called its antecedent. It is declined as foUow^s : 





Singular. 






Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


n: 


K Qui, 


quae, 


quod. 


Qui, 


quae, 


quae. 


G. Cujus, 


cujus, 


cujus. 


Quorum, 


quarum, 


quorum. 


D. Cui, 


cui, 


cui. 


Quibus, 


quibiis, 


quibus. 


A. Quern, 

y. 

A. Quo, 


quam, 


quod. 


Quos, 


quas. 


quae. 


qua, 


quo. 


Quibus, 


quibus, 


quibus. 



V. The Interrogative Pronouns, quis and qui, are so called be- 
cause they are used in asking questions. Qui (which? what?) is 
used adjectively, and is declined like the relative. Qvls (who? 
which? what?) is generally used substantively, and is declined like 
the relative, except in the forms quis, nom. masc, and quid, nom. 
and ace. neut. 

VI. Indefinite Pronouns are so called because they do not de- 
finitely specify the objects to which they refer ; e. g., qmddm, a 
certain one ; aliquis, some one ; quisque, every one ; slqids, if any, 
&c. They are compounds either of quis or qui, and are declined 
in nearly the same manner as the simple pronouns. 

Rem. — The compounds of quis generally take quid in the neut. sing, when used 
substantively, awi qtwd when used adject ively. Some of those compounds, as 
aUquls, siquis, take qua (not quae) in the fern. sing, and neut. plur. 

586. Paradigm of the verb Esse. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present (atn). 



Singular. 
Sum, I am. 
Es, thou art. 
Est, he is. 

11 



Plural. 
Sumus, we are. 
Estis, you are» 
Sunt, they are. 



242 



FIRST LATIN BOOK;. 



[586. 



Singular. 
Eram, / was. 
Eras, thou wast. 
Erat, he was. 

Ero, / shall be. 
Eris, thou wilt be. 
Erit, he will be. 



Fui, / have been. 
Fiiisti, thou hast been. 

Fuit, he has been. 



Eueram, / had been. 
Fueras, thou hadst been, 
Fuerat, he had been. 



Imperfect (loas). 

I Plural. 

Eramus, we were. 

IEratis, you were. 
Erant, they were. 

Future {shall or iciU he). 

Erinius, ice shall be. 
Eritis, you will be. 
Erunt, they loill be» 

Perfect (have been or was). 

Fuimus, we have been. 
Fuistrs, you have been. 

^ ' > they have been, 

Fuere, S 

Pluperfect (had been), 

Fueramus, we had been. 
Fueratis, you had been. 
Fuerant, they had been. 



Future Perfect (shall or will have been). 



Fuero, / shall have been. 
Fueris, thou loilt have been. 
Fuerit, he ivill have been. 



Fuenmiis, we shall have been. 
Fueritis, you ivill have been. 
Fuerintj they will have been. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present (iuay or can be), 
Sim, / may be. Simiis, we may be. 

Sis, thou mayest be. Sitis, you may be. 

Sit, he may be. Sint, they may be. 

Imperfect (mighty could, would, or should be). 



Essem, 1 might be. 
Esses, thou mightest be. 
Esset, he might be. 



Essemiis, we anight be. 

Essetis, you 7night be. 
Essent, they might be. 



Perfect (may have 



Fuerim, I may have been. 
Fueris, thou mayest have been. 
Fuerit, he may have been. 



Fuerimiis, we may have been, 
Fueritis. you may have been. 
Fuerint, they may have been. 



Pluperfect (might, could, would, or should have been). 



Fuissem, 1 7night have been. 
Fuisses, thou tnightest have been. 
Fuiss^t, he might have been. 



Fuissemus, we might have been 
Fuissetis, you might have been. 
Fuissent, they might have been. 



587, 588.] 



PARADIGMS. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



243 



■ Singular. 
Es, or esto, he thou, 
Esto, let him he. 




Plural. 
Este or estote, he ye, 
Simto, let them he. 


INFIMTIYE MOOD. 


Present, 
Perfect, 
Future, 


Esse, to he. 

Fuisse, to have heen. 

Fiiturus (a, um) esse, to he ahout to he. 




PAETICIPLE. 


Future, 


Futuriis 


, a, um, ahout to he. 


587. Eegular 


Verbs,' 


—Four Conjugations. 


1. Infinitive endings. 
1. 
are, 


2. 

ere. 


3. 4. 

ere. Ire. 


2. Favorite vowels. 
1. 
a, 


2. 


3. 4. 

e (t), i. 



588. First Conjugation (Inf. ending are), 

1. Regular endings of the 2d and 3d roots. 

2. 3. 

av, at. 

2. Paradigm. 

Amare, to love: 1st root, am; 2d, amav ; 3d, dmat, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

Passive, I am loved. 



Singular. 
Am-o, 
A.m-as, 
Am-at ; 



Active, Hove, 

Plural. 
Am-amiis, 
Am-atis, 
Am-ant. 



Singular. 
Am-or, 
Am-aris (re), 
Am-atiir ; 



Plural. 
Am-amiir, 
Am-amini, 
Am-antur. 



Imperfect, was loving ; luas loved. 



Am-abam, 
Am-abas, 
Am-abat ; 



Am-abamus, 

Am-abatis, 

Am-abant. 



Am-abar, Am-abamur, 

Am-abaris (re), Am-abamim, 
Am-abatiir ; Am-abantur. 



244 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[588. 



Future, will love ; ivill he loved. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Am-abo, 


Am-abiimis, 


Am-abor, 


Am-abimiir, 


Am-abis, 


Am-abitis, 


Am-aberis (re), 


Am-abiminl, 


Am-abit ; 


Am-abmit. 


' Am-abitur ; 


Am-abuntiir. 




Perfect, have loved ; have been loved. 


Amav-i, 


Amav-imus, 


Amat-iis sum,* 


Amat-i sumiis, 


Amav-isti, 


Amav-istis, 


Amat-iis es, 


Amat-i estis, 


Amav-it ; 


Amav-erunt (ere). 


Amat-iis est ; 


Amat-i sunt. 




Pluperfect, had loved; had been loved. 


Amav-eram, 


Amav-eramus, 


Amat-iis eram,* 


Amat-i eramiis, 


Amav-eras, 


Amav-eratis, 


Amat-iis eras, 


Amat-i eratis, 


Amav-erat ; 


Amav-erant. 


Amat-iis erat ; 


Amat-i erant. 


Future Perfect, will have 


' loved ; will have 


been loved. 


Amav-ero, 


A.mav-erimus, 


Amat-iis ero,* 


Amat-i erimus. 


Amav-erls, 


Amav-eritis, 


Amat-iis eris, 


Amat-i eritis, 


Amav-erit ; 


Amav-erint. 


Amat-iis erit ; 


Amat-i erunt. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Prerent, may love; may he loved. 



Am-em, 


Am-emiis, 


Am-er, Am-emiir, 


Am-es, 


Am-etis, 


Am-eris (re), Am-emini, 


Am-et; 


Am-ent, 


Am-etiir ; Am-entiir. 




Imperfect, might love; might be loved. 


Am-arem, 


Am-aremiis, 


Am-arer, Am-aremiir, 


Am-ares, 


Am-aretis, 


Am-areris (re), Am-aremini, 


Am-aret ; 


Am-arent. 


Am-aretiir ; Am-arentur. 


Perfect, may have loved; may have been loved. 


Amav-erim, 


Amav-erimus, 


Amat-iis sim,f Amat-i simiis, 


Amav-eris, 


Amav-eritis, 


Amat-iis sis, Amat-i sitis, 


Amav-erit ; 


Amav-erint. 


Amat-iis sit ; Amat-i sint. 


Pluperfect, might have loved ; might have been loved. 


Amav-issem, 


Amav-issemus, 


Amat-iis essem,f Amat-i essemiis, 


Amav-isses, 


Amav-issetis, 


Amat-iis esses, Amat-i essetis. 


AmSv-isset; 


Amav-issent. 


Amat-iis esset ; Amat-i essent. 




* See 331, N. 


\ See 332, ^, 



589.] 



PARADIGMS. 



245 



Singular. , 
Am-a, or 

ani-ato, 
Am-ato ; 



Perf. 

FUT. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Plural. Singular. 

Am-ate, or Am-are, 

am-atote, or am-ator. 

Am-anto. Am-ator ; 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Am-are. Am-ari. 

Amav-isse. Amat-us esse. 

Amat-uriis esse. Amat-um M. 



Plural 
Am-amini, 
Am-antor 



FuT. 



Am-iins. 
Amat-uriis. 



PARTICIPLES. 

I Perf. 

FuT. 



Amat-us. 
Am-andiis. 



GERUND. 
Am-andi, ando, andum, ando. 

SUPINES. 
Amat-iim. | Amat-u. 

589. Second Conjugation (Inf. ending ere). 

1. Regular endings of the 2d and 3d roots. 

2. 3. 

u (ev),* it. 

2. Paradigm. 

Monere, to advise: 1st root, mon; 2d, monu; 3d, montu 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 



Active, I advise. 


Passive, / am advised. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. Plural. 


M6n-e6, 


Mon-em^s, 


Mon-eor, Mon-emiir, 


M6n-es, 


Mon-etis, 


Mon-eris (re), Mon-emim, 


Mon-et ; 


Mon-ent. 


Mon-etiir; Mon-entiir. 




Imperfect, was adv 


ising ; was advised. 


Mon-eham, 


Mon-ebamtis, 


Mon-ebar, Mon-ebamiir, 


Mon-ebas, 


Mon-ebatis, 


Mon-ebaris (re), Mon-ebamini, 


Mon-ebat ; 


Mon-ebant. 


Mon-ebatur ; • Mon-ebantiir. 




Future, shall advi 


?e; shall he advised. 


Mon-ebo, 


Mon-ebimiis, 


Mon-ebor, Mon-ebimiir, 


Mon-ebis, 


Mon-ebitis, 


Mon-eberis (re), Mon-ebimini, 


Mon-ebit ; 


Mon-ebunt. 


Mon-ebitur ; Mon-ebuntm*. 




*Seel 


92, N. 



246 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



[589. 



Perfect, have advised ; have been advised. 

Singular. Plural. I Singular. Plural. 

M6nu-i, Monu-imus, Monit-us siim,^ Monit-i sumus, 

Monu-isti, Monu-istis, Moiiit-us es, Monit-i estis, 

Monu-it ; Monu-erunfc (ere). ] Monit-tis est ; M6nit-i sunt. 

Pluperfect, had advised ; had been advised. 



Monu-eram, 
Monu-eras, 
Monu-erat ; 

Future 

Monu-ei'o, 
Monu-eris, 
Monu-erit ; 



Mon-eam, 
Mon-eas, 
Mon-eat ; 



Monu-eramus, 

Monu-eratis, 

Monu-erant. 



Monit-us eram,* Monit-i erainus, 
M6nit-us eras, Monit-i eratis, 
Monit-us erat ; Monit-i erant. 



P:^FECT, shall have advised; shall have been advised. 
Monu-erimus, I Monit-us er6,"^ Monit-i erimiis, 

Monu-eritis, | Monit-us eris, M6nit-i eiitis, 

Monu-erint. ' Monit-iis erit ; Monit-i erunt 

SUBJUI^CTIYE MOOD. 
Present, may advise ; may be advised. 



Mon-eamiis, 

Mon-eatis, 

Mon-eant. 



Mon-ear, 
Mon-earis (re), 
Mon-eatur ; 



Mon-eamur, 
Mon-eamini, 
Mon-eantur. 



Imperfect, might advise ; might be advised. 



Mon-erem, 
Mon-eres, 
Mon-eret ; 



Mon-eremus, 

Mon-eretis, 

Mon-erent. 



Mon-erer, 
Mon-ereris (re), 
Mon-eretui* ; 



Mon-eremur, 
Mon-eremini, 
Mon-erentur. 



Perfect, may have advised; may have been advised. 



Monu-erirq, 
Monu-eris, 
Monu-erit ; 



Monu-erimus, 

Monu-eritis, 

Monu-erint. 



Monit-us sim.f 
Monit-us sis, 
Monit-us sit ; 



Monit-i sirnus, 

Monit-i sitis, 
Monit-i sint. 



Pluperfect, might have advised; might have been advised. 



Monu-issem, 
Monu-isses, 
Monu-isset ; 

Mon-e, 

or mon-eto, 
M6n-et6 ; 



Monu-issemus, 

Monu-issetis, 

Monu-issent. 



Monit-us essem,f Monit-i essemus, 
Monit-us esses, Monit-i essetis, 
Monit-us asset : Monit-i assent. 



IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 



Mon-ete, 

07' mon-etote, 
Mon-ento. 



Mon-er^, 

or mon-etor, 
Mon-etor ; 



Mon-emini, 
Mon-entor. 



* See 831 N. 



t See 382, K 



590.] 



PARADIGMS, 



247 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Pres* Mon-ere. 
Perf. Monu-isse. 
FuT. MoDit-urus esse. 



Mon-en. 
Monit-us esse. 
Monit-um irL 



PARTICIPLES. 



Pees. Mon-ens. 
FuT Monit-urus. 



M6nit-us. 
Mon-endiis. 



GERUND. 
Mon-endi, endo, endiim, endo. 



SUPINES. 



Monit-iim. 



Momt-u. 



590. Third Conjugation (Inf. ending ere), 

1. Regular endings of the 2d and 3d roots. 

2d, 5, or like 1st; 8d, f, sometimes 5. 

2. Paradigm. 

"Regere, to rule : 1st root, re^; 2d, rex ; 3d,recL 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Peesent. 

Pass., I am ruled. 



Act., I rule. 
Singular, Plural. 



K«g-o, 
Reg-is, 
Reg-it; 



Reg-ebam, 

Reg-ebas, 
Reg-ebat ; 

Reg-am, 

Reg-es, 
Reg-et ; 



Regimus, 

Reg-itis, 

Reg-unt. 



Singular. 
Reg-6r, 
Reg-eris (re), 
Reg-itur ; 



Plural. 
Reg-imiir, 
Reg-immi, 
Reg-untiir. 



Imperfect, was ruling ; was ruled. 



Reg-ebamiis, 

Reg-ebatis, 

Reg-ebant. 



Reg-ebar, Reg-ebamiir, 

Reg-ebaris (re), Reg-ebammi, 
Reg-ebatur ; Reg-ebantiir. 



Future, sliall rule ; shall be ruled. 



Reg-emus, 

Reg-etis, 

Reg-eni 



Reg-ar, 
Reg-eris (r^), 
Reg-etiir ; 



Reg-emur^ 
Reg-emini, 
Reg-entiir. 



248 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[590 



Perfect, have ruled ; have been ruled. 
Singular. Plural. I Singular. Plural. 

Rex-i, Rex-inms, Rect-iis sum,* Rect-i sumus, 

Rex-isti, Rex-istis, Rect-us es, Rect-i estis, 

Rex-it ; Rex-erunt (ere). | Rect-us est ; Rect-i sunt. 

Pluperfect, had ruled; had been ruled, 
Rex-eram, Rex-eramiis, Rect-iis eram,* Rect-i eramiis, 

Rex-eras, Rex-eratis, Rect-iis eras, Rect-i eratis, 

Rex-erat ; Rex-erant. R^ct-us erat ; Rect-i erant. 

Future Perfect, shall have ruled; shall have been ruled. 



Rex-er6, 
Rex-eris, 
Rex-erit ; 



Rex-erimiis, 

Rex-eiitis, 

Rex-erint. 



Rect-iis er6,* 

Rect-us eris, 
Rect-iis erit : 



Rect-i erimt»s, 
Rect-i eritis, 
Rect-i erunt. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present, may rule; may be ruled. 



Reg-am, 


Reg-amiis, 


Reg-ar, 


Reg-amiir, 


Reg-as, 


Reg-atis, 


Reg-aris (re), 


Reg-amini, 


Reg-at ; 


Reg-ant. 


Reg-atiii- ; 


Reg-antiir. 




Imperfect, might rule ; might be ruled. 


Reg-erem, 


Reg-eremiis, 


Reg-erer, 


Reg-eremiir, 


Reg-eres, 


Reg-eretis, 


Reg-ereris (re), 


Reg-eremini 


Reg-eret; 


Reg-erent. 


Reg-eretiir, 


Reg-erentiir. 


Perfect, may have rule 


d; may have been ruled. 


Rex-erim, 


Rex-erimiis, 


Rect-iis sim,f 


Rect-i simiis 


Rex-eris, 


Rex-eritis, 


Rect-iis sis, 


Rect-i sitis, 


Rex-erit; 


Rex-erint. 


Rect-iis sit ; 


Rect-i sint. 


Pluperfect, might have ri 


ded ; might have been ruled. 


Rex-issem, 


Rex-issemiis, 


Rect-iis essem,f 


Rect-i essemSt^ 


Rex-isses, 


Rex issetis. 


Rect-iis esses. 


Rect-i essetis, 


Rex-isset ; 


Rex-issent. 


Rect-iis esset ; 


Rect-i essent. 




IMPERATI 


VE MOOD. 




I^eg-e, 


Reg-ite, 


Reg-ere, 


Reg-imini, 


or reg-ito, 


or reg-it5te, 


or reg-itor, 




Reg-it5 ; 


Reg-unto. 


Reg-itor; 


Reg-untor. 




* See 331, K 


t See 332, K 





590.] 



PARADIGMS. 



249 



INFIJS'ITIVE MOOD. 
PnEs. ■ Reg-ere. Reg-i. 

Perf. Rex-isse. Rect-iis esse. 

Put. Rect-uriis esse, Rect-um iri. 



PARTICIPLES. 



pRES. Reg-ens. 
Put. Rect-uriis. 



Perf. Rect-us. 
Put. Ref-endiis. 



GERUND. 
Reg-endi, endo, endum, endo. 

SUPINES. 
Rect-um. I Rect-u. 



3. Paradigm of verbs in i 6 of the third conjugation. 

Capere, io take: 1st root, cap ; 2d, cejp ; 3d, capt, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT, 

Passive. 



Singular. 
Cap-io, 
Cap-is, 
Cap-it ; 



Cap-iebam, 
Cap-iebas, 
Cap-iebat ; 



Active. 

Plural. 
Cap-imus, 
Cap-itis, 
Cap-iunt. 

Cap-iebamus, 

Cap-iebatis, 

Cap-iebant. 



Singular. 
Cap-ior, 
Cap-eris (re), 
Cap-itiir ; 



Plural. 
Cap-imur, 
Cap-imini, 
Cap-iuntur. 



IMPERFECT. 



Cap-iebar, Cap-iebamur, 

Cap-iebaris (re), Cap-iebamiui, 
Cap-iebatur ; Cap-iebantiir. 



Cap-iam, 
Cap-ies, 
Cap-let ; 



Cap-iam, 
Cap-ias, 
Cap-i^t ; 



Cap-iemiis, 

Cap-ietis, 

Cap-ient. 



Cap-iar, 
Cap-ieris (re), 
Cap ietur; 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

Cap-iamus, Cap-iar, 

Cap-iatis, Cap-iaris (re), 

Cap-iant. Cap-iatur ; 

11* 



Cap-iemiir, 
Cap-iemini, 
Cap-ientur. 



Cap-iamiir, 
Cap-iamini, 
Cap-iantur. 



250 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



[591. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
8d Pl. Cap-iunt5. | 3d Pl. Cap-iimtor. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres. Cap-iens. [ Put. Cap-iendiis. 

GERUND. 
Cap-iendi, do, &c. 
' The other parts of verbs in i o are entirely regular. 



591. Fourth Conjugation (Inf. ending ire). 

1. Regular endings of the 2d and 2d roots. 

2d, iv ; 8d, it. 

2. Paradigm. 

Audlre, io hear: 1st root, and; 2d, audlv ; 3d, audit. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



Act., / hear. 



Singular. 
Aud-io, 
Aud-is, 
Aud-it ; 



Aud-iebam, 
Aud-iebas, 
Aud-iebat ; 

Aud-iam, 
Aud-ies, 
Aud-iet ; 

Audiv-i, 
Audiv-istT, 
Audiv-it ; 



Plural. 
Aud-imiis, 
Aud-itis, 
Aud-iunt. 



Pass., I am heard. 
Singular. Plural. 

Aud-ior, Aud-imiir, 

Aud-Iris (re), Aud-imini, 

Aud-itiir ; " Aud-iuntiir. 



Imperfect, ivas hearing ; was heard. 



Aud-iebamtis, 

Aud-iebatis, 

Aud-iebant. 



Aud-iebar, Aud-iebamiir, 

Aud-iebaris (re), Aud-iebaminl, 
Aud-iebantiir. 



Aud-iebatiir 
Future, shall hear ; shall he heard, 



Aud-iemus, 
Aud-ietis, 
A ud-ient. 



Aud-iar, 
Aud-ieris (re). 
A ad-ietiir ; 



Aud-iemur, 
Aud-iemiDi, 
Aud-ientiir. 



Perfect, have heard; have been heard, 
Audiv-imiis, 
Audiv-istis, 



Audiv-erunt (ere). 



Audit-iis sum,* Audit-i siimiis, 
Audit-iis es, Audit-i estis, 

Audit-US est ; Audit-i sunt. 



* See 331, N. 



591.] 



PARADIGMS. 



251 



Pluperfect, had heard; had been heard. 



Audiv-eram, Audiv-eramiis, 
Audiv-eras, Audiv-eratis, 

Audiv-erat ; Audiv-erant. 

Future Perfect, shall have heard; shall have been heard. 



Audit-US eram,* Audit-i eramiis, 
Audit-US eras, Audit-i eratis, 
Audit-US erat ; Audit-i erant. 



Audiv-ero, 
Audiv-eris, 
Audiv-erit ; 



Aud-iam, 
Aud-ias, 
Aud-iat ; 

Aud-irem, 
Aud-ires, 
Aud-iret ; 



Audiv-erimus, 

Audiv-eritis, 

Audiv-erint. 



Audit-us ero,*^ 
Audit-us eris, 
Audit-US erit : 



Audit-i emnus, 
Audit-i eritis, 
Audit-i erunt. 



SUBJUIS^CTIVE MOOD. 

Present, may hear ; may he heard, 
Aud-iamiis, 



Aud-iatis, 
Aud-iant. 



Aud-iar, 
Aud-ians (re), 
Aud-iatur ; 



A i d-iamur, 
Aud-iamini, 
Aud-iantur. 



Imperfect, might hear ; might he heard. 



Aud-iremus, 

Aud-iretis, 

Aud-irent. 



Aud-irer, Aud-iremiir, 

Aud-ireris (re), Aud-irennni, 
Aud-iretur ; Aud-irentiir. 



Audiv-erim, 
Audiv-eris, 
Audiv-erit ; 



Perfect, may have heard; may have been heard. 



Audiv-erimus, 

Audiv-eritis, 

Audiv-erint. 



Audit-iis sim,f 
Audit-iis sis, 
Audit-iis sit; 



Audit-i simiis, 
Audit-i sitis, 
Audit-i sint 



Pluperfect, might have heard; might have been heard. 



Audiv-issem, 
Audiv-isses, 
Audiv-isset ; 



Aud-i, 

or aud-ito, 
Aud-ito ; 



Audiv-issemus, 

Audiv-issetis, 

Audiv-issent, 



Audit-iis essem,f Audit-i essemus. 
Audit-iis esses, Audit-i essetis, 
Audit-us ess^t ; Audit-i essent 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Aud-ite, 

or aud-itote, 
Aud-iunto. 



Aud-ire, 

or aud-itor, 
Aud-itor ; 



Aud-iroini, 



Aud-iuntor. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Pres. Aud-ire. 
Perf. Audiv-isse. 
Fur. Au(^t-urus esse. 



Aud-irL 
Audit-iis esse. 
Audit-um iri. 



* See 331, N. 



f See 332, N 



252 



riEST LATIN book:. 



[592—594 



PARTICIPLES. 
Pees. Aud-iens. | Perf. Audit-iis. 

Put. Audit-urus. I Put. Aud-iendus. 

GERUND. 
Aud-iendi, iend5, iendum, iendo. 

SUPINES. 
Audit-um. I Audit-u. 



592. Formation of Second Root. 



Conj. I. 



av. 



Conj. II. I Conj. III. I Conj. IV. 

REGULAR. 
u or ev. I s or like 1st root. | iv. 

FIRST IRREGULARITY. 



Radical vowel 
lengthened. 



Reduplication. 

Analogy of 2d 
conj. 



radical vowel radical vowel 

lengthened. lengthened (and 

often changed). 

SECOND IRREGULARITY, 
reduphcation. | reduplication. 

THIRD IRREGULARITY. 

analogy of 8d 
conj. 



radical vowel 
lengthened. 



analogy of 2d or | analogy of 2d or 
4th conj. I 3d conj. 



593. Deponent Verbs, 

Deponent verbs are such as have a passive form^ but an active 

meaning. They take, however, all the four participles; e. g., 

1) Loquens, speaking ; 2) locutus, having spoken ; 3) loeil- 

turus, about to speak ; 4) loquendiis, to he spoken. 

Rem.— The past participle of a deponent verb is the participle of the jperfeci active, 
which other verbs do not have. 

Irregular Verbs. 
594. Paradigm of Posse,"^ to be able. 
2d root, potu. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres. Possum, potes, potest, possumus, potestis, possunt. 
Imp. poteram; Fut. potero; Perf. p6tu-i; Pluperf. potu-eram ; Put. Perf, 
p6tu-er6. 



' For the conjugation of the simple verb, ess^, see 686. 



595.] 



PARADIGMS. 



263 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. possim ; Imp. possem ; Perf. potu-erim ; Pluperf. potu-issem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. posse ; Perf. potu-isse. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Potens {used as an adjective^ powerful). 
595. Paradigms of Velle (to be willing) and its compounds. 



Velle. 


Nolle. 


Malle. 


2d root, volu. 


2d root, nolu. 
INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 


2d root, malu. 


V6l5, 

Vis, 

Viilt: 

Volumus, 

Vultis, 

Volunt. 


Nolo, 

Nonvis, 

Nonvult ; 

Nolurnus, 

Nonvultis, 

Nolunt. 

IMPERFECT. 


Mal5, 

Mavis, 

Mavult ; 

Malumusy 

Mavultis, 

Malunt. 


Vol-ebam, bas, &c. 


Nol-ebam, bas, &c. 

FUTURE. 


Mal-ebam, bas, <fec. 


Vol-am. 


Nol-am. 

PERFECT. 


Mal-am. 


V61u-i. 


Nolu-i. 

PLUPERFECT. 


Malu-L 


Volu-eram. 


Nolu-eram. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 


Malu-eram. 


Vclu-er6. 


1 Nolu-ero. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 


Malu-er^,, 


Vel-im, is, <fec. 


1 Nol-im, is, &c. 

IMPERFECT. 


Mal-im, is, <fec. 


Vell-em, es, <fec. 


NoU-em. | 

PERFECT. 


MaU-em. 


Volu-erim. 


Nolu-erim. 

PLUPERFECT. 


Malu-enm. 


Volu-issgm. 


Nolu-issem. 


Malu-issgm. 



254 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [596. 

IMPERATIVE. 

INol-i or ito. I 

Kol-ite or itote. | 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. YeUe. I NoUe. I MaUe. 

Perf, Volu-isse. | Nolu-isse. | Malu-isse. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Yolens. | Nolens. | 

596. Paradigm of Ferre, to bear. 

2d root, iul; 3d, laL 
INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Active. 

Ffer-o, fer-s, fer-t, fer-imus, fer-tis, 

fer-unt. 



Passive. 
Fer-or, fer-ris, fer-tur, fer-imur, 
fer-imini, fer-untur. 



IMPERFECT. 

Fer-ebam, bas, &c. \ Fer-ebar, baiis, (fee. 

FUTURE. 

Fer-am, es, (fee. | Fer-ar, eris, (fee. 

PERFECT. 

Tiil-i, isti, (fee. j Lat-us sum, es, (fee. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Tiil-eram, as, (fee. j Lat-us eram, (fee. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

Tul-ero, (fee. | Lat-us erg, (fee. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Fer-am, as, cfee. | Fer-ar, aris, (fee. 

BIPERFECT. 

Fer-rem, res, (fee. | Fer-rer, reris, (fee. 

PERFECT. 

Tul-erim, (fee. | Lat-us sim, (fee. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Tul-issem. | Lat-us essem, &c 



697.] 



PARADIGMS. 
IMPERATIVE. 



255 



Active. 
Fer, or ferto, 
Fer-to ; 

Fer-te, or fer-tote, 
Fer-UQto. 



Pres. Fer-re, 
Per/. Tiil-isse, 
JFkct Lat-uriis esse. 



Passive, 
Fer-re, or fer-tor, 
Fer-tor; 
Fer-imini, 
Fer-untor. 



INFINITIVE. 



Fer-ri, 

Lat-iis esse, 
Lat-um irL 



PARTICIPLES. 
Pres, Fer-ens, I P^rf, Lat-iis (a, um). 

Put. Lat-uriis (a, iim). j Put Fer-endiis (a, iim). 

GERUND. 
Fer-endi, do, diim, do. | 

SUPINE. 
Lat-um. I Lat-ti. 

Rem.— The compounds of ferre are conjugated like the simple verb. 

597. Paradigm of Fieri, to become, be made. 

PRESENT. 

Subjunctive. 
Fi-am, fi-as, fi-at, &0, 



Indicative. 
Fi5, fis, fit, &c. 



IMPERFECT. 



Fi-grem, eres, &c. 



FUTURE. 



Fi-ebam, 6bas, &c. 

Fi-am, 6s, <fec. | 

PERFECT. 

Fact-iis siim, <fec. | Fact-us sim, &c. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Fact-iis eram, <fec. | Fact-iis essem, <fec. 

^ FUTURE PERFECT. 

Fact-US ero, &c. | 

IMPERATIYE. 



R, or fi-to, 
It-t§. 



Plur. Fi-te, or f i-tote, 
Fi-unto. 



256 FIRST LATIN" BOOK. [598, 599. 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres. Fieri ; Perf. Fact-us esse ; Fut. Fact-iim irl. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Perf. Fact-US (a, um) ; Fut. Faciendus (a, um). 

598. Paradigm of Ire, to go. 

2d root, IV ; Sd, it 

PRESENT. 
Indicative. \ Subjunctive. 

Eo, is, it ; imiis, itis, eunt. j Earn, eas, (fee. 

IMPERFECT. 

Ibam, ibaSj <fec. | Irem, ires, <fec. 

FUTURE. 
Ibo, ibis, &c. I 

PERFECT. 

Iv-i, iv-isti, (fee. | Iv-erim, eris, (fee. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Iv-eram, eras, (fee. | Iv-issem, isses, (fee. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

Iv-er6, eris, (fee. | 

IMPERATIVE. 
Sing. I, or ito, I Plur. Ite, or itote, 

Ito. I Eunto. 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres. Ire ; Perf. Iv-isse ; Fut. Iturus esse. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres. lens {gen. euntis) ; Fut. Iturus, a, uro, 

GERUND. I SUPINE. 

Eundi, do, dmn, do. I Itum, itti. 

599. Edere, to eat. 

Edere, to eat, is conjugated regularly as a verb of the third con- 
jugation, but has also certain forms like those of esse. These are 
as follows : 

Irregular. 



Regular. 
Pres. Ed5, <fec. 

Imperat. Ede, (fee. 
Suhj. Imp. Ederem, (fee. 
Infin. Edere. 



Es, est, estis. 

Es, esto, este, estotg. 

Essem, esses, (fee. 

Esse. 



600, 601.] PAEADIGMS. 257 

600. Perivhrasiic Conjugations, 

There are two periphrastic conjugations formed respectively from 
the future participles in ru^ and c?ws, combined with the various 
tenses of the verb esse. The first periphrastic conjugation repre- 
sents the action as/w/wre, or as one that is about to be done; e.g., 
scripturiis sum, I am about to write : the second expresses duty or 
necessity ; e. g., virlus colenda est, virtue must be cultivated. 

601. Impersonal Verbs. 

1. Impersonal verbs are such as are used only in the third person 
singular, and never take a personal subject (as /, tJiou, he). The 
subject in English is generally expressed by the pronoun it ; e. g., 

Oportet, it behooves. 

Taedet me, it disgusts me (I am disgusted with). 

2. Besides the verbs which are strictly impersonal, many others 
are often used impersonally ; e. g.. 

Constat, it is known, 
Juvat, it delights, 

3. The second periphrastic conjugation is often used imperson- 
ally; e.g., 

Mihi scrlbendum est, / must or should write. 
Tibi scrlbendum est, you must or should write. 
nil scrlbendum est, he must or should ivrite. 
Nobis scrlbendum est, we must or should write. 
Vobis scrlbendum est, you must or should write, 
nils scrlbendum est, they must or should write, 

4. Those verbs which take no direct object in the active, can only 
be used impersonally in the passive ; e. g., 

Mihi creditur, I am believed. 

Tibi creditur. Thou art believed, 

nil creditur. He is believed. 

Nobis creditur. We are believed. 

Vobis creditur. You are believed. 

nils creditur. They are believed. 



SYNTAX. 



INTRODUCTION. 

602. Parts of speech (as we have seen, 2), either smgly or com- 
bmed. form propositions ; e. g., Amas, thou lovest ; puer ludit, the 
hoy plays. 

603. Propositions, either singly or combined, form sentences; 
e. g., Equus cm-rit {one 'prop.), the horse runs; Puer luditetequus 
currit (two propositions). 

604. Sentences, in their various forms and combinations, of course, 
comprise the language. 

605. Sentences may be divided into two classes, viz. : 

1) Simple sentences, or such as contain a single proposition ; 
e. g., Puer ludit. 

2) Compound sentences, or such as contain more than one 
proposition; e. g., Puer ludit et equus currit. 

606. In a compound sentence, the propositions which compose it 
are either, 

1) Independent of each other, as in the above example, and 
are called co-ordinate propositions ; or, 

2) One of them is used to qualify the other, or some part of 
it, and is called a dependent or subordinate proposition, 
while that on which it depends is called a leading or prin- 
cipal proposition; e. g., Servus venit ut portas claudat, 
the slave has come to shut the gates. Here, ' servus venit^ 
is a principal proposition, and ' ut portas claudat' is a de- 
pendent proposition. 



260 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [607 — 611. 

CHAPTER I. 

The Essential Elements of Sentences. — Subject and Predicate. 

Section I. — Subject. 

607. Every sentence, however simple, consists of two distinct 
parts, viz. : 

1) The Subject, or that of which it speaks, as, puer, in the 
sentence vuer ludlt. 

2) The Predicate, or that w^hich is said of the subject, as 
ludlt, in the above sentence. 

608. The subject of a sentence must be either, 

1) A noun; e. g., fuer, in the sentence puer ludti; or, 

2) A word or clause used as a noun; e. g., mentlrl, in the 
sentence iurpe est mentlrl. 

609. Rule I. The Subject. — The subject of a finite* verb is put 
in the nominative ; e. g., Equiis currit, the horse runs, 

610. The subject may either be simple or compound. 

1) The simple subject consists either of a single nominative, 
or of two or more nominatives representing the same per- 
son or thing; e. g., (1) Latlnus regnabat, Latinus was 
reigning ; (2) Latlnus rex regnabat, Latinus the king 
was reigning. 

2) The compound subject consists of two or more simple 
subjects connected by conjunctions, expressed or under- 
stood ; e. g., Caesar et Balbus Romam venerunt, Caesar 
and Balbus came to Rome. 

Section II. — Predicate. 

61 L The predicate of a sentence must be either, 

1) A verb; e. g., ludtt, in the sentence puer ludit ; or, 

2) The verb esse (or sometimes a passive verb) with an at- 
tributivef noun or adjective ; e. g., 

* For the subject of an infinitive see 655. 

f By an attributive noun is meant one v^hich is used to qualify or de- 
scribe another noun. 



612—616.] SYNTAX. 261 

1. 

Cicero fuit consul, Cicero was consul, 

Christiani est neminem violare, it is the duty of a Chris- 
tian to wrong nobody. Here, fuit consul and Christi- 
ani est are the predicates. 
2. 

Terra est rotunda, the earth is round. 

Humanum est errare, to err is human. Here, est rotunda 
and humanum est are the predicates. 

612. Rule II. Finite Verb. — A finite verb must agi'ee with its 
subject in number and person ; e. g., Puer ludit, the boy plays. 

Rem. — If the subject is compound, the verb is generally put in the plural. 

613. Rule III. Attributive Noun.— An attributive noun in the 
predicate, after the verb esse and a few passive verbs, is put, 

1) In the same case as the subject, when it denotes the same 
person or thing; e. g., Cicero fuit consul, Cicero was 
consul. 

2) In the genitive, when it denotes a different person or thing ; 
e. g., Christiani est neminem violare, it is the duty of a 
Christian to wrong nobody. 

614. Rule IV. Adjectives. — Adjectives and participles (whether 
in the subject or the predicate) agree in gender^ number^ and case^ 
with the nouns which they qualify ; e. g.. Terra est rotunda, the 
earth is round. 

615. The predicate, like the subject, may be either simple or 
compound. 

1) The simple predicate contains but a single finite verb; 
e. g.. Puer currit, the boy runs. 

2) The compound predicate consists of two or more simple 
predicates connected by conjunctions, expressed or under- 
stood; e. g Puer currit et ludit, the boy runs and plays. 

616. In principal sentences (including simple sentences) the verb 
of the predicate may be put in any finite mood. 

1) The indicative is used, in positive assertions; e. g., Portas 
claudit, he is shutting the gates. 

2) The subjunctive is used, 



262 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [617—623. 

a) To express an affirmation doubtfully or conditionally ; 
e. g., Daret, he would give it (i. e., ifheliadit^'per'ha'ps), 

b) Sometimes to express a wish or command; e. g., Scrlbat, 
Tie may ivrite, may he write, or let him ivrite, 

3) The imperative is used to express a command ; e. g., Por- 
tas claude, shut the gates. 
. 617. Rule V. Vocative. — The name of the person or thing ad- 
dressed is put in the vocative; e.g., Quid est, Catillna? why is 
this, Catiline 1 

Rem.— This, of course, forms no part of the subject or predicate. 



CHAPTER 11. 

Subordinate Elements. — Modifiers. 

Section I. — Use of Modifiers. 

618. Both subject and predicate may have qualifying words and 
clauses connected with them, to limit or modify their meaning ; e. g., 

1) Latlnus rex regnavit, Latinus the king reigned. Here the 
subject is modified by rex (59). 

2) Milites fortiter pugnant, the soldiers fight bravely. Here 
the predicate is modified hy fortiter (77). 

619. Any modifier, whether in the subject or the predicate, may 
be itself modified ; e. g., Latlniis, bonus rex, regnavit. Here the 
modifier, rex, is itself modified by bonus. 

620. Nouns, adjectives, verbs, and adverbs, are often found with 
modifiers. 

Section II. — Modifiers of Nouns. 

621. Nouns, including pronouns, may be modified, 
I. By adjectives and participles. 

n. By nouns and clauses used with the force of adjectives. 

622. I. Nouns may be modified by adjectives and participles ; e. g., 

Bonus puer, a good boy. 
See Rule IV. 

623. II. Nouns may be modified by nouns and clauses used with 
the force of adjectives. These are, 



624—630.] SYNTAX 263 

1) Limiting nouns. 

2) Relative clauses. 

624. Rule VI. Limiting Nouns. — A noun limiting the meaning 
of another noun is put, 

1) In the same case as that noun, when it denotes the same 
person or thing ; e. g., Latlnus rex^ Latinus the king, 

2) In the genitive, Vv^hen it denotes a different person or 
thing ; e. g., Regis fllius, the kingh son : except, 

a) When it denotes character or quality ; it is then accom- 
panied by an adjective, and is put either in the genitive 
or ablative ; e. g., Puer eximiae pulchrltudims, or Puer 
eximia pulchritudine, a hoy of remarkaUe beauty. 

625. Rule VII. Relative Clauses. — The relative pronoun agrees 
with its antecedent in gender and number ; e. g., Puer qui ludit, 
the boy who plays. 

626. The predicate of a relative clause is sometimes in the indi- 
caiive and sometimes in the subjunctive. It may be observed, how- 
ever, that the subjunctive is used, 

1) To express purpose or result ; e. g., Legates miserunt qui 
dicer ent, they sent ambassadors to say (lit., who might say). 

2) To define an indefinite antecedent ; e. g.. Sunt qui putent, 
there are (some) who think. 

Section III. — Modifiers of Adjectives. 

627. Adjectives may be modified, 
I. By adverbs. 

11. By words (generally the oblique cases of nouns) usea with 
the force of adverbs. 

628. L Adjectives may be modified by adverbs; e. g., Hand dif- 
f icilis, not difficult. 

629. Rule VIII. Adverbs. — Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, 
and other adverbs ; e. g., Haud diff^icilis, not difficult ; miles for- 
titer piignat, the soldier fights bravely. 

Rem.— It will be observed that adverbs modify verbs and other adverbs as well as 
adjectives. 

630. 11. Adjectives may be modified by words (generally the ob- 
lique cases of nouns) used with the force of adverbs. These are, 



264 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [631 — 638. 

1) The genitive. 

2) Tlie dative. 

3) The ablative. "-' 

4) The infinitive. 

631. Rule IX. Genitive. — Many adjectives signifying desire, 
knowledge, skill, participation, recollection, fulness, and the like, toge- 
ther with their contraries, take the genitive ; e. g., Cupidiis laudis, 
desirous of praise, 

632. RxjLE X. Dative. — Many adjectives are followed by the da- 
tive of the object to which the quality is directed, or for which it 
exists; e. g., Pax mihi gratissima erat, peace was very acceptable 
to me. 

633. Rule XL Ablative. — Adjectives may be modified by an 
ablative denoting cause, manner, or means; e. g., Aeger avaritia, 
diseased by avarice. 

634. Rule XII. Ablative, — The adjectives, dlgnus, indlgnus, con- 
tentus, praeditus, fretus, and liber, take the ablative ; e. g., Virtus 
parvo contenta est, virtue is content with little, 

635. Rule XIII. Supine in u as Ablative. — The supine in iZ as a 
verbal noun in the ablative is used after adjectives signifying good 
or bad, easy or difficult, agreeable or disagreeable, &c. ; e. g.. Dif- 
ficile dictu (difficult in saying), difficult to say. 

636. Rule XIV. Ablative. — The comparative degree without 
qudm is followed by the ablative ; e. g., Clementia divinius, more 
godlike than clemency. 

Obs. — If g-wam is expressed, the following noun will be in the same case as that 
which precedes ; e. g., Europa minor est quam Asia, Europe is smaller than 
Asia. 

637. Rule XV. Infinitive. — The infinitive sometimes depends 
upon adjectives ; e. g., Dlgnus amarl, worthy to be loved. 

Rem.— Infinitives dependent upon adjectives are generally used as substantives, and 
as such may be referred to Rule XI. or XII. 

Section IV. — ^IModifiers of Verbs. 

638. Verbs may be modified, 

I. By objects. 
II. By adverbial modifiers. 



689—644] SYNTAX. 265 

5 1. Objects, 

639. Verbs may be modified by objects. These are, 

1) The oblique cases of nouns. 

2) Infinitives or clauses used as nouns. 

640. Verbs may take one or more obHquc cases of nouns as 
objects; e.g., (1) Caius puellam laudat, Caius praises the girl, 
(2) Balbus puero viam monstrat, Balhus shows the way to the boy, 

641. Rule XVI. — The accusative is used as the direct object of 
an action ; e. g., Caius puellam laudat, Caius praises the girl, 

642. Rule XVII;— The genitive is used, 

1) After verbs of pitying ; e. g., Miseremml sociorum, pity 
the allies. 

2) After verbs of remembering and forgetting ; e. g., Memmi 
vivorum, I remember the living, 

3) After refert and interest ; e. g.. Interest omnium, it is the 

interest of all. 

Rem. — Verbs of remembering and forgetting sometimes take the accusative ; e. g., 
Meminl Cinnam, / remember Cinna. 

643. Rule XVIIL— The dative is used, 

1) After esse in expressions denoting possession ; e. g., Puero 
est liber, the boy has a book (lit., there is a book to the boy), 

2) After the compounds of esse, except posse, to be able ; 
e. g., Mihi profuit, it profited me. 

3) After the compounds of bene, satis, and mate ; e. g.. Officio 
suo satisfecit, he has discharged his duty (lit., has done 
enough for). 

4) After the compounds of the prepositions, ad, ante, con, 
m, inter, 6b, post, prae, sub, and super, together with a 
few others ; e. g., Veni ut mihi succurras, / have come 
that you may assist (succor) me. 

6) After verbs signifying to command or obey, please or dis- 
please, favor or injure, serve or resist, together with to in- 
dulge, spare, pardon, envy, believe, persuade. Sic. ; e. g., 
Legibus paret, he obeys the laws (is obedient to the laws). 

644. Rule XIX. — The ablative is used, 

1) After the deponent verbs, utl, fru% fungi, potirl, vescl^ 

12 



266 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [645 — 650. 

dtgnari,'^ and their compounds; e. g., Lacte vescuntur, 
they live upon milk. 
2) After verbs signifying to abound or he destitute of; e. g,. 
Nemo aliorum ope carere potest, no one can be (do) with- 
out the assistance of others. 

645. Rule XX. Two Accusatives. — Verbs of askings demanding, 
teaching, and concealing, may take two accusatives, one of the per- 
son and one of the thing; e. g., Caesar frumentum Aeduos flagita- 
bat, Caesar demanded corn of the Aedui. 

646. Rule XXI. Accusative and Genitive. — Verbs of accusing, 
convicting, acquitting, warning, and the like, take the accusative of 
the person, and the genitive of the crime, charge, &c. ; e. g., Caiiim 
proditionis accusant, they accuse Caius of treachery. 

Rem. — The genitive is perhaps best explained by making it depend upon the abla- 
tive crimlne, understood. See 214, Note. 

647. Rule XXII. Accusative and Genitive. — The impersonal 
verbs of feeling, miser et, poemtet, fudet, taedet, and piget, take the 
accusative of the person, together with the genitive of the object 
which produces the feeling; e. g., Taedet me vltae, / am weary 
of life (lit., it wearies me of life). 

648. Rule XXIII. Accusative and Dative. — Any transitive verb 
may take the accusative of the direct object and the dative of the 
indirect object ; e. g., Balbus puero viam monstrat, Balhus shows the 
way to the boy. 

649. Rule XXIV. Accusative and two Datives. — Transitive verbs 
of giving, sending, imputing (dare, mittere, vertere, &c.), some- 
times take a direct object in the accusative, together with two m- 
direct ohjects in the dative; e.g., Regniim suum Romanis dono 
dedit, he gave his kingdom to the Romans as a present (for a present). 

650. Rule XXV. Accusative and Ablative. — Verbs signifying to 
separate from, or deprive of, take the accusative of the direct object, 
together with the ablative of that from which it is separated, &c. 
e. g.. Me luce privant, they deprive me of light. 



* Bignari takes a direct object in connection with the ablative ; e. g., 
Te honore dignatur, he thi7iks you worthy of honor. 



651—659.] SYNTAX. 267 

651. Rule XXVL Two Dai^iues.-^Intransitive verbs signifying 
to be, to come, to go, and the like, often take two datives, one denot- 
ing the object to which, and the other the object /or lohich; e. g., 
Caesari auxllio venit, he went to the assistance of Caesar. 

652. Rule XXVII. Dative and Ablative. — Opus est and iisus est, 
as impersonal verbs signifying need, take the dative of the person 
and the ablative of the object needed; e. g., Duce nobis opus est, 
we need a leader (lit., there is need to us of a leader^. 

653. Verbs sometimes take an infinitive or clause as object; e. g., 

1. Cupit pugnare, he desires (what?) to fight. 

2. Spero te esse beatiim, I hope (what?) that you are happy, 

3. Nescio unde sol ignem habeat, I know not (what?) whence 
the sun derives its fire. 

654. Rule XXVIII. Infinitive as Object. — The infinitive mood, 
either alone or with other words connected with it, may be used as 
the object of a verb. (See examples above.) 

Rem. — The infinitive as object is used chiefly after verbs of perceiving, declaring, 
desiring, and the like. 

655. Rule XXIX. Subject of Infinitive. — The subject of the in- 
finitive is put in the accusative ; e. g., Spero te esse beatum, / hope 
you are happy. 

Rem.— In this example te, which is the subject of esse, is put in the accusative 
according to rule. 

656. Rule XXX. Dependent Question as Object. — An indirect or 
dependent question m^y be used as the object of a verb; e. g., Nescio 
"unde sol Ignem habeat, I know not whence the sun derives its fire. 

657. The verb in dependent questions is put in the subjunctive, 
as in the above example. 

658. Rule XXXI. Object after Passive Verbs. — Verbs in the 
passive voice are followed by the same cases as in the active, except 
the direct object, which becomes the subject of the passive; e.g., 
(Act.) Balbum furti accusant, they accuse Balbus of theft; (Pass.) 
Balbus furti accasatur, Balbus is accused of theft. 

659. Rule XXXII. Agent of Passive Verbs. — After passive verbs, 
the agent of the action is expressed by the ablative with a or db ; 
e. g., Puer a Caio'docetur, the boy is taught by Caius ; except. 



268 FIKST LATIN BOOK. [660—667. 

The second periphrastic conjugation (425), which takes the dative 
of the agent; e. g., Mihi scrlbendum est, I must icrite. 

660. Rule XXXIII. Impersonal Pasnve Verbs. — Verbs which 
have ho direct object in the active voice, are only used impersonal!}^ 
in the passive; e. g., Milii creditar, I am believed (ht., it is believed 
to me), 

5 II. Adverbial Modifiers. 

661. Verbs often take adverbial modifiers : 'hese are, 

1) Adverbs. 

2) Adverbial expressions. 

662. Verbs may be modified by adverbs ; e. g., Fortiter pugnat, 
he fights bravely. 

See Rule VIH. 
Rem. — Adverbial modifiers are the same whether the verb is active ot passive. 

663. Verbs may be modified by adverbial expressions : these are, 

1) The oblique cases of nouns, with or without prepositions. 

2) Infinitives, or dependent propositions. 

664. The oblique cases of nouns (with or without prepositions) 
used as adverbial modifiers, may be referred to the following classes, 
viz. : 

1) Adverbial expressions of manner, means, &c. 

2) Adverbial expressions of time. 

3) Adverbial expressions of place. 

4) Miscellaneous adverbial expressions. 

665. The oblique cases of nouns (and sometimes of adjectives) 
may be used as adverbial modifiers denoting manner, means, &c. 

666. Rule XXXIV. Manner, Means, c^-c— The manner or cause 
of an action, and the means or instrument employed, are expressed 
by the ablative ; e. g., Dominum gladio occldlt, he killed his master 
with a sword. 

667. Rule XXXV. Price. — Price, when expressed by nouns, is 
usually put in the ablative, and when expressed by adjectives, 
usually in the genitive; e. g., (1) Avarus patriam auro vendet, the 
avaricious man will sell his country for gold ; (2) Avarns pecuniam 
magnl aestlmat, the avaricious man values money- highly. 



668—676.] " SYNTAX. 269 

668. The oblique cases of nouns may be used as adverbial modi- 
fiers denoting time, 

669. Rule XXXVI. Time, — Time when is expressed by the ab- 
lative without a preposition; e. g., Hieme ursus dormit, the hear 

ns in winter. 



670. Rule XXXVII. Length of T/me.— Length of time is gene- 
rally expressed by the accusative ; e. g., Caius annum unum vixlt, 
Caius lived one year. 

671. The oblique cases of nouns (with or without prepositions) 
may be used as adverbial modifiers denoting place. 

672. Rule XXXVIII. — The name of a town where any thing is, 
or is done, if of the first or second declension and singular number, 
is put in the genitive, otherwise in the ablative; e. g., (I) Caius 
Cortonae vixit, Caius lived at Cortona ; (2) Caius Tibure vixit, 
Caius lived at Tihur. 

673. Rule XXXIX. — The name of a place where any thing is, 
or is done, when not a town, is generally put in the ablative with 
a preposition ; e. g., Ursus in antro dormit, the hear sleeps in a cave. 

674. Rule XL. — After verbs of motion, 

1) The place to which the motion is directed, if a town or 
small island, is expressed by the accusative without a pre- 
position, otherwise by the accusative with one; e. g., (1) 
Romam venire, to come to Rome ; (2) In Italiam venire, 
to come into Italy. 

2) The place from which the motion proceeds, if a town or 
small island, is expressed by the ablative without a pre- 
position, otherwise by the ablative with one; e. g., (1) 
Roma venire, to come from Rome ; (2) Ab Italia venire, 
to come from Italy. 

675. Rule XLI. — Domus and rus, together with the genitives 
hcdii, humi, and miUliae, are used like names of towns; e. g., Caius 
rure redilt, Caius relumed from the country; Balbus et domi et 
mjLtiae fuit, Balbus was with me hoth at horne and on service. 

676. Rule XLII. — The supine in urn, as a verbal noun in the ac- 
cusative, follows verbs of motion to express the purpose or object 



270 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [677 — 684. 

of that motion ; e. g., Mittit legates pacem petltum, he sends am^ 
bassadors to sue for peace. 

677. The ablative absolute and the oblique cases of nouns with 
prepositions are used to express various adverbial relations. 

678. Rule XLIIL Ablative Absolute. — A noun and a participle 
standing grammatically independent of the rest of the sentence, are 
put in the ablative absolute ; e. g., Caesar victis hostibus, Caesar 
haling conquered his enemies (or, ivhen he had conquered; lit., his 
enemies being conquered). 

Rem.— The ablative absolute generally expresses either the adverbial relation of 
thne (as in the above example) or that of cause ; sometimes, however, it adds 
an attendant circumstance. 

679. Rule XLIV. Prepositions with Accusative. — The following 
twenty-six prepositions govern the accusative ; viz.. Ad, adversiis, 
ante, apud, circa or circum, els or citra, contra, erga, extra, infra, 
inter, intra, juxta, ob, penes, per, pone, post, praeter, prope, prop- 
ter, secundum, supra, trans, ultra, versus (rare), 

680. Rule XLV. Prepositions with Ablative. — The following- 
eleven prepositions govern the ablative ; viz., A (ab or abs), absque, 
coram, cum, de, e or ex, palam, prae, pro, sine, tenus. 

681. Rule XL VI. Prepositions with Accusative or Ablative. — The 
five prepositions, clam, in, sub, subter, and super, take sometimes 
the accusative and sometimes the ablative. 

Rem. 1. — In and sub govern the accusative in ansvs^er to whither (i. e. after verbs 
of motion), and the ablative in answer to where (i. e. after verbs of rest). Subter 
generally takes the accusative. Super takes the accusative after verbs of mo- 
tion, and also when it signifies upon^ and the ablative when it signifies on or of 
(as of a subject spoken or written about). 

Rem. 2.— Prepositions in composition often govern the same cases as when they 
stand alone. 

682. Verbs may be modified by infinitives or by dependent pro- 
positions. 

683. Rule XLVII. Infinitive as Modifier ofVerb.— The m^mi\\& 
mood may be used after verbs denoting custom, abilitij, and the like; 
e. g., Non facere possum, I am not able to do, &c. 

684. Dependent propositions, as adverbial modifiers, are gene- 



685—692.] SYNTAX 271 

rally introduced by conjunctions, and express a great variety of rela- 
tions, as time^ flace^ manner^ condition^ &c. 

685. Dependent propositions take the verb, 

1) Sometimes in the indi(.>ative ; e. g., Iter faciebara, quuta 
has litteras dabara, / was making a journey wlien I gave 
these letters, 

2) But nore commonly in the subjunctive; e. g., Si quid 
habeat, dabit, if lie has any tiling, lie will give it. 

Section V. — Modifiers of Adverbs. 

686. Adverbs are modified by other adverbs; e.g., Satis bene 
scripsit, lie has written sufficiently well, 

687. Prepositions and conjunctions are connectives, and neither 
modify nor are modified. 

688. Interjections are expressions of emotion or mere marks of 
address, and have no grammatical influence upon the rest of the 
sentence. 



CHAPTER III. 

Use of Moods, Participles, Gerunds, and Supines. 

689. The indicative is used in positive assertions; e. g., Puer 

ludit, the hoy plays. 

Rem. — The indicative is commonly used in principal propositions, but sometimes 
in dependent on§s. 

690. The subjunctive is used both in principal and dependent 
propositions. 

691. I. In principal propositions the subjunctive is used, 

1) To express a wish or a command; e. g., Scrlbat, he may 

write, may he write, or let him write, 

2) To express an affirmation cZot//^//M% or co?2c^z7io7?aZZ2/; e.g., 
Daret, he would give it (i. e= if he had it, perhaps). 

692. II. In dependent propositions. 

1) With ut, ne, quo, quln, qudmmus, to express purpose or 



272 FIRST LATIN BOOK. [693—695. 

consequence ; e. g., Venit ut scrlbat, he has come to write ; 
Caio nihil obstat quominus sit beatus, nothing prevents 
Cains from being happy {by which he should be less happy), 

2) With qnum (cum), when it introduces a cause or reason, 
or in any way shows the dependence of one event upon 
another; e. g., Quae cum ita sint, since these things are so. 

3) With licef, although, quasi, tanqudm, ac si, as if, dum, 
modo, dummodo, provided, if only, (/wawrls, however much, 
however; e. g., Improbiis ita vlvit, quasi nesciat, &c., the 
wicked (man) lives^ as if he did not know, &c. ; Nemo, 
quamms sit locnples, no one, however wealthy he may be, 

4) In conditional sentences, to represent the condition either 
as simply possible or as impossible ; e. g.. Si quid habeat, 
dabit, if he has any thing, he will give it. Si quid haberet, 
daret, if he had any thing, he would give it. 

5) In indirect or dependent questions ; e. g., Nescio unde sol 
Ignem habeat, I know not whence the sun derives its fire. 

6) In relative clauses, (1) to express purpose or result, and 
(2) to define an indefinite antecedent; e. g., (1) Legates 
misernnt qui dlcerent, they sent ambassadors to say ; (2) 
Sunt qui putent, there are (some) who think. 

693. Subjunctive Tenses in Dependent Propositions. — The sub- 
junctive, (1) when dependent upon a present tense (pres., perf. 
def, or fut.) is put in the present to denote an incomplete action, 
and in the perfect to denote a completed action ; and (2) when de- 
pendent upon a past tense (imperf, perf. indef, or pluperf), in the 
imperfect to denote an incomplete action, and in the pluperfect to 
denote a completed action; e. g., 

L Nescio quid dicat, I know not what he is saying, 

2. Nescio quid dixerit, / know not what he said. 

3. Nesclvit quid diceret, / knew not what he said, 

4. Nesclvit quid dixisset, / knew not what he had said. 

694. The imperative is used to express a command ; e. g., Portaa 
claude, shut the gates. 

*695. The infinitive, which expresses the simple meaning of the 
verb without reference to person or number, is used, 

1) x\s the subject of another verb ; e. g., Difficile est jtidieare, 
it is difficult to judge. 



696.] SYNTAX. 273 

2) As the object of another verb ; e. g., Ciipio sapere, / de^ 
sire to he wise. 

3) As the modifier of an adjective or verb; e.g., (1) Dignus 
amari, worthy to beloved; (2) Non facere possum, / am 
not able to do, &c. 

696. Participles, gerunds, and supines are followed by the various 
cases of nouns like the other parts of verbs. In regard to their own 
government, it must be observed, 

1) That participles, like adjectives, agree with substantives. 

2) That gerunds are governed like the same cases of sub- 
stantives. 

3) That supines, as verbal nouns, are governed like the same 
cases of other nouns. 



10* 



DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM. 



ENGLISH IDIOM. 

1. To think nothing of. 

2. To value highly.* 

3. To think little of.f ) 
To hold cheap. ) 

4. iVb stability. 

So7ne time. 

Much good. 

How much pleasure. 



LATIN IDIOM. 

To leckon at nothing {nihili ducere 

or facer e). 
To value at a high price {magni 

aestimdre). 
To value at a little price {parvi 



Nothing of stability {nihil stabili- 

tdtis). 
Something of time (aliquid tempS- 

ris). 
Much of good (mtdtum honi\ 
Hovj much of pleasure {quantum 

voluptdtis). 

Rem. — Hence no, some (when they denote quantity^ not number)^ much., how much^ 
are to be translated by nihil^ cdlquid^ multuni, qumttum, followed by the §en. 



of a wise 
man. 



5. He did it unwillingly. 

6. It is disgraceful to he. 
^. It is the part 

dutg 

■ busifiess 

mark 

character 

8. To condemn a man to death. 

9. As many as possible. } 

^e can or coidd. ) 

The greatest possible. ) 
he can or could. ) 



10. On the top of the mountain. 
In the middle of the water. 



He unwilling did it. 
To lie is disgraceful. 

It is o/" a wise man. 

To condemn a man of the head. 
As the most {quam plurimi). 

As the greatest {quam maximus). 
[That is, as many as the most : as 



great as greatest, cfec] 
On the mountain highest. 
In the water middle (in summo 

monte ; in media aqua). 



^ To value very highly {maximi aestimare). 

f The substantive will follow in the accusative notwithstanding the of 
for that has nothing to do with the Latin verb. 



276 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



ENGLISH IDIOM. 

11. Is going to bed. 

12. It is hard to say, 

13. Whilst they were (are, <fec.) 
playing. 

14. The intention of writing a letter. 

15. "We must cultivate virtue. 

16. Caius must write. 

] 7. We must believe Caius. 

18. The ways of expressing the 
purpose are, 

He comes to see the games. 



19. a) I may go. 

I) I might have gone, 

20. a) I ought to go. 

h) I ought to have gone. 



LATIN IDIOM. 

Is going to lie down {cubitum, sup.) 
It is hard m saying (difficile est 

dictu ; supine). 
Dm'ing playing (inte?- ludendum). 

The intention of a letter to-he-writ- 
ten (scribendae epistolae). 

Virtue is to-he-cultivated {colenda 
est virtus). 

It is to-be-written by Caius iCaio 
scrihe7idum est). 

It is to-be-believed to Caius {creden- 
duin est Caio). 



({a) Yenit ut ludos spectet. 
{h) Venit ludos spectatum (sup,\ 
[c) Venit ludos spectaturus. 
(d) Venit ad ludos spectandos. 

To which add, 
(e) Venit causa {for the purpose) 
ludorum spectandorum ; and 
(/) Instead of ut, the relative 

■ may be used : 
He sent ambassadors, qui pacem 
peter ent {to sue for peace). 
Mihi ire hcet {it is permitted to me 

to go). ^ 
Mihi ire Hcuit {it ivas permitted to 

me to go). 
Me ire oportet. 
Me ire oportuit, 



CAUTIONS. 



a. Him, her, them (or he, she, they, -when they are to be translated by 
the accusative), must be translated into Latin by the proper case of 
sui, when they and the nominative of the verb stand for the same 
person. Also, in the same case, his^ hers, its, theirs, must be trans- 
lated by suits. 

5. In a sentence with that dependent on a past tense, the perfect is to be 
translated into Latin by the present infinitive, whenever the notion 
expressed by it is not to be described as over before the time of the 
principal verb. 

c. Would, should, after a past tense are future forms : 

j He says that he will come. 
( He said that he would come. 

d. Thing should be expressed by res (fem.), when the adjective alone 
would leave it doubtful whether men or things were meant : 

Thus, of many things, not tnultorum, but multdrum rerum. 

e . Cum is written after, and as one word with the ablatives me, te, (fee. : 
mecum, tecum, secum, nobiscum, vobiscum. 

f. Many English verbs become transitive by the addition of a preposi- 
tion ; for instance, to smile at, <fec. 

g. Such in English is often used where size is meant, rather than quality. 
It should then be translated into Latin by tantus, quantus ; not talis, 
qualis. 

h. That or those, when it stands for a substantive which has been ex- 
pressed in a preceding clause, is not to be translated. 
i. When that introduces a consequence, that not is ut non, not ne. 

( for a consequence ...ut non. 
j. After verbs oi fearing, the 'En^. future and the participial substantive 

are translated into Latin by the present or imperfect subjunctive, with 

ut or ne. 
h. Who, what, which, are often dependent interrogatives, especially after 

verbs of asking, knowing, doubting, <fec. 



278 FIEST LATIN BOOK. 

I. May^ might, sometimes mean can, could, and must be translated by 
possum. 

m. The per/, infin. must be translated into Latin by the present infin, 
after might, could, ought, unless the action is to be represented as 
over before the time to which might, could, <fec. refer. 

n. In Enghsh, substantives standing before and spoken of other substan- 
tives, are used adjectively, and must be translated into Latin by ad- 
jectives. 

o. What is sometimes used for how (quam) ; sometimes for how great 
(quant us). 

p. For and as are to be untranslated, when the noun that follows can be 
placed in apposition to another noun in the sentence. 

q. ^\ . en one, two, (fee. mean one, two, &c. apiece, or for each, they must 
be translated by the distributive numerals, singuli, bmi, &c. 

r. I have to do it, must be translated by the part, in dus. 
(Fng.) With whom we have to live. 
(Lat.) With whom it is to-he-lived (quibuscum vivendum est). 

s. It is, followed by what is in form the injin. pass., generally expresses 
necessity, fitness, or something hitended. 

t. But is to he sometimes means, not necessity, fit7iess, or intention, but 
possibility; as, 'the passage is to he found in the fifth book,' = the 
passage may or can be found in the fifth book. 

u. A present participle must be translated into Latin by a perfect parti- 
ciple (or its substitute, quum with perf or pluperf subj.) when the 
action expressed by it must be over, before that expressed by the 
verb begins. 

V. The Enghsh present part. act. is generally translated by the Latin joas^ 
partic, when the verb is deponent. 

w. When the action was not done in, but only near a town, at must be 
translated by ad or apud. 

X. One often means some one (ahquis) or a certain one (quidam). 

y. Will and would, will not and would not, are often principal verbs, to be 
translated by velle and nolle respectively. 
They are to be so translated when for 

will, would, we may substitute 

is (are, (fee.) willing, was (were, &c.) willing. 

z. When an English word is followed by a preposition, consider whether 
the Latin word to be used is followed by a preposition or by a case ; 
and then by what preposition or what case. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



A, ab, abs {prep, with abl.), frorn^ by. 

Abire, i, it, to go away, depart. 

Absolvere, v, ut, to acquit. 

Ac, and. 

Accedere, cess, cess, to approach. 

Accipere (16;, cep, cept, to receive, 

accept. 
Accipiter, tris, hawJc. 
Accusare, av, at, to accuse. 
Acer, acris, acre, sharp, severe. 
Achilles, is, Achilles, a Grecian hero. 
Acies, ei, line of battle. 
Ad {prep, with ace), to. 
Adducere {ad and ducere), dux, duct, 

to lead to. 
Adeo, so, in such a manner. 
Adesse {ad and esse), fu, fiit, to be 

present. 
Adjumentum, i, aid, help. 
Adjuvare, juv, jut, to aid, help. 
Admiratio, oms, admiration. 
Admonere, u, it, to admonish^ warn. 
Adulatio, onis, flattery. 
Adulator, oris, flatterer. 
Adventiis {advenire), us, approach. 
Aedif icare, av, at, to build. 
Aedificium, i, building, ediflce. 
Aeneas, ae, Aeneas, a Trojan prince. 
Aequitas, atis, equity, justice. 
Aestas, atis, smnmer. 
Aestimare, av, at, to value, prize ; 

magni aestimare, to prize highly. 
Afferre (ac? and /erre), attiil, allat, 

to bring to. 
Ager, Sigri,fleld. 
Agere, gg, act, to drive, lead, do ; 

gratias agere, to render thanks. 
Agniis, 1, lamb. 
AgricSla, ae, husbandman. 
AHquando, some time. 



Aliquis, qua, quid, any one, any 
some ; aliquid temporis, some time. 

Alius, a, iim (113. R.), other. 

Alpes, ium, the Alps. 

Altus, a, urn, high, lofty. 

Amare, av, at, to love. 

Ambitus, us, bribery. 

Ambulare, av, at, to walk. 

Americaniis, a, iim, American, 

Amicitia, ae, friendship. 

Amicus, I, friend. 

Amittere, mis, miss, to lose. 

Amphibiiim, i, an amphibious ani- 
mal. 

Amplius {adv.), more, further. 

Ampliis, a, iim, ample, large. 

An, inter rog. part., used i 
questions, 482. 

Anchises, ae, Anchises, the father 
of Aeneas. 

Anguis, is, 7n. or f, snake. 

Angustiae, ariim, a narrow pass, de- 
file. 

Animal, alis, animal. 

Animus, i, m.ind, soul. 

Annuere, nu, nut, to assent, to give 
assent. 

Anniis, i, year. 

Ante {prep, with ace), before. 

Antea {adv.), before. 

Antriim, i, cave. 

Aniilus, i, ring. 

Aperire, eru, ert, to uncover, to open. 

Appropinquare, av, at, to approach. 

Aqua, ae, water. 

Aquari, at, to bring water. 

Aquila, ae, eagle. 

Ara, ae, altar. 

Arare, av, at, to plough. 

Arbor, oris,/., tree. 

\ Argentum, i, silver. 



280 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 



Armiger, i, armor-hearer. 
Arripere (16), ipu, ept, to snatch, 

seize. 
Ars, artis, art. 
Arx, arcis, citadel, tower. 
Ascanius, i, Ascanius, son of Ae- 
neas. 
Asinus, i, ass. 
Aspergere {or adspergere), ers, ers, 

to sprinkle. 
At, but. 
Athenae, arum, Athens, city of 

Greece. 
Atheniensis {Athenae), e, Athenian, 

pi, the Athenians. 
Atqui {co7ij.), but, now (as used in 

reasoning). 
Attamen, bat, but yet. 
Attingere {ad and tangere), tig, tact, 

to attain, reach. 
Auctor, oris, author. 
Auctumniis, i, autumn. 
Audax, acis, daring, audacious. 
Audire, iv, it, to hear. 
Augere, aux, auct, to ivicrease. 
Aureus {aurum), a, um, golden. 
Aurum, i, gold. 

Aut, or ; aut — aut, either — or. 
Autem, but. 
Auxilium, i, aid. 
Avaricia, ae, avarice. 
A varus, a, um, avaricious. 
Avis, is, bird. 

B. 

Balbus, i, Balhus, a marCs name. 

Barba, ae, beard. 

Beate ibeatus), happily. 

Beatus, a, um, happy. 

Bellum, i, war. 

Bene, well, 

Beneficiiim, i, benefit. 

Bemgnus, a, iim, Icind. 

Bibere, bib, bibit, to drink. 

Biennium, i, two years, space of two 



Bonus, a, iim, good. 

Brachium, i, arm. 

Brevis, e, short. 

Brutus, i, Brutus, a Roman con- 



0. 

Cadere, cecid, cas, to fall. 

Caecus, a, um, blind. 

Caesar, aris, Caesar, a distinguished 

Roman general. 
Caius, 1, Caius, a man^s name. 
Calami tas, atis, misfortune, calamity 
Candidus, a, um, white. 
Canere, cecin, cant, to sing. 
Canis, is, c, dog. 
Cantare {canere\ av, at, to sing. 
Cape re (16), cep, capt, to take, re- 
ceive. 
Captivus, a, um, caj. . ive. 
Caput, itis, head; capitis, of the 

head, to death. 
Carpere, carps, carpt, to gather, to 

pluck, to card. 
Carthaginiensis {^Carthago), e, Car- 

thaginia.n. 
Carthag6, inis, Carthage, an ancient 

city in northern Africa. 
Castigare, av, at, to chastise. 
Castra, oriim, camp. 
Catena, ae, chain. 
Cavere, cav, caut, to take care, to be 

on one^s guard against. 
Celeber, bris, bre, celebrated. 
Celeriter, quickly. 
Certamen, inis, contest. 
Certus, a, iim, certaiyi. 
Christianiis, i, Christian. 
Cibus, 1, food. 
Cicero, onis, Cicero, the great Roman 

orator. 
Clngere, nx, net, to surround. 
Circumdare {circmn and dare), ded, 

dat, to surround. 
Cis, on this side. 
Civilis {civis), e, civil. 
Civis, is, citizen. 
Civitas {civis), atis, state. 
Claudere, claus, claus, to shut. 
Clemens, entis, mild, merciful. 
dementia, ae, mildness, clemency, 
Clipeus, 1, shield. 
Coelilm, i, heaven, the heavens. 
Coena, ae, supper, feast. 
Cogitare, av, at, to think, to think 

about. 
Cognitus, a, um, known. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



281 



Cognoscere, nov, nit, to ascertain. 
Coiere, colu, cult, to till, cultivate, 

practise. 
Colloquium, i, conference. 
Color oris, color. 
Columba, ae, dove. 
Committere, mis, miiss, to engage ; 

proelium committere, to engage 

battle. 
Comparare, a7, at, to procure, raise, 

levy. 
Compellere, piil, puis, to compel, 

drive. 
Compescere, escu, to restrain, re- 
press. 
Complere, ev, et, to fill. 
Comprehendere, nd, ns, to arrest. 
Concertare, av, at, to contend, quarrel. 
Concilium, i, council, meeting. 
Condere {con [cum] and dare), did, 

dit, to build, found. 
Conditio, onis, coudition, terms. - 
Confugere (io), fug, to flee for re- 

Conjux, ugis, spouse, wife, husband. 

Conservare, av, at, to preserve. 

Consilium, i, advice, instruction. 

Conspicere (io), spex, spect, to see, 
discover. 

Constat {impers.), it is knoivn, is an 
admitted fact. 

Constituere, u, tit, to arrange, ap- 
point. 

Construere, strux, struct, to build, 
construct. 

Consul, ulis, consul, the Roman chief 
7nagistrate. 

Consiilere, siilu, suit, to consult, ask 
advice. 

Contentus, a, iim, contented, content. 

Continere, u, tent, to restrain, confine. 

Continuus, a, iim, successive. 

Contra {prep, with ace), against. 

Convenire {con [ciim] and venire), 
ven, vent, to come together. 

Convertere, t, s, to turn, co7ivert. 

Copiae, arum, forces. 

Coqnere, x, ct, to cook, to bake, to 
ripen. 

Cor, cordis, n., heart. 

C6YSLm{prep.with abl.), before, in pre- 
sence of; adv., openly, in person. 



Corona, ae, croivn, garland. 
Corpias, oris, body. 
Gorilgere, rex, rect, to correct. 
Corrumpere, rup, rupt, to mislead, 

corrupt. 
Crabro, onis, wasp. 
Creber, bra, \)x\xvi\, frequent. 
Credere, credid, credit, to believe, 

put confidence in. 
Crescere, crev, cret, to increase, to 

wax (as moon). 
Culpa, SiQ, fault, blam.e. 
Cum {prep, with abl.), with. 
Cunctus, a, um, all as a whole. 
Cupere (io), iv (i), it, to desire. 
Cupiditas, atis, desire, passion. 
Cupidiis, a, um, desirous of 
Curare {cura), av, at, to take care 

of- 
Currere, cucurr, curs, to run. 

Currus us, chariot. 

Custodii'e {custos), iv, it, to guard. 

D. 

Damnare, av, at, to condemn. 

Dare, ded, dat, to give. 

De {prep, with abl.), from, about, 

concerning. 
Decem, ten. 
Decernere, crev, cret, to decree, de* 

cide. 
Decimus, a, um, tenth. 
Decipere (io\ cep, cept, to deceive. 
Dedere, dedid, dedit, to surren' 

der. 
Defeudere, d, s, to defend. 
Deglubere, ups, upt, to skin, flay. 
Delere, lev, let, to destroy. 
Demonstrare, av, at, to show, demon' 

sir ate. 
Deprehendere, d, s, to seize, catch. 
Deterrere, u, it, to deter, prevent. 
Devincere, vie, vict, to conquer. 
Dicere, dix, diet, to say. 
Dido, onis. Dido, the foundress of 

Carthage. 
Dies, ei, day. 
Diff icHis, e, difficidt. 
Dignus, a, um, worthy. 
Dilaniare, av, at, to tear in pieces. 
DiKgens, tis, diligent. 



282 



FIRST LATIN BOOK; 



Diligentia (diligens), ae, diligence. 
Dimittere, mis, miss, to disiniss. 
Discere, didic, to learn. 
Discipulus, i, pupil. 
Disjungere, x, ct, to separate. 
Dividere, vis, vis, to divide. 
Diviiius, a, um, divine. 
Divitiacus, i, Divitiacus, a man's 

name. 
Bocere, u, t, to teach. 
Dolere, u, it, to grieve. 
Dolor, oris, pain, grief, sorrow. 
Dominus, i, master as owner. 
Domus, us or i, /., house ; domi, at 

home. 
Donare, av, at, to give, present. 
Donum, i, gift. 
Dormire, iv, it, to sleep. 
Diibitare, av, at, to doubt. 
Ducenti, ae, a, two hundred. 
Ducere, dux, duct, to lead. 
Dum, while. 

Dummodo, if hut, provided. 
Duo, ae, 6, two. 
Duodecim, twelve. 
Durare, av, at, to last. 
Dux, diicis, leader, guide. 

E. 

Edere, ed, es (420), to eat. 

Educere {e and. ducere), dux, duct, to 
lead forth. 

Efficere (io), fee, feet, to effect, ac- 
complish. 

Ego, mei, tfcc., I. 

Elegantia, ae, elegance. 

Elephas, antis, m,, elephant. 

Emere, em, empt, to buy, purchase. 

Enim,/o?*, indeed. 

Enumei'are, av, at, to enumerate. 

Epistola, ae, letter, epistle. 

Epitome, es, abridgment. 

Eques, itis, horseman. 

Equitatus, us, cavalry.. 

Equus, i, horse, 

Erga ( prep, with ace), towards. 

Ergo (cojij.), therefore. 

Errare, av, at, to err. 

Erudire, iv, it, to instruct. 

Esse, fu, fut, to be; est, is, it is. 

Et, and; et^— et, both — and. 



Etiam, also, even ; etiam atque eti- 

am, again and again. 
Evertere, rt, rs, to pull down, to 

overthrow. 
Evoiare, av, at, to fly away, to flee 

from. 
Ex {prep, with abl.), from. 
Excitare, av, at, to excite, arouse. 
Exclamare, av, at, to exclai^n, cry 

out. 
Excruciare, av, at, to torture. 
Exercere, u, it, to practise, exercise. 
Exercitus, us, army. 
Exorare, av, at, to supplicate. 
Expellere, pul, puis, to expel, banish. 
Exponere, posu, posit, to set forth, 

explain. 
Expugnare {ex and pugnare), av, at, 

to storm. 
Exspectare, av, at, to expect. 

F. 

Fabulosus, a, um {fahula), fabidous. 

Facere (io), fee, fact, to do, make^ 
act. 

Facies, ^i,face, appearance. 

Facilis, e, easy. 

Fallax {fallere), acis, false, decep- 
tive. 

Fames, is, hunger. 

Faustulus, i, Faustulus, an Italian 
shepherd. 

Favere, fav, faut, to favor. 

Felicitas, atis, happioiess. 

Ferre, tul, lat (414), to bear. 

Ferrum, i, iron. 

Fidelis, e, faitJful. 

Fides, el, faith, fldelity ; fidemvio- 
lare, to break one^s word. 

Fieri, fact (416), to become, be made. 

Figura, ae, figure. 

Filia, ae (D. pi. flliabus), daughter. 

Filius, i, S071. 

Finire {finis), iv, it, to finish. 

Finis, is {m. and /. sing., m. pL), end. 

Firmiis, a, um, /zr7?i. 

Flagitium, i, crime. 

Flere, flev, flet, to weep. 

Florere {flos), u, to flourish, bloom. 

Florescere {florere), to begin to 
bloom. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



283 



Flos, oris, flower. 

Fluere, x, x, to flow. 

Flumen, inis, river, stream. 

Foedus, eris, treaty. 

Fortis, e, brave. 

Fortiter (fortis), bravely. 

Fortuna, ste, fortune. 

Frangere, freg, fract, to break. 

Frater, tris, brother. 

Fraudare, av, at, to defraud. 

Fretiis, a, urn, relying 07i. 

Fngils, oris, cold, 

Friicex, icis, m., shrub. 

Fuga, me, flight. 

Fugare {fuga), av, at, to put to 

flight. 
iYigere (io), fug, fiigit, to flee. 
Fundus, i, estate, farm. 
Fungi, funct, to discharge, fulfil. 
Furtum, I, theft. 
Futurus, a, um, future. 

G. 

Gallicus {Gallia), a, iim, Gallic, 

Galliis, 1, a Gaul. 

Gener, 1, so7i-in-law. 

Geniis, eris, kind, nature. 

Gerere, gess, gest, to carry on, to 

wage (as war). 
Germania, ae, Germany. 
Gladius, i, sword. 
Gloria, ae, glory. 
Graeci, orum, the Greeks. 
Granum, i, grain. 
Gratia, ae, gratitude, favor ; pi., 

thanks. 
Gravis, e, heavy. 
Grex, egis, m. flock, herd. 

H. 

Habere, u, it, to have. 
Habitare {habere), av, at, to inha- 
bit. 
Haedus, i, kid. 
Hannibal, alis, Hannibal. 
Hasta, ae, spear. 
Heros, ois, hero. 
Hesterniis, a, um, of yesterday. 
Hic, haec, hoc, this. 
Hiems, emis, winter. 
Historia, ae^ history. 



Homo, inis, 7nan. 

Honor, oris, honor. 

Hortiilus [hoi'tus), little garderi. 

Hortus, 1, garde?!. 

Hostis, is, enemy. 

Humanus, a, iim, human^ natural to 

man. 
Humerus, i, shoulder. 



Ibi, there. 

Idem, eadem, idem, same. 

Ideo, therefore. 

Igitm-, therefore. 

Ignariis, a, iim, ignorant. 

IgnavLis, a, iim, indolent, cowardly. 

Ignis, is, m., lire, heat. 

Ignoratio, onis, ignorance. 

Ignoscere, ov, ot, to pardon. 

lUe, ilia, illiid, thai, he, she, it. 

Illustrare, av, at, to illumine, to en- 
lighten. 

Immensiis, a, iim, immense. 

Immergere, rs, rs, to plunge into. 

Immobilis, e, immovable. 

Immortalis, e, immortal. 

Impedire, iv, it, to impede, hinder. 

Impendere, to overhang, threaten. 

Imperare, av, at, to coinmand ; im- 
perata, oriim, commands. 

Imperator {imperare), oris, com,' 
mander. 

Impetus, us, attack. 

Impiiis, a, iim, impious. 

Improbiis, a, iim, bad, wicked. 

Imprudens, entis, imprudent. 

In {prep, with ace. or abl.), with ace, 
into, to, against ; with abl.; in. 

Incendere, d, s, to set onflre, to burn, 

Inceptiim, i, begi7ining. 

Incertiis, a, iim, uncertain. 

Incognitiis, a, iim, unkftown. 

Incola {in and colere), ae, inhabi- 
tant. 

Incoliimis, e, safe, uninjured. 

Incredibilis {in and credere), e, ^w- 
credible. 

In dice re-, dix, diet, to declare (as 

war). 
Indigniis, a, um, unworthy. 
Indoctiis, a, iim, unlearned. 



284 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Indulgere, Is, It, to indulge. 

Industria, ae, industry. 

Inferre, intul, illat (414), to wage. 

lofi-a {prep, with ace), below. 

Infligere, flix, flict, to injlict. 

iDgenium, i, talent, ability. 

Injuria, ae, injury, ivro7ig done. 

Innocens, tis, innocent. 

Inuoxius, a, um, harmless. 

Instruere, strux, struct, to arrange, 
array. 

Intelligere, lex, lect, to understand. 

Inter {prep, with ace), between, dur- 
ing. 

Interdum, sometimes. 

Interesse, fu, fut, to be engaged in. 

Interficere (io), fee, feet, to kill. 

Interim, in the mean tiyne, mean- 
while. 

Intervallum, i, distance, space. 

Intra {prep, with ace), withiii. 

Intitilis, e, useless. 

Invadere {in and vddere), vas, vas, 
to invade. 

Invemre, ven, vent, to find. 

Invidere, vid, vis, to envy. 

Invitus, a, um, unwilling. 

Ipse, a, um, self, he himself. 

Ira, ae, anger. 

Ire, IV, it, to go. 

Irritare, av, at, to irritate. 

Is, ea, id, he, she, it, that. 

Iste, a, ud, that. 

Italia, ae, Italy. 

Itaque, therefore. 

Iter, itineris, journey, way. 

Iterum, again. 

J. 

J iibere, juss, juss, to direct, order. 
Jucundus, a, um, pleasant, delight- 
ful _ 
Judex, icis, judge. 
Judicare, av, at, to judge. 
Jilrare, av, at, to swear. 
Justus, a, um, just, fair. 



Labor, oris, labor. 
Laborare, av, at, to labor. 
Lana, ae, wool. 



Latiniis, i, Latinus, a king of La 

tium. 
Laudare, av, at, to praise. 
Laus, dis, praise. 

Lavare, lav, laut, or lavat, to wash. 
Lavinia, ae, Laviiiia, daughter of 

Latinus. 
Legatus, us^ ambassador. 
Legere, leg, lect, to read. 
Legio, onis, legion, body of foot. 
Lenis, e, mild, mercifid. 
Leo, onis, lion. 
Lex, legis, law. 
Liber, libri, book. 
Liber, a, um, free. 
Liberi, oriim, children. 
Licet (impers. v.), it is lawful. 
Licet, although. 
Liquescere, lieu, to melt. 
Literae, arum (pi.), letter, epistle. 
Locuple^^, etis, wealthy, rich. 
Locus, i (pi. loci or loco), place. 
Loqui, lucut, to speak. 
Lucere, lux, to shi^ie. 
Luctus, us, grief, sorrow. 
Luciis, i, grove. 
Ludere, liis, lus, to ; 
Liidus, i, play, sport. 
Lugere, lux, to grieve, mourn, weep 

for. 
Luna, ae, moon. 
Lupus, i, wolf 
Luscinia, ae, nightingale. 
Lux, lucis, light. 

M. 

Macular e, av, at, to stain, to blem- 
ish 

Magister, tri, master as teacher. 

Magnitude {magnus), inis, greatness^ 
size. 

Magnus, a, um, great, large ; magni, 
at a great price, highly ; magnum 
est, it is a great thing. 

Major, us {comp. o/" magnus), greater, 
larger. 

Male {malus^, badly. 

Malle, malu (410), to prefer. 

Maliim, i, evil, inisfortune. 

Malus, a, um, bad. 

Manere, ns,- ns, to remain. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



285 



Maniis, us, /., hand, force. 

Mare, is, aea. 

MaTiniis, a, iim, marine, of the sea. 

Mater, tris, mother. 

Matrona, ae, matron. 

Maximus, a, uin {superl. ofmagnus), 
greatest, very great ; maximi, at 
a very great price. 

Medicus, i, phyaician. 

Medius, a, um, middle, midst of, mid- 
dle of 261. 

Mel, mellis, honey. 

Mendacium, lie, falsehood. 

Mens, tis, mind, the reasoning fa- 
culty. 

Mensis, is, w., month. 

Metuere, u, to fear. 

Metus. us, fear. 

Meur. a, tim {masc. voc. sing., mi), my. 

Micare, u, to glitter, shine. 

Miles, itls, soldier. 

Militia, ae, military service; mili- 
tiae {gen. sing.), in war, on service. 

Mille, tJiousand. 

Minor, us {comp. of parvus), smaller. 

Mirabilis, e, wonderful. 

Miser, a, um, miserable, wretched. 

Misereri, ert or erit, to pity. 

Miseret (impers. verb), it pities, one 
pities. 

Mittere, mis, miss, to send. 

Mobilis, e, movable. 

Modo, only. 

Monere, u, it, to advise, admonish. 

Mens, tis, m., mouoitain. 

Monstrare, av, at, to shovj. 

Mordere, momord, mors, to bite. 

Mors, tis, death. 

MortaliiS (mors), e, mortal. 

Movere, mov, mot, to move. 

Mulier, eris, tvomaii. 

Multitudo (midtus), inis, multitude. 

Multiis, a, um, much, many ; multa 
(neut. pi.), many things ; multum 
iDoni, much good; multum tem- 
poris, much time. 

Murus, i, wall. 

Mutare, av, at, to change. 



K 



Nam, for. 
Namqu^, for. 



J^Tare, nav, to sivim. 

Karrare, av, at, to relate, narrate. 

Narratio (narrdre), narration, nar- 
rative. 

Nasci, nat, to be born. 

IN'atio, onis, nation. 

Ne, interrog. particle, 287 and 288. 

We (used with imperat. and subj), not. 

Nee, neither; nee — nee, neither — 
nor. 

Negligere, lex, lect, to disregard. 

Nemo (inis, not in good i. se), nobody, 
no one. 

Nequidem, not even, generally with 
the emphatic word beiween the 
two parts ; as, ne populus qmdemy 
not even the people. 

Nere, nev, net, to spin. 

Nescire, iv, it, not to know, to be ig- 
norant of 

Nidus, i, nest. 

Nihil, nothing. 

Nimius, a, um, too much, excessive. 

Nix, nivis, snow. 

Nocere, u, it, to hurt. 

Nolle, nolu (410), to be unwilling. 

Nomen, inis, name. 

Non, not; non solum — sed etiam, 
not only — but also. , 

Nondum, not yet. 

Nonne, interrog. particle; expects 
ans, yes. 288, Rem. 

Noster, tra, trum, our. 

November, bris (abl. i), November. 

Nox, noctis, night. 

Nubes, is, cloud. 

NuUiis, a, iim (113, R.), no, no one. 

Niim, interrog. particle; expects 
ans, no. 288, Rem. 

Niima, ae, Numa, second king of 
Rome. 

Numerare, av, at, to number. 

Numeriis, i, number. 

Nunquam, never. 

Nuntiare (nuntius), av, at, to an- 
nounce, report. 

Nuntius, i, messe7iger. 

O. 

O (interjection), 0. 
O 81, if would that. 



286 



FIRST LATIiN" BOOK. 



Obesse, fu, fut, to he prejudicial to. 

Oblivisci, oblit, to forget. 

Obses, idis, liostage. 

Obstare, scit, star, to oppose, prevent. 

Obtinere, inu, ent, to acquire, obtain. 

Occasio, onis, occasion. 

OccidtTe [^ob and caed'ere), cid, cIs, to 
kill. 

Occidere {oh and cdd'ere), cid, cas, to 
fall. 

Occultai'e (occulere), av, at, to con- 
ceal, hide. 

Octo, eight. 

OcLilus, I, ege. 

Odium, i, hatred. 

Off icium, i, dutg. 

Olim, once, formerly. 

Omnino, in all. 

Omnis, e, all, every. 

Oportet (impers.), it behooves, one 
ought. 

Optio, onis. choice. 

Opus, eris, work. 

Oratio, onis, oration. 

Orator, oris, orator. 

Ornare, av, at, to adorn. 

Otis, is, sheep. 

P. 

Pabiilari, at, to forage. 

Pallium, 1, cloak. 

Parare, av, at, to prepare. 

Pai'ere, u, it, to obey. 

Parcere, peperc, parcit, to spare. 

Pars, tis, part. 

Parvus, a, iim, small, little; par- 
viim, little, a little ; parvi, at a 
low price; parvi aestimare, to 
think little of. 

Pastor ( pascei'e), oris, shepherd. 

Pater, tris, father. 

Patria, ae, native country. 

Paucus, a, um, little, feiu. 

Pauper, eris, a poor man. 

Pausanias, ae, JPausanias, a distin- 
guished Spartan general. 

Pavo, onis, pjeacock. 

Pax, pacis, peace. 

Peccai'e, av, at, to sin, do wrong. 

Pecunia, ae, money, 

Pender^, pepend, to hang. 



Per {prep, icith ace), through. 
Perdere, did, dit, to waste. 
Perf idia, ae, pjerfidy. 
Perlugiuni, i, refuge. 
Peilcuiosus(jjeHcwLW//i), a, iim, dan 

gerous. 
Peiltus, a, iim, skilful, skilled in. 
Pernicies, ei, destruction. 
Perpetuo, for ever. 
Per^picere (i6), ex, ect, to perceive., 

see. 
Persuadere, s, s, to pers lade. 
Pertimescere, timu, to fear greatly. 
Pervenli'e, ven, vent, to arrive at, 

reach. 
Pes, pedis, foot. 
Petere, iv or i, it, to seek. 
Philosophus, i, philosopjher. 
Pietas, atis, piety, faithfulness. 
Piget {impers.), it irks, one is grieved 

at ; me piget, I am grieved. 
Piscis, is, rn., fish. 
Pius, a, iim, pnous. 
Placare, av, at, to appease. 
Placere, u, it, to please. 
Plane, plainly. 
Piuiimus, a, iim {superl. of multus), 

very much or great ; pL, very 

many. 
Poema, atis, poem. 
Poeuitet {impers.), it repents, one re- 
pents. 
Poeta, ae, poet. 
Ponere, posu, posit, to place. 
Pons, tis, m., bridge. 
Populai'is (populus), e, pjopular. 
Populus, i, people. 
Porta, ae, gate. 
Poscere, poposc, to demand. 
Posse, pocu (iiTeg., 407), to he able. 
Possidere, ed, ess, to possess. 
Post {prep, with ace), after. 
Postera, iim {mas. not used), next, 

following. 
Postiilare, av, at, to demand. 
Potiri, it, to get possession of 
Prae {prep, with abl.), before, in 

comparison with.' 
Praebere, u, it, to furnish, offer. 
Praeceptum, i, precept, instructioii. 
Praeda, ae, booty. 
Praeditus, a, um, endued with. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



28V 



Praemittere, mis, miss, to send before. 

Praeparare; av, at, to pre^^are. 

Praeseiis, tis, present. 

Praestans, tis, excellent 

Praestat [iiJipers.), it is better. 

Praeteritus, a, um, past ; neut. pi., 
the past. 

Pratiim, i, meadow. 

Pretiosus, a, iiin, valuable. 

Primus, a, um, first. 

Princeps {primus and caper e), ipis, 
chief leader. 

Privare, av, at, to deprive. 

Privatus, a, iim, private, personal. 

Pro {prep, with abL\ for, before. 

Probus, a, ilm, holiest. 

Prodesse, profu, profut, to profit. 

Proditio, onis, treachery. 

Proditor, oris, traitor. 

Producere, dux, duct, to lead for- 
ward, or out. 

Proelium, i, battle. 

Prof icisci, feet, to set out, to march. 

Promittere, mis, miss, to promise. 

Promovere, mov, mot, to move for- 
ward, advance. 

Propensiis, a, um, inclir^d to. 

Propior, us {coynp.), nearer. 

Providiis, a, iim, cautious, prudent. 

Provincia {pro and vincere), ?iQ, pro- 
vince. 

Proximus, a, iim, nearest^ next. 

Prudens, tis, prudent, cautious. 

Prudentia {prudens), ae, prudence. 

Piidor, oris, shame, modesty. 

Puella, ae, girl. 

Puer, i, boy. 

Pugnare {p^igna), av, at, to fight. 

Pulcher, chra, chriim, beautiful. 

Punire, iv, it, to punish. 

Piitare, av, at, to thinJc, regard. 

Q. 

Quaestio, onis, question. 

Quam {adv.), how ; quam multi, how 
many ; with superl. intensive, as 
quam maximus, as great as pos- 
sible. 

Quam {conj.), than. 

Quam vis, however, however much. 

Quantiis, a, iim, how great. 



Quare, wherefore. 

Quart us, a, iim, fourth. 

Quasi, as if 

Quatuor, four. 

Que (always appended to another 

word), and. 
Qui, quae, quod, toho, which, that 
Qui, quae, quod {interrog.), loho, 

which, luhat ? 
Quia, because. 

Quiescere, e> et, to rest, be quiet. 
Quia (473), that not, bat that 
Quinque, five. 
Quintus, a, iim, fifth. 
Quis, quae, quid {interrog. subs.\ 

who, which, what ^ 
Quo, that, in order that 
Quominus (472), that not, from. 
Quoque, also. 
Quiim, when; qiiiim — tiim, both — 

and. 

R. 

Ratio, onis, reason. 

Pecipere (i6), cep, cept, fo receive. 

Pecordari, at, to remember, call to 

mind. 
Redire, i, it, to return. 
Reducere, dux, duct, to lead bach. 
Referre, tiil, lat, to relate. 
Regere, rex, rect, to rule, govern. 
Regina, ae, queen. 
Regnare, av, at, to reign. . 
Regniim, i, kingdom, government. 
Reliquiis, a, iim, remaining, the rest. 
Reperire, reper, repert, to find. 
Res, rei, thing, affair. 
Resistere, stit, to resist. 
Respondere, d, s, to answer. 
Responsiim, i, answer, response. 
Respuere, pu, to reject. 
Reus, i, criminal. 
Revertere, vert, vers, to return, t <rn 

back. 
Rex, regis, king. 
Rheniis, i, Rhine. 
Ridere, ris, lis, to laugh, laugh at. 
Robustiis, a, iim, robust, siro7ig. 
Rogare, av, at, to ask, entreat. 
Roma, ae, Rome. 
Romaniis {Roma), a, iim, Roman. 



288 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Romiiliis, T, Romulus. 
RotuDdus, a, um, round. 
Ruere, ru, riit (ruit), to rush. 
Rumor, oris, rumor. 
Rumpere, rup, rupt, to break, vio- 
late. 
Rus, ruris, n., country. 



S. 



Sacerdos, otis, ^priest, pi'iestess. 

Saepe, often. 

Saevire {saevus\ iv (i), it, to rage. 

Sagitta, ae, arrow. 

Saltare, av, at, to dance. 

Salus, utis, safety. 

Sanare, av, at, to cure, reform. 

Sancire, x, ct, to enact, confirm. 

Sanguis, inis, m., blood. 

Sapere, iv or i, to be wise. 

Sapiens, entis, wise. 

Sapientia, ae, wisdom. 

Satiare, av, at, to satisfy. 

Satis, enough. 

Sceptrum, i, sceptre. 

Scientia, ae, knowledge. 

Scipio, onis, JScipio, a distinguished 
Roman. 

Scire, iv, it, to know. 

Scribere, ps, pt, to write. 

Secundus, a, um, second. 

Sed, but. 

Semen, inis, seed. 

Semper, always. 

Sempiternus, a, iim, lasting, eter- 
nal. 

Senator, oris, senator. 

Senatus (senex), us, senate. 

Senectus, utis, old age. 

Senex, senis, an old man. 

Sensus, us,fveling, perception. 

Sententia, ae, sentiment. 

Sentire, s, s, to perceive, to feel (as 
pain). 

Sepelire, peliv or i, pult, to hury. 

Sermo, onis, discourse, 

Servare, av, at, to keep, observe, 
save. 

Servire, iv, it, to serve, be slave to. 

Servius, i, Servius, a marHs name. 

Servus, i, slave. 

Seu — seu, whether — or, either — or. 



Sex, six. 

Si, if. . 

Sic, 50. 

Sicut, so as, just as. 

Simplex, icis, simple. 

Simulatio, onis, assumed appearancCy 

pjretence. 
Sine {prep), with abl.), without. 
Siniis, us, bosom. 
Siren, enis, siren. 
Sitire, iv, it, to thirst. 
Sive — sive, ichether — or. 
Socrates, is, Socrates, the celebrated 
. Grecian philosopher. 
Sol, solis, m., sun. 
Somnus, i, sleep. 
Soniis, i, sound. 
Soror, oris, sister. 
Sparger e, rs, rs, to scatter, sow. 
Speciosus {species), a, um, specious^ 

plausible. 
Spectare {specere), av, at, to look at, 

behold. 
Sperare, av, at, to hope for. 
Spes, ei, hope. 
Splendens, tis, shining. 
Spoliare, av, at, to rob of, dk 

spoil. 
Stabilitas, rIis, fir?nness, stability. 
Statim {stare), immediately. 
Stella, ae, star. 

Studere, u, to study, strive for. 
Studiosiis, a, um, studious. 
Stultitia, ae, folly. 
Suadere, s, s, to advise. 
Subvenire, ven, vent, to aid. 
Succurrere, curr, curs, to aid, sicc- 

cor. 
Suere, su, sut, to sew, stitch. 
Sui, sibi (257), of himself, herself 

(tc. 
Sulla, ae, Sulla, a maiiJs name. 
Summus, a, um, highest, greatest ; 

sometimes the topof{2&1); sum- 

miis mons, the top of the moun- 
tain. 
Sumpttis, us, expense. 
Superare, av, at, to surpass, conquer, 

to go over. 
Superficies, ei, surface. 
Supervacuus, a, iim, unnecessary. 
Supplicatio, onis, thanksgiving. 



LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 



289 



Supra {adv. and prep, with ace), 
above. 

Sustmere, u, tent, to sustain^ en- 
dure. 

Suiis, a, um, his, her, (fee. 

T. 

Tacere, u, it, to he silent, to pass over 

in silence. 
Tarn, so ; tarn — quam, 8o — as. 
Tamen, yet 

Tangere, tetig, tact, to touch. 
Tanquam, as if. 
Tantus, a, um, so great. 
Tarentum, i, Tarentum, a town in 

Italy. 
Tardus, a, iim, slow. 
Tarquinius, T, Tarquin, one of the 

kings of Rome. 
Tectum (tegere), i, roof, house. 
Tegere, tex, tect, to cover. 
Tempus, oris, time. 
Tenere, u, t, to hold. 
Tentare, av, at, to try, attempt. 
Terra, ae, the earth. 
Terrere, u, it, to terrify. 
Tertius, a, iim, third. 
Tibur, uris, Tibur, a town in Italy. 
Timere, u, to fear. 
Timidus, a, iim, timid. 
Tondere, totond, tons, to shear, 

shave. 
Totiis, a, iim (113, R.), the whole, the 

entire. 
TranquiMs, a, iim, calm, tranquil. 
Transire, i, it, to go over. 
Tres, tria, three. 

Trojanus (Troja), a, iim, Trojan. 
Tu, tui, thou. 
Tullia, ae, Tullia, a queen of 

Rome. 
Turpiis, e, base, disgraceful. 
Turris, is (ace, em or i7ti ; abl., e or ^), 

toioer. 
Tuiis, a, iim, your. 

U. 

XJlliis, a, iim (113, R.), any. 

Unde, whence. 

Unquam, ever. I 

13 



Uniis, a, iim (113, R.), one, 
single one. 

Urbs, 13, city. 

Ursiis, 1, hear. 

Usque, a.s far as ; usque ad, even 
to. 

Ut {conj), that, as. 

Uti, us, to use. 

U tills, e, useful. 

Utilitas [utilis), atis, utility, advan- 
tage. 

Utinam (conj.), ivould that. 

Utrtim [interrog. part.), whether; 
utriim — an, whether — or. 

Uva, ae, grape. 



Vacare, av, at, to have leisure for. 

Vel {conj.), or ; vel — vel, either — 
or. 

Yelle, Yolu (410), to wish, he wil- 
ling. 

Velox, ocis, sivift. 

Venarl, at, to hunt. 

Vendere, did, dit, to sell. 

Venit'e, ven, vent, to come. 

Ver, veris, n., spring. 

Verbiim, T, ivord. 

Vereri, it, to fear. 

Vero, indeed, tridy. 

Veriis, a, um, true, real ; veriim, 
truth. 

Veruntamen, but yet. 

Vester, tra, triim, your. 

Vestis, is, garment. 

Vetustiis, a, um, ancient. 

Via, ae, way, road. 

Victima, ae, victim. 

Victoria, ae, Victoria. 

Videre, vid, vis, to see ; pass., vi- 
derl, to seem. 

Vigilare {vigil), av, at, to watch. 

Vigintl, twenty. 

Vincere, vie, vict, to conquer. 

Vincire, vinx, vinct, to bind. 

Vinciiliim, i, chain. 

Vindicare, av, at, to avenge. 

Violare, av, at, to violate, lorong, 
break. 

Vir, viri, man, hero. 

Virgo, inis, virgin, maiden. 



290 



FIEST LATIN BOOK. 



Vii*tus, utis, virtue, manliness. 
Yis, Yis (ace, vim), pi., yii'es, vli'iuiii, 

<tc., force, strength. 
Yita, ae, life. 

Vitare, av, at, to shun, avoid. 
Vituperare, av, at, to hlame, criticise. 
Vivere, vix, vict, to live. 



Vocare, av, at, to call. 
Volare, av, at, to fly. 
Yoluptas, atis, jpleasure. 
Vox, vocis, voice. 
Yulnerare, ilv, at, to 2vou?id, 
Yulnus, eris, inound. 
Vulpes, is, fox. 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 



A. 

Ability, ingenium, i. 

About, de {with abl). 

Above, supra {adv. and prep, with 

ace). 
Abridgment, epitome, es. 
Accept, accipere (io), cep, cept 

(550). 
Accomplish, efficere (io), fee, feet. 
Accuse, accusare, av, at. 
Achilles, Achilles, is. 
Acquire, obtinere, tinu, tent. 
Acqtcit, absolvere, v, ut. 
Act, v., facere (io), fee, faet. 
Admiratioji, admiratio, onis. 
Admonish, mpnere, u, it, admonere, 

(fee. 
Adorn, ornare, av, at. 
Advance, promovere, mov, mot. 
Advantage, titilitas, atis. 
Advice, eonsiliiim, i. 
Advise, suadere, s, s ; monere, u, it. 
Aeneas, Aenaas, ae. 
Affair, res, rei. 
After, post {with ace). 
Again, itertim. 

Again and again, etiam atque etiam. 
Agai7ist, in (ace.) ; eontra {ace). 
Aid, s., adjumentum, i ; ausalium, i. 
Aid, v., subvenire, yen, vent, adjii- 

vare, juv, jut. 
All {as a whole), eunctus, a, um. 
All {every), omnis, e. 
Alps, Alpes, iiim. 
Also, etiam, quoque. 
Altar, ara, ae. 
Although, licet. 
Always, semf)er. 
Ambassador, legatus, i. 
American, Americaniis, a, um. 



Amphibious animal, amphibium, L 

Ample, ampliis, a, um. 

Anchises, Aneluses, ae. 

Ancient, vetustiis, a, um. 

And, et, que {enclitic), ac. 

Anger, ira, ae. 

Animal, animal, alis. 

Annoimce, nuntiare, av, at (540). 

Answer, s., responsum, i. 

Answer, v., respondere, d, s. 

Any, ullus, a, um (118, R.). 

Any one, aliquis, a, quid. 

Appearance, facies, ei. 

Appease, placare, av, at. 

Appoint, constituere, u, ut. 
Approach, s., adventus, us (521). 
Approach, v., appropinquai'e, av, at; 

accedere, cess, cess. 
Arm, braehium, L 
Armor-bearer, armiger, i. 
Army, exercitus, us. 
Arouse, excitare, av, at. 
Arrange, constituere, u, ut. 
Arrange, array, instruere, ux, uct. 
Arrest, comprehendere, d, s. 
Arrival, adventus, us (521). 
Arrive at, pervenire, ven, vent. 
Arroiu, sagitta, ae. 
Art, ars, artis. 
As, ut. 

As far as, usque. 
As if, quasi, tanquam. 
As possible, quam with superl. (309). 
Ascanius, Ascaniiis, L 
Ascertain, cognoscere, nov, nit. 
Aslc, rogare, av, at. 
Ask advice, consiilere, lu, It. 
Ass, asinus, i. 

Assemble, convenire, ven, vent (550). 
Assent, give assent, annuere, u, ut. 
Assumed appearance, simulatio, onis. 



i92 



FIKST LATIN BOOK. 



At a high price, magni ; at a very 

high price, maximL 
At a low price, parvL 
At home, doml 
Athenian, Atheniensis, e. 
Athens, Athenae, arum. 
Attack, impetus, us. 
Attain, attingere, tig, tact. 
Attempt, teutare, av, at. 
Audacious, audax, acis. 
Author, auctor, oris. 
Autumti, auctumnus, L 
Avarice, avaritia, ae. 
Avaricious, avarus, a, um. 
Avenge, vindicare, av, at. 
Avoid, vitai'e, av, at. 

B. 

Bad, improbus, a, um ; malus, a, um. 

Badly, inale. 

Bake, coquere, cox, coct. 

Balbus, Balbus, i. 

Banish, expellere, pul, puis. 

BasCy tm'pis, e. 

BMtle, proelium, L 

Be, esse, fu, fut. 

Be able, pLsse, potu. 

Be born, nasci, nat. 

Be engaged in, interesse, fu, fut. 

Be ignorant of, nescii'e, iv (i), it. 

Be made, fien, fact. 

Be on one's guard against, cavere, 

cav, caut. 
Be prejudicial to, obesse, fu, fut. 
Be present, ad esse, fu, fut. 
Be quiet, quiescere, quiev, quiet. 
Be silent, tacere, u, it. 
Be slave to, servire, iv, it. 
Be unwilli7ig, nolle, nolu. 
Be willing, velle, volu. 
Be wise, sapere, iv or i. 
Bear, s., ursus, i. 
Bear, v., ferre, tul, lat. 
Beard, barba, ae. 
Beautiful, pulcher, chra, chriim. 
Because, quia. 
Become, fieri, fact. 
Before (adv.), antea. 
Before (prep.), ante, coram, prae, pro. 
Beg for, sue for, petere, iv (i), it. 
Begin to bloom ^ florescere (544). 



Beginning, inceptum, L 

Behold, spectare, av, at. 

Believe, credere, credid, credit. 

Below, infra (with ace). 

Benefit, benef iciiim, i. 

Between, inter (with ace). 

Bind, viucire, vinx, vinct. 

Bird, avis, is,/. 

Bite, mordere, momord, moral 

Blame, s., culpa, ae. 

Blame, v., vituperare, av, at. 

Blind, caecus, a, um. 

Blood, sanguis, inis, m. 

Bloom, florere, u. 

Body, corpus, oris. 

Book, liber, libn. 

Booty, praeda. 

Bosom, sinus, us. 

Both — and, et — et; quiLn — ttim. 

Boy, puer, i. 

Brave, fortis, e. 

Bravely, fortiter. 

Break, frangere, freg, fract ; i-um- 

pere, rup, rupt ; violare, av, at : 

break one's word, f idem violare. 
Bribery, ambitus, us. 
Bridge, pons, tis, m. 
Bring, bring to, afferre, attiil, aUat 
Bring water, aquari, at. 
Brother, frater, tris. 
Brutus, Brutus, i. 
Build, aedificare, av, at; construere, 

X, ct ; condere, did, dit. 
Building, aedif icium, i. 
Burn, incendere, d, s. 
Bury, sepelire, iv (i),- pult 
But, sed, at, autem. 
But, now {in reasoning), atqui. 
But, but yet, attamen, veruntamen. 
But that, quin. 
Buy, emere, em, empt. 
By (with voluntary agent), 8-, ^h, fl"bm> 

in other cases i7idicated by aH, 

C. 

Caesar, Caesar, aiis. 
Caius, Caius, i. 
Calamity, calaraitas, atis. 
Call, vocare, av, at. # 
Call to mind, recordari, at. 
Calm, tranquillus, a, um. 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 



293 



Camp^ castra, orum. 

Captive, captiviis, i. 
Card, carpere, ps, pt. 
Carry, ferre, tul, lat. 
Carry on {as war), gerere, gess, gest. 
Carthage, Carthago, inis. 
Carthaghiian, Cartliagmiensis, e. 
Catch, deprehendere, d, s. 
Cautious, prudeDS, tis; providus, 

a, um. 
Cavalry, equitatus, us. 
Cave, antrum, i. 
Celebrated, celeber, bris, bre. 
Censure, vituperare, av, at. 
Certain, certiis, a, iim. 
Chain, vinculum, i; catena, ae. 
Change, mutare, av, at. 
Chariot, curms, us. 
Chastise, castigare, av, at. 
Chief, princeps, cipis. 
Children, liberi, orum. 
Choice, optio, onis. 
Christian, Christianus, i. 
Cicero, Cicero, onis. 
Citadel, arx, arcls. 
Citizen, civis, is. 
City, urbs, urbis. • 
Civil, civilis, e (528). 
Clemency, dementia, ae. 
Cloak, pallium, i. 
Cloud, nCibes, is. 
Cold, frigus, oris. 
Collect, comparare, av, at. 
Color, color, oris. 
Come, venire, ven, vent. 
Come together, conyenire, ven, vent. 
Command, v., imperare, av, at. 
Commands, s., imperata, orum. 
Commander, imperator, oris (521). 
Compel, compellere, pul, puis. 
Conceal, occultare, av, at. 
Concerning, de [v^ith ahl.). 
Condemn, damnarS, av, at. 
Condition, conditio, onis. 
Conference, colloquiiim, i. 
Confine, continere, tinu, tent. 
Confirm, sancire, sanx, sanct. 
Conquer, siiperare, av, at ; vincere, 

vie, vict ; devincere, vie, vict. 
Construct, construere, x, ct. 
Co7isul, consul, ulis. 
Consult, consulere, lu, It. 



Contend, concertare, av, at. 
Contented, contentus, a, um. 
Contest, certamen, inis. 
Convert, convertere, t, s. 
Cook, coquere, cox, coct. 
Correct, corrigere, rex, rect. 
Corrupt, corrumpere, rup, rupt. 
Council, concilium, i. 
Country, rus, ruris. 
Cover, tegere, tex, tect. 
Cowardly, ignavus, a, iim. 
Crime, flagitiijm, i. 
Criminal, reus, i. 
Criticise, vitiiperare, av, at. 
Crown, s,, corona, ae. 
Crown, crown with a garland, corona 

cingere, nx, net. 
Cry out, exclamare, av, at. 
Cultivate, colere, colu, cult. 
Cure, sanare av, at. 

D. 

Dance, saltare, av, at. 

Dangerous, periculosus, a, um. 

Daring, audax, acis. 

Daughter, f ilia, ae. 

Day, dies, ei. 

Death, mors, tis. 

Deceive, decipere (io), cep, cept. 

Deceptive, failax, acis. 

Decide, deccrnere, crev, cret. 

Declare, indicere, dix, diet; declare 

war, belliim indicere. 
Decree, decern ere, crev, cret. 
Defend, defendere, d, s. 
Defile, angustiae, ariim. 
Defraud, fraudare, av, at. 
Delightfid, jucundils, a, um. 
Demand, poscere, poposc; posttilar^ 

av, at. 
Demonstrate, demonstrare, av, at. 
Depart, abire, i, it. 
Deprive, privare, av, at. 
Derive, have, habere, u, it. 
Desire, s., cupiditas, atis. 
Desire, v., cupere (16^, iv or i, it. 
Desirous of, ciipidus, a, iim. 
Despoil, spoliare, av, at. 
Destroy, delere, ev, et. 
\ Destruction, pernicies, eL 
I Deter y deterrere, u, it. 



294 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Dido, Dido, onia. 

Difficult, difficilis, e. 

Diligence, diligentia, ae. 

Diligent, diligens, tis. 

Direct, order, jiibere, juss, juss. 

Discharge, fungi, funct. 

Discourse, sermo, onis. 

Discover, conspicere (io), spex, spect. 

Disgracefid, tui'pis, e. 

Disyniss, dimittere, mis, miss. 

Disregard, negligere, lex, lect. 

Distance, intervaUum, i. 

Divide, dividere, vis, vis. 

Divine, divinus, a, um. 

Divitiacus, Divitiacus, L 

Do, facere (io), fee, fact. 

Do good to, prodesse, profu, profiit. 

Do wrong, peccare, av, at. 

Dog, cams, is. 

Doubt, diibitare, av, at. 

Dove, columba, ae. 

Drinli, bibere, bib, bibit. 

Drive, agere, eg, act; compeUere, 

pul, puis. 
During, inter {ijoitJi ace). 
Duty, officiiim, i. 
Dwell, habitare, av, at. 

E. 

Eagle, aquila, ae. 

Earth, terra, ae. 

Easy, facilis, e. 

Eat, edere, ed, es. 

Edifice, aedificiumj i. 

Effect, efficere (io), fee, feet. 

Eight, octo. 

Either — or, aut — aut. 

Elegance, elegantia, ae. 

Elephant, elephas, antis, 

Enact, sancire, x, ct. 

End, finis, is, m, and/. 

Endued with, praeditus, a, iim. 

Endure, sustinere, tinu, tent ; ferre, 
tul, lat. 

Enemy, hostis, is, c. 

Engage {as battle), committere,. mis, 
miss ; engage battle, proelium com- 
mittere. 

Enjoy, frui, fruct (fruit). 

Enlighten, iUustrare, av, at. 

Enough, satis. 



Entire, totus, a, iim (113, R,.). 

Entreat, rogare, av, at. 

Enumerate, enumerare, av, at.' 

Envy, invidere, vid, vis. 

Epistle, epistola, ae ; literae, ariim. 

Equity, aequitas, atis. 

Err, errare, av, at. 

Estate, fundus, i. 

Eternal, sempiternus, a, iim. 

Even, etiam. 

Even to, usque ad. 

Ever, unquam. 

Every, omnis, e. 

Evil, malum, i. 

Excellent, praestans, tis. 

Excessive, nimiiis, a, iim. 

Excite, excitare, av, at. 

Exclaim, exclamare, av, at. 

Exercise, exercere, u, it. 

Expect, exspectare, av, at. 

Expel, expellere, piil, puis. 

Expense, sumptiis, us. 

Explain, exponere, posu, posit. 

Eye, oculiis, i. 



Fabulous, fabulosiis, a, iim. 

Face, facies, ei. 

Faith, fides, ei. 

Faithful, fidelis, e. 

Faithfulness, pietas, atis. 

Fall, cadere, cecid, cas; occidere, 

cid, cas. 
False, fallax, acis (535). 
Falsehood, mendacium, i. 
Farm, fundiis, i. 
Father, pater, patris. 
Fault, culpa, ae. 
Faustulus, Faustiiliis, i. 
Favor, s., gratia, ae. 
Favor, v., favere, fav, faut. 
Fear, s., metus, us. 
Fear, v., timere, u ; metuere, u, ut ; 

vereri, it. 
Fear greatly, pertimescere, mu. 
Feast, coena, ae. 
Feel [as p)ain, etc.), sentii'e, s, s. 
Feeling, sensiis, us. 
Few, pauci, ae, a. 
Fidelity, fides, ei. 
Field, ager, agn. 



ENGLISH-LATIK VOCABULAEY. 



295 



Fifth^ quintus, a, iim. 

Fight, pugnare, av, at. 

Figure, figura, ae. 

Fill, complere, ev, et. 

Find, iuvenii'e, ven, yent ; repeiire, 

reper, repert. 
Fine, beautiful, pulcher, clu'a, clii'um. 
Finish, finire, iv, it (540). 
Fire, ignis, ig,- m. 
Firm, firmus, a, um. 
Firmness, stabilitas, atis. 
First, primus, a, um. 
Fish, piscis, is, m. 
Five, quinque. 
Flatterer, adulator, oris. 
Flattery, adiilatio, onis. 
Flay, deglubere, ps, pt. 
Flee, fugere (io), fug, fugit. 
Flee for refuge, confugere (io), 

fug. 
Fee from, evolare, av, at. 
Flight, fuga, ae. 
Flock, grex, gregis, m. 
Flourish, florere, u. 
Fow, fluere, x, x. 
Flower, flos, oiis. 
Fly, volare, av, at. 
Fly away, evolare, av, at. 
Following, postera, um {masc. nom. 

not used). 
Folly, stultitia, ae. 
Food, cibiis, i. 
Foot, pes, pedis. 
For (conj.), enim, nam, namque. 
For (prep.), pro [luith ahl.). 
For ever, perpetuo. 
Forage, pabiilari, at. 
Force, mantis, us ; vis, vis {pi. 

vires). 
Forces, copiae, arum. 
Forget, oblivisci, oblit. 
Formerly, olim. 
Fortune, fortuna, ae. 
Found, condere, did, dit (550). 
Four, quatuor. 
Fourth, quartus, a, um. 
Fox, vulpes, is. 
Free, liber, a, um. 
Frequent, creber, bra, brum. 
Friend, amicus, i. 
Friendship, amicitia, ae. 
Frighten, terrere, u, it. 



From, a, ab, abs, de, ex, and some- 
thnes before participial nouns, 
quominus. 

FiUfil, fungi, funct. 

Furnish, praebere, u, it. 

Further, ampliiis. 

Future, futui'iis, a, um. 

a. 

Gallic, Gallicus, a, um. 

Game, Indus, i. 

Garden, hortus, L 

Garland, corona, ae. 

Garment, vestis, is. 

Gate, porta, ae. 

Gather, carpere, ps, pt. 

Gaul, a Gatd, G alius, i. 

Germany, Germania, ae. 

Get possession of, potiii, it. 

Gift, doniim, i. 

Girl, puella, ae. 

Give, dare, ded, dat; donare, av, 

at. 
Glitter, micare, u. 
Glory, gloria, ae. 
Go, lie, iv or I, it. 
Go aioay, abii'e, i, it. 
Go over, transire, i, it ; superare, av, 

at. 
Gold, aurum, 1 
Golden, aureus, a, um. 
Good, bonus, a, um. 
Govern, regere, rex, rect. 
Government, regnum, L 
Grain, granum, i. 
Grape, uva, ae. 
Gratitude, gratia, ae. 
Great, magnus, a, um ; at a great 

price, magni ; it is a great thirigy 

magnum est. 
Greater, ^ major, us. 
Greatest, highest, summiis, a, iim. 
Greatest, very great, maximiis, a, um ; 

at a very great price, maidmi. 
Greatness, magnitudo, inis. 
Greeks, Graeci, oriim. 
Grief dolor, oris; luctiis, us. 
Grieve, dolere, u, it ; lugere, lux. 
Grove, luciis, i. 

Guard, custodu'e, iv, it (540). 
Guide, dux, diicis. 



296 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



H. 

Handy manus, us. 

Rang, pendere, pepe^.d. 

Hannibal, Hannibal, alis. 

Happily, beate. 

Happiness, felicitas, atis. 

Happy, beatus, a, um. 

Harmless, innoxius, a, um. 

Hatred, odium, i. 

Have, habere, u, it. 

Hawk, accipiter, tris. 

He himself, ipse, a, iim. 

He, she, it, ille, a, tid. 

He, she, or it is, est. 

Head, caput, itis. 

Hear, audire, iv, it. 

Heart, cor, cordis, n. 

Heat, ignis, is, m. 

Heaven, the heavens, coeiiim, L 

Heavy, gravis, e. 

Help, s., adjumentum, i. 

Help, v., adjuvare, juv, jut. 

Herd, grex, gregis, 7n. 

Hero, vir, viri ; heros, ois. 

Hide, occultare, av, at. 

High, altias, a, iim. 

Highest, summus, a, iim. 

Hinder, impedire, iv (i), it. 

His, her, its, (fee, suiis, a, iim. 

History, historia, ae. 

Hold, tenere, u, tent. 

Home, domiis, us or i, /. 

Honest, probiis, a, iim. 

Honey, mel, mellis. 

Honor, honor, oris. 

Hope, s., spes, ei. 

Hope, hope for, sperare, av, at. 

Horse, equiis, i. 

Horseman, eques, itis. 

Hostage, obses, idis. 

House, tectiim, i ; domiis, us or i, /. 

How, quam ; how many, quam multi. 

Hov) great, quanttis, a, iim; how 

much, quantiim {with gen.). 
However, however much, quamvis. 
Human, humantis, a, iim. 
Hu7iger,-iames, is. 
Hunt, venari, at. 
Hurt, nocere, u, it. 
Husband, conjnx, iigis. 
Husbandman, agricola, ae. 



/, ego, mei. 

If, si, dummodo. 

Ignorance, ignoratio, onis. 

Ignorant, ignariis, a, iim. 

Illumine, iiiustrare, av, at. 

Immediately, statim. 

Immense, immensiis, a, uni. 

Immortal, immortalis, e. 

Immovable, immobilis, e. 

Impede, impedire, iv (i), it. 

Impious, impiiis, a, iim. 

Imprudent, imprudens, tis. 

In, in {with abl.). 

In all, omnino. 

In comparison with, prae. 

In order that, quo. 

In person, in presence of, coram. 

In the mean time, interim. 

In such a manner, adeo. 

Inclined to, propensiis, a, iim. 

Increase, augere, aux, auct ; crescere, 

crev, cret. 
Incredible, incredibilis, e. (535). 
hideed, enim, vero. 
Indolent, ignaviis, a, iim. 
Indulge, indulgere, Is, It, 
Industry, Indus tria, ae. 
Infiict, infligere, x, ct. 
Inhabit, habitare, av, at. 
Inhabitant, incola, ae, (560.) 
Injury, injuria, ae. 
Innocent, innocens, tis. 
Instruct, eriidire, iv, it. 
Instruction, consiliiim, i: praecep- 

tiim, i. 
Into, in {with ace). 
Invade, invadere, vas, vas, (550.) 
Invite, call, vocare, av, at. 
Iro7i, ferriim, i. 
Irritate, irritare, av, at. 
It behooves, oportet. 
It is better, pra^stat. 
It is luell known, is an admitted fact, 

constat. 
It is lawful, licet. 
It pities, one -pities, miseret. 
It repents, one repents, poenitet. 
Italy, Italia, ae. 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULAEY. 



297 



Journey^ iter, itineris, n. 
Judge, s., judex, icis. 
Judge, v., judicare, av, at. 
Just, Justus, a, um. 
Jtcst as, sicut. 
Justice, sequitas, atis. 

K. 

Keep, servare, av, at. 

Kid, hesdiis, T. 

Kill, occidere, cid, cis ; interf icere 

(io), fee, -feet. 
Kind, sort, s., genus, eris. 
Kind, a., benigniis, a, lim. 
King, rex, regis. 
Kingdom, regnum, i. 
Know, scii-e, sciv, scit. 
Knowledge, scientia, ae. 
Known, cognitus, a, iim. 



Labor, s., labor, oris. 

Labor, v., laborare, av, at. 

Lamb, agnus, i. 

Large, magnus, a, um ; ampliis, a, 

um. 
Larger, major, us. 
Last, durare, av, at. 
Lasting, sempiternus, a, iim. 
Latinus, Latiuus, i. 
Laugh, laugh at, ridere, ris, ris. 
Lavinia, Lavinia, ae. 
LaiD, lex, legis. 
Lead, ducere, dux, duct; agere, gg, 

act. 
Lead back, reducere, dux, duct. 
Lead forth, educere, dux, duct. 
Lead forimrd or out, producere, 

dux, duct. 
Lead to, adducere, dux, duct. 
Leader, dux, ducis. 
Lea.rn, discere, didic. 
Legion, legio, onis. 
Letter, literae, arum : epistola, ae. 
Levy, comparare, av, at. 
Lie, a falsehood, mendacium, i. 
Life, vita, ae. 
Light, lux, Iticis. 

13* 



Line of battle, acies, eL 

Lion, leo, oms. 

Listen to, audii'e, iv, it. * 

Little, parvus, a, um ; a little, par- 

viim : paucus, a, iim. 
Little garden, hortuliis, i. (615). 
Live, vivere, vix, vict. 
Lofty, altiis, a, iim. 
Look at, spectare, av, at. 
Lose, amittere, mis, miss. 
Love, amare, av, at. 

M. 

Maiden, vii'go, ims. 

Make, facere (io), fee, fact : make a 
reply, responsiim dare. 

Man, homo, inis : vir, i. 

Manliness, virtus, utis. 

Many, multiis, a, iim ; many things^ 
multa. 

March, proficisci, feet. 

Marine, of the sea, mariniis, a, iim. 

Master as teacher, magister, tri. 

Master as owner, dominiis, i. 

Matron, matrona, ae. 

Meadov), pratum, i. 

Meanwhile, interim. 

Meeting, conciliiim, i. 

Melt, liquescere, lieu. 

Merciftd, clemens, tis : lenis, e. 

Messenger, nuntiiis, i. 

Middle, midst of, middle of, mediiis, 
a, iim, (267.) 

Mild, lenis, e : clemens, tis. 

Mildness, dementia, ae. 

Milita.ry service, militia, ae. 

Mind, animiis, i ; mind, the reason- 
ing faculty, mens, tis. 

Miserable, miser, a, iim. 

Misfortune, calamitas, atis : maliim,L 

MisleaA, corrumpere, rup, rupt. 

Modesty, piidor, oris. 

Money, pectinia, ae. 

Month, mensis, is, m. 

Moo7i, luna, ae. 

More, ampliiis, (adv.). 

Mortal, mortalis, e. 

Mother, mater, tris. 

Mou7itain,- mous, tis, m. 

Mourn, loear mourning for, luger§, 
x, ct. 



298 



FIRST LATIN BOOK. 



Movable, mobilis, e. 

Hove, iiidvere, mov, mot. 

Move fortvard, promovere, mor, mot. 

Much, multus, a, um ; iniich good, 

multum boni ; onuch time, mul- 

tuin temporis. 
Multitude, multitudo, ini's. 
My, meus, a, iim. 

K 

Name, nomen, inis. 
Narrate, narrare, av, at. 
Narration, narrative, narratio, oms. 

(521.) 
jS arrow pass, angustiffi, arum. 
Nation, iiatio, onis. 
Native country, patria, ae. 
Natural to man, hfuimiius, a, um. 
Nature, genus, eris. 
Nearer, propior, us. 
Neither, Dec ; neither — nor, nee — 

nee. 
Nest, nidus, i. 
Never, nunquam. 
Next, nearest, proximus, a, iim ; 

next following, postera, um {inasc. 

noni.not used). 
Night, nox, noctis. 
Nightingale, luscmia, ae. 
No, no one {adj.), nulliis, a, lim 

(113, R.). 
No one, nobody, {sub), nemo, (inis). 
Not, non ; with imperat. or subj., ne ; 

oiot only — but also, non solum — 

sed etiam. 
Not even, nequidem. 
Not to know, nescire, iv, it. 
Not yet, nondum. 
Nothing, oihil {indec). 
November, ]^6vember, bns (abl. i.), 
Numa, Ni^a, ae. 
Number, s., numei'us, i. 
Number, v., numerare, av. at. 

O. 

0,0. 

if, o sT. 
Obey, parere, u, it. 
Observe, servare, av, at. 
Obtain, obtmere, u, tent. 



Occasion, oceasio, onis. 

Of himself, sui. 

Of yesterday, hesternus, a, um. 

Off end- against, vidlare, av, at. 

Offer, prsebere, u, it. 

Often, saepe. 

Old age, seneettis, utis. 

Old man, senex, senis. 

On service, militiae. 

071 this side, cis. 

Otie, single one, unus, a, iim (1 1 3. R.). 

Otie is grieved at, piget ; / am grieved 

at, me piget. 
One oagJit, oportet. 
Only, modo. 
Open, apeiire, u, t. 
Openly, eoram. 
Opportunity, oceasio, onis. 
Oppose, obstare, stit, stat. 
Or, aut, vel ; either — or, vel — veL 
Or, in double questions, an. 
Oration, oratio, oms. 
Orator, oi'ator, oris. 
Order, jubere, juss, juss. 
Other, alius, a, ud (113. R.). 
Our, noster, tra, trum. 
Overhang, impendere. 
OvertJirow, evertere, rt, rs. 

P. 

Pain, dolor, oris. 

Pardon, Ignoseere, nov, not. 

Parent, parens, entis. 

Part, pars, tis. 

Pass over in silence, tacere, u, it. 

Passion, euplditas, atis. 

Past, praeteritus, a, um ; the past, 

praeterita. 
Pausanias, Pausanias,- ae. 
Peace, pax, eis. 
Peacock, pavo, onis. 
People, popiilus, i. 
Perceive, sentire, s. s; perspicere 

(io), spex, speet. 
Perception, sensus, us. 
Perfidy, perfidia, ae. 
Personal, privatus, a, iim. 
Persuade, persiiadere, s. s. 
Philosopher, pbilosopbiis, i. 
Physician, mediciis, i. 
Piety, pietas, atis. 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABTTLART. 



299 



Pious, pius, Rj um, 

Pity, iiiisereri, it. 

Place, s., locus, i. (pi. i, or a.) 

Place, v., ponere, pusu, posit. 

Plainly, plane. 

Plausible, speciosus, a, um. 

Play, s., ludiis, i. 

Play, v., ludere, s. s. 

Pleasant, jucundus, a, iim. 

Please, placere, u, it. 

Pleasure, voluptas, atis. 

Plough, arare, av, at. 

Pluck, carpere, ps, pt. 

Plunge into, immergere, rs, rs. 

Poem, poema, atis. 

Poet, poet-a, ae. 

Poor man, pauper, eris. 

Popular, popularis, e (528). 

Possess, possidere, ed, ess. 

Practise, colere, u, cult ; exercere, 

u, it. 
Praise, s., laus, dis. 
Praise, v., laudare, av, at. 
Precept, praeceptum, i. 
Prefer, malle, malu. 
Prepare, parare, av, at ; praeparare. 
Present (adj.), praesens, tis. 
Present, to ?nake a present, donare, 

av, at. 
Preserve, conservare, av, at. 
Pretence, simiilatio, onis. 
Prevent^ deterrere, u, it; obstarS, 

stit, Stat. 
Priest, priestess, sacerdos, otis. 
Private, privatus, a, um. 
Priz^- , aestimare, av, at ; prize highly, 

magni aestimare. 
Procure, comparare, av, at. 
Profit, prodesse, profu, profut. 
Promise, promittere, mis, miss. 
Provided, dummodo. 
Province, provincia, ae. 
Prudence, prudentia, ae. 
Prudent, prudeus, tis ; providus, a, 

um. 
Pull down, evertere, t, s. 
Punish, punire, iv, it. 
Pupil, discipulus, i. 
Purchase, emere, em, empt. 
Put confidence in, credere, credid, 

credit. 
Put to flight, fiigare, av, at, (540). 



Quarrel, concertare, av, at. 

Queen, regina, ae. 
Question, quaestio, onis. 
Quickly y celeriter, 

R. 

Rage, saevire, iv, it. 

Raise, comparare, av, at. 

Reach, attiugere, tig, tact ; pervS- 
nii-e, ven, vent. 

Read, legere, leg, lect. 

Real, verus, a, um. 

Reason, ratio, onis. 

Receive, accipere (io)» cep, cept ; 
recipere (16) ; capere (16), cep, 
capt. 

Reform, sanare, av, at. 

Refuge, perfiigium, i. 

Regard, putare, av, at. 

Reign, regnare, av, at. 

Reject, respuere, pu. 

Relate, narrare, av, at; refeiTe, tiil, lat. 

Relying on, fretus, a, iim. 

Remain, manere, mans, mans, 

Reinaining, reliqims, a, iim. 

Remember, recordari, at. 

Render thanks, gratias agere. 

Repent, one repents, poeuitet (435). 

Report, s., riimor, oris. 

Report, nuntiare, av, at. 

Repress, compescere, cu. 

Resist, resistcre, stit, stit. 

Response, responsiim, i. 

Rest, the rest, reliquus, a, um. 

Rest, quiescere, quiev, quiet. 

Restrain, continere, u, tent ; com- 
pescere, cu. 

Return, redire, i, it ; revertSre, t, s 
(551.) '^^ 

Rhine, Rheniis, i. 

Rich, locuples, etis. 

Ring, aniiliis, i. 

Ripen, coquere, cox, coot. 

River, flu men ^ inis. 

Road, via, ae. 

Rob of, spoliare, av, at. 

Robust, robustiis, a, um. 

Roman, Romaniis, a, um. 

Rom^e, RomS, ae. 



800 



FIRST LATIK BOOK, 



Romulus, Romulus, i. 
Roof, tectum, i. 
Round, rotundus, «, iim. 
Rule, regere, rex, rect. 
Rmnor, rumor, oris. 
Ru7i, currere, cucm-r, curs. 
Rush, ruere, ru, rut. 

S. 

Safe, incolumis, e. 

Safety, salus, utis. 

Same, idem, eadem,idem. 

Satisfy, satiare, av, at. 

Save, servare, av, at. 

Say, dicere, dix, diet. 

Scatter, sparger e, spars, spars. 

Sceptre, sceptriim, i. 

Scijno, Scipio, onis. 

Sea, mare, is. 

Seco7id, secundus, a, um. 

See, videre, vid, vis ; conspicere 

(io), spex, spect. 
Seed, semen, inis. 
Seek, petere, iv or i, it. 
Seem, videri, vis. 
Seize, arripere (io), ipu, apt ; depre- 

hendere, hend, hens. 
Self, ipse, a, um. 
Sell, vendere, did, dit. 
Senate, senatiis, us, (51^.) 
Senator, senator, oris. 
Send, mittere, mis, miss. 
Send before, praemittere, mis, miss. 
Sentiment, sententia, ae. 
Separate, disjungere, x, ct. 
Serve, servire, iv (i), it. 
Servius, Servius, i. 
Set forth, exponere, posu, posit. 
Set on fire, incendere, d, s. 
Set out, proficisci, feet. 
Severe, acer, acris, acre. 
Sew, stitch, suere, su, stit. 
Shame, pudor, oris. 
Sharp, acer, acris, acre. 
Shave, tondere, totond, tons. 
Shear, tondere, totond, tons. 
Sheep, ovis, is. 
Shepherd, pastor, oris. (520.) 
Shield, clipeus, i. 
Shine, micare, u ; lucere, x. 
Shining, splendens, tis. 



Short, brevis, e. 

Shoulder, humerus, i. 

Shoiv, monstrare, av, at; demon- 

strare, av, at. 
Shrub, friitex, icis, m. 
Shun, vitare, av, at. 
Shut, claudere, s, s. 
Silver, argentum, i. 
Simple, simplex, icis. 
Sin, peccare, av, at. 
Slncey cum, quum. 
Sing, canere, cecin, cant; cantare, 

av, at. 
Single, single one, iinus, a, una 

(113, R.). 
Siren, sii*en, enis. 
Sister, soror, oris. 
Six, sex. 

Size, magnitudo, inis. 
Skilful, skilled in, peritus, a, fim. 
Skin, degiubere, ps, pt. 
Slave, servus, i. 
Sleep, s., somniis, i. 
Sleep, dormire, iv, it. 
Slow, tardus, a, um. 
Smcdl, parvus, a, iim. 
Smaller, minor, iis. 
Snake, anguis, is, m. 
Snatch, arripere (io), ipn, ept. 
Snow, nix, nivis. 
So, sic, adeo, tam ; so— as, tarn — 

quam, siciit. 
So great, tantus, a, um. 
Socrates, Socrates, is. 
Soldier, miles, itis. 
So'me, aliquis, qua, quid (quod); 

some time, aliquid tempoiis. 
Some time, some time or other, ali- 

quando. 
Sometimes, interim. 
Son, filiiis, i. 
Son-in-lav}, gener, i. 
Sorrovj, dolor, oris ; luctiis, us. 
Sold, animus, i. 
Sound, sonus, i. 
SoiD, spargere, rs, rs. 
Space, intervallum, i. 
Spare, par cere, pep ere (pars), pamt 

(pars). 
Speak, loqui, locutus. 
Spear, hasta, ae. 
Specious, speciosiis, a, um (530). 



ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULAEY. 



301 



Spin^ nere, Pxev, net. 

Sport, ludiis, i. 

Spouse, conjux, gis. 

Spring, ver, veris, n. 

Sprinkle, aspergere, rs, rs. 

Stability, stabilitas, atis 

Stain, maciilare, ay, at. 

Star, Stella, ae. 

State, ciyitas, atis. 

Stor7n, expiignare, av, at. 

Stream, flumen, iiiis. 

Strength, vis, vis {pi., vires). 

Strive for, studere, u. 

Strong, robiistiis, a, um. 

Studious, studiosus, a, um. 

Study, studere, u. 

Successive, continuus, a, um. 

Succor, succurrere, rr, rs. 

Sue for, petere, iv (i), it. 

Sidla, Sulla, ae. 

Summer, aestas, atis. 

Sun, sol, solis, m. 

Supper, coena, ae. 

Supplicate, exorare, av, at. 

Surface, superficies, ei. 

Surpass, siiperare, av, at. 

Surrender, dedere, did, dit. 

Surround, cii'cumdare, ded, dat ; cin- 

gere, x, ct. 
Sustain, susti'nere, u, tent. 
Swear, jurare, av, at. 
Swift, velox, ocis. 
Swim, nare, av, at. 
Sword, gladius, i. 

T. 

Take, capere (io), cep, capt. 
Tak '' care, cavere, cav, caut. 
Take care of, curare, av, at. 
Take by storm, expugnare, av, at 

(550). 
Talent, ingeniiim, i. 
Tarentum, Tarentiim, i. 
Tarquin, Tarquinius, i. 
Teach, docere, u, doct. 
Tear in pieces, dilaniare, av, at. 
Ten, decern. 
Tenth, decimiis, a, um. 
Terms, conditio, onis. 
Terrify, terrere, u, it. 
Tlian, quam. 
Thanks, gratiae, ariim. 



Thanksgiving, supplicatio, onis. 

That {p)ro7i.), ille, a, ud ; is, ea, id ; 
iste, a, lid. 

That iconj.), tit, with comp. (469), 
quo. 

That not, quominils, quin. 

The entire, totus, a, iim (113, K). 

Theft, furtiim, i. 

There, ibi. 

Therefore, ergo, itaque, ideo, igitiir. 

Thing, res, rei. 

lliink, piitare, av, at ; think about, 
cogitare, av, at ; think little of 
parvi aestimare, av, at. 

Third, tertiiis, a, iim. 

Thirst, sitire, iv, it. 

This, hie, haec, hoc. 

Thou, you, tu, tui. 

Thousand, mille. 

Threaten, impend ere. 

Three, tres, tria. 

Through, per. 

Tibur, Tibur, uris. 

Till, colere, u, cult. 

Time, tempus, oris. 

Timid, timidils, a, um. 

To, ad, in {ivith ace). 

To death, capitis. 

Too much, nimiiis, a, iim. 

Top, the top, summtis, a, iim ; agree- 
ing with the noun, as, summus 
mons, the top of the mountain. 

Torture, excruciare, av, at. 

Touch, tangere, tetig, tact. 

Towards, erga {imth ace). 

Tower, arx, cis ; turris, is (ace, em 
or im, abl. e or i). 

Traitor, proditor, oris. 

Tranquil, tranquilliis, a, iim. 

Treachery, treason, proditio, onis. 

Treaty, foediis, eris. 

Tree, arbor, 6ns,/. 

Trojan, Trojaniis, a, iim. 

True, verus, a, iim. 

Tridy, vero. 

Truth, veriim, i. 

Try, tentare, av, at. 

Tullia, TuUia, ae. 

Turn, convert, convertere, t, s. 

Turn back, revertere, t, 9. 

Twelve, duodecim. 

Twenty, viginti. 



302 



FIRST LATIK BOOK. 



Two, duo, duae, duo. 
Two hundred, ducenti, ae, a. 
Two years J space of two years, bien- 
niiim. 

U. 

Uncertai7i, incertus, a, iim (550). 
Uncover, aperire. ru, rt. 
Understand, intelligere, lex, lect. 
Uoiinjured, incolumis, e. 
Unknown, incognitus, a, iim. 
Unlearned, indoctus, a, um. 
Unnecessary, supervacuus, a, um. 
Unwilling, invitus, a, um. 
Unworthy, indignus, a, um. 
Use, v., uti, us. 
Useful, utilis, e. 
Use/ess, inutilis, e. 
Utility, utiiitas, atis. 

Y. 

Valuable, pretiosus, a, iim. 

Value, aestimare, av, at. 

Very {before a noun or pronoun, 

sometimes), ipse, a, iim. 
Very fond, stiidiosiis, a, um. 
Very much or great, pltirimiis, a, 

iim ; very many, pluiimi. 
Victim, victima, ae. 
Victoria, Victoria, ae {prop, tiame). 
Victory, victoria, ae. 
Violate, violare, ay, at; rumpere, 

rup, rupt. 
Virgin, virgo, inis. 
Virtue, virtus, litis. 
Voice, vox, vocis. 

W. 

Wage (as war), gerere, gess, gest ; 

inferre, tul, lat. 
JValk, ambiilare, av, at. 
Wall, murus, i. 
War, bell iim, i. 
Warn, admonere, u, it. 
Wccsh, lavare, lav, laut, a7id la vat. 
Wasp, crabi'o, onis. 
Waster pei'dere, did, dit. 
W^atch, vigilare, av, at. 
Water, aqua, ae. 

Wrx (as moon), crescere, crev, cret. 
Way, via, ae ; iter, itineris, n. 



Wealthy, locuples, etis. 

Weep, fiere, ev, et. 

Weep for, lugere, lux. 

Well, bene. 

Whe7i, quiim. 

Whe7ice, unde. 

Wherefore, quarS. 

Whether, utriim; whether — or, in 

double questions, utrum — an, in 

other cases, seu — seu ; sive — sive. 
While, dum; while walkiiig, inter 

ambulandiim. 
White, candidiis, a, iim. 
Wlio, which, that [rel.), qui, quae, 

quod. 
Who, which, what? {interrog.), quis, 

quae, quid ? {subs.) ; qui, quae, 

quod? {adj.). 
Whole, totus, a, iim (113, R.). 
Wicked, improbiis, a, iim. 
Wife, conjux, gis. 
Winter, hiems, is. 
Wisdo77i, sapientia, ae. 
Wise, sapiens, tis. 
Wish, velle, volii. 
With, cura. 

Within, intra {with ace.). 
Without, sine nvith abl.). 
Witness, spectare, av, at (543). 
Wolf liipus, i. 
Woman, miilier, is. 
Wonderful, mirabilis, e. 
Wool, lana, ae. 
Word, verbiim, i. 
Work, opiis, eris. 

World, mundiis, i ; orbis terrarum. 
Worthy, digniis, a, iim. 
Would that, iitinam, o si. 
Wound, s., vulniis, eris. 
Wound, v., vulnerare, av, at. 
Wretched, miser, a, iim. 
Write, scribere, ps, pt. 
Wrong, v., violare, av, at. 

Y. 

Year, annus, i. 
Yesterday, hesterno die. 
Yet, tamen. 
You, til, tui. 

Your, thy, tuiis, a, iim ; your, vestSr,; 
tra, trum. 



THE EKD. 



mn& am xmn. 



ARJNOLD'S CLASSICAL SERIES 

I. 

A FIEST AND SECOND LATIN BOOK 

4ND PRACTICAL GRAMMAR. By Thomas K. Arnold, A. M. Revised and caieftill 
Corrected, by J. A. fencer, A. M. One vol. r2mo., 75 cts. 

LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION: 

A Pracncal Intioduction to Latin Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Arnold, A. 11. 
Revised and Corrected by J. A. Spencer, A. M. 12mo., $L 

III. 

FIRST GREEK BOOK; 

<V4b Easy Exercises and Vocabulary. By ThOxMas K. Arnold, A. M. ileviscd and Cou 
rected by J A. Spencer, A. M. 12mo., 75 cts. 

rv. 
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION: 

A Practical Introdurtion to Greek Prose Composition. By Thomas K. Arkold, A. jC 
Revised anti Corrected by J. A. SpeiiCer, A. M. One vol. 12mo., 75 cts. 



GREEK READING BOOK, 

For the Use c» Schools ; containing the substance of the Practical Introduction to Greek Cow 

etruing, and a 1 realise on the Greek Particles, by the Rev. Thomas K. Arnold, 

A. M., and also a Copious Selection from Greek Authors, with English 

Notes, Critical and Explanatory, and a Lexicon, by 

J. A. Spencer, A. M. 12mo., $1 25 

VI. 

CORNELIUS NEPOS; 

With Practical Questions and Answers, and an Imitative Exercise on each Chapter. 'Bj 

Thomas K. Arnold, A. M. Reviseil, with Addirional Notes, by Prof Johnson, 

Professor of the Latin Language in the University of the City of 

New- York. 12mo. A new, enlarged edition, with 

Lexicon, Lidex, &c., SI. 

"Arnoid's Greek and Latin Series.— The publication of this valuable collection of 
ei£ssicdl school books may be regarded as the presage of better things in respect to the mode ol 
(.eaching and acquiring languages. Heretofore boys have been condemned to the drudgery o^ 

going over Latin and 'Greek Grammar without the remotest conception of the value of what 
ley were learning, and every day becoming more and more disgusted with the diy and un- 
meaning task ; but )«ow, by Mr Arnold's admirable method— substantially the same w'iih that oi 
lUendorfF— the moment they take up the study of Latin or Greek, they begin to learn s^entences. 
10 acquire ideas, to see how the Roma-"-' and Greeks expressed themselves, how their mode oi 
expression differed from ours, and oy dfcsiees they lay up a stock of knowledge which is utterly 
astonishing to those who have dragged on moath alter month in the old-fashioned, dry, aiw 
tedious way of learning languages. 

" JMr. Arnold, in fact, has had the good sense to adopt the system of nature. A child leani 
his own language by imitating what he hears, and constantly repeating it till it is fastened in 
the memoiy ; i i the same way Mr. A. puts the pupil immediately to work a: Exercises in La'.in 
and Greek, invrlvmg the elempntary principles of the language — words are supplied — the mode 
of putting them together is told the pupil — he is shown how the ancients expressed their id as, 
ana fhev, by repeating these things again and Sigdm—iterum iterumque — the docile puj)il has 
them indelibl> impressed upon his memoi-y and rooted in his understanding. 

"The American Editor is a thorough classical scholar, and has been a practical teacher fcT 
years in this city. He has devoted the utmost care to a complete revl^ion of Mr. Arnold's wo ka. 
has corrected several errora of inadvertence or otherwise, .las rearranged and improved \ai oua 
matters in the early volumes oi int .series, and has atte .ded most diligently lo the accurate f .'•in> 
uig and mechanical exc'-'-ution of the^wiiole. We anticipate most confidently the speedy ado jiioB 
of these works m our schools and colleges." 

•.* Arnold's Scries of Ciasajcal Works has attained a circulation almost unparalleled,^ being 
tntrod(i€£ud into nearly all the Colleges and leading Educatitinal Instrtuticins in the Unital ?3tat<» 



<§xnk EHii ts,tit. 



THE HISTORIES 

OF 

CAIUS CORNELIUS TACITUS. 

WITH XOTES FOR COLLEGES. 

BY W. S. TYLER5 

Professor of Languages in Amherst College, 
One volume, 12mo. $1,00. 

The test of this edition follows, for the most part, Orelli's, Zurich, 1S48, which, being bassd 00 
new and most faithful recension of the Medicean MS., by his friend Baiter, may justly be C3n 
adered as marking a new era in the history of the text of Tacitus. In several passages, howcer, 
whert he has needlessly departed from the MS., I have not hesitated to adhere to it in coro^-aay 
with other editors, believing, that not unfrequently " the most corrected copies are the less correct." 
The various readings have been carefully compared throughout, and, if important, are referred tcin 
the notes. 

The editions which have been most consulted, whether in the criticism cf the text or in .h€ 
preparation of the notes, are, besides Orelli's, those of Walther, Halle, 1831 ; Ruperti, Hanover, 
1839 ; and DGd^rlein, Halle, 1847. * * * * 

It will be seen, that there are not unfrequent references to ray edition of the Germania and 
Agricola. These are not of such a nature, as to render this incomplete without that, or essentially 
dependent upon it. Still, if both editions are used, it will be found advantageous to read the 
Germania and Agricola tirst. The Treatises were written in that order, and in that order they best 
illustrate the history of the author's mind. The editor has found in his experience as a teacher 
that students generally read them in that way with more facility and pleasure, and he has con- 
BLructed his notes accordingly. It is hoped, that the notes will be found to contain not only the 
grammatical, but likewise ail the geographical, archaeological and historical illustrations, that are 
necessary to render the author intelligible. The editor has at least endeavored t© avoid the fault, 
which Lord Bacon says " is over usual in annotations and commentaries, viz., to blanch tha 
obscure places, and discourse upon the plain." But it has been his constant, not to say his chief 
aim, to carry students beyond the dry details of grammar and lexicography, and introduce them 
into a familiar acquaintance and lively sympathy with the author and his tinics, and with that 
great empire, of whose degeneracy and decline in its beginnings he has bequeathed to us so profound 
and instructive a history. The Indexes have been prepared with much labor and care, and, it is 
believed, will add materially to the value of the work. — Extract from Preface. 



THE GERMANIA AND AGRICOI A 

OF 

CAIUS CORNELIUS TACITUS. 

WITH NOTES FOR COLLEGES. 

BY W. S. TYLER, 

Professor of the Greek and Latin Languages in Amherst College. 

One very neat volume, 12mo. 62J cents. 

*' V/.f welcome the book as a useful addition to the classical literature of our country. It is very 
nectly and elegantly prepared and printed. Thirteen pages are occupied by a well-written Life 
f Tacitus, in wl 'ch not merely outward events are narrated, but the character of the bistoi.an. 
both ai a man ana a writer, is minutely and faithfully drawn. The notes to each of the tieatises 
arr introduced by a general critique upon the merits and m-itter of the work. The body of thf 
EGtes is drawn up with care, learning, and judgment. Points of style and grammatical consiruc- 
tioriS, and historical references, are ably illustrated. Wo have been struck with tlM elegant 
precision which 'marks these notes; they hit the happy medium between the too much of some 
commentators, and the to > little of others." — JSTortk American Review. 

Am eg the numeious classical Pr.jfessors v/ho nave highly commended and mtroduced thk 
voinm« are Felton of H ward, Lincoln of Brown University, Crosby af Bartmou.th, Cols^ak 
oi Pn. ;ton. North of Hamilton Packarp of Bowdrin. 0\vf.n of New- York, ChaMPLX» ^ 
WaU«i ie, &€., &^u 

32 



#n?Blt niA ITntin. 



TITUS LIYIUS. 

CHIEFLY FROM THE TEXT OF ALSCIIEFSEL 

WITH 

ENGLISH NOTES, GRAMMATICAL AND EXPLxlNATORY 

TOGETHER 

WITH A GEOGRAPHICAL AND HISTORICAL INDEX. 

BY J. L. LIMCOLN5 

Professor of Latin in Brown University. 

WitU AN ACCOMPANYING PLAN OF ROME, AND A MAP OF THE PASSAGE OF HANMIBAL, 

One volume, 12mo. Price $1. 

The publishers believe that, in the edition of Livy herewith announce^, a want is supplied 
Wliich nas been universally felt ; there being previouis to this no American edition furnisher with 
the requisite apparatus for the successful prosecution of the study of this Latin author. 

OPINIONS OF CLASSICAL PROFESSORS. 

From Professor Kingsley^ of Yale College. 
''I have not yet been able to read the whole of your work, but have examined it enough to be 
Batlsfied that it is judiciously prepared, and well adapted to the purixne intended. We use it 
for :he present year, in connection with the edition that has been Uised for several years. Most 
of the class, however, have procured your ediiiun ; and it is probable that next year it will be 
used by all.'' 

From Professor Tyler., of Amherst College. 
" The notes seem to me to be prepared with m.uch care, learning, and taste ; the grammatical 
illustrations are unusually full, faiihlul, and able. The book has been used by our Fresnman 
Class, and will I doubt not come into general use in our colleges. 

From Professor Packard, of Bowdoin College. 
" I have recommended your edition to our Freshman Class. I have no douot tnat your laoon 
Will give a n^-w impulse to the study of this charming classic. 

From Professor Anderson., of Waterville College. 
"A careful examination of several portions of your work has convinced me that, for the use 
of students it is altogether superior to any edition of Livy with which I am acquainted. Among 
its excel li^n'.'es you will \ n-mit me to name, the close attention given to particles — to the sub- 
junctive moc'd— the constant references to the grammars— the discrimination of words nearly 
synonymous and the care in giving the localities mentioned in the text. The book will be nei© 
after used in 3ur college." 



From Professor Johnson, of New - York University. 
only say that your edition p 
next week. I am prepared to find it just \ 



can at present only say that your edition pleases mo much. I shall give it to (XB cf mj 
week. I am prepared to find it just what was wanted." 



WORKS OF HORACE. 

WITH ENGLISH NOTES, CRITICAL AND EXPLANATORY. 
BY U, L. LINCOLN, 

Professor of Latin in Brown University. 

WITH MAPS AND ILLUSTRATIONS. 

One volume, I2mo. 

The text of this edition is chiefly that of Orelli ; and the Notes, besides embodying whatever 
is valuable in the most recent and approved German editions of Horace, contain the results of ihe 
Editor's studies and experience as a College Professor, which he has been gathering and maturing 
for several years with a view to publication. It has been the aim of both the Publishers and the 
Editor to make this edition in all respects suitable to the wants of American schools and col- 



dxni ml £fltm. 



C. JULIUS CESAR'S COJiOIENTARlES 



GALLIC WAE. 

With English Notes, Critical and Explanatory ; A LbXlcoHj ^eograpliical and 
Historical Indexes, &c. 

BY REV. J. A. SPENCER, A. M.j 

Editor of " ArnokPs /Series of Greek and Latin Books,^' eie. 

One handsome vol, 12mo, with Map. Price ^1. 

Ti, e press of Messrs. Appleton is becoming prolific of superior editions of the classics uwd 
in schools, and the volume now before us we are disposed to regard as one of the :nost-beaut]fa\ 
and highly finished among them all, both in its editing and its execution. The classic Latin in v/hich 
the greatest general and the greatest writer of his age recorded his achievements, has been sadly 
corrupted in "the lapse of centuries, and its restoration to a pure and perfect text is a work re- 
quiring nice discrimination and sound learning. The text which Mr. Spencer has adopted is that 
of Oudendorp, with such variations as were suggested by a careful collation of the leading critica 
of Germany. The notes are as they should be, designed to aid the labors of the studem, not to 
supersede them. In addition to these, the volume contains a sketch of the life of Caesar, a brief 
Lexicon of Latin words, a Historical and a Geographical Index, together with a map of the 
country in which the great Roman conqueror conducted the carnpaigns he so graphically de- 
scribes. The volume, as a whole, however, appears to be admirably suited to the purpose for 
which it was designed. Its style of editing and its typographical execution reminds us of Prof. 
Lincoln's excellent edition of Livy — a work v/hich some months since had already passed to a 
second impression, and has now been adopted in most of the leading schools and colleges of the 
country. — Providence Journal. 

" The type is clear and beautiful, and the Latin text, as far as we have examined it, extremely 
accurate, and worthy of the work of the great Roman commander and historian. No one edition 
has been entirely followed by Mr. Spencer. He has drawn from Oudendorp, Achaintre, Lamaire, 
Oborlin, Schneider, and Giani. His notes are drawn somewhat from the above, and al;50 from 
Vossius, Davies, Clarke, and Stutgart. These, together with his own corrections and notes, and 
an excellent lexicon attached, render this volume tJbe most complete and valuable edition ol 
Caesar's Commentaries vet published. — Albany Spectator. 

EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSITTOW,. 

ADAPTED TO THE 

FIRST BOOK OF XENOPHON'S ANABASIS. 

BY JAMES R. BOlSEj 

Professor in Broivn University. 

One volume, 12mo. Price seventy-five cents. 

*/ For the convenience of the learner, an English-Greek Vocabulary, a Catalogue of the Irr© 
gular Verbs, and an Index to the principal Grammatical Notes have been appended. 

'•A school-book of the highest order, containing a carefully arranged series of exercises d© 
rived from the first book of Xenophon's Anabasis, (which is appended entire,) an English and 
Greek vocabulary and a list of the principal modifications of irregular verbs. We regard it as 
one peculiar excellence of this bonk, that it presupposes both the diligent scholar and The pain? 
takhig teacher, m ether hands it would be not only useless, but imasahle. We like it also, be 
cause, instead of aiming to give the pupil practice in a variety of styles, it places before him biU 
a single model cf Greek composition, and that the very author who' combines in the greatest :l9- 
gree. p\irity oflanguage and idiom, with a simplicity that both invites and rewards imitation.'' . 
— Chrisl.iun Register. 

" M*'. Boise is Professor of Greek in Brown University, and has prepared these exercises 
as an accompaniment to the First Book of the Anabasis of "Xenophon We have examined the 
plan with some attention, and are struck with its utility. The exercises consist of short sen- 
tences, composed of the words used in the text of the Anabasis, aaid involving the same construe 
dons; and the system, if faithfully pursued, must not only lead to familiarity with the author 
and a natural adoption of his style, but also to great ease and faultless excellence in Greek coiu 
rwayait mm . ' ' — Prntejitant Churchman . 

34 



imt 
CICEEO DE OFFICIIS. 

WITH ENGLISH NOTES. 
Chiefly selected and tranrjlated from tlie editions of Zumpt and BonneH 

BY THOMAS A. THACHERj 

Assistant Professor of Latin in Yale College. 

One volume 12mo. 90 cents. 

This edition of De OMCiin has the advantage over any other with which we are acqusintecl, 
01' more copious notes, bolter arrangement, and a more beautiful typography. The text cf 
Zumpt QDpe-Yrs to have beon closely followed, except in a very few instances, where it is varied 
on the authority cf Beiei, Orelli and Bonnell. Teachers and students will do well to examine 
this edition. 

"Mr. Thacher very modsstly disclaims for him'self more than the ciedit cf a compiler and 
translator in the editing of this work. Being ourselves unblessed with the works of Zumpt, 
Bonnell, and other Germ^arv writers to whom Mr. T. credits most of his notes and comments, we 
cannot affirm that more credit is due him than he claims for his labors, but we may accord him 
the merit of an extiemely judicious and careful compiler, if no more; for we have seen no re- 
*iiark without an important bearing, nor any point requiring elucidation whit:h was passed un- 
noticed. 

" This work of Cicero cannot but interest eveiy one at all disposed to inquire into the views 
of the ancients on morals. 

" This valuable philosophical treatise, emanating from the pen of the illustrious Roman, de- 
rives a peculiar interest from the fact of its being written with the object to instruct his son, of 
whom the author had heard unfavorable accounts, and whom the weight of his public duties 
had prevented him from visiting in person. It presents a great many wise maxims, apt and 
/ich illustrations, and the results of the experience and reflections of an acute and powerful 
mind. It is well adapted to the use of the student by copious and elaborate notes, explanatory 
of the text, affording ample facilities to its entire comprehension. These have been gleaned 
»Yith great judgment from the most learned and reliable authorities, — such as Zumpt, Bonnell, 
and others"^. Mr. Thacher has evinced a praiseworthy care and diligence in preparing the vo- 
lume for tho purposes for which it was designed." 



SELECT ORATIONS OF M. TULLIUS CICERO • 

WITH NOTES, FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 

BY E. A« JOHNSON, 

Professor of Latin in the University of New- York» 

One volume, 12mo. SI. 

" This edition of Cicero^s Select Orations possesses some special advantages for the student 
which are both new and important. It is the only edition which contains the improved text 
that has been prepared by a recent careful collation and correct deciphering of the best manu 
scripts of Cicero' e writings. It is the work of the celebrated Orelli, together with that ot 
Madvig and Klotz, and has been done since the appearance of Orelli's complete edition. The 
Notes, by Profossor Johnson, of the New- York University, have been chiefly selected, with great 
care, from the best German authors, as well as the English edition of Arnold. Although 
abundant, and almost profuse, they yet appear generally to relate to some important point m 
the text or subject, which the immature mind of pupils could nut readily detect without aid. 
We do not know how a more perfect edition for the use of schools could well be prepared." 

" This is a beautiful and most excellent edition of the great Roman orator ; and, .so far aa 
we know, the best ever published in this country. It contains the four orations against Cata- 
line, the oration for the Moniiian Law, the oration for Marcellus, for Ligarius, for King Deio- 
t«rius, for the poet Archias, and for Milo. In preparing the text of these orations the editor haa 
a railed himself of the best German and English editions ; and the notes have been gathered 
irom every available source. These are so abundant — filling more than 300 pages — as to leava 
almost nothing to be desired by the student. They are philological, explanatory and historical. 
Each Oration is furnished with a valuable Introduction, containing what is necessary for the 
student to know preparatory to the commencement of the study of the Oration, and an analysis 
of the plan and argument of each Oration. Furnished with this edition of Cicero's Select 
Orations, the student is Drepared to enter with pleasure and profit on the study of this eleganl 
steid renowned classic aiifhor.^'— i/osit»H Atlas. 

2S 



§xnk nni Iftem. 



GllEEK OLLENDORFF; 

BEING A PllOGRESSIVE EXHIBITIOlSr OF THE PEIJN^Cn^LliS 

OF THE GEEEK GEAJM3IAR. 

Designed for Beginners in Greek, and as a Book of Exercises for 
Academies and Colleges. 

BY ASAHEL C KENDRICK, 

Professor of the Greek Language and Literature in the University of Rochester, 

One volume, 12mo. $1. 

Extract from the Preface. 

The present work is what its title indicates, strictly an Ollendorff^ and aims to apply the 
methods which have proved so successful in the acquisition of the Modern languages to the 
study of Ancient Greek, with such ditferences of C(>urs>e as the different genius of the Greek, 
and the different purposes for which it is studied, would suggest. It differs Irom the modern 
Oflendorffs in containing Exercises for reciprocal translation, in confining them within a smaller 
compaj^s. and m a more methodical exposition of the principles of the language. 

It differs, on the other hand, from other excellent elementary works m Greek, which have 
recently appeared, in a more rigid adherence to the Ollendorff raethotl, and the greater sim- 
pUcity of its plan ; in simplifying as much as possible the character of the Exercises, and in 
keeping oui of sight every thing which would divert the student's aiieniion from the naked con- 
struction. 

The object of the Author in this work was twofold ; first, to furnish a book which should 
serve as an introduction to the study of Greek, and precede the use of any Grammar. It will 
therefore be found, although not claimin;^ to embrace all the principles of the Grammar, yet 
complete in itself, and will lead the pupil, by in^en^^ible gradations, from the simpler con* 
struc'ions to those wtiich are more complicated and difficult. 

Tne exceptions, and the more idiomatic forms, it studiously leaves one side, and only aims 
to exhibit the regular and ordinary usages of the language, as the proper starting point for the 
dtudei.'s further researches. 

In presenting these, the Author has aimed to combine the strictest accuracy with the utmost 
simplicity of statement. He hopes, therefore, that his work will find its way among a younger 
class of pupils than have usually engaged in the study of Greek, and will v/in lo the acquisi- 
tion of that noble tongue many in our Academies and Primary Schools, who have been repelled 
by the less simple character of our ordinary text-books. On this point he would speak ear- 
nestly. This book, while he trusts it will bear the ciiticism of the scholar, and be found 
adapted to older pupils, has been yet constructed with a constant reference to the wants of the 
young ; and he knows no reason why boys and girls of twelve, ten, or even eight years of asre 
may not advantageously be put to ths study of this book, and, und^r skilful instruction, rapidly 
master its contents. 



GESENIUS'S HEBREW GRAMMAR 

Fonrteentli Edition, as revised by Dr. E. Rodiger. Translated by T. J. Conani 
Professor of Hebrew in Madison University, N. Y. 

With the Modifications of the Editions subsequent to the Eleventh, by Dr. Da vies 

of Stepney College, London. 

To which are added, A Course of Exercises in Hebrew Grammar, and a Hebrew Chrb£ 

TOMATHY, prepared by the Translator. One handsomely printed vol. 8vo. Pi'ice $2. 

Extract from the 7'rans!ator''s Preface. 

"The fourteenth edition of the flebrew Grammar of Gosenius is how offered to the public 

Dy the translator of the eleventh edition, by whom this work was first made a^cessibte [o stv 

dents in the English language. The convicion expressed in iiis pieface to thd.t edition, that ita 

publication in this country would subserve the interests of Hebrew literature, has been fully 

sustained by the result. After a full trial of the merits of this work, both in America and is 

K iglaad, its republication is now demanded in its latest and most improved form." 

36 



IgllBJI. 



A MANUAL 



(JRECIAN AND ROMAN ANTIQUITIES. 

BY DR. E. F. BOJESEN, 

Professor of the Greek Language and Literature in the University of Hopx 

Translated, from the German. 

EDITED, WITH NOTES AND A COMPLETE SERIES OF QUESTIONS, BY TSS 

REV. THOMAS K. ARNOLD, M. A. 
REVISED WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 

One neat volume, 12mo. Price $1. 

The present Manual of Greek and Roman Antiquities is far superior to any t)-flng on U>a 
«ame topics as yet offered to the American public A principal Review of Gern.any says :— 
Small as \q compass of it is, we may confidently aihrm that it is a great improvement on all 
preceding word's of the kind. We no longer meet wiih the wretched old method, in which su'i- 
jects essentially distinct are herded together, and connected subiects discomiected. but hav© a 
simple, systematj" arrangement, by which ihe reaaer easily receives a clear representation A 
Roman life. We ^) longer stumble against countless errors in detail, which though long ago 
assailed and axtirpj-ied by Niebuhrand others, have found their last place of refuge in our Ma- 
nuals. The recent investigations of philologists and jurists have been extensively, but careCullj 
and circumspectly used. The conciseness and precision which the author has every where 
prescribed to himself, prevents the superficial observer from perceiving the essential superiority 
of the book to its predecessors, but whoever subjects it to a careful examination will discover 
this on every page." 

The Editor says : — "I fully believe that the pupil will receive from these little works a 
correct and tolerably complete picture of Grecian and Roman life; what I may call the poli- 
tical portions — the account of the national constitu'.ions and their effects — appear to me to be 
of great value; and the very moderate extent of each volume admits of its being thoroughly 
masfred — of it? being got up and retained." 

" A work long need -d in our schools and colleges. The manuals of Rennet, Adam, Potter, 
and Robinson, with ..^b m.ore recent and valuable translation of Eschenburg, were entirely too 
roluminous. Here lo nc :her too much, nor too little. The arrangement is admirable — every 
euliject is treated of in its proper place. We have the general Geography, a succinct historical 
Tiew of the general subject ; the chiro^raphy, history, laws, manners, customs, and religion ol 
eoc/i Stale, as well i ""the points of union for all, beautifully arranged. We regard the work as 
tfce "very test adjun^ to classical study for youth that we have seen, and sincerely hope tkst 
tsachers may be bri ^ht to regard it in the same light. The whole is copiously digested inW 
fcppropiiate questions."—^. Lit. Gazette. 

From Professor Lincoln.^ of Broicn University. 
*'I fouml 0.1 my table after a short absence from home, your edition of Bojecen's G:ceek an 
Roman Antiquities. Pray accept my acknowledgments for it. I am agreeably surprised to 
Liii cr. exaiTi'nmg it, that within so very narrow acompass for so comprehensive a suiiecc, the 
tx>ok contai is so much valuable matter; and, indeed, so far as I see, omits noticing no tOjUcs es- 
sential. It will be a very useful book in Schools and Colleges, and it is Va<c superior to any thing 
that I know of the same kind. Besides being cheap and accessible to all students, it has tha 
great msrit of discussing its topics in a consecutive and connected manner." 

Extract of a letter from Professor Tyler, of Amhp.rsf College. 
" I have never ToMnd time till lately to look over Bojesrn's Antiquities. i)f which you were 
lind enough to send me a copy. I think it an excellent book ; learned, accurate, concise, and 
perspicuous; well adapted for use in the Academy or the College, and comprehi'uding ui a 
•mall compass, more *^iit is valu?.ble on the subject than many extended treatises " 

s 



HAND BOOK 



OP 

MEDIAEVAL GEOGRAPHY AND' HISTORY 

BY 

WILHELM PUTZ, 

PRINCIPAL TUTOR IN THE GYMNASIUM OF DUREN. 

Translated from the German by 
REV. R. B. PAUL, M. A., 

Wear of St. Augustine' s^ Bristol, and late Fellow of Exeter Collect ^ Gxfer^ 

1 volume, 12mo. 75 cts. 

■ HEADS OF CONTENTS. 

I. Germany before the Migrations. 
II. The Migrations. 

THE MIDDLE AGES. 

First Tekiod.— From the Dissolution of the Western Empire to the Accession of th« cJarleriA 

gians and Abbasides. 

Si::coND I'ERiOD,— From the Accession of the Carlovingians and Abbasides to the first Crusadft. 

Third Period. — Age of the Crusades. 

FoTTRTH Period. — From the Termination of the Crusades to the Discorery of America. 

" The characteristics of this volume are : precision, condensation, and luminous arrangement 
It is precisely what it pretends to be— a manual, a sure and conscientious guide for the studeni 
through the crooks and tangles of Mediaeval history. * * * * All the great principles of this 
ex'ensj -3 Period are carefully laid down, and the most important facts skilfully grouped around 
them. There is no period of History for which it is more difficult to prepare a- v/ork like this. 
anl none for which it is so much needed. The leading facts are v/ell established, bat they are 
scattered over an immense space; the principles are ascertained, but their development wag 
slow, unequal, and interrupted. There is a general breaking up of a great body, and a parcelling 
of it out among small tribes, concerning whom we have only a few general data, and are left to 
analogy and conjecture for the details. ^Then come successive attempts at organization, each 
more or less independ•^'^t, and all very imperfect. At last, modem Europe begins slov/ly to 
emerge from the chaos, bat still under forms which the most diligent historian cannot always 
comprehend. To reduc3 such materials to a clear and definite form is a task of no small diffi- 
culty, and in which partial success deserves great praise. It is not too much to say that 't has 
.never been so well done within a compass so easily mastered, as in the little volume wh^jh is 
now offered to the public." — Extract from American Preface. 

"This translation of a foreign school-book embraces a succinct and well ar anged body of 
facts concerning European and Asiatic history and geography during the middle^'ages. It la 
fumishei with printed questions, and it seems to b<3 well "adapted to its purpose, in alfrespects, 
The mediaeval period is one of the most interesting in the annals of the world, and a knowledge 
of its great men, and of its progress. in arts, arms, government and religion, is particularly mi- 
portanN since this period is the basis of our own social polity." — Commercial Advertiser. 

" This is an immense amount of research condensed into a moderately sized volume, ia a way 
which no one has patience to do but a German scholar. The beauty of the work is its luminous 
arrangement. It is a guide to the student amidst the intricacy of Mediaeval History, the mosi 
difficult period of the world to understand, w^hen the Roman Empire was breaking up and par- 
celling out into smaller kingdoms, and every thing was in a transition state. It was a period ol 
chaos from which modern Europe was at length to arise. 

The author has briefly taken up the principal political and social influences which were 
acting on society, and shown their bearing from the time previous to the migrations of the 
Northern nations, down through the middle ages to the sixteenth century. The n Kes on the 
crusader are particularly valuable, and the range of observation embraces not only Euiepe but 
(he East. To the student it will be a most valuable Hand-book, saving him a world of tr©ubl« 
la. hunting up authorities and facts. "--i2e'y. Dr. Kip, in Albany State Register. 

4 



(fnglisfi. 



MANUAL 

OF 

ANCIENT GEOGRAPHT AND HISTOSI. 

BY WlLH£Li\t PUTZ3 

PRINCIPAL TUTOR IN THE GYMNASIUM OF PUREN 

Translated from the German. 
EDITED BY TliE REV. THOMAS K. ARNOLD, .^I A,j 

AUTHOR OP A SERIES OF "GREEK AND LATIN TEXT-BOOKS." 

One volume, 12mo. $1. 

" At no perif>c nas History presented such strong claims upon the attention of the leameil, as 
\i Jhe present day ; and to no people were its lessons of such value as to those of the United 
•States. With no past of our own to revert to, the great masses of our better educated are tempted 
'o overlook a science, which comprehends all others in its grasp. To prepare a text-bc»Dk, which 
shall present a full, clear, and accurate view of the ancient world, its geography, its political, 
civil, social, religious state, must be the result only of vast industry and learning. Our exami- 
nation of the present volume leads us to believe, that as a text-book on Ancient History, for Col- 
leges and Academies, it is the best compend yet published. It bears marks in its methodical 
arrangement, and condensation of materials, of the untiring patience of German scholarship ; and 
in its progress through the English and American press, has been adapted for acceptable use in 
our best institutions. A noticeable feature of the book, is its pretty complete list of 'sources ol 
information' upon the nations which it describes. This will be an invaluable aid to the student 
in his future course of reading." 

" Wilhelm Piitz, the author of this ' Manual of Ancient Geography and History,' is Principal 
Tutor ( Oberleher) in the Gymnasium of Duren, Germany. Hfs book exhibits the advantages o 
the German method of treating History, in its arrangement, its classification, and its rigid analy- 
sis. The Manual is what it purports to be, ' a clear and definite outline of the history of the 
principal nations of antiquity,' into which is incorporated a concise geography of each country. 
The work is a text-oook ; to be studied^ and not merely read It is to form the groundwork o\ 
subsequent historical investigation, — the materials of which are pointed out, at the proper places, 
in tlje Manual, in careful references to the works which treat of the subject directly under con- 
sideration. The list of references (especially as regards earlier works) is quite complete, — thus 
supply mff that desideratum in Ancient History and Geography, which has been supplied so fully 
by^D ". J. C. I, Gieseler in Ecclesiastical History. 

'' The nations whose history is considered in the Manual, are : in Asia^_ the Israelites, th^ In- 
dians, the Babylonians, the Assyrians, the Medes, the Persians, the Phoenicians, the States of Asia 
Minor ; in Africa^ the Ethiopians, the Egyptians, the Carthaginians ; in Europe^ the Greeks, the 
Macedonians, the Kingdoms wbich arose out of the Macedonian Monarchy, the Romans. The 
order in which the history of each is treated, is admirable. To the whole are appended a ' Chro 
uolosical Table,' and a well-prepared series of 'Questions.' The pronunciation of prope« 
names is indicated, — an excellent feature. The accents are given with remarkable correctness. 
Tha typograpiiical execution of the American edition is most excellent," — S. W.BaptistChro7iicle, 

^'- " like every thing which proceeds from the editorship of that eminent Instructor, T. K. Arnold, 
this Manual appears to be well suited to the design with which it was prepared, and will, un' 
doabtedly, secure for itself a place among the text-books of schools and academies thoughout tha 
Oi>ant.ry. It presents an outline of the history of the ancient nations, from the earliest ages to the 
fall of tiie Western Empire in the sixth century, the events being arranged in the order of aD 
accurate chronology, and explained by accompanying treatises on the geography of the several 
countries in which they transpired. The chief feature of this work, and this is a very important 

' one, is, thai it sets forth ancient history and ancient geography in their connection with each 
©Jh^r. 

" It was originally prepared by Wilhelm Piitz, an eminent German scholar, and translated an«3 
edited in England by Rev. T. K. Arnold, and is now revised and introduced to the American 
public in a well written preface, by Mi George W. Greene, Teacher of Modem Languages in 
.^Irown University."— Proi?.!^|a^rnaZ, ? * ^&i 



MANUAL 

OF 

MODEM GEOGRAPHY AND IlISTOM. 



i 



BY WILHcLM PUTZ, 

Autkjr of Manuals of '•''Ancient Gtography and History," ^^ Mediceval Geography and 
History,''^ ^'c. 

TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN. REVISED AND CORRECTED. 

One volume, 12m o. %1. 

" Pre/ace.— The present volume completes the series ol Professor Piitz's Handbooks o| 
Ancient, Mediaeval, and Modern Geography and History. Its adaptation to the wants of tha 
Btudent will be found to be no less complete than was to be expected from the fLrmer Parts, 
which have been highly approved by the public, and have been translated into several Ian-' 
guages besides the English. The difficulty of compressing within the limits of a single volume 
the vast amount of historical material furnished by the progress of modern states and nations 
iiT power, wealth, science, and literature, will be evident to all on reflection ; and they wiK 
find occasion to admire the skill and perspicacity of the Author of this Handbook, not only in 
the arrangement, but also in the facts and ^statements which he has adopted. 

" In the Ainerican edition several improvements have been made ; the sections relating to 
America and the United States have been almost entirely re-written, and materially enlarged 
and improved, as seemed on every account necessary and proper in a work intended for general 
use in this country; on several occasions it has been thought advisable to make certain verbal 
corrections and emendations ; the facts and dates have been verified, and a number of explan- 
atory notes have been introduced. It is hoped that the improvements alluded to will be found 
to add to the value of the present Manual." 



FIRST LESSONS IN COMPOSITION, 

IN WHICH THE PRINCIPLES OF THE ART ARE DEVELOPED IN CONNECTION WITH 
THE PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR; 

Embracing full Directions on the subject of Punctuation : with copious 

Exercises. 

BY. G. P. QUACKENBOS, A.M. 

Rector of the Henry Street Grammar School^ N. Y. 
One volume. 12mo. 45 cts. 

EXTRACT FROM PREFACE. 

^ A county superintendent of common schools, speaking of the important branch of com- 
posuion, uses the following language: ' For a long time 1 have noticed with regret the almost 
entire neglect of the arf of original composition in our common schools, and the want of a 
proper text '^ook upon this essential branch of education. Hundreds graduate from our common 
schools with no well-defined ideas of the construction of our Jang^'uage " The wriiei mignt 
have gone further, and said that multitudes sraduate, not only from common schools, but 
from some of our best private institutions, utterly destitute of all practical acquaintance with 
the subject; that to many such the composition of a single letter is an irksome, to some an 
altnos'. impossihle task. Yet the reflecting mind must admit that it is onlv this practical appli- 
cation oi grammar that renders that art useful— that parsing is secondary to composing, and 
the analysis of our language almost unimportant when compared with its synthesis. 

••One great reason of the neglect noticed above, has, no doubt, been the want of a suitable 
text-book on the subject. During the years of the Author's experience as a teacher, he ha 
examined, dod practically tested the various works on composition with which he has met. 
the result has been a conviction that, while there are several publications well calcidated to 
advance pupils at the asre of fifteen or sixteen, there is not one suited to the coinprehension 
o! tho^e beiwpcn nine and twelve ; ai which time it is his decided opinion that this branch 
prou'd be taken up. Heretofore, the teacher has been oblisiul either to make the scholar labor 
throusb a work entirely too difficult for him. to srive him exercises not foimded on anv regular 
sy.^tem. or to abandon the branch altogether— and the disadvantages of either of these courses 
arc at once aj: parent. 

"It is this conviction, founded oi^lifi experience not only of the Author, but of many 
other teachers with whom he has c^H^d, gM lifs M to thgg|oduction of the work now 
fffferea to the public. !t claims to ^mmAt-lsEk §. JKiposit^Band is intended to initiat« 
the begmner, by easy and pleasant f!eD3, into liat^lTWiportail^ut hitherto generally nc? 










"^ 






>^ / 



'^ c^ 



.' .^^- 






A' -^r i-Xi ■ 







o 0; 






/■^^ > 






f,. -^ 




.'"^ .^ 



^ ,0- -c. 























^fi i 



OO^ 



O 0' 






II 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



003 037 356 A 9 



